Chemsiry Solutions

SOME BASIC CONCEPTS OF CHEMISTRY 11
18. (d) Litre (L) is not an SI unit. It is used for measurement of

FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS volume of liquids.
1. (c) By sublimation since I2 sublimes. 19. (c) yocto = 10–24
2. (d) It forms the basis of gravity separation. 5 5
20. (c) C F 32 41 32 = 5°C
3. (d) Candle is a heterogeneous mixture of wax and threads. 9 9
Copper is an element while bottled water and table salt It will be cold.
are compounds. 21. (a) Out of two 3.929 g is more accurate and will be reported
4. (c) Glucose is a pure substance hence its constituents as 3.93 after rounding off.
cannot be separated by simple physical method. 22. (b)
5. (a) In case of B, none of O2 and H2 is a compound since 23. (a) 0.00016 can be written as 1.6 × 10–4 in scientic notation.
compound consist of two or more different atoms. 24. (d) Both Y and X are neither precise nor accurate as the
6. (c) two values in each of them are not close. With respect
7. (d) Silver is an element, water is a compound and air is a to X & Y, the values of Z are close & agree with the
mixture. true value. Hence, both precise & accurate.
8. (c) Attraction between particles in solid is maximum and 25. (c) On calculation we find
hence their movement is minimum amongst the
phases. (29.2 – 20.2)(1.79 ¥105 )
= 1.17×106
Attraction between particles in gases is minimum and 1.37
hence their movements is maximum amongst the three As the least precise number contains 3 significant
phases. figures therefore, answers should also contains 3
Attraction between the particles and their movements significant figures.
in liquids is intermediate i.e., between solids and gases. 26. (d) We know that all non-zero digits are significant and
9. (c) A mixture may contain any number of components in the zeros at the beginning of a number are not
any ratio. significant. Therefore number 161 cm, 0.161 cm and
e.g. air is a mixture of various gases. 0.0161cm have 3, 3 and 3 significant figures
10. (d) It is a solution and is a mixture of sucrose and water. respectively.
11. (b) One fermi is 10–13 cm. 27. (b) Given P = 0.0030m, Q = 2.40m & R = 3000m. In P(0.0030)
12. (c) Exa = 1018 initial zeros after the decimal point are not significant.
13. (d) 1 zepto = 10–21 Therefore, significant figures in P(0.0030) are 2.
Similarly in Q (2.40) significant figures are 3 as in this
14. (a) Joule is the unit of work and Pascal is unit of pressure.
case final zero is significant. In R = (3000) all the zeros
J Work Nm
JPa 1 m3 are significant hence, in R significant figures are 4
Pa Pressure 2
Nm because they come from a measurement.
15. (a) 1 m3 of water 106 cm3 of water 28. (a)
Mass of 106 cm3 water 29. (c) If zero is used to locate the decimal point it is
= 106 cm3 × 1 g cm3 ( density of H2O = 1 g cm3) considered as a significant figure. In 50.000 all zero are
significant.
10 6 30. (a) Sum of the figures 29.4406, 3.2 and 2.25 is 34.8906. The
= 106 g = kg = 103 kg = 1000 kg
103 sum should be reported to the first place of decimal as
(b) Weight of normal adult man = 65 kg 3.2 has only one decimal place. After rounding off the
Weight of 1 m3 of water is highest. sum is 34.9. Hence number of significant figures is
(c) Density of Hg = 13.6 g cm–3 three.
Volume of Hg = 10 L = 10 × 1000 = 104 cm3 31. (d) 10.3106 g has 6 significant figures. Since all
non-zero digits are significant and a zero becomes
Weight of Hg = 13.6 × 104 = 136000 g = 136 kg
significant if it appears between two non-zero digits.
16. (d) Smallest and largest amount of energy respectively
are eV and L-atm. 43.0 0.0243
32. (b) = 0.7683088
1 eV = 1.6 × 10–19 J 0.340 4
1L -atm = 101.325 J The least precise term has two significant figures
17. (c) (leaving the exact number). Hence after rounding off
correct answer is 0.77.
EBD_7207
12 SOME BASIC CONCEPTS OF CHEMISTRY
33. (a) 2.6 has two significant figures. 50. (b) The number of molecules of N2 and X are same. Hence
0.260 has three significant figures. they must have the same molecular weights.
0.002600 has four significant figures. X is CO.
2.6000 has five significant figures. 51. (c)
Energy 52. (c) In law of reciprocal proportions, the two elements
34. (d) which can be shown combining with the third element, must combine with
volume
Pressure each other in the same ratio or multiple of that Ratio of
S and O when combine with C is 2 : 1. Ratio of S and O is
= Force Work (energy/di stance) Energy
SO2 is 1 : 1
area Area Volume 53. (d) Avogadro’s law is independent of the reactive or
35. (b) X Y R S unreactive nature of the gases.
ng mg pg qg
According to Avogadro’s law equal volumes of gases
n + m = p + q by law of conservation of mass. at the same temperature and pressure should contain
36. (a) CaCO3 CaO + CO2 equal number of molecules.
20 g 8.8 g 11.2 g
mass of reactant = mass of products = 20g. 54. (c)
Hence the law of conservation of mass is obeyed. 1
37. (a) 38. (a) 55. (b) 1 amu = of the mass of C-12.
12
39. (b) NaHCO3 CH3COOH Residue CO 2 56. (b) The modern atomic weight scale is based on C12.
4.2g 10.0g 12.0g 2.2g
57. (d) Molecular weight of ZnSO 4 .7H 2O
Mass of reactants = 4.2 + 10.0 = 14.2 g
Mass of products = 12.0 + 2.2 = 14.2 g = 65 + 32 + (4 × 16) + 7(2 × 1 + 16) = 287.
Hence, given reaction illustrate law of conservation
percentage mass of zinc (Zn)
of mass.
mass of H 2 combined 4 1 65
40. (c) I experiment : 100 22.65%
mass of O 2 combined 32 8 287
58. (b) Average atomic mass of neon
mass of H 2 combined 50 1 = 20 × 0.9051 + 21 × 0.0027 + 22 × 0.0922
II experiment :
mass of O 2 combined 400 8 = 20.187 u
Hence both law of conservation of mass and constant 59. (a) (78.9183361) × (0.5069) + (80.916289) × (0.4931)
composition is obeyed. 60. (a) Mass of oxygen atom is 15.995 amu, becasue 1 amu
41. (c) The H : O ratio in water is fixed, irrespective of its = 1.66056 × 10–24 g, hence 15.995 × value of 1 amu
source. Hence it is law of constant composition. give the value equal to option (a).
42. (a) Constant proportions according to which a pure 23
chemical compound always contains same elements 2.824784 10
61. (d) = 14 amu
combined together in the same definite proportion of 1.66056 10–24
weight. Where 1.66056 × 10–24 is equal to one atomic mass
43. (c) (amu)
44. (d) SnCl2 SnCl4 62. (b) Gram molecular weight of CO = 12 + 16 = 28 g
119 : 2 × 35.5 119 : 4 × 35.5 6.023 × 1023 molecules of CO weight 28 g
Chlorine ratio in both compounds is
28 4.65 10 23 g
= 2 × 35.5 : 4 × 35.5 = 1 : 2 1 molecule of CO weighs =
6.02 1023
45. (d) In CuO and Cu2O the O : Cu is 1 : 1 and 1 : 2 respectively.
This is law of multiple proportion. 63. (b) Molecular weight of SO2 = 32 + 2 × 16 = 64
46. (c) 64 g of SO2 occupies 22.4 litre at STP
47. (b) Law of multiple proportion. As the ratio of oxygen 22.4
which combine with fix weights of 1 g of nitrogen bears 240 g of SO2 occupies = 240 84 litre at STP
64
a simple whole number ratio
0.57 : 1 : 12 : 1.7031 : 2 : 3 64. (a) 1 mol CCl4 vapour = 12 + 4 × 35.5
48. (b) = 154 g 22.4 L at STP
49. (c) According to Avogadro's law "equal volumes of all 154
gases contain equal number of molecules under similar Density = gL 1 6.875 gL 1
22.4
conditions of temperature and pressure". Thus if 1 L 65. (b) 6.02 × 1023 molecules of CO =1mole of CO
of one gas contains N molecules, 2 L of any other gas 6.02 × 1024 CO molecules = 10 moles CO
under the same conditions of temperature and pressure = 10 g atoms of O = 5 g molecules of O2
will contain 2N molecules.
4.4 1
66. (a) 4.4 g CO2 = = 0.1 mol CO2 (mol. wt. of CO2 = 44) No. of molecules of O2 =
44 32
= 6 × 10 molecules = 2 × 6 × 1022 atoms of O.
22
4
67. (b) 2g of H2 means one mole of H2, hence contains No. of molecules of N2 =
28
6.023 × 1023 molecules. Others have less than one mole,
1 4 1 1
so have less no. of molecules. Ratio of no. of molecules = : : = 7 : 32
32 28 32 7
558.5
68. (a) Fe (no. of moles) = = 10 moles = 10NA atoms.
55.85 weight 50
No. of moles in 60 g of C = 60/12 = 5 moles = 5NA 80. (d) No. of moles = = = 0.14 mole
mol. wt . 342
atoms.
69. (c) 16 g CH4 is 1 mol. Hence number of molecules 81. (c) Mass of 1 electron = 9.11 × 10–28 g
= Avogadro number = 6.023 × 1023. Mass of 1 mole (6.02 × 1023) electrons
70. (c) M. Wt of Na2SO4.10H2O is 322 g which contains 224 = 9.11 × 10–28 × 6.02 × 1023g
g oxygen. = 55 × 10–5 g = 55 × 10–5 × 103 mg = 0.55 mg.
32.2 g will contain 22.4 g oxygen. 1
82. (b) H2 + O H2 O
71. (a) 21% of 1 litre is 0.21 litre. 2 2
22.4 litres = 1 mole at STP 10g 64g
10 64
0.21 5 mol 2 mol
0.21 litre = 0.0093 mol 2 32
22.4 In this reaction oxygen is the limiting agent. Hence
72. (d) At S.T.P. 22.4 litre of gas contains 6.023 × 1023
molecules amount of H2O produced depends on the amount of
O2 taken
molecules in 8.96 litre of gas
0.5 mole of O2 gives H2O = 1 mol
6.023 10 23 8.96 2 mole of O2 gives H2O = 4 mol
= 24.08 10 22
22.4 83. (c) No. of molecules
73. (b) Mass of one molecule of Water 44
Moles of CO2 = 1 NA
44
18
= 3 10 23 g 3 10 26 Kg 48
6.023 10 23 Moles of O3 = 1 NA
48
74. (d) 1 molecule of CO2 has one atom of C and two atoms of
8
oxygen. Moles of H2 = 4 4NA
1 mole of CO2 has = 6.02 × 1023 atoms of C 2
= 2 × 6.02 × 1023 atoms of O 64
1
Moles of SO2 = NA
75. (a) Given, V = 1.12 × 10–7 cm3 64
22400 cm3 at NTP = 6.02 × 1023 molecules 84. (b) Molecular weight of C60H122 = (12 × 60) + 122 = 842.
Therefore weight of one molecule
6.02 1023
1.12 × 10–7 cm3 at NTP = 1.12 10 7 Molecular weight of C 60 H 122
22400 =
= 3.01 × 1012 molecules. Avagadro' s number
76. (b) Total atoms in 1 molecule of C12H22O11 842
1.4 10 21 g
= 12 + 22 + 11 = 45 6.023 10 23
Total atoms in 1 mole of C12H22O11 85. (c) 50% of X (Atomic mass 10), 50% of Y (Atomic mass 20).
= 45 × 6.02 × 1023 atoms/mol.
Relative number of atoms of X = 50 5 and than
77. (a) 22.4 L of O 2 at STP = 32 g 10
50
Y= 2.5
32 20
1 L of O2 at STP = 1 = 1.428 g = 1.43 g
22.4 Simple Ratio 2 : 1. Formula X2Y
78. (c) Given V = 2 L, Molarity = 0.5M, Moles = ? 86. (a) Element % Atomic Relative Simple ratio
mass no.of atoms of atoms
Molarity No. of moles of solute or Moles
0.5
2 80 6.66
V of solution in L C 80 12 6.66 1
12 6.66
Moles = 2 × 0.5 = 1.0
20 20.0
79. (a) Let mass of O2 = 1 g H 20 1 20.0 3
1 6.66
Mass of N2 = 4g
Empirical formula is CH3
EBD_7207
87. (a) Empirical formula of compound = CH2 5
Molecular mass of the compound = 42 1 mole of NH3 requires = = 1.25 mole of O2.
4
n = 42/14 = 3 Hence O2 is consumed completely.
Hence molecular formula = C3H6
Equivalent mass
88. (d) C 54.55 54.55/12 = 4.5 4.5/2.27 = 2 97. (a) Molarity = Normality ×
H 9.099.09/1= 9.09 9.09/2.27 = 4 Molecular mass
O 36.36 36.36/16 = 2.27 2.27/2.27= 1 M
= 0.2 = 0.1 M
Hence empirical formula of the compound = C2H4O 2 M
89. (a) Mass ratio of H : C = 1 : 12 Normality
However, given mass ratio of H : C = 1 : 3 98. (a) Molarity
Replaceable hydrogen atom
Therefore, for every C atom, there are 4 H atoms, hence
empirical formula = CH4 H2SO4 is dibasic acid.
Molar solution of H2SO4 = N/2 H2SO4
90. (a) Element Percentage Atomic Atomic Simple
weight ratio ratio 99. (b) Given N1 = 10N, V1 = 10 ml, N2 = 0.1N, V2 = ?
C 38.71 12 38.71 3.23 N1V1 N 2V2

3.23 1
12 3.23 or 10 × 10 = 0.1 × V2
H 9.67 1 9.67 9.67
9.67 3 10 10
1 3.23 or V2 , V2 = 1000 ml
O 100 16 51.62 3.23 0.1
(38.71 9.67) 3.23 1 Volume of water to be added
16 3.23
51.62 = V2 – V1 = 1000 – 10 = 990 ml.
Mass of solute
Thus empirical formula is CH3O. 100. (b) ppm 106
Mass of solution
91. (d) At. Rel.No. of Simple
Element % 6 10 –3
Mass Atoms Ratio ppm 10 6.
1000
C 75 12 75 /12 6.25 1 101. (a) 5 M H2SO4 = 10 N H2SO4,
H 25 1 25 /1 25 4 ( Basicity of H2SO4 = 2)
N1V1 = N2V2,
Empirical formula is CH4. 10 × 1 = N2 × 10 or N2 = 1 N
92. (b) Mg 2 HCl MgCl 2 H2 102. (c) Among all the given options molarity is correct
1 mole 1 mole because the term molarity involve volume which
1
mole
1
mole (12g of Mg
1
mol ) increases on increasing temperature.
2 2 2
6.02 1020
93. (a) We know that 103. (b) Moles of urea present in 100 ml of sol.=
6.02 10 23
N2 + 3H2 2NH3
28 g 6 g 34 g 6.02 10 20 1000
M 0.01M
14 g 3 g 17 g 6.02 10 23 100
Here given H2 is 3 kg and N2 is 20 kg but 3 kg of H2 can [ M = Moles of solute present in 1L of solution]
only react with 14 g of N2 and thus the obtained NH3 104. (b) From the molarity equation.
will be of 17 kg. M1V1 + M2V2 = MV
94. (d) 2H2 + O2 2H2O Let M be the molarity of final mixture,
4g 32g 36g M1V1 +M V2
4kg 32 kg 36kg 2
M= where V = V1 + V2
V
95. (c) C2H4 + 3 O2 2CO2 + 2H2O
28 g 96 g 480 1.5 520 1.2
M 1.344 M
28 g of C2H4 undergo complete combustion by 480 520
= 96 g of O2
STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS
2.8 kg of C2H4 undergo complete combustion by
= 9.6 kg of O2. 105. (c) Both solids and liquids have definite volume, but
96. (c) According to stoichiometry they should react as follow gases do not.
Solids have their own shape, but liquids and gases
4NH 3 5O 2 4NO 6H 2 O
takes the shape of the container in which they are put
4 mole of NH3 requires 5 mole of O2. in.
106. (b) For statement (ii), it is not necessary that all 114. (a) 115. (b) 116. (a)
components of a h eterogeneous mixture are
28
observable to naked eyes for example blood is a 117. (d) A : 28 g of He = = 7 mol
heterogeneous mixture whose components are not 4
visible to naked eyes. For statement (iv) air is a 46
homogeneous mixture of various gases. B : 46 g of Na = = 2 mol
23
107. (d) Mass of a substance is the amount of matter present
in it while weight is the force exerted by gravity on an 60
object. C : 60 g of Ca = = 1.5 mol
40
Mass is constant while weight may vary from one
place to another due to gravity. 27
D : 27 g of Al = = 1 mol
SI unit of both mass and weight is kilogram. 27
108. (c) 27.3 days = 27.3 × 24 hours 118. (c)
= 655.2 hours
27.3 days = 27.3 × 24 × 60 minutes ASSERTION- REASON TYPE QUESTIONS
= 39312 minutes
27.3 days = 27.3 × 24 × 60 × 60 seconds 119. (c)
= 2358720 seconds 120. (d) 1.231 has four significant figures all no. from left to
109. (c) For statement (i), T = The other name of Gay-Lussac’s right are counted, starting with the first digit that is
law is law of definite proportions by volume. not zero for calculating the no. of significant figure.
For statement (ii), F = Law of conservation of mass is 121. (b)
valid for both physical and chemical change. 122. (d) We know that from the reaction H2 + Cl2 2HCl that
For statement (iii), F = Law of definite proportion is the ratio of the volume of gaseous reactants and
valid for each compound individually and not for products is in agreement with their molar ratio.The ratio
comparing two different compounds. of H2 : Cl2 : HCl volume is 1: 1: 2 which is the same as
For statement (iv), T = x/y must be a simple whole their molar ratio. Thus volume of gas is directly related
number ratio and must be a positive integer. to the number of moles. Therefore, the assertion is
For statement (v), F = Equal volumes of all gases false but reason is true.
under similar conditions of temperature and pressure
123. (c) Equal moles of different substances contain same
contain equal number of molecules.
number of constituent particles but equal weights of
110. (c) For statement (i) : H, O, C, N = All have different different substances do not contain the same number
chemical properties. of consituent particles.
For statement (ii) : It is true as per Dalton’s postulate.
124. (a)
For statement (iii) : N : O = 1 : 1 (NO)
For statement (iv) : Dalton’s postulates says, atoms
CRITICAL THINKING TYPE QUESTIONS
can neither be created nor destroyed.
111. (c) Molecular mass of cane sugar (C12H22O11) 125. (b) For, 0.0 significant figure is zero. For 0.1 to 0.9
= 12 × 12 + 22 × 1 + 11 × 16 significant figure will be 1 whereas from 1.0 to 2.0
= 342 amu significant figures will be 2.
1 mole of cane sugar (C12H22O11) = 342 g 126. (a) In law of reciprocal proportions, the two elements
(Molecular mass of cane sugar = 342 g) combining with the third element, must combine with
342 g of cane sugar contain = 6.022 × 1023 molecules each other in the same ratio or multiple of that ratio.
6.022 10 23 P2O3, PH3 and H2O correctly illustrate the law of
34.20 g of cane sugar contain = 34.20 reciprocal proportions. Ratio in the number of atoms
342
of hydrogen and oxygen combining with one P is 3 :
= 6.022 × 1022 molecules.
1.5 i.e., 2 : 1.
MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS 127. (a) Relative atomic mass
Mass of one atom of the element
112. (a) = th
113. (b) Terminal zeros are not significant if there is no 1/12 part of the mass of one atom of Carbon 12
decimal i.e., 290 contains two significant figures Mass of one atom of the element
whereas in 29900. there are 5 significant figures; or 12
1.23 × 1.331 = 1.63713 but keeping the mind the 1.23 mass of one atom of the C 12
has only few significant figures i.e., only three Now if we use 1/6 in place of 1/12 the formula becomes
significant figures, so result should also be reported Mass of one atom of element
in three significant figures only. Thus 1.6373 should Relative atomic mass = 6
Mass of one atom of carbon
be rounded off to 1.64. Value 1.783 is rounded off to
Relative atomic mass decrease twice
2, so has only one significant figure.
EBD_7207
128. (a) No. of molecules in different cases 131. (b) The number of atoms in 0.1 mole of a triatomic gas
(a) 22.4 litre at STP contains = 0.1 × 3 × 6.023 × 1023.
= 6.023 × 1023 molecules of H2 = 1.806 × 1023
15 132. (d) At NTP 22400 cc of N2O = 6.02 × 1023 molecules
15 litre at STP contains = 6.023 10 23
22.4 6.02 10 23
= 4.03 × 1023 molecules of H2 1 cc N2O = molecules
22400
(b) 22.4 litre at STP contains
3 6.02 10 23 1. 8
= 6.023×1023 molecules of N2 atoms = 1022 atoms
22400 224
5
5 litre at STP contains = 6.023 10 23 No. of electrons in a molecule of N 2O = 7 + 7 + 8 = 22
22.4
Hence no. of electrons
= 1.344 × 1023 molecules of N2
6.02 10 23 23
(c) 2 gm of H2= 6.023×1023 molecules of H2 22 electrons = 1.32 ¥10
22400 224
0.5 133. (b) If 10 grains are distributed in one sec, 6.023 × 1023
20
0.5 gm of H2= 6.023 10 23
2 grains will be distributed in
= 1.505 × 1023 molecules of H2
6.023 1023 1
(d) Similarly 10 g of O2 gas 1.673 hrs
1020 60 60
10 134. (a) Mass of 6.023 × 1023 atoms of oxygen = 16 g
= 6.023 10 23 molecules of O2
32 Mass of one atom of oxygen
= 1.88 × 1023 molecules of O2 16 23
= 2.66 10 g
Thus (a) will have maximum number of molecules 6.023 10 23
129. (d) 1 Mole of Mg3(PO4)2 contains 8 mole of oxygen atoms Mass of 6.023 × 1023 atoms of nitrogen = 14 g
8 mole of oxygen atoms 1 mole of Mg3(PO4)2 Mass of one atom of nitrogen
1 14
0.25 mole of oxygen atom 0.25 mole of 2.32 10 23
g
8 6.023 1023
Mg3(PO4)2 Mass of 1 × 10–10 mole of oxygen = 16 × 10–10
Mass of 1 mole of copper = 63 g
2 mole of Mg3(PO4)2
3.125 10 Mass of 1 mole of oxygen = 16 g
Mass Mass of 1 × 10–10 mole of copper = 63 × 1 × 10–10
130. (c) Density
Volume = 63 × 10–10
So, the order of increasing mass is II < I < III < IV.
1gram
1 gram cm–3 = 135. (b) The equation for the formation of Al 2 O3 can be
cm 3 represented as
Mass 1gram 2Al 3 / 2O 2 Al2 O3
Volume = 3
1cm 3 2 moles
Density 1gram cm 1.5 moles 1 mole
Thus, 1 mole of alumina is obtained by the reaction of

Volume occupied by 1 gram water = 1 cm3
1.5 moles of oxygen and 2 moles of aluminium. Thus,
or Volume occupied by the amount of aluminium
6.023 1023 = 2 × 27 g = 54 g. [mol. mass of Al = 27]
molecules of water = 1 cm3 136. (c) (a) Weight of H2 = mole × molecular wt.
18
= 0.2 × 2 = 0.4 g
1 23
(b) 6.023 × 10 = 1 mole
[ 1g water = moles of water]
18 Thus 6.023 × 1022 = 0.1 mole
Thus volume occupied by 1 molecule of water Weight of N2 = 0.1 × 28 = 2.8 g
1 18 (c) Weight of silver = 0.1 g
= 23
cm 3 = 3.0×10–23 cm3. (d) Weight of oxygen = 32 × 0.1 = 3.2 g
6.023 10
137. (c) Percentage R.N.A Simplest ratio 15.05

Number of moles of N = = 1.075
9 3 14.00g / mol
C 9 = 3 1.074 is the smallest value, division by it gives a ratio
12 4
of C : H : N
1 = 5.9 : 6.9 : 1
H 1 =1 4 =6:7:1
1
Empirical formula = C6H7N
3.5 1 Empirical formula weight = 6 × 12 + 7 + 14 = 93
N 3.5 = 1
14 4 Molecular mass
n 1
Empirical formula = C3H4N Empirial formula weight
(C3H4N)n = 108 Molecular formula = 1 × C6H7N = C6H7N
(12 × 3 + 4 × 1 + 14)n = 108 142. (d) 2C 6 H 6 15O 2 (g ) 12 CO 2 (g ) 6 H 2 O(g )
(54)n = 108 2 (78) 15(32 )
108 156 gm of benzene required oxygen = 15 × 22.4 litre
n= =2
54 15 22.4
molecular formula = C6 H8N2 1 gm of benzene required oxygen = litre
156
138. (c) The acid with empirical formula CH2O2 is formic acid, 39 gm of Benzene required oxygen
H—COOH.
15 22.4 39
139. (d) 18 gm, H2O contains = 2 gm H = 84.0 litre
156
2 143. (c) BaCO3 BaO CO 2
0.72 gm H2O contains = 0.72 gm 0.08 gm H
18 197 gm
44 gm CO2 contains = 12 gm C 197 gm of BaCO3 released carbon dioxide
12
= 22.4 litre at STP
3.08 gm CO2 contains = 3.08 0.84 gm C 22.4
44 1 gm of BaCO3 released carbon dioxide = litre
0.84 0.08 197
C:H= : = 0.07 : 0.08 = 7 : 8 9.85 gm of BaCO3 released carbon dioxide
12 1
Empirical formula = C7H8 22.4
140. (a) Let 100 g of compound be there. = 9.85 = 1.12 litre
197
35 144. (b) Ba(OH)2 CO2 BaCO3 H2 O
Number of moles of Nitrogen = = 2.5
14 n mol n mol
5 n mol Ba(OH)2 = n mol BaCO3
Number of moles of Hydrogen = = 4.9 0.205 mol Ba (OH) 2 0.205 mol BaCO3
1.008
Wt. of substance = No. of moles × Molecular mass
60
Number of moles of Carbon = = 4.9 = 0.205 × 197.3 = 40.5 g
12.01 145. (a) Fe2O3 + 3CO 2Fe + 3CO2
Since 2.5 is the smallest value division by it give 1 vol. 3 vol. 2 vol. 3 vol.
ratio 1 mol. 3 mol. 2 mol. 3 mol.
N:H:C ( vol% = mol%)
1 : 1.96 : 1.96 One gram mol of any gas occupies 22.4 litre at NTP.1
mol of Fe2O3 requires 3 mol of CO for its reduction
=1:2:2
i.e., 1 mol of Fe2O3 requires 3 × 22.4 litre or 67.2 dm3
Empirical formula = C2H2N
CO to get itself reduced.
Empirical formula weight = 2 × 12 + 2 + 14 = 40 146. (d) Writing the equation for the reaction, we get
Molecular mass = 80 PbO + 2HCl PbCl2 + H2O
Molecular formulae = n (C2H2N) 207 + 16 2 × 36.5 207 + 71
= 223 g = 73g = 278g
80 6.5
= 2 (C2H2N) n = C4H4N2 No. of moles of PbO 0.029
40 223
141. (b) Let 100 g of compound be there. 3.2
No. of moles of HCl 0.0877
77.43g 36.5
Number of moles of C = = 6.44 Thus PbO is the limiting reactant 1 mole of PbO produce
12.01g / mol
7.53g 1 mole PbCl2.
Number of moles of H = = 7.47 0.029 mole PbO produces 0.029 mole PbCl2.
1.008g / mol
EBD_7207
149. (a) From molarity equation
163
147. (a) C57H110O6 + O2 57CO2 + 55H2O M1V1 + M2V2 = MV(total)
2
10 200 210
890 gram of fat produces 990 gram of H2O 2 0.5 M
1000 1000 1000
990 120 = M × 210
450 gram fat produces 450
890 120
M= 0.57 M
= 500.56 g of H2O 210
500.56g 150. (a) 1 ppm = 1 mg / 1 litre (for liquids)
Moles of H2O = = 27.80 4 ppm = 4 mg / 1 litre
18g mol
1 litre contains 4 mg of fluoride ions
26g 4
148. (d) nC = 2.16 10 ml contains 10 = 0.04 mg
12 g/mol 1000
20 g 0.04g
nO2 = 0.625 Number of moles of fluoride =
32 g/mol 19g / mol
O2 will be a limiting reagent in reaction (i) = 2.10 × 10–3
60g No. of moles of solute
nN 2 = 2.14 151. (a) Molarity (M)
28g/mol Volume of solution in litres
Molarity nsolute
nH 2 = 40
25
According to balanced equation, nNaOH = = 0.625
40
1 mol of N2 requires 3 mole of N2
2.14 mol of N2 require 6.42 mol of N2 25
nLiOH = = 1.04
N2 will be a limiting reagent in reaction (ii) 24
100g 25
nP4 = = 0.86 nO2 = 6.25 nAl(OH)3 = = 0.32
4 31 (17 3 17)
According to balanced equation
25
1 mol of P4 require 3 mol of O2 nKOH = = 0.45
0.86 mol of P4 require 2.58 mol of O2 (39 17)
So P4 is a limiting reagent in reaction (iii) 25
nB(OH)3 = = 0.403
(11 17 3)
STRUCTURE OF ATOM 31
26. (a) 19 + 1e– = 20 electrons.

FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS
27. (c) 18Ar40 contains 22 neutrons and 21Sc40 contains 19
1. (b) neutrons. The number of neutrons = (A – Z)
2. (b) Cathode rays are never electromagnetic waves. 28. (b) Number of p = number of e– = 89 and neutrons
3. (c) Cathode rays are made up of negatively charged 231 – 89 = 142.
particles (electrons) which are deflected by both the 29. (a) Z = 11, A = 24. Hence protons = 11 the neutrons
electric and magnetic fields. (24 – 11) = 13.
4. (d) 5. (b) 6. (c) 7. (c) 30. (d) For neutral atom . No. of p = No. of e– = 18 and
8. (c) The electrical discharge through the gases could be A = Z + No. of neutrons = 18 + 20 = 38.
observed only at low pressure and high voltage. 31. (c) When an alpha particle is emitted from a nucleus its
9. (b) The cathode rays (negatively charged particles atomic number decreases by two and its atomic mass
stream) originates from cathode and move towards decreases by four e.g.
anode. –
Z XA Z 2X
A 4
10. (b) Millikan determined the value of charge on the
electron by using oil drop experiment. 32. (b) Nucleons are total number of protons and neutrons.
11. (b) Both of these are collectively known as nucleons.
12. (d) Proton is the nucleus of H-atom (H-atom devoid of its 33. (b) Atoms with mass number but different atomic numbers
electron) are called isobars. Examples; 146C, 147N are isobars.
13. (b) Positron (positive electron, +1e0) is positively charged 34. (d) 35 and 37 are isotopes, so they will have
17 Cl 17 Cl
electron without any mass, so it is the lightest particle
same chemical properties.
among given choices.
35. (d) Atomic number is equal to number of protons or
14. (c) As the neutron is a chargeless particle, hence, the beam
number of electrons. Thus if two species have
of neutrons is not deflected by electrical or magnetic
different atomic number they must contain different
field.
number of protons and electrons. Number of neutrons
15. (a) James Chadwick in 1932 discovered the neutrons. = Atomic mass – Atomic number. Therefore due to
16. (b) Since electrons are negatively charged particles they difference of atomic numbers two species also have
got deflected toward positively charged electrode different number of neutrons.
whereas proton being positively charged will get 36. (a)
deflected toward negative electrode. Since neutrons
c
are neutral, so they went straight. 37. (d) 1
17. (a) l
18. (b) -rays have the least penetrating power, followed by c c
-rays (100 times that of -rays) and -rays (1000 times 2
2 3 1
that of -rays).
2 1 100
19. (d) X- and -rays are not deflected by the electric and % change in frequency =
magnetic field. 1
20. (c) Rutherford’s -ray scattering experiment first showed c c 2c
the existence of a small positivily charged entity in the 100
3 1 1 3 1
centre of atom, called nucleus. = 100
c c
21. (d) The nucleus occupies much smaller volume compared
to the volume of the atom. 1 1
22. (a) All positive ions are deposited at small part. (nucleus = – 66%
of atom). 38. (b)
23. (d) Rutherford used doubly charged helium particle. 39. (b) The ideal body, which emits and absorbs radiations of
( - particle) all frequencies, is called a black-body and the radiation
24. (d) Electrons are revolving around the nucleus, and emitted by such a body is called black-body radiation.
centrifugal force is balancing the force of attraction. 40. (a) Energy is always absorbed or emitted in whole number
25. (d) Number of neutrons = Mass number – Atomic number or multiples of quantum.
= 70 – 30 = 40.
EBD_7207
32 STRUCTURE OF ATOM
41. (d) (i) Interference and diffraction support the wave Atomic number of Li (Z) = 3.
nature of electron.
n2 (1) 2
(ii) E = mc2 supports the particle nature of electron. Radius of Li2+ ion 0.53 r1 0.17
Z 3
hc 57. (c) Energy of an electron in Bohr's orbit is given by the
(iii) E h is de-Broglie equation and it
13.6
supports both wave nature and particle nature of relationship. En eV.
electron. n2
hc c 1312
42. (d) E h or 58. (b) We know that En = kJ mol 1
n2
3 108 n = 4 (Fourth Bohr orbit)
3.75 10 8 m 1312
8 1015 Given E4 = –82 kJ mol–1
In nanometer = 3.75× 10 42
which is closest to 4 × 101 59. (a) 2nd excited state will be the 3rd energy level.
43. (c) K.E. of emitted electron 13.6 13.6
En eV or E eV 1.51 eV.
= hv hv0 (i.e. smaller than hv ). n2 9
44. (a)
45. (a) At a frequency > 0, the ejected electrons come out 13.6 Z 2
60. (d) For H atom, En eV
with certain kinetic energy. n2
46. (a) For second orbit, n = 2
47. (d) This statement is known as uncertainty principle which Z = At. no. = 1 (for hydrogen)
was given by Heisenberg it is not a Bohr’s postulate.
13.6 (1) 2 13.6
48. (c) Since the energy difference between two consecutive E2 eV
2 4
Bohr orbits is quantized and the energy of higher orbit (2)
is more than that of lower orbit, so an electron from 13.6 1.6 10 19 19
one Bohr stationary orbit can go to next higher orbit = J = 5.44 10 J
by absorption of electromagnetic radiation of particular 4
wavelength or frequency. 61. (b) If we assume the atom to be hydrogen like, energy of
nth energy level
49. (d) For a Bohr atom, angular momentum M of the electron
E
nh
= . En = 21 where E1 is energy of first energy level
2 n
50. (b) Angular momentum of an electron in nth orbit is given E1 21.79 10 12
E1
E2 =
by 2 2 44
nh –12
= – 5.447 × 10 erg per atom.
mvr
2 E0
For n = 5, we have 62. (a) Energy of an electron E
n2
5h 2.5h For energy level (n = 2)
Angular momentum of electron
2 13.6 13.6
E 3.4 eV.
51. (d) y n2 2
2 4
For 1st orbit y = 1 63. (a) H,He+ and Li2+ are single electron species thus show
similar line spectra.
For IIIst orbit y 32 9
64. (c)
So it will 9y. 65. (c) Vth stationary state, as radii of stationary state is given
52. (a) rn = r1 × n2 (for hydrogen atom) as rn = n2 × a0 n=5
rn = r × n2
as r1 = r (given) 1 1 1
66. (c) R
r2 = r × 22 (n = 2, for second Bohr’s orbit) n12 n22
= 4r 1 1 1
53. (b) 54. (d) 1.097 107 1.097 107 m 1
1
55. (a) Radius of nth orbit = r1 n2 . (for H-atom)
56. (a) For hydrogen atom (n) = 1 (due to ground state) 9
91.15 10 m 91nm
Radius of hydrogen atom (r) = 0.53 Å.
6.626 10 34 Js
1 1 1 m
67. (c) IE 1.54 10 10 m 3 108 m sec 1
h n12 n22
1.4285 10 32 kg
18
2.18 10 1 1
6.625 10 34 1 16 3.08 1015 s 1
34
h 6.6 10 10
82. (c) 24
2 10 m 2Å
p 3.3 10
1 1
68. (c) E for two energy levels 21.79 J/atom
n12 n22 ch c
83. (b) E h ;and
1 1
69. (a) E R ;
n12 n22 3.0 108
8 1015
First line in Balmer series results in the transition :
n2 = 3 to n1 = 2.
70. (c) Energy of photon obtained from the transition n = 6 to 3.0 108
0.37 10 7 37.5 10 9 m 4 101 nm
n = 5 will have least energy. 8 1015
1 1
E 13.6Z 2 h
n12 n22 84. (b)
mv
1 1 1 h = 6.6 × 10–34 J/s
71. (a) R –
n12 n 22 m = 1000 kg
For second line in lyman series
36 103
n2 = 3 v = 36 km/hr = m/sec = 10 m/sec
60 60
1 1 1 1 1 8R
R R – =
1 2
3 2 1 9 9 6.6 10 34
= 6.6 10 38 m
3
72. (d) The shortest wavelength in hydrogen spectrum of 10 10
Lyman series is given by formula : 85. (b) Heisenberg uncertainity principle can be explained by
1 RH RH 109678 the relation
2 2 1
n 1 h
x. P
= 9.117 × 10–6 cm 4
= 911.7 × 10–10 m = 911.7 Å. where x = uncertainity in position
73. (b) P = uncertainity in momentum
74. (c) Bohr model can explain spectrum of any atom or ion
86. (d) Heisenberg's uncertainty Principle is applicable to any
containing one electron only (that is H-like species)
moving object.
75. (d) Uncertainty principle which was given by Hiesenberg
and not Bohr’s postulate. h
87. (d) By Heisenberg uncertainty Principle x p
76. (d) Bohr’s model can be applied to one electron system 4
only. (which is constant)
77. (b) Bohr model can only explain one electron system As x for electron and helium atom is same thus
78. (a) = h/ mv ; for the same velocity, varies inversely momentum of electron and helium will also be same
with the mass of the particle. therefore the momentum of helium atom is equal to
5 × 10–26 kg. m.s–1.
h 6.6 10 34
79. (d) 10 33 m 88. (a) Given m = 9.1 × 10–31kg
mv 60 10 3 10
h = 6.6 × 10–34Js
80. (d) Given E = 4.4 × 10–4 j , =?
300 .001
hc 6.6 10 34 3 108 v= = 0.003ms–1
= 4.5 10 22 m 100
E 4
4.4 10
h h From Heisenberg's uncertainity principle
81. (c) We know that ; m
mv v 6.62 10 34
The velocity of photon (v) = 3 × 108 m sec–1 x 31
1.92 10 2 m
4 3.14 0.003 9.1 10
1.54 10 8 cm 1.54 10 10 meter
EBD_7207
100. (b) Value of l = 0 ..........(n – 1)
h h
89. (c) x. p or x.m v ; l cannot be equal to n.
4 4 101. (b) For n = 5, l = n – 1 = 5 – 1 = 4
0.011 m = 2l + 1 = 2(4) + 1 = 9
v 3 10 4 3.3 cms 1 Sum of values of l and m = 9 + 4 = 13
100
102. (a) Quantum number n = 3, l = 2, m = +2 represent an
27 orbital with
6.6 10
x 0.175 cm
4 3.14 9.1 10 28 3.3 s
1
3d xy or 3d 2 2
2 x y
90. (b) x. v value will be large for object of smallest mass
and is therefore the most significant for calculating which is possible only for one electron.
uncertainity. 103. (d) The orbitals which have same energy are called
91. (b) Magnetic quantum no. represents the orientation of degenerate orbitals eg. px , p y and pz .
atomic orbitals in an atom. For example px, py & pz 104. (a) No. of radial nodes in 3p-orbital = (n – – 1)
have orientation along X-axis, Y-axis & Z-axis [for p ortbital = 1]
92. (b) The sub-shell are 3d, 4d, 4p and 4s, 4d has highest =3–1–1=1
energy as n + value is maximum for this. 105. (b)
93. (a) The possible quantum numbers for 4f electron are 106. (a) As n – l – 1 = 5 or 8 – l – 1 = 5 l = 2.
1 107. (b) According to given information n = 5 and l = 3.
n = 4, = 3, m = – 3, –2 –1, 0, 1 , 2 , 3 and s 108. (a) The number of allowed orbitals are given by n 2.
2
Thus when n = 5
Of various possiblities only option (a) is possible.
(5)2 = 25
94. (b) n = 4 represents 4th orbit
109. (d) Spherical shaped s-orbital shields the outer shell
= 3 represents f subshell electrons move effectively than p-orbital, which in turn
m = – 2 represents orientation of f-orbital shields more effectively than d-orbital and so on.
s = 1/2 represents direction of spin of electron. 110. (d) According to Hund’s rule electron pairing in p, d and f
The orbital is 4f. orbitals cannot occur until each orbital of a given
95. (b) For 4d orbitals, n = 4, l = 2 subshell contains one electron each or is singly
occupied.
For s orbital l 0
111. (d) We know that atomic number of gadolinium is 64.
For p orbital l 1 Therefore the electronic configuration of gadolinium
For d orbital l = 2 is [Xe] 4f 7 5d1 6s2. Because the half filled and fully
m = –2, –1, 0, +1 or + 2 filled orbitals are more stable.
112. (b) The sub-shell with lowest value of (n + ) is filled up
1 1
s = + and first. When two or more sub-shells have same (n + )
2 2 value the subshell with lowest value of 'n' is filled up
1 first therefore the correct order is
Thus choice b having n = 4, l = 2, d = 1 and s = is
2 orbital 4s 3d 4p 5s 4d
correct. n+ 4+ 0 3+ 2 4 +1 5 + 0 4 + 2
96. (c) n = 2, l = 1 means 2p–orbital. Electrons that can be value =4 =5 =5 =5 =6
accommodated = 6 as p sub-shell has 3 orbital and 113. (c) Fe++ (26 – 2 = 24) = 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 4s0 3d 6 hence
each orbital contains 2 electrons. no. of d electrons retained is 6. [Two 4s electron are
97. (d) = 3 means f -subshell. Maximum no. of removed]
electrons = 4 + 2 = 4 × 3 + 2 = 14 114. (b) This configuration represents ground state electronic
98. (b) m = – l to +l, through zero thus for l = 2, values of m configuration of Cr.
will be – 2, –1, 0, + 1, + 2. 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s23p63d 5 4s1
Therefore for l = 2, m cannot have the value –3. 115. (c) N(7) = 1s2 2s2 2p3
99. (c) (a) n = 3, 0 means 3s-orbital and n + = 3 N2 1s 2 , 2 s 2 2 p1x
(b) n = 3, 1 means 3p-orbital n + = 4 Unpaired electrons = 1.
116. (a) Cu+ = 29 – 1 = 28 e–
(c) n = 3, 2 means 3d-orbital n + = 5
thus the electronic confingration of Cu+ is
(d) n = 4, 0 means 4s-orbital n + = 4
2 2 6 2 6 10
Increasing order of energy among these orbitals is Cu+ (28) = 1s 2s 2 p 3s 3 p 3d
3s < 3p < 4s < 3d 18e
3d has highest energy.. 117. (d) This is as per the definition of Pauli’s exclusion
principle.
118. (b) Electronic configuration of Cu (29) is 1s2 2s 2 2p6 3s2 135. (a) For d-subshell Number of orbitals = 5, l = 2
3p6 3d 10 4s1 and not 1s2, 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d 94s2 due f-subshell Number of orbitals = 7, l = 3
to extra stability of fully filled orbitals. s-subshell Number of orbitals = 1, l = 0
119. (b) According to Aufbau principle, the orbital of lower p-subshell Number of orbitals = 3, l = 1
energy (2s) should be fully filled before the filling of 136. (b) 137. (c) 138. (b)
orbital of higher energy starts.
120. (a) ns (n 2)f (n 1)d np [n = 6] ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS
121. (d) The number of sub shell is (2 l + 1). The maximum 139. (d) The statement-1 is false but the statement-2 is true
number of electrons in the sub shell is 2 (2 l + 1) exact position and exact momentum of an electron can
= (4 l + 2). never be determined according to Heisenberg’s
122. (b) uncertainty principle. Even not with the help of electron
5p 4f 6s 5d microscope because when electron beam of electron
(n + l) 5+ 1 4+ 3 6+ 0 5+ 2 microscope strikes the target electron of atom, the
impact causes the change in velocity and position of
6 7 6 7 electron .
Hence the order is 5p < 6s < 4f < 5d 140. (a) Both assertion and reason are true and reason is the
123. (d) correct explanation of assertion.
124. (d) The d-orbital represented by option (d) will become
completely filled after gaining an electron. Therefore n2 h2 n2
Radius, rn 2
0.529Å.rn
option (d) is correct. 4 e mZ Z
For first orbit of H-atom
STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS n=1
125. (c) When both electric and magnetic field is applied, (1)2
electron strikes at point B, and at point C when only r1 0.529Å = 0.529Å
1
magnetic field is applied.
126. (c) 141. (a) 142. (b) 143. (c)
127. (b) For statement (ii) there is no time lag between striking
of light beam and the ejection of electrons. For
statement (iii) refer statement (iv). 144. (c)
128. (c) (i) Beyond a certain wavelength the line spectrum
e 0
becomes band spectrum. 145. (d) for (i) neutron 0
(ii) For Balmer series n1 = 2 m 1
(iii) For calculation of longest wavelength use nearest 2
(ii) -particle 0.5
value of n 2. Hence for longest wavelength in Balmer 4
series of hydrogen spectrum,
1
n1 = 2 & n2 = 3. (iii) proton 1
129. (c) Statement (i) is related to Heisenberg’s uncertainity 1
principle. Statement (iii) belongs to Pauli’s exclusion 1
(iv) electron 1837
principle. 1 1837
130. (b) Angular quantum number determines the 3d shape of 146. (b) N3– The amount of deviation depends upon the
the orbital. magnitude of negative charge on the particle.
Spin quantum number of an electron determines the 147. (d) The lesser is the mass of particle, greater is the
orientation of the spin of electron relative to the chosen deflection.
axis. 148. (c) Deuterium and an -particle have identical values of
e/m.
MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS 149. (a) Considering the core of an atom, higher the positive
charge concentrated in the nucleus, greater the
131. (b) Isotopes have same atomic number. Isobars have repulsion for an alpha-particle.
same mass number, whereas isoelectronic species
have same number of electrons although the (A) has kq1 ( ze )
Coulombic force of repulsion =
same number of electrons but the protons they carry r2
are same while in case of isolelectronic species q1 = charge on -particle
number of protons they carry are different. (ze) = charge on nucleus of atom
132. (a) 133. (c) 134. (a) 150. (c)
EBD_7207
151. (d) Atomic number = No. of protons = 8 Also, linear momentum (mv) = 7.3 × 10 –34 kg ms–1
Mass number = No. of protons + No. of neutrons Then angular momentum will be
= 8 + 8 = 16 = (mv) × r
Since the no. of electrons are two more than the no. of = (7.3 × 10–34 kg ms–1) (158.7 pm)
protons, hence, it is a binegative species. Thus, the = 7.3 × 10–34 kg ms–1 × (158.7 × 10–12 m)
species is 16 O82 . = 11.58 × 10–48 kg m2 s–1
152. (c) e/m waves shown in figure A has higher wavelength = 11.58 × 10–45 g m2s–1
in comparison to e/m waves shown in figure B. 156. (d) Given : Radius of hydrogen atom = 0.530 Å, Number of
Thus these waves also differ in frequency and excited state (n) = 2 and atomic number of hydrogen
c atom (Z) = 1. We know that the Bohr radius.
energy.
n2 (2)2
(r ) Radius of atom 0.530
Z 1
1
4 0.530 2.12 Å
hc
(A) E1
z2
1 157. (c) Energy of electron in 2nd orbit of Li+2 13.6
n2
13.6 (3) 2
2 = = –30.6 eV
(B) E2
hc (2) 2
2 Energy required = 0 – (–30.6) = 30.6 eV
158. (d) Except Al3+ all contain one electron and Bohr’s
model could explain the spectra for one electron
153. (d) E = h system, Bohr’s model was not able to explain the
spectra of multielectron system.
c
and
Z2 2.18 10 18
159. (d) EnH 2.18 10 18 2 J J
= 1015, b = 1014,
a nH 2
nH
17 15
c = 10 , d = 0.85 × 10
and 15
e = 10 × 10 , + Z2 2.18 10 18 4
154. (d) From the expression of Bohr’s theory, we know that EnHe 2.18 10 18 J J
n2 + n2 +
h He He
me v1r1 n1
2
+ 1 4
EnH EnHe nHe+ = 2 × nH
h 2
nH n2 +
& me v 2 r2 n2 He
2
If nH = 1 Then nHe+ = 2
m e v1r1 n1 h 2 If nH = 2 Then nHe+ = 4
m e v2 r2 n2 2 h If nH = 3 Then nHe+ = 6
Given, r1 = 5 r2, n1 = 5, n2 = 4 n2 h 2
160. (d) Radius of nth orbit
me v1 5r2 5 4 2 me2 Z
me v2 r2 4 where n = no. of orbit
h = Plank’s constant
v1 5 1 e = charge on one electron
1: 4
v2 4 5 4 m = mass of one electron
155. (b) Z = 3 for Li2+ ions Z = atomic number
161. (c)
52.9 n 2
So rn Ze 2
Z 162. (d) In S.I. units the P.E. .
n = 3, Z = 3 4 0r
For Li2+, Z = 3.
2
52.9 3
rn pm 3e 2
3 P.E. .
= 158.7 pm 4 0r
163. (c) Series limit is the last line of the series, i.e. n2 = . h / mA v A m Bv B
A
1 1 1 1 1 R B h / mB v B m A vA
R R
n12 n 22 n12 2
n12 5mA 0.05
5 0.5 2.5 5 / 2
mA 0.1
09677.76
12186.3
n12 A : B 5:2
109677.76 h
n12 9 n1 3 170. (d) de Broglie wavelength
12186.3 mv
The line belongs to Paschen series. 1 m 2 v2 1 1 v2
;
2 m1v1 4 9 v1
1 1 1
164. (d) For He+ ion, Z2 R
n12 n 22 v2 9
v1 4
2 1 1 3R
2 R
22 42 4 v1 4
v2 9
1 1 1
For hydrogen atom, R
n12 n 22 1
KE mv 2
2
3R 1 1 1 1 3 2
R or KE1 m1 v12 9 4 16
4 n12 n 22 n12 n 22 4
KE2 m2 v 22 1 9 9
n1 = 1 and n2 = 2.
171. (a) Given mass of an electron(v) 28
165. (c) The wavelengths of elements decreases with increase 9.1 10 g;
h Velocity of electron (v) 3 10 4 cm/s;
in their mass.
mv
0.001
hc Accuracy in velocity 0.001% ;
166. (c) Energy of a photon, E 100
Actual velocity of the electron
34
6.626 10 (Js) 3 108 (ms 1 )
= 6× 10–19 J 0.001
331.3 10 9 (m) ( v) 3 104 0.3 cm/s .
100
No. of photons emitted per second
Planck’s constant (h) = 6.626×10–27erg-sec.
600 (J)
=1021
6 10 9 (J) Uncertainty in the position of the electron
167. (a)
1
m 2
h h h 6.626¥10-27 ¥ 7
0 ( x) =
2 4 m v 4 ¥ 22 ¥ (9.1¥10-28 )¥ 0.3
1 2 =1.93 cm
mv h( 0)
2 172. (a) p=m v
Substituting the given values of x and m, we get
2h 1×10–18 g cm s–1 = 9×10–28 g × v
v ( 0)
m 18
1 10
168. (a) According to de-Broglie, or v
9 10 28
h = 1.1 × 109 cm s–1 1×109 cm s–1
mv i.e. option (a) is correct.
where m = mass of electron, v = velocity 173. (b) According to Heisenberg uncertainty principle.
169. (d) Given, vA = 0.1 ms–1 and vB = 0.05 ms–1 also, h h
mB = 5mA x.m v x
4 4 m v
h 600 0.005
de-Broglie wavelength, Here v 0.03
mv
100
EBD_7207
34 176. (c) Possible values of and m depend upon the value of n

6.6 10
So, x = 0 to (n – 1)
4 3.14 9.1 10 31 0.03 m = – to + through zero
= 1.92 × 10–3 meter
1 1
h s= and
174. (a) We know p. x 2 2
4 Thus for n = 3,
since p = x (given) may be 0, 1 or 2; but not 3
h m may be –2, –1, 0, +1 or +2
p. p
4 1 1
s may be or
h 2 2
or m v m v. [ p= m v]
4 177. (c)
2 h 178. (b) (A)4 p (B) 4 s
or v (C) 3 d (D) 3 p
4 m2
According to Bohr Bury's (n + ) rule, increasing order
h 1 h of energy will be (D) < (B) < (C) < (A).
or v
4 m 2 2m Note : If the two orbitals have same value of (n + )
Thus option (a) is the correct option. then the orbital with lower value of n will be filled first.
175. (a) For n = 5, l may be 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 179. (c) First four orbitals contain four lobes, while fifth orbital
For l = 4, m = 2l + 1 = 2 × 4 + 1 = 9 consists of only two lobes. The lobes of dxy orbital lie
between x and y axis. Similarly in the case of dyz and
= –4, – 3, – 2, –1, 0, +1, +2, +3, +4
dzx. their lobes lie between yz and zx axis respectively.
1
For m = 0, s Four lobes of d 2 2 orbital are lying along x and y
2 x y
Hence, (a) is correct option. axis while two lobes of d orbital are lying along z-
z2
(b) For any value of n, the value of l cannot be equal or axis.
greater than value of n, hence it is incorrect. 180. (c) As per Pauli exclusion principle "no two electrons in
(c) For l = 0, m = 0 hence it is incorrect. the same atom can have all the four quantum numbers
(d) The value of s can never be zero. Thus this option is equal or an orbital cannot contain more than two
also incorrect. electrons and it can accommodate two electrons only
when their directions of spin are opposite".
CLASSIFICATION OF ELEMENTS AND PERIODICITY IN PROPERTIES 49
FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS 16. (d) Chloride formulas

(i) Eka-Aluminium = GaCl3(ECl3)
1. (c) Periodic classification of elements follow a logical (ii) Eka-Silicon = GeCl4(ECl4)
consequence of electronic configuration of atoms Mendeleef arranged elements in horizontal rows and
which is used to examine the physical and chemical vertical columns of a table in order to their increasing
properties of the elements. atomic weights.
2. (c) According to Dobereneir’s triad the atomic mass of Br 17. (b)
will be average of the atomic masses of Cl & I
18. (d) 118 elements are known at present. The recently
35.5 127 discovered elements are man-made.
81.25
2 19. (c) Moseley discovered that atomic number is more
3. (a) fundamental property than atomic mass.
4. (a) According to the law of triads the atomic wt of the 20. (d) 6th period consists of 32 elements.
middle element is arithmatic mean of I and III. 21. (b)
At.wt of Cl At wt of I 22. (b) The period number corresponds to the highest
At wt of Br principal quantum number (n) of the element.
2
5. (b) In 1800, only 31 elements were known by 1865 the 23. (a) Atomic number (Z) = 120
number of identified elements had more than doubled IUPAC name = Unbinilium
to 63. At present 116 elements are known. Of them the Symbol = Ubn
recently discovered elements are man-made. 24. (b) Element with atomic number 104 was named by
6. (c) Johann Dobereiner in early 1800’s was the first to American society as Rutherfordium and Kurchatovium
consider the idea of trends among properties of by soviet society.
elements. By 1829 he noted a similarity among the 25. (c) Digit Name
physical and chemical properties of several groups of 1 un
three elements (triads). 4 quad
7. (a) According to law of triad,
Using above notation IUPAC name of element 114 is
Li Na K Ununquadium.
Ø Ø Ø 26. (b) Its valence shell has 5 electrons (ns2, np3). It belongs
39 + 7 46 to 5th group of the periodic table.
= = 23
2 2 27. (b)
8. (c) Arithmetic mean of atomic mass of F and Br 28. (d) Because of the presence of same number of valence
electrons the elements of same group have similar
19 80 chemical properties.
= = 49.5.
2 29. (c) Halogens are most electronegative elements i.e., they
Atomic mass of Cl = 35.5 are likely to form anions most readily.
Arithmetic mean of atomic masses of F and Br 30. (d) Barium has atomic number 56. It is an alkaline earth
Atomic mass of Cl. metal i.e., found in s-block.
9. (c) 31. (c)
10. (c) Every eighth element had the similar properties to the 32. (c) Element with Z = 33
first element.
(1s2 2s p6 3s2 p6d10 4s 2 p3 ) lies in fifth (or 15th) group.
11. (b) Lothar Meyer plotted the physical properties such as
atomic volume, melting point and boiling point against 33. (a) The electronic configuration clearly suggest that
atomic weight and obtained a periodically repeated it is a d-block element (having configuration
pattern. (n – 1) d 1– 10 ns 0 – 2 ) which starts from III B and goes
12. (a) 13. (d) 14. (c) till II B. Hence with d3 configuration it would be
classified in the group.
15. (b) Correct order is Dobereiner, Chancourtois, Newlands,
Mendeleev. 34. (d) 35. (c)
EBD_7207
50 CLASSIFICATION OF ELEMENTS AND PERIODICITY IN PROPERTIES
36. (c) Elements (a), (b) and (d) belong to the same group 62. (b) O < S < F < Cl
since each one of them has two electrons in the s sub Electron gain enthalpy –141, –200, –333, – 349 kJ mol–
shell. In contrast, element (c) has seven electrons in 1
the valence shell and hence does not lie in the same 63. (a)
group in which elements (a), (b) and (d) lie. 64. (d) Noble gases have positive values of electron gain
37. (c) enthalpy because the anion is higher in energy than
38. (b) Na and Cl both belongs to III period. the isolated atom and electron.
39. (b) 40. (b) 65. (a) Within a group, electron gain enthalpy becomes less
41. 2 2 6 2
(b) 1s , 2s 2p , 3s 3p 4 negative down a group. However, adding an electron
to the 2p-orbital leads to greater repulsion than adding
Ø
an electron to the larger 3p-orbital. Hence,
Number of shell = 3 phosphorus has the least negative electron gain
(Principal quantum number)
enthalpy.
Number of period = 3
66. (a)
Valence electrons = 6 i.e., 2 + 4
67. (a) Electronegativity values of given elements are as
Number of group = 16
follows:
42. (a) Metallic ch aracter decreases down group and
Be – 1.5 (I) Mg – 1.2 (IV)
increases along a period.
O – 3.5 (II) N – 3.0 (III)
43. (b) Cu, Ag and Au are coinage metals. They belong to group
i.e. II > III > I > IV
IB (d-block) of periodic table.
68. (b) It is electronic configuration of alkali metal. Hence it
44. (b) 45. (b)
46. (b) Non-metals are mainly placed in p-block elements. will form basic oxide.
47. (b) Non-metallic character increases on moving from left 69. (d) 70. (c)
to right in a period. 71. (b) Silicon has valence of 4 and bromine has valence of 1.
48. (b) Correct order of ionic size is Sn > Ce > Yb > Lu. Hence formula of compound will be SiBr4.
49. (c) On moving down in a group atomic radii increases due 72. (b) On passing from left to right in a period acidic character
to successive addition of extra shell hence of the normal oxides of the elements increases with
O < S < Se increase in electronegativity.
Further As is in group 15 having one less electron in
its p orbital hence have higher atomic radii than group STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS
16 elements. 73. (c) Gallium was placed in place of Eka aluminium and
i.e., O < S < Se < As germanium was placed in place of Eka silicon.
50. (a) 74. (b) 75. (c)
51. (c) Isoelectronic ions have same number of electrons. 76. (d) In fourth period filling up of 3d orbital becomes
52. (a) Continuous increase as no. of shells increases down energetically favourable before the 4p orbital is filled.
the group. 77. (b) The chemical element with atomic number 17 is
53. (d) The size of an anion will be larger than that of the chlorine. It belongs to third period in the periodic table
parent atom because the addition of one or more
and forms anion with unit negative charge (Cl–).
electron(s) would result in increased repulsion among
78. (a) For statement (iii) the s-block elements because of
the electrons and a decrease in effective nuclear
their high reactivity are never found pure in nature.
charge.
For statement (iv) the compounds of the s-block
54. (b) K K 2 e . Since e– is to be removed from stable elements with the exception of lithium and beryllium
configuration. are predominantly ionic.
55. (c) 56. (c) 79. (c) 80. (d) 81. (d)
57. (a) IE1 is always less than IE2. 82. (c) Noble gases are placed extremely right in periodic table.
58. (a) Mg 1s 2 2s 2 2p 6 3s 2 Sodium is more metallic than magnesium as it is more
After removing of 2 electron, the magnesium acquired electropositive and has low ionisation energy.
noble gas configuration hence removing of 3rd 83. (b) Second ionization enthalpy will be higher than the
electron will require large amount of energy. first ionization enthalpy but lower than the third
59. (d) ns1 configuration and lesser IE. ionization enthalpy.
60. (b) As I.E. of Mg is more 84. (d)
61. (a) The halogen (group-17) and the chalcogens (group- 85. (b) Oxygen has smaller first ionization enthalpy than
16) are two groups of elements having highly negative nitrogen.
electron gain enthalpies. 86. (c)
CLASSIFICATION OF ELEMENTS AND PERIODICITY IN PROPERTIES 51
MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS 105. (b) Both the statements are correct but assertion is not
correct explanation for reason.
87. (d) A. 1800 31 elements were known 106. (c) Atomic size generally decreases along a period.
B. 1865 63 elements 107. (b) Both assertion and reason are true but reason is not
C. At present 118 the correct explanation of assertion.
88. (b) 89. (d) 90. (b) 91. (a) 92. (b) It is difficult to remove an electron from a positively
93. (d) 94. (d) 95. (c) charged ion than a neutral atom.
96. (d) Helium (He) 1s2 Highest ionisation 108. (b) Both assertion and reason are true but reason is not
energy due to noble gas
the correct explanation of assertion.
in nature.
Alkali metals belong to first group and have largest
Fluorine (F) 1s2, 2s22p3 High electronegativity in
size in a period and hence low I.E.
nature due to small size
and –1 oxidation state. 109. (b) Both assertion and reason are true but reason is not
Rubidium (Rb) Most electronegative the correct explanation of assertion.
element due to large Depending on the element, the process of adding an
atomic size. electron to the atom can be either endothermic or
Lithium (Li) Strongest reducing exothermic.
agent due to small size 110. (c) Assertion is true but reason is false.
and positive oxidation Electronegativity refers to the tendency of atom to
state (+1) attract bonding electrons.
97. (b) A. Li+ < Al2+ < Mg2+ < K+
The cation with the greater positive charge will CRITICAL THINKING TYPE QUESTIONS
have a smaller radius because of the greater
attraction of the electrons to the nucleus. Anion 111. (b)
with the greater negative charge will have the larger 112. (a) Iodine with lower atomic weight than that of tellurium
radius. (Group VI) was placed in Group VII along with fluorine,
chlorine, bromine because of similarities in properties.
1
Positive charge 113. (d) Oxides of Eka-Aluminium = Ga2O3
ionic radius Oxides of Eka-Silicon = SiO2
Negative charge ionic radius Melting point of Eka-Aluminium = Low (302 K)
B. Greater positive charge, increases effective nuclear Melting point of Eka-Silicon = High (1231 K)
charge in case of isoelectronic species. While for
114. (d) Neptunium and plutonium like actinium and
same group elements effective nuclear charge
protoactinium are also found in pitch.
decreases down the groups.
C. Cl > F > Br > I 115. (a) Seventh period includes most of the man-made radio-
electron affinity of Cl is highest in halogen family. active elements.
D. F > Cl > Br > I 116. (a) Atomic number of the given element is 15 and it
electronegativity of fluorine (F) is higher than Cl, belongs to 5th group. Therefore atomic number of the
Br and I. element below the above element
98. (b) 99. (b) = 15 + 18 = 33.
117. (b) These are characteristic properties of d-block
ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS elements.
118. (b) 119. (c) 120. (d) 121. (b) 122. (c)
100. (d) In a triad, the atomic mass of the middle element is the
mean of the atomic masses of the first and third 123. (a) By observing principal quantum number (n). Orbital
elements. (s, p, d, f ) and equating no. of e–’s we are able to find
101. (d) According to Mendeleev, periodic properties of the period, block and group of element in periodic table.
elements is a function of their atomic masses. 124. (b) Periodic table deals with elements and not molecules.
102. (a) Both assertion and reason are true and reason is the 125. (c) Cs is a metal. It is liquid at room temperature. It is
correct explanation of assertion. lighter than Hg (also a liquid metal).
103. (c) Number of elements in each period is twice the number 126. (d) All the given species contains 10 e – each i.e.
of atomic orbitals available in the energy level that is isoelectronic.
being filled. For isoelectronic species anion having high negative
104. (c) He (1s2) should be placed along with s-block elements charge is largest in size and the cation having high
because of its electronic configuration but it has a positive charge is smallest.
completely filled valence shell and as a result it exhibits 127. (b) The ionic radii of isoelectronic ions decrease with the
properties of noble gases, thus it is placed along with increase in the magnitude of the nuclear charge.
noble gases (ns2, np6). So, decreasing order of ionic radii is C4– > N3– > O2–.
EBD_7207
52 CLASSIFICATION OF ELEMENTS AND PERIODICITY IN PROPERTIES
128. (b) Anions will be larger and cations will be smaller than 140. (b) On moving along the period, ionization enthalpy
the parent atoms. Among isoelectronic species (Na+, increases.
Mg2+ and Al3+), the one with the larger positive In second period, the order of ionization enthalpy
nuclear charge will have a smaller radius. should be as follows :
Largest = Cl– and smallest = Al3+ F > O > N.
129. (b) In case of halogens covalent radius is considered this But N has half-filled structure, therefore, it is more
bond is formed by overlapping of electron clouds; stable than O. That is why its ionization enthalpy is
while noble gases remain monoatomic, in this case higher than O. Thus, the correct order of IE is
only way to obtain radius is through van der Waal
F > N > O.
radii.
141. (c) In a period the value of ionisation potential increases
130. (c) Covalent radius is radius of an atom in its bound state
from left to right with breaks where the atoms have
i.e., in fluorine it is half of distance between two
some what stable configuration. In this case N has
covalently bonded fluorine atoms; van der Waal radii
half filled stable orbitals. Hence has highest ionisation
is one-half of the distance between the nuclei of two
energy. Thus the correct order is
identical non-bonded isolated atoms. These atoms are
attracted toward each other through weak van der B< C< O < N
Waal’s force hence van der Waal radii are very large. and not as given in option (c)
131. (c) All the given species are isoelectronic. In case of 142. (d) With the exception of lithium and beryllium compounds
isoelectronic species ionic radii increases with of s-block elements are predominantly ionic.
increase in negative charge on anions. 143. (d) As the size increases the basic nature of oxides
132. (c) I represents Li, II represents K changes to acidic nature i.e., acidic nature increases.
III represents Br, IV represents I
SO 2 P 2O 3 SiO 2 Al 2 O 3
V represents He
Acidic Weak Amphoteric
So, amongst these, II represents most reactive metal acidic
and V represents least reactive non-metal.
133. (b) 134. (b) 135. (c) SO2 and P2O3 are acidic as their corresponding acids
136. (b) In the isoelectronic species, all isoelectronic anions H2SO3 and H3PO3 are strong acids.
belong to the same period and cations to the next 144. (c)
period. 145. (c) The anomalous behaviour of first member of a group
137. (c) Electron affinity of 9F is less than that of 17Cl of element in the s- and p-block element is due to their
138. (b) Fully filled electronic configuration. small size, large charge/radius ratio and high
139. (c) The increase in the electronegativities across a period electronegativity.
is accompanied by an increase in non-metallic 146. (a) Because Al is amphotoric in nature so it dissolve in
properties (or decrease in metallic properties) of both acid and base.
elements.
EBD_7207
66 CHEMICAL BONDING AND MOLECULAR STRUCTURE
FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS Cl Cl

1. (a) Chemical bond is an attractive force, which holds 8e
–
8e
–
various constituents (atoms, ions etc.) together in 13. (a) (i) represents : N N :
different chemical species. (iv) represents H – C C – H
2. (d) The evolution of various theories of valence and the (ii) and (iii) represents respectively :
interpretation of the nature of chemical bonds have
H H
closely been related to the developments in the C=C and O=C=O
understanding of structure of atom, electronic H H
configuration of elements and Periodic Table. 14. (a) All Lewis representation of the molecules NH3, O3
3. (b) Kossel and Lewis provide some logical explanation and HNO3 given in question are correct.
of valence which was based on the intertness of 15. (c) N2 ; N N
noble gases. 3 electrons are shared by each nitrogen atom
4. (c) In the formation of a molecule, only the outer shell
16. (a) Lewis structure of N2 is N N
electrons take part in chemical combination and they
17. (a) Step I : Skeleton OCO
are known as valence electrons.
Step II : A = 1 × 4 for C + 2 × 6 for O = 4 + 12
5. (d) Valence electrons in O = 6
= 16 electrons
Correct Lewis symbol = O Step III : Total no. of electrons needed to achieve noble
Similarly, Ne is a noble gas having valence electrons gas configuration (N)
=8 N = 1 × 8 + 2 × 8 = 24
Step IV : Shared electrons, S = N – A = 24 – 16
: :
Correct Lewis symbol for Ne = :Ne:

6. (b) Electrovalent bond is formed as a result of electrostatic = 8 electrons
attraction between the positive and negative ions. Step V : O::C::O
:
:
7. (a) The electrostatic force that binds the oppositely Step VI : :O::C ::O: : O = C = O:
charged ions which are formed by transfer of
electron(s) from one atom to another is called ionic ..
N N
bond. Cation and anion are oppositely charged 18. (b)
particles therefore they form ionic bond in crystal. F F F H H H
8. (a) Calcium is assigned a positive electrovalence of two,
while chlorine has a negative electrovalence of one. N –– N– O octet of each atom is complete.
9. (d) When a metal for example Na combines with a non 19. (c) Formal charge (F.C.) on an atom in a Lewis structure
metal e.g., Cl2. Following reaction occurs = [total number of valence electrons in the free atom]
2Na Cl 2 2NaCl – [total number of non bonding (lone pair) electrons]
In this process Na loses one electron to form Na + and – (1/2) [total number of bonding (shared) electrons]
Cl accepts one electron to form Cl– 20. (a) The lowest energy structure is the one with the
smallest formal charges on the atoms.
Na Na e
21. (c) Bond order between P – O
Cl e Cl
Therefore, in this process Cl gain electrons and hence no. of bonds in all possible direction 5
its size increases. 1.25
total no. of resonating structures 4
10. (b) Langmuir (1919) refined the Lewis postulations by –
abandoning the idea of the stationary cubical O O
arrangement of the octet, and by introducing the –
O P O
–
O P O
–
term covalent bond. – –

O O
11. (c) Each combining atom contributes at least one O
–
O
–
electron to the shared pair. – – –

O P O O P O
12. (a) In formation of Cl2 molecule a pair of electrons is
–
shared between the two chlorine atoms. Each O O
chlorine atom contribute one electron to the shared 3
pair. Formal charge on oxygen = 0.75
4
CHEMICAL BONDING AND MOLECULAR STRUCTURE 67
22. (b) In CN– ion formal negative charge is on nitrogen atom 30. (a)
due to lone pair of electrons. 31. (c) Formation of positive ion involves removal of
23. (d) According to octet role, the central atom must have 8 electron(s) from neutral atom and that of the
electrons but in some compounds the number of negative ion involves addition of electron(s) to the
electrons is more than 8, or less than 8 or an odd number neutral atom.
of electrons is left on the central atom e.g., PCl5, BF5, 32. (b) Ionic bonds will be formed more easily between
NO. elements with comparatively low ionization enthalpies
and elements with comparatively high negative
F value of electron gain enthalpy.
F 33. (a) In ionic solids, the sum of the electron gain enthalpy
and the ionization enthalpy may be positive but still
F P
the crystal structure gets stabilized due to the
F Cl energy released in the formation of the crystal
:
: :
: :
F Cl:B:Cl N=O lattice.
10 electrons 6 electrons Odd electrons 34. (d) Lattice enthalpy is required to completely separate
around P around B around N one mole of a solid ionic compound into gaseous
24. (d) constituent ions.
35. (a) An ionic bond tightly held the two ions of opposite
Cl Cl Cl charges together, so it is a dipole. More is the
25. (c) (i) Al Al
Cl Cl Cl electronegativity of anion higher will be the electron
(Complete octet) density and higher will be its charge which
consequently increses the strength of ionic bond.
CH3 CH3 CH3 36. (c) Higher the difference in electronegativity between the
(ii) Al Al two atoms, more will be electrovalent character of the
CH3 CH3 CH3
bond. Among given choices, calcium and hydrogen
(3c – 2e) bond
(incomplete octet) have maximum difference in their electronegativities.
37. (b) For compounds containing cations of same charge,
- lattice energy increases as the size of the cation
(iii) AlF3 Æ Al3+ + 3F
ææ
decrease. Thus, NaF has highest lattice energy. The
(ionic 2s 2 2p6 2s2 2p6 size of cations is in the order Na+ < K+ < Rb+ < Cs+
compound)
(octet (octet
complete) complete) 38. (b) Ionic character of a bond is directly proportional to
the difference of electro negativities of bonded atoms.
Cl So, H – F in which electronegativity difference is
(iv) Cl – Be Be – C (Incomplete octet) highest, will have highest ionic character.
Cl
(inomplete octet) 39. (b) The stability of the ionic bond depends upon the lattice
energy which is expected to be more between Mg and
H F due to +2 charge on Mg atom.
(v) H – Be Be – H (Incomplete octet) 40. (d) Bond lengths are measured by spectroscopic, X-ray
H diffraction and electron diffraction techniques.
(3c – 2e– ) bond 41. (c) The covalent radius is measured approximately as
the radius of an atom’s core which is in contact with
the core of an adjacent atom in a bonded situation.
.. .. .. .. ..
O .. S .. O 42. (d) A = Covalent radius
26. (d) .. ..
B = van der Waal’s radius
C = Bond length
Total no. of valence electron around sulphur in SO 2 is
10 while in case of other molecules total no. of 8 43. (d) All of the given statements are correct.
electrons are present in each. 1
44. (c) Bond order bond enthalpy
27. (a) Boron in BCl3 has 6 electrons in outermost shell. bond length
Hence BCl3 is a electron deficient compound.
28. (b) The compounds in which octet of central atom is 45. (c) In CO (three shared election pairs between C and O)
incomplete are known as electron deficient the bond order is 3. For N2 bond order is 3 and its
compounds. Hence B2H6 is a electron deficient Dg H - is 946 kJ mol–1, being one of the highest for a
compound.
diatomic molecule, isoelectronic moleculaes and ions
29. (a) PCl5 does not follow octet rule, it has 10 electrons in
have identical bond order for example F2 and O2–
2 have
its valence shell.
bond ordeer 1, N2, CO and NO+ have bond order 3.
EBD_7207
46. (c) Both representation of resonating structures in 59. (b) O = C = O
molecules of CO2 and CO32– are correct. 60. (a) The correct order of dipole moments of HF, H2S and
47. (c) I and II structure shown above constitute the H2O us
cannonical structure. III structure represents the HF < H2S < H2O
structure of O3 more accurately. This is also called
resonance hybrid. 61. (a) C F
48. (a) The molecule does not exist for a certain fraction of
Because difference between electronegativity of
time in one cannonical form and for other fractions
carbon and flourine is highest.
of time in other cannonical forms.
62. (c) In case of SF6 resultant dipole moment is zero while
49. (b) There are three resonance structures of CO32 ion. all other possess dipole moment.
O O– O– 63. (c)
64. (c) According to Fajan's rule, smaller size and greater
C C C charge on cation favour the formation of partial
–
O O – –
O O O O– covalent character in ionic bonds.
(I) (II) (III) 65. (c) As difference of electronegativity increases % ionic
50. (d) Choices (a), (b) and (c) are the resonance structures of character increases and covalent character decreases
CO2. i.e., electronegativity difference decreases covalent
character increases.
51. (b) 52. (b)
53. (b) Both NO2 and O3 have angular shape and hence will Further greater the charge on the cation and smaller
have net dipole moment. the size more will be its polarising power. Hence
covalent character increases.
54. (c) The dipole moment of symmetrical molecules is zero.
66. (a) According to Fajan’s rule, as the charge on the cation
F increases, and size decreases, its tendency to polarise
|
the anion increases. This brings more and more
| B
F F covalent nature to electrovalent compounds. Hence
|
Triangular planar (symmetrical molecule) AlCl3 shows maximum covalent character.

55. (c) Dipole moment is a vector quantity, hence the dipole 67. (d) In case of anions having same charge as the size of
moment of symmetrical molecules is zero. As CO2, anion increases, polarisibility of anion also increases.
p-dichlorobenzene and CH4 have regular symmetrical 68. (d) The electronegativity difference is maximum in O—H
shape. Hence = 0 bond hence O—H bond length is the smallest among
Cl the given set.
H 69. (a) A gaseous HCl molecule has hydrogen and chlorine
.. linked by a covalent bond. Here electronegativity of
O=C=O C H N H
chlorine is greater than that of hydrogen. Due to this
H H H H the shared pair of electron is more attracted towards
Cl chlorine. Thus, chlorine end of molecule has higher
However, NH3 has distorted structure due to presence electron density and becomes slightly negative and
of lone pair of electrons on N atom and thus has definite the hydrogen and slightly positive. Hence the covalent
dipole moment. bond in HCl has a polar character as shown below
56. (a) In H2, both atoms are identical, so the molecule is non
polar.
H Cl
57. (b) BF3 has planar and symmetrical structure thus as a
70. (b) Hydrogen is non metal and non metal atoms form
result the resultant of two bond moments, being equal
covalent bond.
and opposite to the third, cancels out and hence
71. (d)
molecule possess zero dipole moment.
F
72. (b) Hybridisation is sp3 and shape pyramidal.
; =0 F
F B
:
73. (c) Br F
F
58. (c) CCl4 and BF3 being symmetrical have zero dipole
moment. H2O, CHCl3 and NH3 have dipole moments :
of 1.84 D, 1.01 D and 1.46 D respectively. Thus among F
the given molecules H2O has highest dipole moment.
In BrF3, both bond pairs as well as lone pairs of 85. (b) H — C — C— C — C— C — C— C — C — H
electrons are present. Due to the presence of lone
pairs of electrons (lp) in the valence shell, the bond H H H H H H H H
angle is contracted and the molecule takes the T- 1, 3,5, 7 - octatetraene
17 and 4
shape. This is due to greater repulsion between two
lone pairs or between a lone pair and a bond pair than 86. (b) Allyl cyanide is :
between the two bond pairs. H H
H
74. (a) The number of lone pairs of electrons on central atom C C C C N
H ,
in various given species are
H
Species Number of lone pairs on
central atom It contains 9 sigma bonds, 3 pi bonds and 1 lone
pair of electrons.
IF7 nil
87. (a) Cl2 : Cl – Cl (1 , No )
IF5 1
O 2 : O = O (1 , 1 )
ClF3 2
N 2 : N N (1 , 2 )
XeF2 3
CO2 : O = C = O (2 , 2 )
Thus the correct increasing order is 88. (a) The given molecule is
IF7 < IF5 < ClF3 < XeF2
0 1 2 3 H2 C C C C C C H
2
..
S H H H
75. (d)
O O The number of C—C ‘ ’ bonds = 5
lp = 1 The number of C—C ‘ ’ bonds = 4
bp = 4 The number of C—C ‘ ’ bonds = 6
76. (a) V-shaped H2O like structure.
77. (d) BrF5 has square pyramidal geometry. 89. (a)
78. (b) SO2 – bent s-orbital p-orbital
SF4 – see-saw The overlap between s- and p-orbitals occurs along
ClF3 – T-shape internuclear axis and hence the angle is 180°.
BrF5 – square pyramidal O–H
XeF4 – square planar.
90. (a) CH3 C CH 2 has 9 ,1 and 2lone pairs.
79. (a) I is the most stable geometry because both the lone
pairs are present at equitorial position. Due to which 91. (a) Linear combination of two hybridized orbitals leads to
repulsion is minimum in molecule as compared to the the formation of sigma bond.
repulsion in other molecules where lone pair is in axial 92. (b) Sigma bond is stronger than -bond. The electrons in
position. the bond are loosely held. The bond is easily broken
X and is more reactive than -bond. Energy released
80. (b) during sigma bond formation is always more than
..
bond because of greater extent of overlapping

M X
93. (c) Option (c) represents zero overlapping.
..
94. (a) Bond angle increases with increase in s-character of

X hybridised orbital. The table given below shows the
Number of lone pair = 2 hybridised orbitals, their % s-chatracter and bond
81. (a) In methane molecule C is sp3 hybridised so its shape angles.
will be tetrahedral. Hybridised % s-character Bond
.. orbitals angle
Sn
82. (d) Bent sp 3 25 109.5°
Cl Cl
sp 2 33 120°
83. (b) The minimum in the energy curve corresponds to the
sp 50 180°
most stable state of H2.
95. (d) Promotion of electron is not an essential condition
84. (d) Structure of acetylene molecule
prior to hybridisation. It is not necessary that only
1 1 1 half filled orbitals participate in hybridisation. In
H— C C— H
2 some cases, even filled orbitals of valence shell take
Thus acetylene molecule has 3 bonds and 2 bonds. part in hybridisation.
EBD_7207
96. (d) The hybridisation in a molecule is given by 100. (a) O C O
1 C(6) = 1s2 2s2 2p2
H [V M C A] .......(1)
2 ground state
where V = no. of valency e– in central atom 2
2s 2px 2py 2pz
M = no. of monovalent atoms around central atom
C = charge on cation, A = charge on anion Excited state
For NH3; V = 5, M = 3, C = 0, A = 0
Putting these values in (1), we get sp hybridized
two electrons excluded
1 from hybridization and
H [5 3 0 0] = 4
2 partcipate in bonding
For H = 4, the hybridisation in molecule is sp3. with oxygens.
97. (d) Hybridisaiton of SO42– ion is given by 101. (b) In fullerene, carbons are sp2-hybridised like graphite.
1 Fullerenes are also the allotropes of carbon other than
H= [V + M + A– C] diamond and graphite but have been produced
2
synthetically, e.g.; C60.
Where V = valency of central metal atom 102. (d) Ions having sp3 hybridisation contain hydrogen atoms
M = no. of monovalent atoms surrounding central metal at the corners of tetrahedron.
atom. 103. (a) For linear arrangement of atoms the hybridisation
A = charge on anion, C = charge on cation should be sp(linear shape, 180° angle). Only H2S has
For SO24 ; V = 6, M = 0, A = 2, C = 0 sp3-hybridization and hence has angular shape while
C2H2, BeH2 and CO2 all involve sp - hybridization and
1 hence have linear arrangement of atoms.
H= [6 + 0 + 2 – 0] = 4 104. (b) BF3 involves sp2-hybridization.
2
i.e., sp3 hybridisation and tetrahedral shape. sp 3 sp sp sp 3
98. (d) The strength of a bond depends upon the extent of 105. (b) H3C — C C — CH3
overlapping. s-s and s-p overlapping results in the linear
formation of bond but extent of overlapping along 106. (b) Equilateral or triangular planar shape involves sp2
internuclear axis is more in case of s-s overlapping hybridization.
than in s-p. p-p overlapping may result in bond if 107. (a) Only those d orbitals whose lobes are directed along
overlapping takes place along internuclear axis or may X, Y and Z directions hybridise with s and p orbitals.
result in –bond if sideways overlapping takes place. In other three d orbitals namely dxy, dyz and dxz, the
In any case the extent of overlapping is lesser in p - p lobes are at an angle of 45° from both axis, hence the
than that of the other two, s-s and s-p. Hence the correct extent of their overlap with s and p orbitals is much
order is lesser than d and d orbitals.
s - s > s - p > p - p. x 2 y2 z2
99. (c) In case of Xenon compounds 108. (a) According to VSEPR theory, trigonal bipyramidal
1 geometry results from sp3d or dsp3 hybridisation.
Hybridization = [No. of valence electrons of dsp2 hybridisation results in square planar geometry,
2
Xe + number of monovalent atoms surrounding Xe – while d2sp3 leads to octahedral shape.
charge on cation + charge or an ion] 109. (b) In CH3 CH2OH underlined C is forming 4 bonds,
hence sp3 hybridisation. In others it is sp2 hybridised
1
In XeF6 = [8 + 6 – 0 + 0] = 7 i.e. sp3d3 hybridizaiton. (due to 3 bonds).
2 110. (a) Each sp3-hybrid orbital has 25% s-character and 75%
In case of SF6, Sulphur is sp3d2 hybridized. p-character.
In case of BrF5 .Bromine atom has seven valence
electrons and 5 are contributed by the fluorine atoms. 111. (c) H3C CH C CH CH 3
sp3 sp 2 sp 2
sp sp3
Total number of electron pairs in valence shell of central
112. (d)
7 5
atom = 6 sp 2 sp sp 2
2 113. (a) CH 2 C CH2
Number of shared pairs = 5
Number of one pairs = 1 sp3
The molecule is square pyramidal. sp3 sp3
In PCl5 P is sp3d hybridised. i.e. the correct answer is sp 3
sp3
sp3
XeF6 or option (c)
sp3 sp 2 sp 2 sp 3 131. (b) The removal of an electron from a diatomic molecule

CH3 CH CH CH 3 may increase the bond order as in the conversion
sp sp sp sp O2 (2) O 2 ( 2 .5) or decrease the bond order as
HC C C CH
in the conversion, N 2 (3.0) N 2 ( 2.5), As a
sp 2 sp 2 sp 2 sp2 result, the bond energy may increase or decrease.
CH 2 CH CH CH2
1, 3-butadiene Thus, statement (b) is incorrect.
114. (d) Statement (d) is incorrect. 132. (b) O2 : 1s 2 , *
1s 2 , 2s 2 , *
2 s 2 , 2 p z2 ,
115. (c) Molecular orbital theory was given by Mulliken.
116. (b) Atomic orbital is monocentric because an electron in 2 p 2x *
2 p1x
it is influenced by one nucleus. While molecular ,
orbital is polycentric as it is influenced by two or 2 p 2y *
2 p1y
more nuclei depending upon the number of atoms in
the molecule. 10 6
Bond order 2
117. (c) 2
118. (d) For oxygen correct increasing order is (two unpaired electrons in antibonding molecular orbital)
1s < s < 2s < 2s < 2pz < ( 2px = 2py) <
( px= *2py) < 2pz
119. (d) Nb < Na or Na = Nb 2 p x2 , *
2 p1x
O 2 : 1s 2 , *
1s 2 , 2s 2 , *
2s 2 , 2 p 2z ,
i.e., a negative or zero bond order corresponds to an 2 p 2y , *
2 p 0y
unstable molecule.
120. (a) 121. (c) 10 5
122. (c) Paramagnetism of O2 is best explained by molecular Bond order 2. 5
2
orbital theory.
(One unpaired electron in antibonding molecular
123. (b)
orbital)
124. (b) One bonding M.O. and one anti-bonding M.O.
125. (d) Molecules having unpaired electrons show Hence O2 as well as O 2 both are paramagnetic, and
paramagnetism.
126. (c) bond order of O 2 is greater than that of O2.
127. (c) N 2 = 7 + 7 – 1 = 13 electrons 133. (c)
Configuration is 134. (c) Helium molecule does not exist as bond order of
1s 2 , *1s 2 , 2s 2 , * 2s 2 , 2 px 2 He2 = 0.
= 2 p y 2 , 2 p1z 135. (c) The paramagnetic property in oxygen came through
Bond order = unpaired electron which can be explained by molecular
1 No. of e s in bonding No. of e s in antibonding orbital theory.
2 molecular orbital molecular orbital
1 1
= (9 4) 5 2.5
2 2 2p*x
128. (a)
129. (a, b) The molecular orbital structures of C2 and N2 are
N2 1s 2 *1s2 2s 2 *2s 2 2 px2 2 py2 2 pz2 2pz* 2py*
C2 1s 2 *1s 2 2 s 2 * 2 s 2 2 py 2 2 Pz2
Both N2 and C2 have paired electrons, hence they are px py pz px py pz
diamagnetic.
130. (d) H 2 ( 1s1)
1 1
Bond order = (1 0)
2 2
H 2 : ( 1s 2 ) ( *1s1 ) 2px bonding
1 1
Bond order = (2 1)
2 2 2p*y and 2p*z
So 2 unpaired of electron present in
The bond order of H 2 and H 2 are same but H 2 is more 136. (c) H-bonding is maximum in the solid state and
stable than H 2 . In H 2 the antibonding orbital is filled minimum in gaseous state.
with 1 electron so this causes instability.
EBD_7207
137. (c) H2O shows intermolecular hydrogen bonding while 151. (d) The least electronegative atom occupies the central
o-nitrophenol shows intramolecular H-bonding. position in the molecule/ion.
O
152. (b) Formal charges do not indicate real charge separation
within the molecule. Indicating the charges on the
138. (a) N (Intermolecular
O hydrogen bonding) atoms in the Lewis structure only helps in keeping
OH track of the valence electrons in the molecule.
153. (c) The greater the charge on the cation, the greater the
o-nitrophenol
covalent character of the ionic bond.
139. (c) The b.p. of p-nitrophenol is higher than that of 154. (d) Statement (c) and (d) are incorrect.
o-nitrophenol because in p-nitrophenol there is 155. (b) (ii) (F) In general as the number of lone pair of electrons
intermolecular H-bonding but in o-nitrophenol it is on central atom increases, value of bond angle from
intramolecular H-bonding. normal bond angle decreases due to lp – lp > lp – bp.
140. (b) The strength of the interactions follows the order (iv)(F) Structures of xenon fluorides and xenon
vander Waal’s < hydrogen – bonding < dipole-dipole oxyfluoride are explained on the basis of VSEPR theory.
< covalent. In SOBr2, S – O bond has minimum bond length in
141. (c) H–F shows str ongest H-bonds due to high comparison to S – O bond lengths in SOF2 and SOCl2,
electronegativity of F atom. because in SOBr 2, S – O bond has been formed by
142. (c) Ice has many hydrogen bonds which give rise to cage hybrid orbital containing less s-character.
like structure of water molecules. This, structure 156. (b) Atomic orbitals having same or nearly same energy
possess larger volume and thus makes the density of will not combine if they do not have the same
ice low. symmetry. 2pz orbital of one atom cannot combine
143. (b) Methanol and ethanol are soluble because of the with 2px or 2py orbital of other atom because of their
hydrogen bonding. different symmetries.
144. (d) F—H----F bond is shortest, because with the increase
of electronegativity and decrease in size of the atom to MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS
which hydrogen is linked, the strength of the hydrogen
157. (c) BeH2 : Incomplete octet of central atom.
bond increases.
Be has 2 valence electrons
145. (a) Hydrogen bonding is possible only in compounds
SF6 : Expanded octet
having hydrogen attached with F, O or N.
There are 12 electrons around the S atom in SF6
C2 H 5 OH CH 3 O CH 3 NO2 : Odd electron molecules.
(H-bonding possible) (H-bonding not possible)
In molecules with an odd number of electrons like
O O NO2, the octet rule is not satisfied.
|| || 158. (c)
CH3 C CH 3 CH 3 C H
(H-bonding not possible) (H-bonding not possible) 159. (b) NH3 1lp, 3bp Trigonal pyramidal
SO2 1lp, 2bp Bent
146. (c) ortho-Nitrophenol has intramolecular H-bonding SF4 1lp, 4bp See-saw
.
. . OH ClF3 2lp, 3bp T-shape
. O and para-nitrophenol has 160. (c) Trigonal planar = BF3
||
. N Tetrahedral = NH +
O 4
Trigonal bipyramidal = PCl5
intermolecular H-bonding.
147. (d) Hydrogen bonding increases the boiling point of Octahedral = SF6
compound. 161. (c)
148. (b) 162. (a) SF6 sp3d2
149. (a) Hydrogen bond is formed when hydrogen is attached PF5 sp3d
with the atom which is highly electronegative and BCl3 sp2
having small radius. C2H6 sp3
163. (c) Valence bond theory = Heitler and London
STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS Octet rule = Ko ssel and Lewis
150. (c) The group valence of the elements is generally either Molecular orbital theory = F. Hund and R.S. Mulliken
equal to the number of dots in Lewis symbols or 8 VSEPR theory = Nyholm and Gillespie
minus the number of dots or valence electrons. 164. (b)
ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS 172. (a) Both assertion and reason are true and reason is the
correct explanation of assertion.
1 lone pair – lone pair repulsion > lone pair – bond pair
:
O repulsion > bond pair – bond pair repulsion. In the
165. (a) 2 : : 3 ammonia molecule, NH3 there are three bond pairs and
: :
O O: one lone pair. The three N – H bond pairs are pushed

closer because of the lone pair – bond pair repulsion,
1
Formal charge on O1 = 6 – 2 – (6) = +1 and HNH bond angle gets reduced from 109°23’ (the
2 tetrahedral angle) to 107°.
1 173. (d) Assertion is false but reason is true.
Formal charge on O2 = 6 – 4 – (4) = 0 NH3 molecule is pyramidal is shape, because out of
2
four electron pairs, three are bonding pairs and one is
1 lone pair.
Formal charge on O3 = 6 – 6 – × 3 = –1
2 174. (a) Both assertion and reason are true and reason is the
Hence, correct representation of O3 is correct explanation of assertion.
pi bonds are formed by the overlapping of p-p orbitals
(+1)
perpendicular to their axis i.e., sidewise overlap.
:
O
175. (a) Both assertion and reason are true and reason is the
(0) (–1)
: :
: :
O O: correct explanation of assertion.

Helium molecule is formed by linking two helium atoms.
166. (a) Atoms combine either by transfer of valence
Both have 1s orbitals. These will combine to form two
electrons from one atom to another or by sharing of
molecular orbitals (1s) and * (1s). Four available
valence electrons to have an octet in their valence
electrons are accommodated as (1s)2 and * (1s)2.
shell.
176. (c) The electron density in a bonding molecular orbital
167. (d) Assertion is false but reason is true.
is located between the nuclei of the bonded atoms
The greater the lattice enthalpy, more stable is the ionic because of which the repulsion between the nuclei
compound.
is very less while in case of an antibonding
168. (c) Sulphur forms many compounds in which the octet molecular orbital, most of the electron density is
rule is obeyed. For example SCl2 has an octet of located away from the space between the nuclei.
electrons around it. Electrons placed in a bonding molecular orbital tend
169. (b) Both assertion and reason are true but reason is not to hold the nuclei together and stabilise a molecule.
the correct explanation of assertion. 177. (b) Both assertion and reason are true but reason is not
BF3 is sp2 hybridized. Dipole moment is a vector the correct explanation of assertion.
quantity. The three bond moments give a net sum of Water is excellent solvent because it has high value of
zero, as the resultant of any two is equal and opposite dielectric constant. Due to high value of dielectric
to the third. constant, the electrostatic force of attraction between
F the ions decrease and these ions get separated and
ultimately get solvated by the solvent molecules.
F B =0 ( + )= 0
F 178. (b) Hybridisation of the central atom in compound is given
(a) (b)
by
170. (d) Assertion is false but reason is true. 1
CH2Cl2 is polar while CCl4 is non-polar because in H= [V M C A]
2
CCl4 net dipole moment cancels.
where V = No. of valency electrons in central metal
171. (a) While the lone pairs are localised on the central
atom,
atom, each bonded pair is shared between two
M = No. of monovalent atoms surrounding the central
atoms. As a result, the lone pair electrons in a
atom,
molecule occupy more space as compared to the
bonding pairs of electrons. This results in greater C = charge on cation and A = charge on anion
repulsion between lone pairs of electrons as compared 1
to the lone pair -bond pair and bond pair - bond pair For NO 2 , H = [5 0 0 1] 3
2
repulsions.
sp2 hybridisation
EBD_7207
1 (c) CH3 — C C— CH 2
For SF4, H = [6 4 0 0] 5 sp sp
2 sp 3 sp 2
sp3d hybridisation
(d) CH3 — CH2 CH— CH 2–
2
1 sp3 sp sp sp3
For PF6–, H =
[5 6 0 1] 6
2 Note : Carbocations and carboanions are sp2 and sp3
sp3d2 hybridisation. hybridised respectively.
So, option (a) is correct choice. 186. (c) Let amount of compound = 100 g
179. (a) BF3 is sp2 hybridised. So, it is trigonal planner. NH3, 92.3
PCl 3 has sp 3 hybridisation hence has trigonal No. of moles of C 7.69 7.7
12
bipyramidal shape, IF3, has sp3d hydridization and
has linear shape. 7.7
No. of moles of H 7.7
1 1
180. (b) XeF4 hybridisation is (V X C A)
2 Empirical formula = CH
hence V = 8 (no. of valence e– ) Empirical formula mass = 12 + 1 = 13 g/mol
X = 4 (no. of monovalent atom) Molecular mass = 52 g/mol
1 52
(8 4 0 0) 6 sp3d 2 n 4
2
13
C = 0 charge on cation
Molecular foumula = Empirical formula × 4
F F = C4H4
Xe Possible structures
A = 0 (charge on anion). The shape is square
F F H H
sp sp H H
planar shape. C C C C H C C C C
H H, H,
181. (d) Hybridisation present in a molecule can be find out by sp 2
sp 2 sp sp sp2 sp2
the following formula.
1 H H 2
H (V M C A) sp2 C C sp
2
Where V = No. of electrons in valence shell of central H C C H
atom 2
sp sp2
M = No. of singly charged atoms
C = charge on cation 187. (d) As the bond order decreases, bond length increases
A = charge on anion Bond order
1 No. of bonding e s No. of antibonding e s
So, Hybridisation (in ClF3) = [7 3 0 0] = 5
2 2
sp3d Hybridisation For N2, electronic configuration is
182. (a) CH 2 CH C N 1s 2 *1s2 2s2 * 2s 2 ( 2p 2x 2p2y ) 2p 2z
1 2 3 4
3 bonds (sp2 hybridisation); 2 bonds 10 4
(i) Bond order of N2 3
(sp - hybridisation) 2
C1 = 3 bonds, C2 = 3 bonds, 9 4
C3 = 2 bonds (ii) Bond order of N 2 2.5
2
183. (a) Hybridisation of carbon in CH 3 is sp2 and in CH4 its
hybridisation is sp3 2 8 4
(iii) Bond order of N 2 2
184. (a) XeF4 having one lone pair of electron show distorted 2
pentagonal bipyramidal shape and sp3d3 hybridisation. Hence, order of Bond length will be,
185. (c) (a) CH 2 C CH2 N2 N2 N2
sp
sp 2 sp 2
188. (c) According to molecular orbital theory, bond order of
(b) CH3 — CH2 CH— CH 2 Li2 is 1 , while in all other cases bond order is 0, so
2
sp3 sp sp sp 2 they do not exist. Li2 molecules are known to exist in
the vapour phase.
189. (c) I3 has – sp3d hybridisation and has linear structure 194. (d) On calculating bond order of species given in question
I 2
C2 = 2 C2 3
:
: I : B2 = 1
B2 0.5
I
Li2 0.5 Li2 = 1
190. (c)
N2 2.5 N2 = 3
sp2 hybridisation
O2 = 2.0 O2 1.5
For AlCl 3
1
(excited state) Bond length
Bond order
Cl Cl Cl
O2 O2
3 2
sp d hybridisation 195. (b) For C2 (12) :
( 1s)2 ( 1s)2 ( 2s)2 ( 2s)2( 2px)2 ( 2py)2
3–
For [Al2Cl6] 8 4
B.O. 2
(excited state) 2
Cl Cl Cl Cl– Cl– Cl– For N2(14) :

191. (b) Covalent radius is half of the distance between atoms ( 1s)2 ( *1s)2 ( 2s) 2 ( * 2s)2 ( 2p x ) 2 ( 2p y )2 ( 2p z )2
in bonding state, while van der Waal radius is half of
the distance between atoms in its non bonding state. 10 4
B.O. 3
192. (d) According to Fajan's rule : 2
1 For B2 (10)
Covalent character
size of cation = ( 1s)2 ( *1s) 2 ( 2s)2 ( * 2s) 2 ( 2p x )1 ( 2p y )1
size of anion
6 4
Among the given species order of size of cations B.O. 1
2
N3+ < O2+ < Pb2+ < Ba2+
For O2 (16)
order of size of anions O2– > Cl–.
Hence the order of covalent character is = ( 1s)2 ( *1s)2 ( 2s)2 ( * 2s) 2 ( 2p z ) 2 ( 2p x ) 2
NCl3 Cl2O PbCl2 BaCl2 ( 2p y ) 2 ( * 2p x )1 ( * 2p y )1
BaCl2 is most ionic in nature.
193. (c) M.O. electronic configuration of CN– is 1s2 *1s2 10 6
B.O. 2
s2 *2s2 2px2 2py2 2pz2 2
10 – 4 F2 is (18)
B.O. 3
2 = ( 1s)2 ( *1s)2 ( 2s)2 ( * 2s) 2 ( 2p z ) 2 ( 2p x ) 2
M.O. electronic configuration of O2– is
1s2 *1s2 2s2 2s2 2pz2 2px2 ( 2p y ) 2 ( * 2px ) 2 ( * 2p y ) 2
2py2 *2px2 *2py1
10 8
10 – 7 B.O. 1
B.O. 1.5 2
2
N2 has the highest bond order = 3.
M.O. electronic configuration of CN+
1s2 *1s2 2s2 *2s2 2px2 2py2 2pz1 1
196. (c) B.O. = [N b N a ] 0 ; cannot exist
9–4 2
B.O. 2.5
2 197. (d) In this configuration, there are four completely filled
M.O. electronic configuration of NO+ is bonding molecular orbitals and one completely filled
1s2 *1s2 2s2 *2s2 2pz2 2px2 2py2 antibonding molecular orbital. So that Nb = 8 and
10 – 4 Na 2.
B.O. 2
2 1 1
CN– and NO+ have bond order equal to 3 Bond order = ( N b Na ) (8 2) 3.
2 2
EBD_7207
198. (c) Benzene has the following resonance structures– Though the bond order of all the species are same
(B.O = 1) but stability is different. This is due to
difference in the presence of no. of anti-bonding
electron.
Hence, its bond order is Higher the no. of anti-bonding electron lower is the
stability hence the correct order is H2 > Li2 > B2
no of possible resonating structures 202. (a) Molecular orbital configuration of
1.5.
2
N 2–
2 1s 2 *1s 2 2 s 2 * 2 s 2 -
199. (a) Molecular orbital electronic configuration of these
species are : 2 px2 * 2 p1x
2 p2z
O2 (17e ) 1s 2 , *1s 2 , 2s 2 , *2 s 2 , 2 pz2 , 2 p 2y * 2 p1y
2 px2 2 p2y , *2 px2 2* p1y 10 – 6

Bond order = 2
2
O2 (16e ) 1s 2 , *1s 2 , 2 s 2 , * 2 s 2 , 2 p z2 ,
2 px2 * 2 p1x
N 2– 1s 2 *1s 2 2s 2 * 2s 2 2 pz2
2 px2 2 p 2y , *2 p1x * 2 p1y 2 p 2y *2 p 0y
O22 (18e ) 1s 2 , *1s 2 , 2 s 2 , * 2 s 2 , 2 p z2 , 10 5
2.5
Bond order =
2
2 px2 2 p 2y , *2 px2 *2 p 2y
2 px2
Hence number of antibonding electrons are 7, 6 and 8 N2 1s 2 *1s 2 2 s 2 * 2 s 2 , 2 pz2
respectively. 2 p 2y
2
200. (d) b *a2 2
b
*2 2
a ( b
2 1
b ) b (N 2 13electrons) 10 – 4
Bond order = 3
it contains one unpaired electron hence paramagnetic. 2
201. (N) None of the given option is correct. The correct order is = N 2–
2 N 2– N 2
The molecular orbital configuration of the given 203. (a) Hydrogen bonding is not possible in HI due to low
molecules is electronegativity of iodine. So, hydrogen bonding
H2 = 1s2 (no electron anti-bonding) would not affect boiling point of HI.
Li2 = 1s2 1s2 2s2(two anti-bonding electrons) 204. (d) HF form linear polymeric structure due to hydrogen
bonding.
B2 = 1s2 1s2 2s2 2s2 2p1y 2p1z 205. (c) B, C and D form intermolecular hydrogen bonding
(4 anti-bonding electrons) while A form intramolecular hydrogen bonding due to
proximity of oxygen and hydrogen.
STATES OF MATTER 89
FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS 19. (c)

P P
1. (c) Attractive forces between an ion and a dipole are
known as ion - dipole forces and these are not van der
Waals forces. V 1/V
2. (d) Fritz London explained the concept of dispersion force. Curve I Curve III
1 Both these graphs represents Boyle's law.

3. (b) Interaction energy 20. (b) According to Boyle's Law
r6
pv = k
4. (c)
5. (c) London forces are always attractive and interaction m
p k
energy is inversely proportional to the sixth power of d
the distance between two interacting particles.
p k
6. (c) k'
d m
7. (a) Dipole-dipole interaction is stronger than the London
forces but is weaker than ion-ion interaction because 21. (b) Boyle’s law
only partial charges are involved e.g., HCl molecules. 1
The attractive force decreases with the increase of P
V
distance between the dipoles.
K
8. (d) Induced dipole moment depends upon the dipole P
V
moment present in the permanent dipole and the
polarisability of the electrically neutral molecule. PV K
Molecules of large size can be easily polarized. High 22. (a) Given initial volume (V1) = 600 c.c.; Initial pressure
polarisability increases the strength of attractive (P1) = 750 mm of Hg and final volume (V2) = 500 c.c.
interactions. according to Boyle’s law,
9. (b) This type of attractive force operates between the polar P1V1 = P2V2
molecules having permanent dipole and the molecules
lacking permanent dipole. or 750 × 600 = P2 × 500
HCl is polar ( 0) and He is non polar ( = 0), thus
gives dipole-induced dipole interaction. 750 600
or P2 900 mm of Hg
10. (c) Nobel gases has no intermolecular forces due to 500
inertness. Therefore increase of pressure = (900 – 750) = 150 mm
of Hg
11. (a) Strength of the hydrogen bond is determined by
coulombic interaction between lone pair electrons of 23. (b) The lowest hypothetical or imaginary temperature at
the electronegative atom of one molecule and the which gases are supposed to occupy zero volume is
hydrogen atom of the other molecule. called absolute zero.
12. (d) 13. (a) 24. (b) Given initial volume (V1) = 500 ml ; Initial temperature
(T1) = 27ºC = 300 K and final temperature (T2) = –5ºC
14. (c) Gaseous state of substance has the maximum thermal
= 268 K.
energy.
From Charle’s law :
15. (c) Gases do not have definite shape and volume. Their
volume is equal to the volume of the container. V1 V2 500 V2
or
16. (b) It is characteristic of gases i.e., Thermal energy >> T1 T2 300 268
molecular attraction.
Where V2 = New volume of gas
17. (c) Robert Boyle made first reliable measurement on
properties of gases. 500
V2 268 446.66ml.
18. (d) According to Boyle’s law at constant temperature, 300
1 25. (c) At any given pressure, graph of volume vs temperature
V or PV = constant (in °C) is a straight line and on extending to zero volume
P
each line intercepts the temperature axis at – 273.15° C.
EBD_7207
90 STATES OF MATTER
V PV m
26. (c) According to Charle’s law V T or k 44. (c) n
T RT M
27. (b) Charle’s law V T at constant P.. MPV 34 2 100
m 282.68gm
MP RT 0.082 293
28. (a) d p, Boyle’s law, d . At sea level pressure is PV T 760 546
RT 45. (c) V2
1 1 1 273 691.6 ml
more, hence density of air is more. T1 P2 600 273
29. (b) Hot air is lighter due to less density (Charle’s law) 46. (a) Total moles
4 2
MP = 1.125; PV nRT
d 32 2
RT
P 1.125 .0821 273
MP P = 25.215 atm
30. (b) Higher P, lower T, greater the density. d
RT 47. (c) PV = nRT is for an ideal gas which follows both
31. (a) Order of pressure, p1 < p2 < p3 < p4. isothermal and adiabatic processes.
32. (a) V1 = 2 L, T2 = (26.1 + 273) K = 299.1 K, V2 = ? 48. (a) By Dalton’s law of partial pressures, the total pressure
T1 = (23.4 + 273) K = 296.4 K of a mixture of two gases is the sum of the partial
pressures of components of the mixture.
V1 V2 V1T2 49. (a)
From Charle's law, V2
T1 T2 T1 50. (b) Because H2 & Cl2 gases may react with each other to
produce HCl gas hence Dalton’s law is not applicable.
2L 299.1K 51. (a) Pressure exerted by saturated water vapour is called
V2 2L 1.009
296.4K aqueous tension.
= 2.018 L nRT 6 8.314 402
52. (d) P = 41648 Pa
P V 16.02 0.03
33. (d) constant (Gay Lussac's law)
T
53. (a) Given nCO = n N2
P1 P2
P1T2 P2T1
T1 T2 PCO + PN2 = 1 atm
PV = constant Partial pressure of a gas = mole fraction of gas × total
P1V1 = P2V2 [Boyle's law] pressure
34. (c) This relationship is derived from Boyle's and Charles' n N2
n N2
law. PN2 = 1 = 2n 1= 1 0.5 atm.
35. (d) All of the given relations are true for Avogadro's law. n CO n N2 N2 2
36. (a) At STP molar volume of an ideal gas or a combination 54. (a) Given
of ideal gases is 22.71098 L mol–1. P1 = 1.5 bar T1 = 273 + 15 = 288 K V1 = V
37. (d) 44g at STP occupies volume 22.4 litre which is molecular P2 = 1.0 bar T1 = 273 + 25 = 298K V2 = ?
mass of CO2. Molecular mass occupies 22.4 litre at P1V1 P2 V2
STP. T1 T2
38. (b) An ideal gas obeys the gas laws under all experimental
1.5 V 1 V2
conditions.
288 298
39. (c) PV = nRT
V2 = 1.55 V i.e., volume of bubble will be almost 1.6 time
n/V = P/RT
T. to initial volume of bubble.
40. (c) In the equation PV = nRT, n moles of the gas have 55. (a) Partial pressure = total pressure × mole fraction
volume V.
64
PV PV P2V2 Moles of oxygen = 2
41. (b) constant or 1 1 32
T T1 T2
60
PV
1 1 T1 Moles of neon = 3
20
P2V2 T2
2 2
42. (b) R = 0.0082 litre atm K–1 mole–1 . Mole fraction of oxygen =
2 3 5
43. (d) PV = nRT = m RT
M 2
PO 2 10 4 bar
m PM 5
or PM = RT = dRT d=
V RT
STATES OF MATTER 91
3 3 64. (c) Given statement explain the great compressibility of

Mole fraction of neon = gases.
2 3 5
65. (b) If there were loss of kinetic energy, the motion of
3 molecule will stop and gases will settle down.
PNe 10 6 bar
5 66. (b) Particles of a gas are always in constant and random
56. (b) P1V1 = P2V2 motion. If the particles were at rest and occupy fixed
760 × 500 = P2 × 200. positions, then a gas would have a fixed shape which
760 500 is not observed.
P2 = 1900mm Hg 67. (b) If assumption (ii) is correct, the pressure vs volume
200
graph of experimental data (real gas) and that of
57. (d) Value of gas constant depends only upon units of
theoretically calculated for Boyle's law (ideal gas)
measurement.
should coincide.
58. (a) Given conditions
68. (d) Kinetic theory of gases proves all the given gas laws.
V1 = 16.4 L, V2 = 5 L
69. (d) Molecules move very fast in all directions in a straight
P1 = 1.5 atm, P2 = 4.1 atm
line by colliding with each other but with different
T1 = 273 + 27 = 300 K, velocity.
T2 = 273 + 227 = 500 K 70. (b) At low temperature and high pressure.
P1V1 n1T1 71. (a) In van der waals equation ‘b’ is for volume correction
Applying gas equation, P V n 2 T2
2 2
a a
72. (c) P (V – b) = RT
T; Here P represents
n1 P1V1T1 V2 V2
n2 P2 V2 T2 the intermolecular forces.
1.5 16.4 500 2 73. (c) ‘a’ is directly related to forces of attraction. Hence
4.1 5 300 1 greater the value of ‘a’, more easily the gas gets
liquified.
59. (d) On applying Dalton's law,
74. (b)
Partial pressure of a component
(i) At very large molar volume
= Mole fraction × Total pressure
Given, mass of N2 = 56 g, mass of O2 = 96 g a
P P and Vm b Vm
Total pressure = 10 atm Vm2
n 56 96 (iii) According to van der Waals equation 'a' and 'b' are
N2 2, n O2 3
28 32 independent of temperature.
n
N2 2 n2a PV 2
x
N2 0.4, 75. (a) P ; a atm dm 6 mol-2
n
N2 n
O2 2 3 V2 n2
n
76. (c) Easily liquefiable gases have greater intermolecular
x O2 3 forces which is represented by high value of 'a'. The
O2 n n
0.6
N2 O2 2 3 greater the value of 'a' more will be liquefiability.
PN = 0.4 × 10 = 4 atm, PO = 0.6 × 10 = 6 atm
2 2
So, the order is Q < S < P < R.
60. (d) From the ideal gas equation : 77. (a) When pressure is low ‘b’ can be neglected, thus
PV nRT a
P V RT
PV 3170 10 3 V2
or n = 1.27 × 10–3
RT 8.314 300
a
61. (a) By Dalton’s law of partial pressures, the total pressure PV RT
of a mixture of two gases is the sum of the partial V
pressures. a
62. (b) An ideal gas equation is the combination of Boyle's PV RT
V
law, Charles' law and Avogadro law.
63. (b) According to kinetic theory the gas molecules are in a PV RT a
state of constant rapid motion in all possible directions RT RT VRT
colloiding in a random manner with one another and
PV a
with the walls of the container and between two Z 1
successive collisions molecules travel in a straight line RT VRT
path but show haphazard motion due to collisions.
EBD_7207
92 STATES OF MATTER
a a 91. (a) 92. (b)

78. (c) P (V b) RT at high pressure can be 93. (d) All these phenomena are caused by surface tension.
V2 V2
neglected 94. (b) 95. (b)
PV – Pb = RT and PV = RT + Pb 96. (c) Due to intermolecular H-bonding the surface tension
of H2O is more than other liquid. One H2O molecule is
PV Pb
1 joined with 4 another H2O molecule through H–bond.
RT RT
Hydrogen bonding is in order H2O > C2H5OH >
Pb CH3OH.
Z 1 ; Z > 1 at high pressure
RT
97. (a) Boiling point of water is 100°C whereas evaporation of
79. (d) CO2 has highest critical temperature of 304.2 K water into water vapours occurs at room temperature.
80. (d) At low pressure and high temperature: At low pressure
98. (a) As intermolecular forces are least in case of petrol.
volume correction for 1 mole of a gas in negligible, i.e b
=0 Thus, it has highest rate of evaporation.
thus the gas equation becomes 99. (c) The correct order of viscosity of the given liquids is
dimethyl ether < methyl alcohol < water < glycerol.
Ê ˆ
ÁÁ P + a ˜˜ V = RT
ÁË 2 ¯˜˜ STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS
V
PVm a 100. (d) These forces are important only at short distances
or Z = = 1- (~ 500 pm)
RT Vm RT
101. (b) For statement (ii), partial charge possessed by these
At higher pressure, the pressure correction for 1 mole
dipoles is always less than the unit electronic charge.
a For statement (iii), dipole - dipole interaction is stronger
of gas in negligible i.e =0
V2 than London forces but weaker than ion - ion
or (P + 0) (V – b) = RT interaction.
or P (Vm – b) = RT 102. (d) All of the given statements are correct for hydrogen
or PVm = RT + Pb bond.
PVm Pb 103. (c) Gases have much lower density than the solids and
or Z = = 1+ liquids.
RT RT
104. (b) Value of R = 8.314 Pa m3 K–1 mol–1
81. (d) In the ideal gas, the intermolecular forces of attraction
are negligible and hence it cannot be liquefied. 105. (a) All the given statements are true.
82. (d)
83. (d) Above Boyle point, real gases show positive deviation an 2
106. (a) For statement (ii), preal = p ideal
from ideality and Z values are greater than one. V2
84. (c) For statement (iii), value of 'a' is independent of
85. (c) More will be critical temperature easier is the temperature and pressure.
liquifaction of the gas. Hence correct order will be
107. (d) Viscosity of liquid decreases as temperature rise.
He < H2 < N2 < O2
86. (a) For statement (iii), we can move down from G towards MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS
D by lowering the temperature.
For statement (iv), we get liquid as soon as we cross 108. (a) 109. (b) 110. (a) 111. (b) 112. (c)
point H.
87. (b) At 1 atm pressure boiling temperature is called normal ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS
boiling point. If pressure is 1 bar than the boiling point
is called standard boiling point of the liquid. 113. (a)
88. (b) 1 bar pressure is slightly less than 1atm pressure. 114. (a) Gases expand and occupy all the space available to
89. (d) A substance exists as a liquid above its m. pt. and them because there is no force of attraction between
below its b. pt. the particles of a gas at ordinary temperature and
90. (a) The kinetic energy of molecules in gaseous state is pressure.
more than those in the liquid state as the molecules in 115. (a) 116. (a)
gaseous state can move freely (with higher speed) as 117. (c) At high altitude atmospheric pressure is low.
compared in liquid state. 118. (d)
STATES OF MATTER 93
It means density of gas is directly proportional to
pressure and inversely proportional to temperature.
119. (c) In case of HCl molecules their is dipole-dipole Density of neon will be maximum at highest pressure
interaction which is stronger than London forces as and lowest temperature.
in case of SF6. Now between HCl and NaCl the ion- 127. (c)
ion interaction present in NaCl is far more stronger 128. (d) According to Boyle’s law at constant temperature,
than dipole-dipole interaction of HCl.
1
120. (d) Given, P1 = 15 atm, P2 = 60 atm V or PV = constant
V1 = 76 cm3, V2 = 20.5 cm3. P
If the gas is an ideal gas, then according to Boyle's law, 129. (a) Applying Boyle's law P1V1 = P2V2 for both gases
it must follow the equation, 500 200
P1V1 = P2V2 400 P 3 P
1000 3
P1 × V1 = 15 × 76 = 1140
P2 × V2 = 60 × 20.5 = 1230 666.6 400
600 P 3 P
1000 3
P1V1 P2 V2
The gas behaves non-ideally. 200 400 600
PT P P 200 tor
The given information is not sufficient to comment on 3 3 3
other statements. 130. (c) Percentage of nitrogen in atmosphere is 78% .Partial
121. (d) All the gases occupy the available volume and will pressure of N2 = 0. 78 × 760
form homogeneous mixture. 131. (d) By Ideal gas equation
V1 V2 P1V n1RT
122. (c) at const. pressure
T1 T2
n1 P1 and n 2 P2
22.4 V2
, V2 30.6 litre n1 P1 n1 170
273 373 0.30
n2 P2 n2 570
123. (a) Since atmospheric pressure remain constant
132. (a) Given weight of empty glass vessel = 50 g
V1 V2 V1 2800m 3 Weight of vessel filled with liquid = 144 g
T1 T2 298K 372K Weight of liquid = 144 – 50 = 94 g.
V1 = 2243 m3 Volume of liquid = Mass/density = 94/0.47
2800 m3 volume of inflated balloon. = 200 ml = 200 × 10–3 L.
Mass of air in inflated ballon = 2800 m3 × 0.94 kg m–3 Given, pressure of ideal gas = 760 mm Hg = 1 atm
= 2632 kg Temperature = 300 K
Keeping the volume same = 2800 m3 R = 0.0821 L atm K–1 mol–1
The mass of air, which occupies it with density Mass of ideal gas = 50.5 – 50 = 0.5 g
(1.2 kg/m3) is 2800 × 1.2 = 3360 kg According to ideal gas equation,
Amount of air which had been escaped = 3360 – 2632 w
= 728 kg PV = nRT = RT
M
124. (d)
0.5
16 1 1 × 200 × 10–3 0.0821 300
125. (d) n of O 2 M
32 2
0.5 0.0821 300
3 M 61.575
n of H2 200 10–3
2
133. (d) p1 = 1.5 atm, T1 = 15°C = (15 + 273)K = 288 K
3 1
Total no. of moles 2 p2 = 1 atm, T2 = 25°C = (25 + 273)K = 298 K
2 2
nRT 2 .082 273 p1V1 p 2 V2
V 44.8lit 44800 ml T1 T2
P 1
PM p1T2 V2 V2 1.5 298
126. (b) d = 1.55
RT T1p2 V1 V1 288 1
EBD_7207
94 STATES OF MATTER
p A vA 8 12 96 136. (a) Extent of diffusion H2 > CH4 > SO2 because rate of
134. (c) Moles of A, (n A)
RT RT RT 1
diffusion
molar mass
pB v B 8 5 40
Moles of B, (n B) Order of partial pressure after diffusion is
RT RT RT
Total pressure × total volume = (nA + nB) × RT pSO 2 pCH 4 pH 2
1 137. (a) As the height increases, atmospheric pressure

p (12 8) (96 40)RT decreases, so now the volume of the gas increases
RT
and gas tends to become less denser, hence the
p = 6.8
concentration of oxygen decreases.
Partial pressure of A = p × mole fraction of A
138. (d) The mathematical relationship between pressure and
96 96 40 temperature was given by Gay Lussac's law.
6.8
RT RT 139. (c) Number of moles, temperature and volume are same.
= 4.8 atm 140. (c) Due to small size of these species (H2 and He)
Partial pressure of B = 6.8 – 4.8 = 2 atm. intermolecular interactions (van der Waal forces) are
very low, therefore it is difficult to compress these .
70.6g
135. (d) Number of moles of O2 2.21 mol 141. (a) Since surface tension depends on the attractive
1
32g mol forces between the molecules, and hydrogen bonding
a special type of dipole-dipole interactions in (b), (c)
167.5g and (d) which is stronger than London forces of
Number of moles of Ne 8.375 mol
1
20g mol attraction in hexane.
142. (c)
2.21
Mole fraction of O2 0.21 143. (a) Force is required to maintain the flow of layer which
2.21 8.375
is inversely proportional to the area of contact of
Mole fraction of Ne = 1 – 0.21 = 0.79 layer therefore flow in B is greater than that in A as
Partial pressure of a gas = Mole fraction × total pressure the area of contact is greater in A. Also viscosity of
Partial pressure of O2 = 0.21 × 25 = 5.25 bar the fluid decreases with increase in temperature
Partial pressure of Ne = 0.79 × 25 = 19.75 bar therefore liquid flow increases.
THERMODYNAMICS 105
22. (c) For isothermal reversible expansion.

V
1. (c) w = –nRT ln 2
V
2. (b) The laws of thermodynamics deal with energy changes
of macroscopic systems involving a large number of 23. (c) W P V 105 (1 10 2
1 10 3 ) 900J
molecules rather than microscopic systems containing 24. (d) The difference between H and U is not usually
a few molecules.
significant for systems consisting of only solids or
3. (b)
liquids. Solids and liquids do not suffer any significant
4. (c) The universe = The system + The surroundings volume changes upon heating. The difference,
5. (c) however, becomes significant when gases are
6. (c) Closed system can exchange energy and not matter involved.
with surroundings. Pressure cooker provides closed 25. (b) H = E + P V, for solid and liquid,
system.
V = or H = E + n RT, for solids and liquids n = 0.
7. (c) Isolated system can not exchange mass or energy.
26. (c) During isothermal expansion of an ideal gas,
8. (b) We can describe the state of a gas by quoting its
pressure (P), volume (V), temperature (T ), amount (n) T = 0. Now H = E + PV
etc. H E ( PV )
9. (d) We know that q (heat) and work (w) are not state
H = E + (nRT); T);
functions but (q + w) is a state function. H – TS (i.e. G)
is also a state functions. Thus II and III are not state Thus if T = 0., H = E
functions so the correct answer is option (d). i.e., remain unaffected
10. (c) Internal energy and molar enthalpy are state functions. 27. (d) We know that
Work (reversible or irreversible) is a path function. H= E + P V
11. (c) In the reactions, H2 + Br 2 2HBr there is no
12. (a) Internal energy is a quantity which represents the total change in volume or V = 0
energy of the system. It may be chemical, electrical, So, H = E for this reaction
and mechanical or any other type of energy you may 1 1
think of, the sum of all these is the internal energy of 28. (b) n ; H E RT ; E H
2 2
the system.
13. (d) 14. (b) 29. (c) As all reactant and product are liquid n (g) 0
15. (c) In accordance with Hess’s law.
H E nRT
16. (a)
17. (a) E = Q–W H E ( n 0)
For adiabatic expansion, Q = 0 30. (a) H E P V
E = –W 31. (c) H E nRT
The negative sign shows decrease in Internal energy, n = 3 – (1 + 5)
which is equal to the work done on the system by the
= 3 – 6 = –3
surroundings.
18. (d) q is a path dependent function, H is a state function H E ( 3RT )
because it depends on U, p and V, all of which are 32. (b) H U nRT for N 2 3H 2 2 NH 3
state functions. ng = 2 – 4 = – 2
19. (a) The shaded area shows work done on an ideal gas in a
H= U 2 RT or U= H+ 2R T U> H
cylinder when it is compressed by a constant external
pressure 33. (a) Mass independent properties (molar conductivity and
20. (b) As volume is constant hence work done in this proces electromotive force) are intensive properties.
is zero hence heat supplied is equal to change in Resistance and heat capacity are mass dependent,
internal energy. hence extensive properties.
21. (b) W = – p V 34. (a) Volume depends upon mass. Hence it is extensive
property.
3(6 4) 6 litre atmosphere
6 101.32 608 J
EBD_7207
106 THERMODYNAMICS
35. (c) An extensive property is a property whose value 48. (b) Enthalpy of reaction
depends on the quantity or size of matter present in = B.E(Reactant)– B.E(Product)
the system. For example, mass, volume, internal energy,
enthalpy, heat capacity, etc. are extensive properties = B.E (C C) 4 B.E.(C–H) B.E.(H H)
36. (d ) The magnitude of the heat capacity depends on the
size, composition and nature of the system. B.E.(C C) 6 B.E.(C H)
37. (b) The heat required to raise the temperature of body by = [606.1 + (4 × 410.5) + 431.37)] – [336.49 + (6 × 410.5)]
1C° is called thermal capacity or heat capacity. = –120.0 kJ mol–1
5 49. (a) Fe2O3(s)+ CO(g) 2FeO(s)+ CO2(g)
CP R
2 5
1.67 H = –26.8 + 33.0 = + 6.2 kJ
38. (d) CV 3 3 50. (b) Given H
R
2 1
39. (c) Given Cp = 75 JK–1 mol–1 A B + 150 ...(1)
2
100
n mole , Q = 1000 J T=? 3B 2C D –125 ...(2)
18 +350 ...(3)
E A 2D
1000 18 To calculate H operate
Q = nCp T T 2.4 K 2 × eq. (1) + eq. (2) – eq. (3)
100 75
40. (b) 1 calorie = 4.184 joule H = 300 – 125 – 350 = – 175
41. (b) The coefficients in a balanced thermo-chemical H H f products H f reactants
51. (b)
equation refer to the number of moles (not to molecules)
of reactants and products involved in the reaction.
H° [ H f (CO)(g) H f (H 2 O)(g)] –
42. (c)
43. (b) Enthalpy of formation of C 2 H 4 , CO2 and H 2 O are [ H f (CO 2 )(g) H f (H 2 )(g)]
52, – 394 and – 286 kJ/ mol respectively. (Given) = [– 110.5 + ( – 241.8)]– [– 393.5 + 0] = 41.2
The reaction is
52. (b) C 2 H 4 3O 2 2CO 2 2H 2O.
C 2 H 4 3O 2 2CO 2 2H 2O. Change in enthalpy,
change in enthalpy,
H H products H reactants
( H) H products H reactants
2 ( 394) 2 ( 286) (52 0)
2 ( 394) 2 ( 286) (52 0)
= –1412 kJ/ mol.
= – 1412 kJ/ mol. 53. (a) Hess’s law is used for calculating enthalpy of reaction.
44. (b) 45. (c)
54. (c) H
1 1
X Y
46. (b) H2 Cl 2 HCl H1 H2 H3
2 2 X P Q Y
H HCl B.E. of reactant H H1 H2 H3
55. (a) 56. (b)
B.E. of products
57. (b) Heat of combustion of a substance is always negative
as it is the amount of heat evolved (i.e. decrease in
1 1 1
90 430 240 B.E. of HCl enthalpy) when one mole of the substance is
2 2 2
completely burnt in air or oxygen.
B.E. of HCl = 215 + 120 + 90
58. (c)
= 425 kJ mol–1
59. (a) Conc. of HCl = 0.25 mole
47. (c) The reaction for formation of HCl can be written as
Conc. of NaOH = 0.25 mole
H2 + Cl2 2HCI
Heat of neutralization of strong acid by strong base
H – H + Cl – Cl 2 (H – Cl) = – 57.1 kJ
Substituting the given values, we get enthalpy of
HCl + NaOH NaCl + H2O – 57.1kJ
formation of
1 mole of HCl neutralise 1 mole of NaOH, heat evolved
2HCl = – ( 862 – 676) = –186 kJ.
= 57.1 kJ
Enthalpy of formation of
0.25 mole of HCl neutralise 0.25 mole of NaOH
186 Heat evolved = 57.1 × 0.25 = 14.275 kJ
HCl = kJ = –93 kJ.
2
THERMODYNAMICS 107
60. (c) For a reaction to be non-spontaneous at all
61. (d) A process is spontaneous only when there is decrease in temperatures, H should be +ve and S should be –ve
the value of free energy, i.e., G is –ve. G = +ve – T × (–ve); the value of G is always
62. (a) If Gsystem = 0 the system has attained equilibrium is positive for such a reaction and hence it will be non-
right choice. spontaneous at all temperatures.
In it alternative (d) is most confusing as when G > 0, 74. (d) We know that G = H – T S
the process may be spontaneous when it is coupled When H < 0 and S < 0 then G will be negative at
with a reaction which has G < 0 and total G is low temperatures (positive at high temperature) and
negative, so right answer is (a). the reaction will be spontaneous.
63. (b) Spontaneity of reaction depends on tendency to 75. (d) Since the process is at equilibrium G = 0 for G 0,
acquire minimum energy state and maximum they should be H > 0, S > 0.
randomness. For a spontaneous process in an isolated 76. (c) S has negative value if number of gaseous moles
system the change in entropy is positive. decreases during a reaction, ng = –ve
For the reaction
64. (d) G is negative for a spontaneous process.
2SO2 + O2 2SO3
65. (a) Crystallization of sucrose solution. Entropy is a
ng = 2 – 3 = –1
measure of randomness during the crystallisation of
77. (d) G= H– T S
sucrose solution liquid state is changing into solid
For a reaction to be spontaneous,
state hence entropy decreases.
H = –ve, S = +ve
66. (d) G = H – T S; G is positive for a reaction to be at all temperatures.
non-spontaneous when H is positive and S is
but at high temperature, G H T S
negative. ve ve
67. (b) For the reaction Thus the second term will have high positive value
PCl5 (g) PCl3 (g) Cl2 (g) and reaction will be non-spontaneous.
The reaction given is an example of decomposition 78. (b) At equilibrium G = 0
reaction and we know that decomposition reactions Hence, G = H – Te S = 0
are endothermic in nature, i.e, H > 0. H = Te S or Te = DH
Further DS
For a spontaneous reaction
n = (1 + 1) – 1= + 1
G must be negative which is possible only if
Hence more number of molecules are present in
H– T S<0
products which shows more randomness i.e. S > 0
( S is positive) DH
H < T S or T > ; Te < T
DS
68. (b) For the reaction
79. (a) Measure of disorder of a system is nothing but
2ZnS 2Zn + S2 ; G1º = 293 kJ ..........(1)
Entropy. For a spontaneous reaction, G < 0. As per
2Zn + O2 2ZnO ; G2º = – 480 kJ ..........(2) Gibbs Helmholtz equation,
S2 + 2 O2 2SO2 ; G3º = – 544 kJ .........(3) G= H– T S
Gº for the reaction Thus G is –ve only
2ZnS + 3 O2 2ZnO + 2SO2 When H = –ve (exothermic)
can be obtained by adding eqn. (1), (2) and (3) and S = +ve (increasing disorder)
Gº = 293 – 480 – 544 = – 731 kJ 80. (a) Since, in the first reaction gaseous products are
69. (a) Third law of Thermodynamics. forming from solid carbon hence entropy will increase
q i.e. S = +ve.
70. (a) S
T 1
C (gr.) + O2(g) CO(g); S° = + ve
q required heat per mole 2
T constant absolute temperatur e Since, G° = H° – T S hence the value of G decrease
Unit of entropy is JK–1 mol–1 on increasing temperature.
71. (a) For a spontaneous process, S total is always positive. 81. (b) This is combustion reaction, which is always exothermic
hence
72. (d) For an exothermic reaction all three enthalpy, entropy H = –ve
and Gibb's free energy change have negative values. As the no. of gaseous molecules are increasing hence
73. (d) Gibb’s-Helmholtz equation is entropy increases
G= H– T S now G H T S
EBD_7207
108 THERMODYNAMICS
For a spontaneous reaction ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS
G ve
98. (c) Values of state functions depend only on the state of
Which is possible in this case as H = –ve and S
the system and not on how it is reached.
= +ve.
99. (a) Q = –W if E = 0
82. (c) For a spontaneous reaction
100. (b) In an isothermal process change in internal energy
G(–ve), which is possible if S = +ve,
( E) is zero (as it is a function of temperature).
H = +ve
According to first law of thermodynamics
and T S > H [As G = H – T S]
Q + W = E. Hence Q = –W (if E = 0)
H 1.435 103 If a system undergoes a change in which internal
83. (c) S energy of the system remains constant (i.e. E = 0)
T 273
then –W = Q. This means that work done by the system
5.260 cal / (mol K) equals the heat absorbed by the system.
101. (a) It is fact that absolute values of internal energy of
STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS substances cannot be determined. It is also true that it
is not possible to determine exact values of constitutent
84. (c) Variables like P, V and T which describes the state of energies of a substance.
system are called state variables or state functions 102. (c) It may involve increase or decrease in temperature of
because their values depend only on the state of the the system. Systems in which such processes occur,
system and not on how it is reached. are thermally insulated from the surroundings.
85. (d) The positive sign expresses when work is done on the 103. (a) As internal energy is a state function so its value
system. Similarly, negative sign expresses when work depends on intial and final states of the system. In
is done by the system case of cyclic system initial and final states are same.
86. (b) 87. (a) 88. (a) So E = 0, and similarly H = 0.
89. (c) All the statements regarding spontaneity of a reaction 104. (a) The properties whose magnitude depends upon the
are correct. quantity of matter present in the system are called
90. (c) The standard enthalpy of reaction is the enthalpy extensive properties eg, internal energy.
change for a reaction when all the participating 105. (b) The mass and volume depend upon the quantity of
substances are in their standard states. The standard matter so these are extensive properties while ratio of
state of a substance at a specified temperature is its mass to its volume does not depend upon the quantity
pure form at 1 bar. For example, the standard state of of matter so this ratio is an extensive property.
liquid ethanol at 298 K is pure liquid ethanol at 1 bar. 106. (a) In case of electric fan electrical energy is converted
Standard state of solid ion at 500 K is pure iron at 1 bar. into mechanical energy and in case of heater, electrical
The standard conditions are denoted by adding the energy is converted into heat energy. Therefore, these
superscript to the symbol H e.g., H . follow the first law of thermodynamics.
107. (c) The value of enthalpy of neutralisation of weak acid
MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS by strong base is less than 57.1 kJ. This is due to the
reason that the part of energy liberated during
91. (b) 92. (c) combination of H+ and OH+ ions is utilised in the
93. (a) A – (p), B – (s), C – (r), D – (q) ionisation of weak acid.
Expansion of a gas in vacuum (pext = 0) is called free 108. (d) When a solid melts, increase in enthalpy is observed.
expansion. 109. (b) The factor T S increases with increase in temperature.
For isothermal irreversible change 110. (b) Both assertion and reason are true but reason is not
q = –W = pext(Vf – Vi) the correct explanation of assertion.
for isothermal reversible change For a process to be spontaneous G must be negative.
q = – W = nRT ln (Vf/Vi) G= H–T S
= 2.303 nRT log Vf/Vi Exothermic process ( H is negative) is non-
For adiabatic change, q = 0, U = Wad spontaneous if S is negative and temperature is high
94. (b) (A) ng = 2 – 2 = 0 hence H = U because in such condition T S H.
(B) ng = 2 – 1 = 1 hence H = U + RT ( G H T S tive ). When temperature is
(C) ng = 2 – 4 = –2 hence H = U – 2RT
decreased, T S H ( G H T S tive)
(D) ng = 5 – 2 = 3 hence H = U + 3RT
and so the reaction becomes spontaneous.
95. (c) 96. (d) 97. (b)
THERMODYNAMICS 109
CRITICAL THINKING TYPE QUESTIONS 8.314 373

Uo = 40.79 kJ/mol kJ / mol
111. (c) Justification : free expansion w = 0 1000
adiabatic process q = 0 = (40.79 – 3.10) kJ/mol
U = q + w = 0, this means that internal energy remains kJ
constant. Therefore, = 37.69
mol
T = 0.
Internal energy change for 36 g of water
112. (d) Mathematical expression of first law of
thermodynamics kJ 36g
37.69
E = q + w, E is a state function. mol 18g / mol
113. (d) As H = E + ngRT U = 75.98 kJ
if np < nr; ng = np – n r = – ve. 4NO 2 (g) O 2 (g) 2N 2 O5 (g),
121. (d) rH = – 111 kJ
Hence H< E.
– 54 kJ
V2 H'
114. (a) q = –W 2.303nRTlog
V1 2N 2 O5 (s)
115. (a) Process is isothermal reversible expansion, hence
– 111 – 54 = H'
U = 0, therefore q = – W.
Since q = + 208 J, W = – 208 J H' = – 165 kJ
122. (c) In a reversible process the work done is greater than in
116. (d) When work is done by the system, U = q – W
irreversible process. Hence the heat absorbed in
117. (c) For a cyclic process the net change in the internal reversible process would be greater than in the latter
energy is zero because the change in internal energy case. So
does not depend on the path. Tf (rev.) < Tf (irr.)
reversible path
123. (c) Applying Hess’s Law
1
fH sub H diss H I.E. E.A lattice H
2
A B
617 161 520 77 E.A. (–1047)
E.A. = –617 + 289 = –328 kJ mol–1
irreversible path
electron affinity of fluorine
118. (a) –Wirreversible = Pext (V2 – V1) = –328 kJ mol–1
= 10 atm (2L – 1L) 124. (a) To calculate average enthalpy of C – H bond in
= 10 atm – L methane following informations are needed
(i) dissociation energy of H2 i.e.
V2
1
Pex dv H (g) H( g ); H x suppose
–Wreversible = 2 2
V1
(ii) Sublimation energy of C(graphite) to C(g)
V2 C( graphite) C( g ); H y Suppose
= 2.303 nRT log V Given
1
1
C( graphite ) 2H 2 ( g ) CH 4 ( g ); H 75 kJ mol
2
= 1 2.303 0.0821 atm–L /K /mol × log 125. (a) C 2 H 5 OH( ) 3O 2 ( g ) 2CO2 ( g ) 3H2O( )
1
Bomb calorimeter gives U of the reaction
= 16.96 atm–L
Given, U = –1364.47 kJ mol–1
Wreversible 16.96 ng = – 1
= 1.69 1.7
Wirreversible 10.00 1 8.314 298
H = U + ngRT = 1364.47
119. (a) 1000
120. (a) H2O (l ) H2O (g) = – 1366.93 kJ mol–1
Hvap = 40.79 kJ/mol 126. (a) H 2O ( ) H 2O (g) + Q
H = U + ngRT E = 37558 J / mol
40.79 kJ/mol = U + (1) (8.314 JK–1 mol–1) (373 K) E = 37.56 kJ mol–1
EBD_7207
110 THERMODYNAMICS
127. (d) This reaction shows the formation of H2O, and the X2 If now 10g of copper is added Cp, m = 24.47 J/ mol K
represents the enthalpy of formation of H2O because Amount of heat gained by Cu
as the definition suggests that the enthalpy of formation
is the heat evolved or absorbed when one mole of J 10g
= 24.47 (373 – 298) K
substance is formed from its constituent atoms. K mol 63g / mol
128. (b) For the equation = 291.3 J
B 2 H 6 ( g ) 3O 2 ( g ) B 2 O 3 ( g ) 3H 2 O( g ) Heat lost by water = 291.30 J
Eqs. (i) + 3 (ii) + 3 (iii) – (iv) J
H = – 1273 + 3(–286) + 3(44) – 36 – 291.30 J = 75.32 T2 373K
K
= – 1273 – 858 + 132 – 36
–3.947 K = T2 –373 K
= – 2035 kJ/mol
T2 = 369.05 K
129. (a) qp H Cp dT 131. (a) I 2 ( s ) Cl2 ( g ) 2ICl( g )
J rH = [ H(I2(s) I2(g)) + HI–I + HCl–Cl] – [ HI –
qp 75.32 299 298 K ]
K mol Cl
= 151.0 + 242.3 + 62.76 –2 × 211.3 = 33.46
J 33.46
qp 75.32 Df H∞(ICl) = = 16.73 kJ / mol
K mol 2
For 180 kg of water, no. of moles of water
132. (a) G RT ln K eq : Normal body temperature = 37oC
180 103 g
104 g moles kJ J
18g / mol 50 8.314 310 lnK eq
mol K mol
J 19.39 = lnKeq
qp 75.32 10 4 moles
mol
= 753.2 × 103 J = 753.2 kJ K eq 2.6 108
H for ATP = 7 kcal / mol 133. (b) G= H– T S
= 7 × 4.184 kJ/mol G = – T S (when H = 0 and S = +ve)
= 29.2 kJ/mol G = –ve
6.022 × 1023 molecules of ATP produce = 29.2 kJ 134. (a) For spontaneous reaction, dS > 0 and dG should be
29.2 kJ produced from 6.022 × 1023 molecules negative i.e. < 0.
75.8 135. (a) G° = H° – T S°
753.2 kJ produced from 6.022 × 1023 × For a spontaneous reaction G° < 0
29.2
= 1.5 × 1025 molecules or H° – T S° < 0
H
T
130. (a) 18gm of water at 100oC S
10gm of Cu at 25oC is added.
179.3 103
T> 1117.9K 1118K
160.2
1atm
o 136. (d) H 2O H2O(g)
100 C
H = 40630 J mol –1
S = 108.8 JK–1 mol –1
qp = Cp, m dT
G = H T S When G = 0,
J 18g H T S =0
= 75.32 373 298 K
K mol 18g / mol
H 40630 J mol 1
J T = S
=
108.8 J mol 1
= 373.4 K.
= 75.32 × 75 K
K
= 5.649 × 103 J
EBD_7207
124 EQUILIBRIUM

[AB]2
16. (c) A2 + B2 2AB Kc
1. (c) 2. (c) 3. (b) [A 2 ][B2 ]
4. (d) The time taken for complete evaporation depends on
(i) the nature of the liquid, (ii) the amount of the liquid (2.8 10 3 ) 2 (2.8) 2
and (iii) the temperature. Kc 3 3
0.62
3 10 4.2 10 3 4.2
5. (c) When the watch glass is open to the atmosphere, the
rate of evaporation remains constant but the molecules 17. (c) A+ B C +D
are dispersed into large volume of the room. As a At eqb. x x 2x 2x
consequence the rate of condensation from vapour to
liquid state is much less than the rate of evaporation. 2x.2x
Kc = 4
6. (c) Ice melts with a reduction in volume. So Increase in x.x
pressure shifts equilibrium to water side, result in
melting of ice according to Lechatelier's principle. 18. (a) For A B C, n 1 2 1
7. (a) A reaction is said to be in equilibrium when rate of
n 1
forward reaction is equal to the rate of backward mol mol
Unit of K c
reaction. litre litre
8. (c)
= Litre mole–1
9. (b) The reaction mixtures starting either with H2 or D2
reach equilibrium with the same composition, except P 2 CO 4 4
that D2 and ND3 are present instead of H2 and NH3. 19. (c) Kp = ;K p 8; C(s) 1;
PCO 2 2
10. (a) Equilibrium can be attained by either side of the
reactions of equilibrium. The concentration of solids and liquids are taken as
11. (d) According to the idea of dynamic equilibrium there is unity.
possibility of formation of all product. 20. (d) 2C(s) +O 2 ( g ) 2 CO2 ( g )
12. (b) At equilibrium, the rate of forward and backward
n =2–1=+1
reactions is equal.
Kc and Kp are not equal.
13. (a) For reation (1)
21. (b) For a gaseous phase reaction Kp and Kc are related as
[NO]2 ng
K1 = Kp K c ( RT )
[N 2 ][O2 ]
For the given reaction,
and for reaction (2) 1
CO(g) + O2 ( g ) CO2(g)
[N 2 ]½ [O 2 ]½ 1 2
K2 = therefore K1 =
[NO] K 22 1
ng = 1– (1 + 0.5) = – 0.5 or
2
14. (c) N2 + 3H2 2NH3
1
K = [NH3]2 / [N2] [H2]3 .... (i) 2
Kp = Kc ( RT )
1 3
N2 H2 NH3 1
2 2 Kp
or = ( RT ) 2
K ' [NH3 ]/[N 2 ]1/ 2 [H 2 ]3/ 2 .... (ii) Kc
Dividing equation (i) by equation (ii), we get K' = 22. (c) Using the relation KP = KC. (RT) n, we get
K KP n
( RT )
15. (b) Given reaction, 2A B C KC
[B][C]
Kc KP
[A]2 Thus K will be highest for the reaction having
C
3 3
2 10 3 10
Kc =6 highest value of n.
(10 3 ) 2
EQUILIBRIUM 125
The n values for various reactions are Since [CaCO3 (s)] and [CaO(s)] are both constant,
therefore modified equilibrium constant for the thermal
1 1
(a) n 1– 1 – decomposition of calcium carbonate will be
2 2 Kć = [CO2(g)]
(b) n = 2 – (1 + 1) = 0 K p = [p CO2(g)]
(c) n = (1 +1) – 1= 1 31. (d) Equilibrium constant (K) is independent of
(d) n = (2 + 4) – (7 + 2) = – 3 concentrations of reactions and products.
Thus maximum value of n = 1 32. (a) Equilibrium constant is not effected by change in
n conditions like P and V. These changes can change
23. (c) As Kp = Kc RT g
only the time required to attain equilibrium.
Here ng = 1
33. (b) Reaction proceed forward according to Le-chatelier’s
So, Kp = Kc when RT = 1
principle.
Thus T = 12.5 K
34. (b)
24. (b) 3Fe(s) + 4H2O (steam) Fe3O4 (s) + 4 H2 (g) 35. (d) For reaction to proceed from right to left
(p H 2 ) 4 Q K c i.e the reaction will be fast in backward
Kp = 4 only gaseous products and reactants. direction i.e r b > rf.
(p H 2 O )
36. (b) The equilibrium constant helps in predicting the
25. (b) C(s) + CO2(g) 2CO(g) direction in which a given reaction will proceed at any
Apply law of mass action, stage. For this purpose, we calculate the reaction
quotient Q. The reaction quotient Q (Qc with molar
(PCO )2 (10PCO2 )2
KP or 63 concentration and Qp with partial pressures) is defined
PCO2 PCO2 in the same way as the equilibrium constant Kc except
that the concentrations in Qc are not necessary
(Given KP = 65) and PCO = 10PCO2 equilibrium values.
37. (d)
100(PCO2 ) 2 38. (c) Both (a) and (b) are correct for the equation,
or 63 or 63 100 PCO2
PCO2 K = e G /RT
39. (c) G = –2.303 RT log K
63
PCO 2 0.63 atm –nFE° = –2.303 RT log K
100
nFE (I)
log K
PCO 10PCO2 = 10 × 0.63 = 6.3 atm 2.303 RT
nFE
Ptotal = PCO2 PCO = 0.63 + 6.3 = 6.93 atm. 0.4342 ........ (i)
RT
26. (d) Rate constant of forward reaction (Kf) = 1.1 × 10–2 and
rate constant of backward reaction (Kb) = 1.5 × 10–3 nFE
ln K
per minute. RT
2 nFE
Equilibrium constant (Kc) Kf 1.1 10 ....... (ii)
3
7.33 K e RT
Kb 1.5 10
40. (d) Solid Liquid
27. (a) MgCO3 (s) MgO(s) CO 2 (g) It is an endothermic process. So when temperature is
MgO & MgCO3 are solid and they donot exert any raised, more liquid is formed. Hence adding heat will
pressure and hence only pressure exerted is by CO2. shift the equilbrium in the forward direction.
Therefore K P PCO2 41. (d) According to Le-chatelier's principle" whenever a
constraint is applied to a system in equilibrium, the
28. (a) All the reactants and products are in same physical
system tends to readjust so as to nullify the effect of
state.
the constraint.
1 42. (b) The most favourable conditions are :
[Ni(CO) 4 ] mol l
29. (a) K (mol l 1) 3 (i) High pressure ( n < 0)
[CO]4 (mol l 1 )4 (ii) Low temperature (Exothermic reaction)
30. (b) For the reaction (iii) Catalyst Fe is presence of Mo.
CaCO3 (s) CaO (s) + CO2 (g) 43. (c) As in this no. of moles are increasing hence low
On the basis of the stoichiometric equation, we can pressure will favour the forward direction.
write, n = (1 + 1) – 1 = 1
Kc =[CaO(s)] [CO2(g)/[CaCO3(s)] 44. (a) For n = 0, no effect of pressure.
EBD_7207
126 EQUILIBRIUM
45. (a) Melting of ice involve absorption of heat i.e 60. (b) Because NH3 after losing a proton (H+) gives NH2–
Endothermic hence high temperature favour the NH3 + H2O NH 2– H 3O
process.
(Conjugate acid-base pair differ only by a proton)
Further for a given mass volume of water is less than
61. (c) Lewis acid is that compound which have electron
ice thus high pressure favour the process. High
deficiency. eg. BF3, SnCl2.
pressure and high temperature convert ice into liquid.
62. (d) (CH3)3 B - is an electron deficient, thus behave as a
46. (d)
lewis acid.
47. (b) Le chatelier principle is not applicable to solid-solid
equilibrium. 63. (c) Boron in B2H6 is electron deficient
48. (c) Effect of increase of temperature on equilibrium 64. (b) BF3 is Lewis acid (e– pair acceptor)
constant depends on the fact that whether the reaction 65. (c) HSO4– accepts a proton to form H2SO4.
is exothermic, or endothermic. If the reaction is Thus H2SO4 is the conjugate acid of HSO4–.
exothermic, it is favoured by low temperature and if HSO4
H
H 2SO 4
the reaction is endothermic, it is favoured by high base conjugate acid
temperature. of HSO 4
49. (d) A2 (g) B2(g) 3C(g) D(g) 66. (a) Bronsted base is a substance which accepts proton.
step-1 step-2 In option (a), H2O is accepting proton, i.e., acting as a
since the steps 1 and 2 are exothermic hence low base.
temprature will favour both the reactions. In step - 1 67. (c)
moles are increasing hence low pressure will favour it. 68 (a) (i) H 3PO 4 H 2O H 3O H 2PO 4
In step 2 moles are decreasing, hence high pressure acid1 base 2 acid 2 base1
will favour it.
(ii) H 2PO4 H2O HPO 4 H 3O
50. (a) On adding inert gas at constant volume the total acid1 base 2 base1 acid 2
pressure of the system is increased, but the partial
pressure of each reactant and product remains the (iii) Hbase
2 PO 4 OH
acid 2
H 3 PO 4 O
acid1 base 2
1
same. Hence no effect on the state of equilibrium.
51. (c) The backward reaction is not favoured at high pressure. Hence only in (ii) reaction H2PO4– is acting as an acid.
52. (c) A catalyst increases the rate of the chemical reaction 69. (b) The value of ionic product of water changes with the
by making available a new low energy pathway for the temperature.
conversion of reactants to products. It increases the 70. (a) Given : Hydroxyl ion concentration
rate of forward and reverse reaction that pass through [OH–] = 0.05 mol L–1. We know that
the same transition state and does not affect 14
[H ][OH ] 1 10
equilibrium.
14
Catalyst lowers the activation energy for the forward or [H ] 1 10 2 10 13 mol L–1
and reverse reactions by exactly the same amount. 0.05
53. (c) An aqueous solution of sodium chloride is comprised We also know that
entirely of sodium ions and chloride ions, while that of 13
acetic acid mainly contains unionized acetic acid pH log[H ] log [2 10 ]
molecules and only some acetate ions and hydronium = 13
log 2 log 10 log 2 ( 13) log 10
ions. This is because there is almost 100% ionization
in case of sodium chloride which is a strong electrolyte 0.3010 13.0000 12.6990.
as compared to less than 5% ionization of acetic acid Since the value of pH > 7, therefore the solution is
which is a weak electrolyte. basic.
54. (c) The hydronium ion has a trigonal pyramidal geometry 71. (b)
and is composed of three hydrogen atoms and one
1
oxygen atom. There is a lone pair of electrons on the 72. (b) pH = – log [H+] = log
oxygen giving it this shape. The bond angle between H
the atoms is 113°. 73. (c) On dilution [H+] = 10–6 M
= 10–6 mol
55. (d) Now dissociation of water cannot be neglected,
56. (b) According to Arrhenius, acids are those substances Total [H+] = 10–6 + 10–7 = 11 × 10–7
which give proton in aqueous solution, hence gaseous pH = –log [H+]
HCl is not an Arrhenius acid. = –log (11× 10–7) = 5.98
57. (d) Base accepts protons and acid donates protons. 74. (d) pH = 1 ; H+ = 10–1 = 0.1 M
58. (c) Lewis concept. pH = 2 ; H+ = 10–2 = 0.01 M
59. (c) H2CO3 H+ + HCO3– H+ + CO3–. M1 = 0.1 V1 = 1
HCO 3 can donate and accept H+. M2 = 0.01 V2 = ?
EQUILIBRIUM 127
From 83. (a) Given Ka = 1.00×10–5,
C= 0.100 mol
M1V1 = M2V2 for a weak electrolyte,
0.1 × 1 = 0.01 × V2 degree of dissociation
V2 = 10 litres
Volume of water added = 10 – 1 = 9 litres Ka 1 10 –5
( ) 10 2 1%
75. (b) Given [OH–] = 10–3 C 0.100
pOH = 3 84. (b) HA H+ + A–
pH + pOH = 14
pH = 14 – 3 = 11 [H ][A ]
Ka , [H+] = 10–pH
76. (a) Given [H3O+] = 1 × 10–10 M [HA]
at 25º [H3O+] [OH–] = 10–14 [H+] = 10–5 ; and at equilibrium [H+] = [A– ]
14
10 4
[OH ] 10 10 5 10 5
8
10 10 Ka 2 10
0.0015
OH OH
Now, [OH ] 10 p 10 4 10 p
Ka 2 10 8 6 3
pOH = 4 4 10 2 10
C .005
77. (a) Molarity (M) = 10M. HCl is a strong acid and it is
Percentage ionization = 0.2
completely dissociated in aqueous solutions as : HCl
(10) H+(10) + Cl–. 85. (c) M1V1 = M2V2
1 × 0.10 = M2 × 100
So, for every moles of HCl, there is one H+. Therefore
[H+] = [HCl] or [H+] = 10. M2 = 0.001 = 10–3
pH = – log[H+] = – log [10] = – 1. BOH B OH
4 C 0 0
78. (d) No. of moles of NaOH = 0.1 C(1 ) C C
40
[Molecular weight of NaOH = 40] C C
Kb
No. of moles of OH– = 0.1 C(1 )
0.1 Kb = C 2 ( 1 1)
Concentration of OH– = 1 litre 0.1Mole / L
14
Kb / C
As we know that, [ H ] [OH ] 10
13 Kb
[H ] 10 ( OH – 10 –1 ) [OH ] C C K bC
C
79. (a) Given [H3 O+] = 1 × 10–10 M
at 25º [H3O+] [OH–] = 10–14 10 5
10 3
10 4
10 14 pH + pOH = 14
4
[OH ] 10 pH = 14 – 4 = 10
10
10
86. (d)
OH OH
Now, [OH ] 10 p 10 4 10 p 87. (d) H 2A H+ + HA-
pOH = 4
80. (c) H2SO4 2H+ + SO42– [H ][HA ]
K1 = 1.0 × 10–5 = (Given)
Given concentration of H2SO4 = 0.005 M [H 2 A]
[H+] = 0.005 × 2 = 0.01 = 10–2
HA H A
pH = – log [H+] = – log 10–2 = 2
81. (a) pOH = – log [OH–] 10 [H ][A ] (Given)
pH + pOH = 14 K2 5.0 10
[HA ]
For 10–4 KOH, [OH–] = 10–4
pOH = – log [OH–] = – log 10–4 = 4
[H ]2 [A 2 ]
pH = 14 – pOH = 10 K K1 K2
82. (d) Among M/4 KOH, M/4 NaOH, M/4 NH4OH and [H 2 A]
M/4 Ca(OH)2, Ca(OH)2 furnishes highest number of = (1.0 × 10–5) × (5 × 10–10) = 5 × 10–15
OH– ions ( Ca(OH)2 Ca2+ + 2OH–).
88. (b) Acidic strength Ka
So pH of M/4 Ca(OH)2 is highest.
EBD_7207
128 EQUILIBRIUM
89. (d) Given Kb = 1.0 × 10–12 101. (b) CH3COOH is weak acid while NaOH is strong base, so
[BOH] = 0.01 M [OH] = ? one equivalent of NaOH can not be neutralized with
one equivalent of CH3COOH. Hence the solution of one
BOH B OH equivalent of each does not have pH value as 7. Its pH
t o c 0 0
teq c(1 x) cx cx will be towards basic side as NaOH is a strong base
hence conc. of OH– will be more than the conc. of H+.
c 2 x2 cx 2 0.01x 2 102. (a) IVth group needs higher S2– ion concentration. In
Kb 1.0 × 10–12 = presence of HCl, the dissociation of H2 S decreases
c (1 x) (1 x ) (1 x )
hence produces less amount of sulphide ions due
On calculation, we get, x = 1.0 × 10–5 to common ion effect, thus HCl decreases the
Now, [OH–] = cx = 0.01 × 10–5 = 1 × 10–7mol L–1 solubility of H2 S which is sufficient to precipitate
90. (b) pKa = –log Ka IInd group radicals.
Smaller the value of pKa, stronger will be acid 103. (d) A salt of strong base with weak acid undergoes anionic
Acid having pKa value of 10–8 is strongest acid. hydrolysis to give basic solution.
4 104. (d) Ferric chloride is the salt of a strong acid and a weak
Ka1 3.14 10
91. (b) 1
4 :1 base, hence on hydrolysis it yields a mixture of weak
K a2 5
2 1.96 10 base and strong acid
FeCl3 3H2O Fe OH 3 3HCl
[H3O ][F ] weak base strong acid
92. (c) Ka ...(i)
[HF] Due to this, there is predominance of H+ ions in
solution, hence the solution is acidic.
[HF][OH ] 105. (c) In aqueous solution BA(salt) hydrolyses to give
Kb ...(ii)
[F ] BA + H2O BOH + HA
From (i) and (ii), KaKb = [H3O+][OH–]=Kw Base acid
(ionic product of water) Now pH is given by
2 1 1 1
1.34 pH pK w pKa pK b
93. (a) K c 2 0.1 1.8 10 5 2 2 2
100
94. (b) In polyprotic acids the loss of second proton occurs substituting given values, we get
much less readily than the first. Usually the Ka values 1
pH = (14 4.80 4.78) 7.01
for successive loss of protons from these acids differ 2
by at least a factor of 10–3 i.e., K a1 K a2 salt
106. (d) For acidic buffer pH = pKa + log
acid
H2 X H+ + HX- (K a1 )
A
HX- H+ + X2- (K a 2 ) or pH pK a log
HA
95. (a) The values of dissociation constants for successive
stages decrease. Given pKa = 4.5 and acid is 50% ionised.
96. (a) [HA] = [A–] (when acid is 50% ionised)
97. (a) NH 4 Cl H 2 O NH 4OH HCl pH = pKa + log 1
pH = pKa = 4.5
or
pOH = 14 – pH = 14 – 4.5 = 9.5
Cl H 2O HCl H i.e., acidic 107. (b) Given [NH3] = 0.3 M, [NH4+] = 0.2 M, Kb = 1.8 × 10–5 .
98. (c) Due to common ion effect addition of NH4Cl in group
[salt]
(III) suppresses the ionisation of NH4OH with the pOH = pK b log [pKb = –log Kb;
result concentration of OH– decreases. [base]
99. (c) Solubility of weak electrolyte decreases in solvent pKb = –log 1.8 × 10–5]
having common ion. So solubility of AgI in NaI solution pKb = 4.74
is less than in pure water because of common ion effect. 0.2
100. (b) Dissociation of CH 3COOH is suppressed by the 4.74 log = 4.74 + 0.3010 – 0.4771 = 4.56
0.3
addition of sodium acetate (CH 3COONa ) due to pH = 14 – 4.56 = 9.436
common ion (CH3COO ) effect. The [ H ] decreases Salt
108. (d) pH p Ka+ log
raising the pH of the acid solution. Acid
Note : After the addition of CH3COONa to CH3COOH, Salt
a buffer solution is formed which has reserved pH log H log Ka – log
Acid
value.
EQUILIBRIUM 129
[OH–] = 10–2
Acid
log H = log Ka + log 2s = 10–2
Salt
10 2
Acid s
H = Ka 2
Salt Ksp = 4s3
0.15 3
= 1.8 × 10 = 9 × 10 6 M 10 2
0.2 = 4
2
109. (d) HNO2 is a weak acid and NaNO2 is salt of that weak
acid and strong base (NaOH). = 5 × 10–7
110. (a) Lets take an example of an acidic buffer CH3COOH 117. (c) Let binary electrolyte be AB
and CH3COONa.
AB A B
CH3COOH CH3COO – + H + ; s s s
CH3COONa CH3COO– + Na+ Hence, solubility product of AB
when few drops of HCl are added to this buffer, the H+ Ksp = [A+] [B–]
of HCl immediatly combine with CH3COO– ions to S = [s.] [s] s = S½
form undissociated acetic acid molecules. Thus there 118. (a) Ksp of As2 S3 is less than ZnS. In acid medium
will be no appreciable change in its pH value. Like ionisation of H2S is suppresed (common ion effect)
wise if few drops of NaOH are added, the OH – ions and Ksp of ZnS does not exceed.
will combine with H+ ions to form unionised water 119. (a) Given Na2CO3 = 1.0 × 10–4 M
molecule. Thus pH of solution will remain constant. [CO3– – ] = 1.0 × 10–4 M
111. (d) Buffering action is maximum when i.e. S = 1.0 × 10–4 M
[Salt] = [Acid] At equilibrium
i.e., pH = pKa [Ba++] [CO3– –] = Ksp of BaCO3
112. (d) pH or [H+] of a buffer does not change with dilution. 9
Ksp 5.1 10
113. (b) Solubility product is the product of ionic concentration [Ba++] = = 5.1 × 10–5 M
4
in a saturated solution of an electrolyte at a given [CO3 ] 1.0 10
temperature.
120. (b) AgBr Ag+ + Br-
114. (b) Cr(OH)3 (s) Cr 3 (aq.) 3OH (aq.)
s 3s Ksp = [Ag+] [Br–]
(s) (3s)3 = Ksp For precipitation to occur
Ionic product > Solubility product
27 S 4 K sp
K sp 5¥10-13
[Br- ] = = = 10-11
K sp
1/ 4 30 1/ 4 [Ag + ] 0.05
1.6 10
s
27 27 i.e., precipitation just starts when 10–11 moles of KBr
is added to 1 AgNO3 solution
115. (b) Mg(OH) 2 Mg 2 OH Number of moles of Br– needed from
Ksp = [Mg++][OH–]2 KBr = 10–11
1.0 × 10–11 = 10–3 × [OH–]2 Mass of KBr = 10–11 × 120 = 1.2 × 10–9 g
121. (b) Mg(OH)2 Mg 2OH
10-11
[OH- ] = = 10-4 ++
Ksp = [Mg ][OH ] – 2
10-3
1.0 × 10–11 = 10–3 × [OH–]2
pOH = 4
pH + pOH = 14 10-11
[OH- ] = = 10-4
pH = 10 10-3
116. (b) Given pH = 12 pOH = 4
or [H+] = 10–12 pH + pOH = 14 pH = 10
Since, [H+] [OH–] = 10–14
14 STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS
10
[OH–] = = 10–2
10 12 122. (c) Boiling point depends on the altitude of the place; at
high altitude the boiling point decreases.
Ba(OH)2 Ba 2+ + 2OH 123. (a)
s 2s
EBD_7207
130 EQUILIBRIUM
124. (b) Chemical reactions which are in equilibrium are (B) As n < 0 therefore if V , P reaction will go in
reversible the direction in which more number of gaseous
125. (c) Since equilibrium constant is related to the partial moles are formed i.e. backward direction.
pressure of reactant and product therefore if nobel (C) As n = 0 hence no effect.
gas is added, no change is observed, Statement 1 is (D) If concentration of reactant is increased reaction
incorrect. will go in the forward direction.
If Nobel gas react with reactant, concentraction of 141. (d) 142. (b)
reactant will decrease and therefore reaction will 143. (b) HClO4 is a strong acid
proceed backword according to Le– chatelier ’s HNO2 is a weak acid.
principle. NH2– is a very good proton acceptor and thus, it is a
126. (c) Equilibrium constant is temperature dependent having base.
one unique value for a particular reaction represented H2SO4 is a strong acid hence its conjugate base (HSO4–)
by a balanced equation at a given temperature. will be a weak base.
127. (b) An equilibrium constant does not give any information
about the rate at which the equilibrium is reached. ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS
128. (a) 129. (d)
130. (a) As strong acid dissociate completely in water hence 144. (a) Kp = Kc(RT) n
resulting base formed would be very weak. On the 145. (a) If the volume is kept constant and an inert gas such as
other hand a weak acid is only partially dissociated in argon is added which does not take part in the reaction,
aqueous solution, hence resulting base formed would the equilibrium remains undisturbed. It is because the
be strong. addition of an inert gas at constant volume does not
131. (a) H2O(l) + H2O(l) H3O+(aq) + OH–(aq) change the partial pressure or the molar concentration
acid base conjugate acid conjugate base of the substance involved in the reaction. The reaction
132. (c) Kw depends upon temperature as it is an equilibrium quotient changes only if the added gas is reactant or
constant. product involved in the reaction.
133. (d) Larger the value of Ka, the stronger is the acid. 146. (d) In biological systems buffer system of carbonic acid
134. (a) and sodium bicarbonate is found in our blood. It
135. (c) Bond energy being directly related to bond strength maintains the pH of blood to a constant value of about
increases with increase in bond strength 7.4.
147. (a) Ionic product of AgBr is greater than that of AgCl in
MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS comparison with there solubility product AgBr will
precipitate first rather than that of AgCl.
136. (d)
137. (b) (A) Liquid Vapour equilibrium exists at the CRITICAL THINKING TYPE QUESTIONS
boiling point.
(B) Solid Liquid equilibrium exists at the 148. (d) To calculate the value of K4 in the given equation we
melting point. should apply :
eqn. (2) + eqn.(3) × 3 – eqn. (1)
(C) Solid Vapour equilibrium exists at the
sublimation point. K 2 K33
(D) Solute Solute (solution) equilibrium exists hence K4 =
K1
in a saturated solution.
149. (d) Given,
138. (a) In case of A no. of moles of product and reactant are K1 1
same, in case of B no. of moles of reactant are greater AB A B
so reaction go forward, in case of C the no. of moles of [A ] [B ]
K1
product are greater than no. of moles of reactant. [AB]
139. (a) K2
(A) KP = KC (RT) n AB B AB 2
KP [AB2 ]
= (RT) n as n = –ve KP < KC K2
KC [AB] [B ]
(B) n > 0
Dividing K1 and K2, we get
(C) n = 2 – 1 = 1
(D) As the reaction is not containing any gaseous K1 [A ] [B ]2
K
component therefore KP is not defined for this. K2 [AB2 ]
140. (b)
(A) As n > 0 therefore if P , reaction will go in the [A ] K
backward direction. [AB2 ] [B ]2
EQUILIBRIUM 131
Ni(CO)4 [CO]2 Kp
150. (a) K1 = ; K2 = 154. (d) Kc
2
[CO 2 ] [CO2 ] (RT) n
[Ni(CO) 4 ] 1.44 10 5
K= (R in L. atm. K–1 mole–1).
[CO]4 (0.082 773) 2
2 155. (b) PCl5 PCl3 + Cl2
[Ni(CO)4 ] [CO 2 ]
K= × a (1-x) ax ax
[CO2 ]2 [CO]2
a = 2, x = 0.4, V = 2 L
K1 2 1 0.4
K PCl5 0.6 mol L 1
K 22 2
K1 2 0.4 1
151. (b) (I) N 2 2O 2 2NO 2 PCl3 Cl2 0.4 mol L
2
[NO 2 ]2
K1 ...(i) 0.4 0.4
[N 2 ][O 2 ]2 Kc 0.267
K2 0.6
(II) 2NO 2 N2 2O 2 156. (b) PCl5 PCl3 + Cl2
[N 2 ] [O2 ] 2 Moles at equilibrium
K2 ...(ii) 1 1 1
[NO 2 ]2
2 2 2
K3 1 Mole fraction at equilibrium
(III) NO2 N2 O2
2 1 1 1
[N 2 ]1/2 [O2 ] 3 3 3
K3
[NO 2 ] Partial pressure at equilibrium
2 [N 2 ][O 2 ]2 P P P
K3 ...(iii) 3 3 3
[NO2 ]2
P P
from equations (i), (ii) and (iii)
1 1 3 3 P
K1 Kp
K 2 ( K3 )2 P/3 3
152. (c) Reaction (c) can be obtained by adding reactions (a) 157. (b) NH 2 COONH 4 ( s ) 2NH 3 ( g ) CO 2 ( g )
and (b) therefore K3 = K1. K2 2
Hence (c) is the correct answer. PNH3 PCO2 2
153. (b) Given: Equilibrium constant (K1) for the reaction KP = PNH3 PCO2
PNH 2COONH 4 ( s)
K1 1 1
HI(g) H 2 (g) I 2 (g); K1 = 8; .........(i) As evident by the reaction, NH3 and CO2 are formed
2 2
in molar ratio of 2 : 1. Thus if P is the total pressure of
To find equilibrium constant for the following reaction
the system at equilibrium, then
H 2 (g) I2 (g) 2HI(g); K2 = ? .....(ii) 2 P 1 P
For this multiply (i) by 2, we get PNH3 PCO2
3 3
2HI(g) H 2 (g) I2 (g); K1 = 82 = 64 .....(iii) 2
[Note: When the equation for an equilibrium is 2P P 4 P3
KP =
multiplied by a factor, the equilibrium constant must 3 3 27
be raised to the power equal to the factor] Given KP = 2.9 × 10–5
Now reverse equation (iii), we get
4 P3
1 2.9 10 5
H 2 (g) I 2 (g) 2HI(g); K .....(iv) 27
64
[Note: For a reversible reaction, the equilibrium 5
2.9 10 27
constant of the backward reaction is inverse of the P3
4
equilibrium constant for the forward reaction.]
1
Equation (iv) is the same as the required equation (ii), 2.9 10 5
27 3
1 P = 5.82 × 10–2 atm
thus K2 for equation (ii) is i.e. option (b) is correct. 4
64
EBD_7207
132 EQUILIBRIUM
158. (c) Given reaction are Total number of moles
X Y Z ..... (i) = 2 (1–x) + 2x + x = (2 + x)
and A 2B ......(ii) 2(1 x)
PAB = P where P is the total pressure.
2 (2 x)
Let the total pressure for reaction (i) and (ii) be P1 and
P2 respectively, then 2x x
PAB = P , PB P
K P1 (2 x) 2 (2 x)
9
(given) Since x is very small so can be neglected in denominator
KP2 1 Thus, we get
After dissociation, PAB = (1 – x) × P PAB = x × P
2
X Y Z x
PB P
2 2
At equilibrium (1– )
2
[Let 1 mole of X dissociate with as degree of PAB PB2
dissociation ] Now, K P
2
Total number of moles = 1– + + PAB2
= (1+ ) x
(x)2 P 2 .P
1 = 2
Thus PX = . P1 ; PY = P1 ; (1 x) 2 P 2
1 1
x 3 .P3
= [ 1–x 1]
PZ = .P1 2 1 P2
1 1
x 3 .P 2.K p 2K p 3
= or x3 = or x =
K P1 .P1 . 2 P P
1 1 160. (a) Justification : According to Le-Chatelier’s principle, at
constant temperature, the equilibrium composition will
1 change but K will remain same.
P1 / .P1 ... (i)
1 161. (a) The reaction given is an exothermic reaction thus
Similarly for A 2B according to Lechatalier’s principle lowering of
temperature, addition of F2 and / or Cl2 favour the for
At equilibrium (1– ) 2
ward direction and hence the production of ClF3 .
We have,
162. (a)
2 P2
2
1 163. (c) Strong base has higher tendency to accept the proton.
K P2 / P2 ...(ii) Increasing order of base and hence the order of
1 1
accepting tendency of proton is
Dividing (i) by (ii), we get I HS NH3 RNH 2
2
K P1 .P1 K P1 1 P1
or . 164. (d) [Cu(H2O)4]2+ + 4NH3 [Cu(NH3)4]2+ + 4H2O
K P2 2 K P2 4 P2
4 .P2 involves lose and gain of electrons. H2O is coordinated
to Cu by donating electrons (LHS). It is then removed
1 P1 K P1 9 by withdrawing electrons.
or 9 .
4 P2 K P2 1 165. (b) [H3O]+ for a solution having pH = 3 is given by
[H3O]+ = 1×10–3 moles/litre
P1 36 [ [H3O]+ = 10–pH]
or or P1 : P2 = 36 : 1
P2 1 Similarly for solution having pH = 4,
[H3O]+ = 1 × 10–4 moles/ litre and for pH = 5
159. (b) For the reaction
[H3O+] = 1×10–5 moles/ litre
2AB2 (g) 2AB(g) B2 (g) Let the volume of each solution in mixture be IL, then
at equi 2(1 x) 2x x
total volume of mixture solution L = (1 + 1 + 1) L = 3L
2 Total [H3 O] + ion present in mixture solution
AB B2 (2x) 2 x = (10–3 + 10–4 + 10–5) moles
Kc or K c
AB2
2
{2(1 x)}2 Then [H3O]+ ion concentration of mixture solution
3
= x3 [(1–x) can be neglected in denominator (1– x) 1] 10 10 4 10 5 0.00111
= M= M
The partial pressure at equilibrium are calculated on 3 3
the basis of total number of moles at equilibrium. = 0.00037 M = 3.7 ×10–4 M.
EQUILIBRIUM 133
10 On taking log on both side

166. (d) Given concentration of NaOH = 10 M
– log [H+] = –log (55 × 10–14)1/2
NaOH Na OH
1
10 10 M
10 10 pH = – log 55 7 log10
2
10
[OH ] from NaOH = 10 pH = – 0.87 + 7
We have to consider dissociation of H2O = 6.13
7 – +
[OH ] from H 2 O = 10 170. (c) CH3COOH CH3COO + H
7 10
Total [OH ] = 10 10 [ CH 3COO ][ H ]
Ka
1001 [ CH 3COOH ]
= 10 7 (0.001 1) = 10 7
= 10 10
1001 Given that,
1000
pOH = – log [OH ] [CH 3 COO ] [H ] 3.4 10 4 M
= (log1001 10 10 ) = – 3.004 + 10 = 6.9996 Ka for CH3COOH = 1.7 × 10–5
CH3COOH is weak acid, so in it [CH3COOH] is equal
pH = 14 – pOH = 14 – 6.996 = 7.004
to initial concentration. Hence
pH of 10–10 M NaOH solution is nearest to 7.
167. (c) Number of meq. of the acid = 0.04 × 100 = 4 (3.4 10 4 )(3.4 10 4 )
1.7 10 5
Number of meq. of the base = 0.02 × 100 = 2 [CH 3 COOH ]
Number of meq. of the acid left on mixing = 4 – 2 = 2
Total volume of the solution = 200 mL 4 4
3.4 10 3.4 10
No. of meq of the acid present in 1000 mL of the [ CH 3 COOH ]
1.7 10 5
solution = 10
= 6.8 × 10–3M
or No. of eq. of the acid in 1000 mL of the solution
171. (c) Higher the value of Ka lower will be the value of pKa
10
= = 0.01 i.e. higher will be the acidic nature. Further since
1000 CN–, F– and NO2– are conjugate base of the acids
Since the acid is monobasic and completely ionises in HCN, HF and HNO2 respectively hence the correct
solution order of base strength will be
0.01 N HCl = 0.01 M HCl F– < NO2– < CN–
Thus [H ] = 0.01 ( stronger the acid weaker will be its conjugate base)
pH = – log (0.01) = – (– 2) = 2
172. (c) Given, CH3COOH CH3COO– + H+ ;
168. (b) [H3O]+ for a solution having pH = 3 is given by
[H3O]+ = 1×10–3 moles/litre Ka1 , = 1.5 × 10– 5 ....(i)
[ [H3O]+ = 10–pH]
Similarly for solution having pH = 4, HCN H++ CN–; K a 2 = 4.5 × 10–10
[H3O]+ = 1 × 10–4 moles/ litre and for pH=5 or H+ + CN– HCN;
[H3O+] = 1×10–5 moles/ litre
1 1
Let the volume of each solution in mixture be IL, then K 'a 2 ...(ii)
total volume of mixture solution L = (1 + 1 + 1) L =3L Ka 2 4.5 10 –10
Total [H3O]+ ion present in mixture solution From (i) and (ii), we find that the equilibrium constant
= (10–3 + 10–4 + 10–5) moles (Ka) for the reaction,
Then [H3O]+ ion concentration of mixture solution CN– + CH3COOH CH3COO– + HCN, is
3
10 10 4 10 5 0.00111 Ka K a1 K a' 2
= M= M
3 3
= 0.00037 M = 3.7 ×10–4 M. 1.5×10 –5 1
= –10
105 3.33 10 4
169. (a) Kw at 25°C = 1 × 10–14 4.5×10 3
At 25ºC
wt. of solute per litre of solution
Kw = [H+] [OH–] = 10–14 173. (d) As, molarity,
At 100°C (given) Mol. wt. of solute
Kw = [H+] [OH–] = 55 × 10–14 1000
Molarity of H2O = mole/litre
for a neutral solution 18
[H+] = [OH–] H2O H+ + OH–
[H ] = 55 × 10–14
+ 2
c (1 – c c
or [H+] = (55 × 10–14)1/2
pH = – log [H+] c 2
Thus, K a c 2 = 1.8 × 10–14
1
EBD_7207
134 EQUILIBRIUM
174. (c) For weak acid dissociation equilibria, degree of 1 1
dissociation is given as : È 3.2 ¥10-14 ˘ 3
Solubility of MX 2 = ÍÍ ˙ or ÈÍ 32 ¥10-15 ˘˙ 3
4 ˙ ÍÎ 4 ˙˚
Ka Ka ÍÎ ˙˚
% 100
c c 1
= ÈÍ8¥10-15 ˘˙ 3 or 2¥10-5
Î ˚
[H ][A ] [H ]c [H ]
Also, K a 1
[HA] c (1 ) (1 )
È 2.7 ¥10-15 ˘ 4
Solubility of M 3 X = ÍÍ ˙
˙
log K a log H log ÎÍ 27 ˚˙
1
1
1 = ÈÍ10-16 ˘˙ 4 or 10–4
or pK a pH log
Î ˚
Thus the solubilities are in the order MX > M3 X> MX2
1
pK a pH log i.e the correct answer is (d).
177. (c) Ksp = [Ag+] [Cl–]
1 1.8 × 10–10 = [Ag+] [0.1]
10pK a pH
[Ag+] = 1.8 × 10–9 M
Ksp = [Pb+2] [Cl–]2
1
or, 10pK a pH
1 1.7 × 10–5 = [Pb+2] [0.1]2
[Pb+2] = 1.7 × 10–3 M
1 178. (d) The solubility equilibrium for AgI is
pKa pH
[1 10 ] AgI (aq) Ag aq + I aq ;
175. (b) The highest pH will be recorded by the most basic Ksp = [Ag+][I–]
solution. The basic nature of hydroxides of alkaline Let solubility of AgI be S moles per litre,
earth metals increase as we move from Mg to Ba and [Ag+] = S, [I–] = S
thus the solution of BaCl2 in water will be most basic Ksp = [Ag+][I–]
and so it will have highest pH. 1 × 10–16 = (S) × (S) = S2
1
176. (d) MX M X (Where s is the solubility)
s s S = 1 10 16 2 1 10 8
On calculating solubility of all given compounds
Then Ksp s 2 or s K sp
Compound Solubility
Æ M 2+ + 2X -
Similarly for MX 2 ææ AgCl 1 10 5
s 2s AgI 1 10 8
7
1 PbCrO4 2 10
K sp 3 Ag 2 CO3 1.26 10 4
K sp s (2 s ) 2 4 s3 or s
4
Ag2CO3 is most soluble and AgI is least soluble.
and for M 3 X 3M X 3 179. (b) Ksp = [Fe3+].[3OH–]
3s s So molar solubility of Fe3+ = S and [3OH–] = 3S
1 Fe(OH)3 Fe3 3OH
Ksp 4 [S] [3S]
Ksp (3s )3 s 27 s 4 or s 1.0 ×10–38 = [S] [3S]3
27
1.0 ×10–38 = S4 × 27
From the given values of Ksp for MX, MX2 and 1.0 10 38
M3 X, we can find the solubilities of those salts at S4 =
27
temperature, T.
S4 = 3.703×10–40
Solubility of MX = 4¥10 -8 -4
= 2¥10 40 1/ 4
S = 3.703 10 = 1.386 × 10–10
EBD_7207
142 REDOX REACTIONS
14. (b) Blue colour of the solution disappear due to

FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS formation of Zn 2+.
1. (a) Addition of oxygen takes place in oxidation. 15. (d) Correct order is Zn > Cu > Ag.
2. (c) Given reaction is oxidation reaction due to removal 16. (b) For elements, in the free or the uncombined state,
of electropositive element potassium from potassium each atom bears an oxidation number of zero.
ferrocyanide. 17. (c) Oxidation number of oxygen in OF2 = + 2.
D 1
3. (d) 2Na(s) + H 2 (g) ææÆ 2NaH(s)
In KO2 =
With the careful application of the concept of 2
electronegativity only S we can find that sodium is 18. (d) Oxidation number of hydrogen when it is bonded to
oxidised and hydrogen is reduced. metals in binary compounds is –1
4. (a) Losing of electron is called oxidation. 19. (a) Auric Chloride = Au(III)Cl3
5. (b) Oxidation reaction (loss of 2e–) 20. (d) Let the oxidation no. of N in HNO3 = x
1 + x + (3 × – 2) = 0
2Na(s) + S(s) (Na + )2S– (s) x= +5
+2 -1 +1 +6 -2 +2 +6 -2 +1 -1
– 21. (c) Ba O2 + H 2 S O4 ææ
Æ Ba S O4 + H 2 O2
Reduction (gain of 2e )
reaction In this reaction, none of the elements undergoes a change
in oxidation number or valency.
6. (a) O.N. of Mn in MnO – is +7 and in Mn it is +2. The
22. (a) Let x = oxidation no. of Cr in K2Cr2O7.
difference is of 5 electrons. (2 × 1) + (2 × x) + 7 (– 2) = 0
7. (a) Ox. no. of Cr on both side is + 6. or 2 + 2x – 14 = 0 or x = + 6.
8. (a) 4P 3KOH 3H 2 O KH 2 PO 2 PH 3 23. (a) (i) Oxidation state of element in its free state is zero.
O.N of P = 0, In KH2PO2 it is + 1, In PH3 it is –3. (ii) Sum of oxidation states of all atoms in compound is
Hence P is oxidised and reduced. zero.
9. (a) In a redox reaction, one molecule is oxidised and other O.N. of S in S8 = 0; O.N. of S in S2F2 = + 1;
molecule is reduced i.e. oxidation number of reactants O.N. of S in H2S = –2;
are changed. 24. (c) K[Co(CO) ]
0 0 1 1
H2 Br 2 2 HBr Let O.N. of Co be x then
Here H2 is oxidised and Br2 is reduced, thus it is 1 × ( 1) x 4× (0) 0
for K for Co
oxidation-reduction reaction. for CO
+ O.N. of Co is = –1
10. (b) 4Na + O 2 ææ
Æ 2Na 2 O
25. (d) (NH4)2 SO4 is split into ions. NH 4 . Let O.N. of N be x
Loss of electrons (oxidation)
then, 1 × (x) + 4 × (+1) = 1 x = –3
In this reaction, Na converts into ion (Na+) and Na
donates electrons to oxygen atoms, So, Na behaves H 1
as reducing agent. 1 |
11. (b) Zn2+ + 2e– Zn(s) 26. (c) H – C 22 – Cl 1 O.N. of C is zero
|
Here electrons are reducing from Zn 2+ to Zn. 1
Cl
12. (c) Co(s) Cu 2 (aq) Co 2 (aq) Cu(s)
This reaction is a redox reaction as Co undergoes 27. (d) O.N. of Fe in (a), (b), (c) and (d) respectively are : +3,
oxidation whereas Cu+2 undergoes reduction. +2, +2 and 0.
loss of 10e 28. (d) OsO4
13. (c) N 24 H 44 N 2 6 Y;
N Let O.N. of Os be x then 1 × (x) + 4(–2) = 0
O.N.of N changes from – 2 to +3 x=8
REDOX REACTIONS 143
29. (a) Fe(CO)5 is metal carbonyl, hence O.N. of Fe is zero. 47. (b) Fluorine is so reactive that it attacks water and
30. (c) O.N. of Mn in K2MnO4 is +6 displaces the oxygen of water :
31. (d) MnO – (O.S. of Mn +7); Cr (CN) 36– (O.S. of Cr +3), 1 2 0 1 1 0
2H 2O( I ) 2F2 ( g ) 4HF( aq ) O 2 ( g )
NiF62 – (O.S. of Ni +4) and CrO2Cl2 (O.S. of Cr +6) 48. (b) As fluorine is the strongest oxidising agent; there is
32. (d) O.N. of carbon in CH3CHO is –1; in other cases it is no way to convert F– ions to F2 by chemical means.
zero. The only way to achieve F2 from F– is to oxidise it
electrolytically.
33. (b) O.N. of iodine in I3 is –1/3
49. (c) F2 being most electronegative element cannot exhibit
34. (b) M3+ on losing 3 elections will become M+6 and O.N. = + 6. any positive oxidation state.
35. (b) The method of representing oxidation number by a
In ClO –4 chlorine is present in its highest oxidation
Roman numeral within the paranthesis represents Stock
notation. state i.e + 7. Therefore it does not show
36. (c) Carbon has the maximum oxidation state of + 4, disproportionation reaction.
therefore carbon dioxide (CO2 ) cannot act as a 50. (c) A reaction, in which a substance undergoes
reducing agent. simultaneous oxidation and reduction, is called
disproportionation reaction. In these reactions, the
37. (b) Let the oxidation no. of Fe in Fe3O 4 x
same substance simultaneously acts as an oxidising
3x + (– 2 × 4) = 0 or 3x = 8 agent and as a reducing agent. Here Cl undergoes
8 simultaneous oxidation and reduction.
x
3
2KOH Cl 2 KCl KOCl H 2O.
38. (c) Let oxidation state of oxygen in OF2 = x 0 1 1
x + ( – 1 × 2) = 0 51. (d) In disproportionation reaction, one element of a
x= +2 compound will simultaneously get reduced and
39. (d) In H2O2 : 2 × (+1) + 2 × x = 0 x = –1 oxidised. In ClO4 , oxidation number of Cl is + 7 and it
In CO2 : 4 + 2x = 0 x = –2
can not increase it further. So, ClO4 will not get
In H2O : 2 × (+1) + x = 0 x = –2
In F2O : 2 × (–1) + x = 0 x = +2 oxidised and so will not undergo disporportionation
– reaction.
40. (d) NO3 N 2 H 4 So, for reduction of 1 mole of NO
5 2 52. (d) 3Br2 6CO32 – 3H 2 O 5Br – BrO3– 6HCO 3–
3 number of electrons required is 7. O.N. of Br 2 changes from 0 to –1 and +5
41. (a) Let the oxidation state of S be x. hence it is reduced as well as oxidised.
S4O62– 4x – 12 = – 2 4x = 10 x = 10/4 = 2.5
53. (c)
42. (c) Species O.N.
54. (b) Phosphorus, sulphur and chlorine disproportionate in
Cl – –1
the alkaline medium.
ClO4– +7
D
ClO– +1 55. (b) 2H 2 O ææÆ 2H 2 + O 2
MnO4 – +7
There is decomposition of H2O molecule into H2 and
In ClO– chlorine is in +1 oxidation state which can be O2.
increased or decreased thus it acts as an oxidising or
56. (a) H+ ions are added to the expression on the
reducing agent.
appropriate side so that the total ionic charges of
In other given species the underlined elements are either
reactants and products become equal.
in their minimum or maximum oxidation state.
57. (d) Since reaction is occuring in basic medium therefore
43. (a) 2OH– are added on right side.
44. (b) O.N. of N changes from + 2 to + 5 hence NO is reducing.
2MnO 4 (aq) + Br– (aq)
45. (b) In KMnO4 : Let O.N. of Mn be x
+1 + x + 4(–2) = 0 x = +7 2MnO2(s) + Br O3– (aq) + 2OH–(aq)
In K2Cr2O7 : Let O.N. of Cr be x
Now, hydrogen atoms balanced by adding one H2O
2(1) + 2x + 7(–2) = 0 x = +6
molecule to the left side
46. (d) The element is Ti (At. no. 22). Electronic configuration
2MnO 4 (aq) Br (aq) H 2 O( )
is 1s2, 2s2p6, 3s2p6d2, 4s2. the energy level of 3d and
4s is very close. It can have Ti4+ O.S. 2MnO2(s) + BrO 3 (aq) 2 OH (aq)
EBD_7207
144 REDOX REACTIONS
58. (c) The balanced equation : 73. (a) Lower the value of reduction potential higher will be
2 NH 3 OCl N 2H 4 Cl H 2O reducing power hence the correct order will be
Mn2+ < Cl– < Cr3+ < Cr
59. (b) The balanced equation is
74. (d)
2C2 H6 7O2 4CO 2 6H 2O.
75. (d) Order of decreasing electrode potentials of Mg, K, Ba
Ratio of the coefficients of CO2 and H2O is 4 : 6 or 2 : 3. and Ca is
60. (a) 2MnO 4– 5H 2 O 2 6H 2Mn 2 5O 2 8H 2 O. Mg > Ca > Ba > K
It can be explained by their standard reduction
61. (d) 8KMnO 4 3NH 3 8MnO 2 3KNO 3 5KOH potentials.
2H 2O E 2.925
K |K
62. (b) Reduction
E 2.90
Ba 2 |Ba
2Fe3 Sn 2 2Fe2 Sn 4
Oxidation E 2.87
Ca 2 |Ca
63. (c) On balancing the given reaction, we find
3Na2HAsO3 + NaBrO3 + 6HCl E 2.37
Mg 2 |Mg
6NaCl + 3H3AsO4 + NaBr
Highly negative value of E red shows the least value
64. (c)
o 5 –1 of electrode potential.
x Cl 2 6 H – ClO 3 yCl 3H 2 O 76. (a) Standard electrode potential i.e. reduction potential of
–1
A is minimum (–3.05V) i.e. its oxidation potential is
on balancing the eq we get maximum which implies ‘A’ is most reactive chemically.
3Cl2 6OH ClO 3 5Cl 3H 2 O
65. (d) Negative E Stronger reducing agent or weaker
oxidising agent 77. (a) For statement (iii), HgCl2 is reduced to Hg2Cl2
78. (b) For statement (ii) reducing agents are donor of electrons.
Positive E Weaker reducing agent or stronger
79. (b) H2O2 is strong oxidizing than I2, reduction potential
oxidising agent.
of H2O2 is greater than that of I2.
66. (b) Strongest oxidising agent = Ag+/Ag(s)
80. (d) All the given statements are correct.
Weakest oxidising agent = Mg2+/Mg(s)
67. (a) More is E∞RP , more is the tendency to get itself reduced 81. (a) (i) Mn+ + ne– M, for this reaction, high
or more is oxidising power. negative value of E° indicates lower reduction
68. (a) Higher the value of reduction potential higher will be potential, that means M will be a good reducing
the oxidising power whereas the lower the value of agent.
reduction potential higher will be the reducing power.
Stronger reducing agent Easy to oxidise
69. (c) The redox couple with maximum reduction potential
will be best oxidising agent and with minimum reduction
Lower reduction potential higher oxidation potential
potential will be best reducing agent.
70. (a) Since oxidation potential of Zn is highest hence (ii) Element F Cl Br I
strongest reducing agent. Reduction potential +2.87 +1.36 +1.06 +0.54
71. (a) Fe Al Br (E° volt)
0.77 –1.66 1.08 E°Red As reduction potential decreases from fluorine to
–0.77 1.66 –1.08 E°Oxi iodine, oxidising nature also decreases from fluorine
Hence, reducing power Al > Fe2+ > Br– to iodine.
72. (d) More the negative reduction potential, more is the (iii) The size of halide ions increases from F – to I –.
tendency to lose electron. The reducing power The bigger ion can loose electron easily. Hence the
increases as the standard reduction potential becomes reducing nature increases from HF to HI.
more and more negative.
82. (a)
Thus, Li is the strongest reducing agent as the
83. (a) –(4/3) is the average oxidation state of C in C3H4.
standard reduction potential of Li+/ Li is most negative,
–3.05 V.
REDOX REACTIONS 145
MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS Oxidation state of N in NaN3 is

1
84. (b) Oxidation is addition of electronegative or removal + 1 + 3x = 0 or x = –
3
of electroposition element to a substance or removal
Oxidation state of N in Mg3N2 is
of hydrogen from a substance.
3 × 2 + 2x = 0 or x = –3
Reduction is addition of electropositive or removal
Thus 3 molecules (i.e. NH3, NaN3 and Mg3N2 have
of electropositive element or removal of oxygen from
nitrogen in negative oxidation state.
a substance.
93. (b)
85. (b)
94. (b) Oxidation no. of O are + 2, 0, – 1/2 and – 1 respectively
86. (a) CuO +2
MnO2 +4 95. (d) PO3–
4 = x + 4 (– 2) = – 3; x – 8 = – 3; x = + 5
HAuCl4 +3
Tl2O +1 SO 2–
4 = x + 4 (– 2) = – 2; x – 8 = – 2; x = + 6
87. (b)
Cr2 O72– = 2x + 7 (– 2) = – 2; 2x – 14 = – 2;
ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS 2x =12; x = + 6
96. (b) On reaction with hot and concentrated alkali a mixture
88. (c) In reaction 2Na(s) + Cl2(g) 2NaCl(s) sodium is
of chloride and chlorate is formed
oxidised by loss of electrons and acts as a reducing
agent (donor of electrons). 3Cl2 + 3 NaOH(excess) Hot
89. (b) Both Assertion and Reason are true but reason is not
1 5
the correct explanation of assertion. Greater the number
5NaCl NaClO3 3H 2O
of negative atoms present in the oxy-acid make the
acid stronger. In general, the strengths of acids that 97. (a)
have general formula (HO)m ZOn can be related to the 98. (d) In (i) and (ii) both P and S are in highest oxidation
value of n. As the value of n increases, acidic character state. In (iii) and (iv) ; P has oxidation state of +4
also increases. The negative atoms draw electrons which can be oxidized to +5 state, while in case of
away from the Z-atom and make it more positive. The NH3 nitrogen has oxidation state of –3 which can be
Z-atom, therefore, becomes more effective in oxidised.
withdrawing electron density away from the oxygen 99. (c) The redox reaction involve loss or gain of electron(s)
atom that bonded to hydrogen. In turn, the electrons i.e. change in oxidation state. Given reaction is not a
of H – O bond are drawn more strongly away from the redox reaction as this reaction involves no change in
H-atom. The net effect makes it easier from the proton oxidation state of reactant or product.
release and increases the acid a strength. 100. (b) During disproportionation same compound undergo
90. (b) Decomposition of calcium carbonate is not a redox simultaneous oxidation reduction.
reaction. Oxidation
Oxidation loss of 2e– 1 5
91. (a) 3HO Cl 2HCl HClO 3
Zn(s) + Cu2+(aq) Zn2+ (aq) + Cu(s)
Reduction
101. (a) ClO3 Cl20
Reduction gain of 2e–
x 6 1 x 0
x 5 x 0 x = oxidation number
Molecular mass 84.45
92. (c) Calculating the oxidation state of nitrogen in given Equivalent mass = = 16.89
Oxidation number 5
molecules;
102. (c) On balancing the given equations, we get
Oxidation state of N in NH3 is
x + 3 × (+ 1) = 0 or x = – 3 2MnO 4 5C 2 O 4 2 16H 2Mn
Oxidation state on N in NaNO3 is 10CO 2 8H 2O
1 + x + 3 × (– 2) = 0 or x = + 5 So, x = 2, y = 5 & z = 16
EBD_7207
146 REDOX REACTIONS
103. (a) Given reaction is 3
MnO4 5e 8H Mn 2 4H 2O
IO3 aI bH cH 2 O dI 2 5
st
I half reaction Fe2+ Fe3+ + le–
I I2 ...(i) SO32 SO 24 2e
–1 0 (oxidation)
IInd half reaction 8 24
MnO 4 H Fe2 SO32
IO 3 I2 ...(ii) 5 5
`
+5 0 (reduction) 3Mn 2 4H 2 O Fe3 SO 24
On balancing equation (ii) we have
10e 2IO3 12H I2 6H 2 O ...(iii) 105. (b) If one uses HCl, HBr or HI, to make acidic medium for
Now, balance equation (i) KMnO4 than all the halide ion can be oxidized as the
2I I2 2e ....(iv) reduction potential of KMnO4 is very high in acidic
medium, while in case of H2SO4, sulphur is already in
Multiply eqn (iv) by 5 and add it to eqn (iii), we get
its highest oxidation state cannot be further oxidized.
2IO 3 10I 12H 6I 2 6H 2 O
106. (d) Reduction potential of Cu(II) is greater than that of
or, IO3 5I 6H 3I 2 3H 2 O Zn(II) and Al(III) thus can be easily replaced by these
Hence a = 5, b = 6, c = 3, d = 3 ions. Moreover solution of copper is blue in color.
107. (d) F2 is strongest oxididing agent among halogens thus
104. (a) Both Fe(ii) and S(iv) in SO32 can be oxidised to Fe(iii) X– can be possibly Br–, Cl– or I–.
and (SO4)2– respectively hence (3/5)×0.5 =0.3 moles /
litre.
EBD_7207
154 HYDROGEN
19. (b) Mn + 2HNO3 (dil.) Mn(NO3)2 + H2

catalyst
1. (c) (i) and (iii) are properties of hydrogen which shows 20. (b) CO + H 2+ H2O CO 2+ 2H2
its resemblance with alkali metals whereas (ii) , (iv) water gas
and (v) shows resemblance with halogens. 21. (a) Zinc has no action on cold water.
2. (d) Chlorine has lone pair which it can donate to form 22. (a) Cu + 4HNO3(conc.) Cu(NO3)2 + 2NO2 + 2H2O
coordinate bond while hydrogen cannot.
3. (c) Hydrogen behaves as a metal at very high pressure. C2 H 5OH Na C2 H 5O Na 1 / 2H 2
4. (d) Hydrogen is a non-metal while all other members of
group 1 (alkali metals) are metals. Mg 2H 2 O(steam) Mg(OH) 2 H2
5. (a) H + e– (1s1) H– (1s2 or [He])
C6 H 5OH Na C6 H 5O Na 1 / 2H 2
F + e–([He]2s22p5) F– ( [He] 2s2 2p6 or [Ne])
6. (c) In metal hydrides the O.S. of hydrogen –1 otherwise it NaH H 2 O NaOH H 2
is +1.
23. (d) Very pure hydrogen can be prepared by the action of
7. (d)
water on sodium hydride.
8. (c) (i) Protium, deuterium and tritium are isotopes of
hydrogen. NaH + H2O NaOH + H2
(ii) Ortho and para hydrogens are allotropes of (very pure Hydrogen)
hydrogen. In ortho hydrogen, protons are cobalt
24. (b) CO(g) + 2H2(g) CH3OH(l)
spinning in same direction (parallel spin), while in catalyst
para hydrogen, protons spin in opposite direction 25. (c) Hydrogen is not used in the synthesis of
(antiparallel). hydroquinone and tartaric acid.
9. (a) Number of neutrons in protium, deuterium and 26. (d) Almost all elements except noble gases, forms
tritium respectively is = 0, 1 and 2 hydrides.
10. (c) Tritium is radioactive and emits low energy – particles. 27. (c) Melts of ionic hydrides conduct electricity and
11. (c) Hydrogen bond is weak force of attraction existing liberate dihydrogen gas at anode.
between molecules. Its energy is equal to 3-10 k cal 28. (c) Fire due to action of water on saline hydrides cannot
12. (c) Except method given in statement (iii) all other are be extinguished with water or CO2. These hydrides
commercial methods for production of dihydrogen. can reduce CO2 at high temperature to produce O2.
13. (d) Zn+ 2NaOH Na2ZnO2 + H2 29. (b) Electron deficient hydride = B2H6
Electron precise = CH4
(Sodium zincate)
Electron rich = NH3 and HF
1270 K
14. (c) CH4(g) + H2O(g) Ni
CO + 3H2 30. (a)
Mixture of CO and H2 is called water gas. 31. (d) All metal hydrides are ionic in nature.
15. (c) Mixture of CO and H2 is used in synthesis of 32. (d) Metal hydride +H2O Metal hydroxide + H2
methanol and a number of hydrocarbons due to this 33. (d) Due to its covalent nature MgH2 is Polymeric in nature.
reason it is also called syn gas. 34. (c) Ionic hydrides give the basic solution when it reacts
16. (d) Carbon dioxide formed in water gas shift reaction is with water, e.g.,
removed by scrubbing with sodium arsenite solution. LiH + H2O LiOH + H2
35. (d) d- and f-block elements form metallic hydride.
17. (c) Fe dil. H 2SO 4 FeSO 4 H2 While p-block elements form covalent hydrides, s-block
3Fe 4H 2 O Fe 3O 4 4H 2 elements except Be and Mg form ionic hydrides.
Steam Hydrides of Be, Mg, Cu, Zn, Ca and Hg are intermediate
Cu + dil. HCl No reaction hydride.
Copper does not evolve H2 from acid as it is below 36. (b)
hydrogen in electrochemical series. 37. (b) LiH + AlCl3 (AlH3)n excess Li[AlH 4 ]
LiH
2Na + 2C 2 H 5OH Æ 2C 2H 5ONa + H 2 ≠ Lithuim aluminium hydride is a most useful organic
18. (a) Mg dil. HNO 3 Mg( NO 3 ) 2 H 2 (Mg and Mn reducing agent. It reduces functional groups but does
give H2 with dil HNO3) not attack double bonds.
HYDROGEN 155
38. (a) Polarity of bond depends on difference in 52. (a) Calgon process is used to remove permanent hardness
electronegativity of the two concerned atoms. H2O is of water
more polar than H2S because oxygen (in O–H) is more 53. (b) Na zeolite + CaCl 2 Ca zeolite 2NaCl
electronegative than sulphur (in S–H).
54. (a) The complex salt of metaphosphoric acid sodium
39. (b) In gas phase water is a bent molecule with a bond
hexametaphosphate (NaPO3)6, is known as calgon. It
angle of 104.5° and O–H bond length of 95.7 pm.
is represented as Na2[Na4(PO3)6]
40. (d) The hybridisation in water is sp3 and bond angle 104.5º
55. (c) Polyphosphates (sodium hexametaphosphates,
2 –
41. (c) O 95.7 pm O sodium tripolyphosphate or STPP) form soluble
104.5° + + complexes with Ca+2, Mg+2 present in hard water.
H H H H
(i) (ii) 56. (b)
57. (a) This method is known as Clark's process. In this
method temporary hardness is removed by adding lime
water or milk of lime.
Ca(OH)2 Ca(HCO3 )2 2CaCO3 2H 2O
O ppt.
+ +
H H H 58. (c) Permanent hardness of water is due to chlorides and
H sulphates of calcium and magnesium.
(iii) 59. (a) H2SO4 + BaO2 BaSO4 + H2O2
42. (c) The unusual properties of water in the condensed 60. (d) MnO2 , PbO2 and BaO will not give H2O2 with HCl.
phase (liquid an solid states) are due to the presence MnO2 and PbO2 will give Cl2 and BaO will react with
of extensive hydrogen bonding between the water HCl to give BaCl2 and water.
molecules. 61. (b)
43. (c) The high boiling point of water is due to H-bonding. 62. (c) 30 vol of H2O2 means one volume of H2O2 on
44. (b) Due to high dielectric constant, water acts as a good decomposition will give 30 volume of oxygen.
solvent therefore it is also called a universal solvent.
vol. strength
45. (b) In the structure of ice each molecule of H2O is 63. (a) Normality of H2O2 =
surrounded by three H2O molecules in hexagonal 5.6
Volume of normal (1N) H2O2 solution = 5.6 volumes.
honey comb manner which results an open cage like
structure. As a result there are a number of 'hole' or Volume of strength of 1.5 N H2O2
= 1.5 × 5.6 = 8.4 volumes.
open spaces. In such a structure lesser number of
molecules are packed per ml. When ice melts a large 68 10
64. (b) Strength of 10V H2O2 = 100 3.035%
no. of hydrogen bonds are broken. The molecules 22400
therefore move into the holes or open spaces and come 65. (b) Structure of H2O2 is nonplanar
closer to each other than they were in solid state. This 66. (d) O – O – H bond angle in H2O2 is 94.8°.
result sharp increase in the density. Therefore ice has H
lower density than water. 67. (b) O–O is the true structure of H2O2.
46. (a) We know that due to polar nature, water molecules are H
held together by intermolecular hydrogen bonds. The 68. (b)
structure of ice is open with large number of vacant
69. (a) H 2O 2 H 2 O [O]
spaces, therfore the density of ice is less than water. weak acid
47. (a) Two ice cubes stick to each other due to H-bonding.
48. (d) 70. (b) H 2 O2 [O] Oxidation H 2 O O 2
49. (d) Sodium is most electropositive element among those 71. (b) The value of dipole moment of H2O2 is 2.1 D, which
suggest the structure of H2O2 cannot be planar.
given.
2Na 2H 2O 2NaOH H 2 An open-book structure is suggested for H2 O2 in
Room temp. which O – H bonds lie in different plane.
50. (b) Water has high dielectric constant i.e., 78.39 C2/Nm2, 72. (a) In the following reaction H2O2 acts as a reducing agent.
high liquid range and can dissolve maximum number PbO2(s) + H2O2 (aq) PbO(s) + H2O( ) + O2 (g)
of compounds. That is why it is used as universal 73. (a) As H2O2 is loosing electrons so it is acting as reducing
solvent. agent.
51. (b) Temporary hardness is due to presence of bicarbonates
74. (c) H2S is oxidised to S by H2O2.
of calcium and magnesium and permanent hardness is
due to the sulphates and chlorides of both of calcium 75. (d) H2O2 does not have basic properties.
and magnesium. 76. (b) 77. (c)
EBD_7207
156 HYDROGEN
78. (b, d) HOCl(aq) H 2 O 2 (aq)
MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS
H 3O (aq) Cl (aq) O 2 (g)
100. (a) 101. (b) 102. (c)
I 2 (s) H 2 O 2 (aq) 2OH (aq) 103. (d) Many salts can be crystallised as hydrated salts from
2I (aq) 2H 2 O(l ) O 2 (g) an aqueous solutions such an association of water is
79. (a) Option (a) represents oxidising action of H2O2 in of different types viz.,
acidic medium. (i) Coordinated water e.g., [Cr(H2O)6]3+ 3Cl–
80. (d) H2O2 is not used as a moderator in nuclear reactors (ii) Interstitial water e.g., BaCl2 . 2H2O
81. (d) Decomposition of H2O2 can be accelerated by finely (iii) Hydrogen-bonded water
divided metals such as Ag, Au, Pt, Co, Fe etc. e.g., [Cu(H2O)4]4+ SO2– 4. H2O in CuSO4.5H2O
82. (c) H2O2 is unstable liquid and decomposes into water 104. (d) Heavy water is D2O (1 – C); Temporary hard water
and oxygen either on standing or on heating. contains the bi-carbonates of Mg and Ca (2 – A); Soft
83. (d) Although H2O2 is a better polar solvent than H2O. water contains no foreign ions (3 – B); Permanent
However it cannot be used as such because of the hard water contains the sulphates and chlorides of
strong auto-oxidation ability. Mg and Ca (4 – D) therefore the answer is D.
84. (d) H2O2 show all these properties. 105. (b)
85. (b) The formula of heavy water (deuterium oxide) is D2O.
86. (a) CaC2 2D 2 O C 2 D 2 Ca(OD) 2 ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS
87. (b) D2O is used in nuclear reactors as moderator. 106. (a) Due to extremely small size of H+ as compared to
88. (b) Al4C3 + D2O 3CD4 + 4Al(OD)3 normal atomic and ionic size H+ does not exist freely.
89. (c) Heavy water is formed by the combination of heavier 107. (a) 108. (a)
isotope (1H2 or D) with oxygen. 109. (c) Both assertion is correct reason is not true.
2D 2 O 2 2D 2 O Correct reason : Calgon forms soluble complexes with
Heavy water
Ca2+ and Mg2+ in which properties of these ions are
90. (d) H2 O absorbs neutrons more than D2 O and this masked.
decreases the number of neutrons for the fission 110. (a) 2C17H35COONa(aq) + M2+ (aq)
process.
(C17H35COO)2M (M = Ca or Mg) + 2Na+(aq)
91. (b) Heavy water is D2O hence
111. (a) Both assertion and reason are true and reason is the
number of electrons = 2 + 8 = 10 correct explanation of assertion.
number of protons = 10 112. (a)
Atomic mass of D2O = 4 + 16 = 20
hence number of neutron CRITICAL THINKING TYPE QUESTIONS
= Atomic mass – number of protons
= 20 – 10 = 10 113. (d) H2 will not reduce heated Al2O3. As Al is more electro-
92. (b) The only pollutant in combustion of dihydrogen is positive than hydrogen. therefore, its oxide will not be
oxides of dinitrogen (due to the presence of reduced by hydrogen.
dinitrogen as impurity with dihydrogen). 114. (d) Heavy water is stable.
93. (d) It is for the first time in the history of India that a pilot 115. (a) 1H1 1D2 1T3
project using dihydrogen as fuel was launched in no. of neutrons respectively are 0 , 1 , 2
October 2005 for running automobiles. Initially 5% H2 no. of protons respectively are 1 , 1 , 1
has been mixed in CNG for use in four wheeler vehicles. Hence the sum of protons + neutrons = 1 + 2 + 3 = 6
116. (b) H (aq) H 2 O(l) OH (aq) H 2 (g)
STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS base 1 acid 1 base 2 acid2
94. (c) Tanks of metal alloy like NaNi5, Ti – TiH2, Mg – MgH2 In this reaction H–acts as bronsted base as it accepts
etc are used for storage of dihydrogen in small one proton (H+) from H2O and for H2.
quantities. 2 0
95. (a) 117. (c) H 2 S H 2 O2 S 2H 2O
96. (c) Hydrogenation occurs in presence of nickel as a In this reaction H2O2 shows oxidising nature.
catalyst. 118. (a) D2O actually has higher freezing point (3.8°C) than
97. (a) In winter seasons ice formed on the surface of a lake water H2O (0°C)
provides thermal insulation which ensures the 119. (d)
survival of the aquatic life.
electrolysis
98. (d) Dihedral angle of H2O2 in gas phase is 111.5° and 120. (b) 2HSO4– (aq) HO3SOOSO3H(aq)
in solid phase it is 90.2° Hydrolysis
99. (b) 2HSO 4 (aq) + 2H+(aq) + H2O2(aq)
THE s-BLOCK ELEMENTS 165
FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS 15. (c) All the alkali metals when heated with oxygen form
different types of oxides for example lithium forms
1. (c) Group 2 elements are called alkaline earth metals as lithium oxide (Li2O), sodium forms sodium peroxide
their oxides and hydroxides are alkaline in nature and (Na2O2), while K, Rb and Cs form their respective
these metal oxides are found in the earth’s crust. superoxides.
2. (c) Francium is highly radioactive. 1
2Li O Li 2O
3. (c) Monovalent sodium and potassium ions and divalent 2 2
magnesium and calcium ions are found in large 16. (c) Because KO2 not only provides O2 but also removes
proportions in biological fluids. 1CO2 as follows
4. (b) Alkali metals readily lose electron to give monovalent 4KO2 2CO2 2K 2 CO3 3O 2
M+ ion. Hence they are never found in free state in nature. 4KO 2 4CO 2 2H 2 O KHCO3 3O 2
5. (c) A cation is always much smaller than the
17. (d) Smaller the size of cation higher is its hydration energy
corresponding atom, whereas an anion is always larger and lesser is its ionic mobility hence the correct order
than the corresponding atom. is Li+ < Na+ < K+ < Rb+
Hence, correct order of the size is 18. (a) In aqueous solution because of high charge density
Na– > Na > Na+ of Li+ it is heavily hydrated, therefore due to its
6. (a) Na Na+ + e– ; IE of Na = + ve extensive hydration which increases its size to highest
Na+ + e– Na ; E.A. of Na+ = – ve the mobility of Li+ ion will be lowest.
19. (b) Both Ca and CaH2 produce H2 gas with water.
Both are equal but opposite in nature
7. (a) Within a group, ionic radius increases with increase in Ca 2H 2 O Ca(OH) 2 H2
atomic number. The melting points decrease down the CaH 2 2H 2 O Ca(OH) 2 2H 2
group due to weakening of metallic bond. The
20. (a)
electronegativity and the 1st ionization energy also
21. (d) The basic character and stability of hydrides decrease
decreases down the group. down the group.
8. (d) Li, Na, K are lighter than water but Rb is heavier than 22. (a) For a given metal, order of stability of halides is
water. MF > MCl > MBr > MI
9. (a) 23. (a) A reducing agent is a substance which can loose
10. (c) Alkali metals have large size. When they are heated in electron and hence a reducing agent should have low
the flame of Bunsen burner, the electrons present in ionisation energy. Now since ionisation energy
the valence shell move from lower energy level to decreases from Li to Cs, the reducing property should
higher energy level by absorption of heat from the increase from Li to Cs. The only exception to this is
flame. When they come back to the ground state, they lithium. This is because the net process of converting
emit the extra energy in the form of visible light to an atom to an ion takes place in 3 steps.
provide colour to the flame. (i) M(s) M(g) H = Sublimation energy
(ii) M(g) M (g) + e–
+ H = Ionisation energy
11. (d)
(iii) M+(g)+H2O M+ (aq) H = Hydration energy
12. (b) Gp 1 metals form cations M+ by loss of electron from
The large amount of energy liberated in hydration of
outermost shell. Electronic configuration of Gp 1 metals
Li (because of its small size) makes the overall H
is ns1. When the outer electron is removed to give a negative. This accounts for the higher oxidation
positive ion, the size decreases because the outermost potential of lithium i.e., its high reducing power.
shell is completely removed. After removal of an 24. (b) The alkali metals dissolve in liquid ammonia giving
electron, the positive charge of the nucleus is greater deep blue solution.
on the remaining electrons so that each of the remaining 25. (c) x = paramagnetic y = bronze
electrons are attracted more strongly towards the z = diamagnetic
nucleus. This further reduces the size. 26. (b) Na reacts violently and may catch fire on exposure to
13. (a) Lithium does not form peroxide. moisture (air + water). So it is always stored in
14. (b) Sodium metal on burning in air gives sodium peroxide. kerosene. Na reacts with alcohol to produce H2.
EBD_7207
166 THE s-BLOCK ELEMENTS
27. (d) Lithium with lead is used to make white metal. 47. (a) NaHCO3 (baking soda) is one of the major constituents
28. (b) Liquid sodium is used as a coolant in fast breeder of baking powder.
nuclear reactors. 48. (a) Baking powder has starch, NaHCO3 and Ca(H2PO2)2.
29. (a) Since the ionization energies of alkali metals decrease 49. (b) Potassium ions are the most abundant cations within
down the group, the ionic character and consequently cell fluids.
basic property of their hydroxides increases in the same 50. (a) Metallic character decreases, as we go to the right
order, i.e. from LiOH to CsOH. side in a period and increases when we move
30. (c) With the same anion, smaller the size of the cation, downwards in a group.
higher is the lattice energy. The correct order of size of 51. (b) Ca (20) = 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 4s2 = [Ar], 4s2.
cations is – 52. (a)
Na+ < K+ < Rb+ < Cs+ 53. (c) Within a period, the size decreases from left to right,
Hence, the lattice energy of NaF will be maximum. i.e., Na > Mg > Li > Be. Atomic size increases down the
i.e., NaF. group.
31. (c) As Cs+ ion has larger size than Li+ and I– has larger 54. (d)
size than F–, therefore maximum distance between
55. (d) The IInd ionisation potential of Na is higher than Mg
centres of cations and anions is in CsI.
because it requires more energy to remove an electron
32. (a) Larger cation (K+) develops less polarisation in anion from a saturated shell or stable (fully filled) orbital.
and thus KI has more ionic nature and more soluble in
I
water. 11 Na 1s 2 , 2s 2 2p 6 , 3s1
33. (a) 4LiNO3 2Li 2 O 4NO 2 O 2 II
1s 2 , 2s 2 2 p 6 , 3s 0
34. (d) Anhydrous form of Na2CO3 does not decompose on
heating even to redness. It is a amorphous powder 1s 2 , 2s 2 2p5 , 3s 0
called soda ash.
I
35. (c) 4LiNO3 2Li2O + 4NO2 + O2 12 Mg 1s 2 , 2s 2 2p 6 , 3s 2
2 NaNO3 2NaNO2 + O2 II
36. (b) Li is much softer than the other group I metals. Actually 1s 2 , 2s 2 2p 6 , 3s1 1s 2 , 2s 2 2p 6 , 3s 0
Li is harder then other alkali metals. Here Na-I < Mg-I and Na-II > Mg-II.
37. (b) Lithium although has most negative E value reacts 56. (c) As we go from grp I element to grp II element in a
less vigorously with water than other alkali metals period, an extra electron is added in same shell which
due to its small size and very high hydration energy. results in increase in nuclear charge due to which
38. (d) Elemental sodium is easily oxidised ( has low I.P.) and force of attraction by the nucleus increases and hence
acts as reductant. ionic radii decreases and consequently I.E. increases.
39. (b) Washing soda is Na2CO3.10 H2O. 57. (d) 58. (d) 59. (d) 60. (c)
40. (c) 61. (a) Calcium gives brick red colour and barium gives
apple green colour in flame test.
41. (c) NH 4 HCO3 NaCl NaHCO3 NH 4 Cl
Brine Sod. bicarbonat e ppt .
62. (a) Within a group, ionic radius increases with increase in
atomic number. The melting points decrease down the
42. (a) CO2 and NH3 formed are reused (See Solvay process)
group due to weakning of metallic bond. The
43. (a) NH3 is recovered when the solution containing
electronegativity and the 1st ionization energy also
NH4Cl is treated with Ca(OH)2
decreases down the group.
2NH4Cl + Ca(OH)2 2NH3 + CaCl2 + H2O
63. (d) Barium is most electropostive element among those
44. (b)
given. Hence it is most reactive.
45. (d) Sodium sulphate, calcium chloride and magnesium
64. (a) Mg(OH)2 is not formed because of poor solubility of
chloride are present as impurities in crude sodium
MgO in H2O.
chloride.
65. (d) K and Mg, both form oxides
46. (b) Na metal is manufactured by electrolysis of fused NaCl
by two methods. K O2 KO 2 ;2Mg O 2 2MgO
(i) Castner's process
Mg form nitride also 3Mg N 2 Mg 3 N 2
(ii) Down's process
In both the above processes electrolysis of fused K does not form nitride.
sodium chloride produces Na at cathode. 66. (b) Thermal decomposition of (NH4)2BeF4 is the best
method for preparation of BeF2.
2NaOH 2Na OH
67. (b) BaF2 > MgF2 > CaF2
at cathode 2Na 2e 2Na 68. (a) Alkaline earth metals have a fairly strong tendency to
at anode 4OH 2H 2 O O 2 4e lose their outermost electrons due to which they act
as reducing agent.
THE s-BLOCK ELEMENTS 167
69. (a) 84. (d) 85. (d) 86. (c) 87. (c)
70. (d) For a compoud to be soluble, the hydration energy
88. (b) CaCO 3 2HCl 2CaCl 2 H 2 O CO 2
must exceed lattice energy. For Gp.II hydroxides
(Mg(OH)2, Sr(OH)2, Ca(OH)2, Ba(OH)2, lattice energy 89. (a) During setting of cement, silicates and aluminates of
decrease more rapidly than the hydration energy & so calcium are hydrated. Hydration is an exothermic
their solubility increases down the group. Ba(OH)2> process. Therefore setting of cement is exothermic
Sr(OH)2 > Ca(OH)2 > Mg(OH)2 process.
71. (a) Be(OH)2 is amphoteric while Ca(OH)2, Sr(OH)2 and 90. (d) For a good quality cement, the ratio of silica (SiO2)
Ba(OH)2 are all basic. to alumina (Al2O3) should be between 2.5 and 4 and
72. (a) Because of small atomic size and high I.E. Be forms the ratio of lime (CaO) to the total of the oxides of
covalent chloride. silicon (SiO2), aluminium (Al2O3) and iron (Fe2O3)
73. (a) should be as close as possible to 2.
74. (a) As we move down the group, the lattice energies of 91. (a) The calcium concentration in plasma is regulated at
carbonates remain approximately the same. However about 100 mgL–1. It is maintained by two hormones :
the hydration energies of the metal cation decreases calcitonin and parathyroid hormone.
from Be++ to Ba++, hence the solubilities of carbonates 92. (b)
of the alkaline earth metal decrease down the group
mainly due to decreasing hydration energies of the STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS
cations from Be++ to Ba++.
75. (a) As the basicity of metal hydroxides increases down 93. (d) Amongst alkali metal Li ions are highly hydrated.
the group from Be to Ba, the thermal stability of their 94. (d) Lithium halides are some what covalent in nature.
carbonates also increases in the same order. Further Li is the most powerful reducing agent and Na is the
group 1 compounds are more thermally stable than least powerful reducing agent.
group 2 because their hydroxide are much basic than 95. (c)
group 2 hydroxides therefore, the order of thermal 96. (a) For statement (iii), stability of the carbonates and
stability is hydrogen carbonates of alkali metals increases with
BeCO3 < MgCO3< CaCO3< K2CO3. increase in electropositive character down the group.
76. (a) In alkaline earth metals ionic size increases down the Hydrogen carbonate of lithium does not exist as a
group. The lattice energy remains constant because solid.
sulphate ion is so large, so that small change in cationic 97. (d) All the given statements are correct.
sizes do not make any difference. On moving down 98. (c) Radium is used in treatment of cancer.
the group the degree of hydration of metal ions 99. (d) All alkaline earth metal oxides except BeO are basic
decreases very much leading to decrease in solubility in nature. BeO is amphoteric in nature.
BeSO 4 MgSO 4 CaSO 4 SrSO 4 BaSO 4 Hydrated halides of Ca, Sr and Ba on heating
undergo dehydration while corresponding hydrated
77. (b) Be 2+ is very small, hence its hydration enthalpy is halides of Be and Mg on heating suffer hydrolysis.
greater than its lattice enthalpy 100. (a)
78. (b) The Be(OH)2 and Al(OH)3 are amphoteric in nature.
79. (a) Gypsum is CaSO4.2H2O MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS
80. (c) Chemically plaster of Paris is CaSO4.1/2H2O.
101. (a)
120 C 1 102. (c) Cs + O2 CsO2 (Superoxide)
81. (b) CaSO 4 2H 2 O CaSO4 H 2O
2 4Li + O2 2Li2O (Oxide)
Plaster of Paris is hemihydrate. 2Na + O2 Na2O2 (Peroxide)
1 103. (a) Lithium metal is used to make useful alloys, for
82. (d) Plaster of Paris (CaSO4 . H O) on making paste with example with lead to make ‘white metal’ bearings for
2 2
motor engines, with aluminium to make aircraft parts,
little water sets to a hard mass due to formation of
and with magnesium to make armour plates.
gypsum (CaSO4.2H2O).
104. (a) 105. (c)
1 3 106. (b) Quick lime is used for the manufacture of dyestuffs.
CaSO4 . H2O + H2O CaSO4.2H2O + Heat
2 2 Plaster of Paris is used for setting of fractured bones.
Plaster of Paris Gypsum Slaked lime is used for the manufacture of bleaching
83. (a) (CaSO4)2.H2O – Plaster of paris is used for plastering powder.
the broken bones. Limestone is a constituent of chewing gum.
EBD_7207
168 THE s-BLOCK ELEMENTS
ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS 120. (d) LiI is more soluble as the degree of covalent character
is high due to larger size of anion i.e., iodide ion by
107. (a) Li+ has maximum degree of hydration among other greater polarization of lithium cation.
alkali metals. 121. (a)
108. (a) Lithium carbonate is unstable to heat; lithium being
122. (c) NaCl (brine), NH 3 and CO 2 are raw materials. CaCO3
very small in size polarises a large CO32 ion leading
is source of CO 2 .
to the formation of more stable Li2O and CO2.
109. (a) Because of high value of ionisation enthalpy and small 123. (d) Because of larger size and smaller nuclear charge, alkali
size it forms compound which are highly covalent in metals have low ionization potential relative to alkaline
nature, hence, it get hydrolysed easily. earth metals.
110. (d) Both assertion and reason are false. 124. (a) Lattice energy decreases more rapidly than hydration
Radium is the rarest of all s-block elements comprising energy for alkaline earth metal hydroxides. On moving
only 10–10 percent of igneous rocks. Francium (s-block down a group solubility of their hydroxides
member) is radioactive; its long lived isotope 223Fr increases.
ahs a half life of only 21 minutes. 125. (b) 2Na 2H 2 O 2NaOH H 2
2K 2H 2O 2KOH H 2
All alkali metals decompose water with the evolution
111. (c) The atom becomes larger on descending the group, so of hydrogen.
the bonds becomes weaker (metallic bond), the
cohesive force/energy decreases and accordingly Ca 2H 2 O C a(OH) 2 H2
melting point also decreases. Sr 2H 2O Sr(OH) 2 H2
112. (a) The ionisation potential value of lithium is maximum
among alkali metals i.e., its tendency to ionise to give Be + 2H2O No reaction
Li+ ions should be the minimum i.e. Li should be the Ca, Sr, Ba and Ra decompose cold water readily with
poorest reducing agent. But, lithium is the strongest evolution of hydrogen. Mg decomposes boiling water
reducing agent in aq. solution. This is due to the largest but Be is not attacked by water even at high
value of hydration energy of Li+ ions. temperatures as its oxidation potential is lower than
113. (c) Li due to highest hydration energy among the alkali the other members.
metals is the strongest reducing agent. 126. (a) Mg burns in CO2 to give MgO and C.
114. (b) During the dissolution of alkali metal hydrides energy 127. (d) Group1 carbonates are more soluble than group 2
is released in large amount, i.e., it is exothermic in nature. which are sparingly soluble, and also in case of group
115. (c) Calcium carbonate on thermal decomposition gives 2, down the group the solubility of carbonates
CaO (Basic oxide) and CO2 (Acidic oxide) decreases.
CaCO 3 CaO + CO 2 128. (d) Down the group solubility of sulphate decreases. Thus
Basic oxide Acidic oxide
Ba2+ ions will precipitate out most easily.
116. (c) 2NaO2 + 2H2O 2NaOH + H2O2 + O 129. (a) BeF2 is highly soluble in water due to the high
hydration enthalpy of the small Be2+ ion.
117. (b) O 24 ion is not possible and K 2O4 is unknown . 130. (b) Electrons in Mg due to its small size are tightly bound
118. (a) All the given elements react with oxygen to form so they cannot be excited by the flame.
oxides but only Li also react with nitrogen to form 131. (d) Be(OH)2 is amphoteric, but the hydroxides of other
Li3N. alkaline earth metals are basic. The basic strength
119. (d) (a) and (b) forms corresponding hydroxides (NaOH increases gradually.
and LiOH) in aqueous solution 132. (d) When cold calcium hydroxide reacts with chlorine, then
M 2 O H 2O 2M 2OH (M Na or Li) bleaching powder is obtained.
Therefore reaction of HI with (a), (b) and (c) is simply 3Ca(OH) 2 2Cl 2
a neutralization reaction, while aqueous solution of slaked lim e
(d) form H2O2 which act as oxidizing agent, hence Ca(OCl)2 .Ca(OH) 2 .CaCl 2 .2H 2 O
convert Iodide to Iodine( I2). Bleaching powder
Na 2O 2 2H 2 O 2Na 2OH H 2O 2
THE p-BLOCK ELEMENTS (GROUP 13 AND 14) 177
FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS 27. (d) B(OH)3 is acid because it can take OH– ions.
H3BO3 or B(OH)3 + OH– B(OH) 4
1. (a) The non – metal oxides are acidic or neutral whereas
metal oxides are basic in nature. 28. (d) H3BO3 acts as a Lewis acid and accepts OH– ions to
2. (b) Aluminium does not occur in the free state in nature form [B(OH)4]–
29. (c) H3BO3 on heating at 373K yields metaboric acid
but is most abundant metal in the earth’s crust.
(HBO2)
3. (d)
373K
4. (b) The order of ionisation enthalpies, as expected, is H3BO3 HBO2 H 2O
metaboricacid
iH1 < iH2 < iH3. (orthorombic form)
5. (c) Due to the low density of aluminium it is useful for
30. (b) In Boric acid each B atom is sp2 hybridized and
food packaging.
6. (c) 7. (b) contains BO 33 units which are held together by
8. (c) The m.p decreases from B to Ga , hence gallium (Ga) hydrogen bonds.
has least m.p. (303 K) among group of 13 element. 31. (a)
9. (a) Due to its small size and high ionization energy boron 100 C 160 C
32. (b) H 3 BO 3 HBO 2 H
does not form B3+ ion.
10. (c) Gallium is remarkable for its unusually low M.P.
H 2 B4 O 7 H 2O 2B2 O3 H 2O
(29.7°C).
33. (a) H3BO3 is monobasic acid.
11. (b) Thallium shows different (+1 and +3) oxidation states
34. (c) 35. (b)
because of inert pair effect.
36. (c) H
12. (a) |
13. (c) Because Tl +5 does not exist B
|
||
14. (c) H N N H
|
|
| ||
15. (d) The order of strength of Lewis acid character for boron
H B B H
|
halides is, BF3 < BCl3 < BBr3 < BI3 (due to back
N
||
|
bonding) |
16. (b) 17. (a) 18. (c) H
Inorganic benzene, B 3N 3H6
19. (d) 2KOH 2Al 2H 2 O 2KAlO 2 3H 2
It is isoelectronic with benzene.
20. (a) 37. (d) In diborane (B2H6) structure there are four 2c-2e bonds
21. (b) Down the group basic character of oxides increases. and two 3c–2e bonds (see structure of diborane).
B2O3 - Acidc Structure of B 2H6 :
Al2O3 - Amphoteric
Ga2O3 - Amphoteric Hb
In2O3 - Basic Ht •• Ht
Tl2O3 - Basic
B B
22. (d) 23. (a)
24. (d) It is p p back bonding involving B and F. The Ht •• Ht
smaller atoms show more back bonding. Hb
38. (b) 39. (c) 40. (c) 41. (d) 42. (b)
25. (b) Na2B4O7. 10 H2O Na2B4O7
10H 2O 43. (c) B2H6 contains hydrogen bridge bonds. These are one
electron bonds also known as banana bonds.
Na 2 B4O7 2 NaBO2 B2 O3
anhydrous sod.metaborate Boric anhydride excess NH3
44. (d) B2H6 + NH3 low temperature B2H6.2NH3
CuO B2 O3 Cu(BO 2 )2
cupric meta borate(Blue beed) Diborane with ammonia gives B2H6 .2NH3 that is
26. (d) formulated as [BH2(NH3)]+[BH4]– which when heated
to 473K decomposes to give borazole.
EBD_7207
178 THE p-BLOCK ELEMENTS (GROUP 13 AND 14)
Cl Cl Cl 64. (b) F and Cl are more oxidising in nature and can achieve
45. (c) Al Cl AlCl3 (dimer)
Cl Al Al Pb in (IV) O.S. but Br2 and I 2 can not achieve Pb in
46. (c) Valence shell electronic configuration of group 14 (IV) O.S. secondly Pb 4 is strong in oxidising nature
elements is ns 2 p 2 . and in its presence, Br and I can not exist.
65. (b)
47. (c) Electronegativity decreases down the group. 66. (d) The more the bond energy, the more is the
48. (c) 14C is a radioactive isotope with half life of 5770 catenation.
years and used for radiocarbon dating. 67. (c) Lead pipes are readily corroded by water containing
49. (c) Due to non-availability of vacant d-orbitals, it cannot organic acids.
exceed its coordination number more than four. Thus
68. (b) 2Pb 2H 2O O 2 2Pb(OH) 2
carbon never forms complexes e.g., [CCl6]2– deos not
exist but [SiCl6]2– exists. 69. (a) The stability of +2 O.S. follows the order
50. (b) The inert pair effect is most prominent in the heavier Pb 2 Sn 2 Ge 2
members of the group. Inert pair effect increases as we
Hence reducing power Ge Sn Pb
move the group down the group.
70. (d) The order of tendency of catenation for elements of C
51. (c) Inert pair effect increases down the group. Hence for
family is
Pb2 ,O.S. is most stable. C >> Si > Ge Sn > Pb
71. (b) Fullerene contains twenty six membered rings and
52. (d) Pb3O4 is also known as Sindhur.. twelve five membered rings.
53. (c) CO2, SiO2 are acidic, CaO is basic and SnO 2 is 72. (b) Fullerenes are the only pure form of carbon because
amphoteric. they have smooth structure without having dangling
bonds.
54. (a) Red lead is Pb3O4. It is a mixed oxide of Pb (II) and
Pb (IV). It acts as a powerful oxidising agent. 73. (a) Carborundum is chemically SiC. It is not an allotrope
of carbon.
55. (d) PbO2 is a strong oxidising agent and is produced in
74. (b) In diamond each carbon atom is sp3 hybridized and
situ in lead storage batteries. The anode is oxidized to thus forms covalent bonds with four other carbon atoms
PbO2 and cathode is reduced to spongy Pb. lying at the corners of a regular tetrahedron.
56. (b) SiO2 is acidic oxide. 75. (a)
57. (d) The thermal stability of tetrahalides decreases in order 76. (b) Buckminster fullerene is C60. The molecule has shape
CX4 > SiX4 > GeX4 > SnX4 and in terms of same metal of soccer ball.
with different halides is in order of 77. (b) In fullerene each carbon atom is bonded to three other
MF4 > MCl4 > MBr4 > MI4. carbon atoms and is sp2 hybridised.
58. (a) The stability of dihalides (MX2) increases down the 78. (c) Buckminster fullerene has the formula C60 and is made
group. Except C and Si, the other members form from interlocking hexagonal and pentagonal rings of
dihalides. C-atoms.
59. (a) Since bond energy of C-F >C-Cl > C-Br > C-I 79. (c)
80. (d) In graphite, each carbon is sp2 -hybridized and the
Hence CF4 is most stable.
single occupied unhybridized p-orbitals of C-atoms
60. (d) Reluctance of valence shell electrons to participate in
bonding is called inert pair effect. The stability of lower overlap side wise to give -electron cloud which is
oxidation state (+2 for group 14 element) increases on delocalized and thus the electrons are spread out
going down the group. So the correct order is between the structure.
SiX2 < GeX2 < SnX2 < PbX2 81. (d) Si and Ge are semiconductors and are used in making
transistors.
61. (b) Ge4 is more stable than Ge2+ . Hence GeCl 4 is more
82. (b) Both Ge and Si are extensively used as semiconductors.
stable than GeCl 2 Semiconductors are solids where there is only a small
62. (d) Carbon halides are not hydrolysed due to absence of difference in energy, called band gap, between the filled
d-orbitals. On the other hand SiCl4 is easily hydrolysed
valency band of electrons and a conduction band since
due to the availability of d-orbitals in Si.
the band gap of Ge is less than Si, it is a better element
SiX4 + 2H2O SiO2 + 4HX
to be used as semiconductor.
63. (d) In nature Pb 4 is strong oxidant and I is strong 83. (c) Glass is a super cooled liquid.
reductant. Hence PbI 4 cannot exist. 84. (b) 6 HF SiO 2 H 2SiF6 2 H2O
THE p-BLOCK ELEMENTS (GROUP 13 AND 14) 179
85. (a) Producer gas is a fuel gas and is mixture of CO and N2. 106. (d) BCl3 is a covalent compound hence lower melting
86. (b) Coal gas is a mixture of H2 + CO + N2 + CH4 point.
87. (b) Quartz is crystalline form of silica. 107. (a) Higher boranes are also spontaneously flammable in
88. (d) air.
89. (b) In silica (SiO2); each Si atom is surrounded by four H H H
oxygen atom. 108. (d) B 197° B
H H H
— —
— —
— —
— —
3
B is sp hybridized
— Si — O —Si — O — Si — O —Si —
Only 12 bonding electrons available
O O O O BHB angle is 97° not 180°.
—
—
— Si — O —Si — O — Si — O —Si — 109. (b) Lead compounds in +4 state are strong oxidising
agents. In tetravalent state the number of electrons
—
—
O O O O around the central atom in a molecule is eight. Being
— —
— —
— —
— —
electron precise molecules, they are normally not

— Si — O —Si — O — Si — O —Si — expected to act as electron acceptor or electron
donor species.
Structure of SiO2 110. (b) Carbon dioxide is not a poisonous gas.
Only Si – O bonds exist and no Si = O. 111. (a) All the given statements are true.
90. (b) R 3SiCl HOH R 3SiOH HCl MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS
R 3SiOH HOSiR 3 R 3Si O SiR 3 H 2O
112. (b)
91. (a) Water gas is CO H 2
113. (c) Na2B4O7.10H2O Na2B4O7
92. (c) CO is essential constituent of almost all fuel gases. (i)
93. (c) CO 2 is incombustible and non supporter of 2NaBO2 + B2O3
combustion. (ii) (iii)
94. (b) CO react with haemoglobin, forms carboxy
haemoglobin and stopes the supply of O2 Na2B4O7 + 7H2O 4H3BO3 + 2NaOH
(iv) (v)
95. (c) Producer gas is mixture of CO + N 2 . It is prepared by
114. (d)
incomplete combustion of coal in limited supply of air. 115. (a) Carbon and silicon are non-metals. Germanium is a
96. (b) Silicone has Si – O – Si – O – Si linkage. metalloid. Tin and lead are metals.
373K 116. (b) 117. (d)
97. (a) HCOOH conc. H2SO4 H2O + CO
98. (d) H2CO3/HCO3– buffer system help to maintain pH of ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS
blood between 7.26 to 7.42. 118. (c) Atomic radius of gallium is less than that of
99. (d) Quartz, Cristobalite and Tridymite are crystalline aluminium.
form of silica. 119. (c) Boron is metalloid. Thus assertion is correct. Metalloids
100. (a) Being biocompatible silicones are used in surgical possess, metallic as well as non-metallic nature. Hence,
and cosmetic plants. reason is false.
101. (c) Zeolite is not a man-made silicate. 120. (a) The use of aluminium and its compounds for domestic
102. (b) ZSM – 5 type of zeolite is used to convert alcohols purposes is now reduced considerably because of their
directly into gasoline. toxic nature.
121. (c) Assertion is true because lower oxidation state
becomes more & more stable for heavier elements in p-
103. (d) All the given statements are correct. block due to inert pair effect. Hence Reason is false.
104. (c) d-orbitals are of higher energy than the p-orbitals, 122. (a) PbI4 does not exist because Pb–I bond initially
they contribute less to the overall stability of formed during the reaction does not release enough
molecules than p -p bonding of the second row energy to unpair 6s2 electrons and excite one of
elements. them to higher orbital to have four unpaired electrons
105. (c) Aluminium chloride in acidified aqueous solution around lead atom.
forms octahedral [Al(H2O)6]3+ ion. 123. (a)
EBD_7207
180 THE p-BLOCK ELEMENTS (GROUP 13 AND 14)
138. (d) Boron nitride (BN) is known as inorganic graphite. The
most stable form is hexagonal one. It has layered
124. (a) Gallium (Ga) is soft , silvery metal. Its melting point is structure similar to graphite.
30ºC. This metal expands by 3.1% when it solidifies
and hence, it should not be stored in glass or metal N N+
–
containers. + B
B– –B
125. (b) 2Al(s) + 2NaOH(aq) + 6H2O(l)
2Na+[Al(OH)4]–(aq) + 3H2 (g) N+ +N N
– +
126. (a) B2O3 is acidic and Al2O3 is amphoteric. –B B B– –B
127. (b) Anhydrous aluminium chloride gets partially
hydrolysed with atmospheric moisture to liberate +N N N+ – + N
HCl gas. Moist HCl appears white in colour. +
B– –B B
128. (b) BCl3 forms [B(OH)4]– in which B is sp3 hybridized
and have +3 oxidation state.
N+ +N N
129. (d) Al in its compounds forms covalent bonds. – +
B B–
130. (c) The correct formula of inorganic benzene is B3N3H6
so (d) is incorrect statement 139. (a)
140. (c) When diborane is hydrolysed one can get both
OH orthoboric acid and H2.
|
Boric acid (H3BO3 or B OH ) is a lewis acid so (a) B2H6 + 6H2O 2H3BO3 + 6H2
| 141. (a) Carbon does not contain d-orbital hence it cannot
OH expand its octet.
is incorrect statement. 142. (d) Ge(II) tends to acquire Ge (IV) state by loss of electrons.
The coordination number exhibited by beryllium is 4 Hence it is reducing in nature. Pb (IV) tends to acquire
and not 6 so statement (b) is incorrect. Pb (II) O.S. by gain of electrons. Hence it is oxidising
Both BeCl2 and AlCl3 exhibit bridged structures in solid in nature. This is due to inert pair effect.
state so (c) is correct statement. 143. (b) In fullerene a six membered ring can fuse with five
as well as with six membered ring while a five
Cl m Cl Cl Cl Cl
2p membered ring can only fuse with a six membered
20
Be 98° Be 263 pm Be Be ring.
82° 144. (d) Silicon does not form mono oxide.
Cl Cl Cl Cl Cl 145. (c) CO2 forms carbonic acid H2CO3, when dissolved in
water, CO is neutral, whereas other two GeO2 and
Cl Cl Cl
SnO2 are solids.
Al Al 146. (a) Lead in +2 oxidation is stable while Sn and C are both
stable in +4 oxidation.
Cl Cl Cl 147. (c) Pb with dil HCl forms protective coating of PbCl 2
131. (d) 148. (a) Graphite sp3, % s character = 33%
132. (a) When borax is heated in a Bunsen burner flame with Diamond sp3, % s character = 25%
CoO on a loop of platinum wire a blue coloured 149. (a)
Co(BO2)2 bead is formed. 150. (d) Diamond and crystalline silicon are isomorphous.
133. (a) H3BO3 is a weak monobasic acid. 151. (d)
134. (b) The hybridizations of B in H3BO3 is sp2 152. (b) Glass being a mixture of sodium and calcium silicates
135. (d) Borax on heating gives B2O3 and NaBO2 which is reacts with hydrofluoric acid forming sodium and
glassy mass and used for borax-bead test. calcium fluorosilicates respectively.
136. (c) Diborane is produced on industrial scale by the Na 2SiO 3 6HF Na 2SiF6 3H 2 O
reaction of BF3 with sodium hydride.
137. (d) CaSiO3 6HF CaSiF6 3H 2 O
The etching of glass is based on these reactions.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY – SOME BASIC PRINCIPLES & TECHNIQUES 195
FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS 8. (b) C – 1 is sp hybridized C C

C – 3 is sp3 hybridized (C– C)
1. (a) Berzilius, a Swedish chemist proposed the concept
C – 5 is sp2 hybridized (C = C)
of ‘vital force’.
Thus the correct sequence is sp, sp3, sp2.
2. (d) Urea was first discovered in human urine by H.M. 9. (c) 10. (c)
Rouelle in 1773. It was synthesised in 1828 by Friedrich
Wohler and was the first organic compound to be H H H
| | |
synthesised from inorganic starting materials. It was H C C C C C H
found when Wohler attempted to synthesize ammo- 11. (b) | | | | | ;
nium cyanate, to continue a study of cyanates which H H H H H
he had be carrying out for several years. On treating 2 Pentene
silver cyanate with ammonium chloride solution he No. of bonds = 14, No. of bonds = 1
obtained a white crystalline material which proved iden- 12. (c) (ii) and (iii) do not represent 2-bromopentane
tical to urea obtained from urine. 13. (c) Correct expanded form of given structure is shown
3. (b) F. Wohler synthesised urea from an inorganic in option (c).
compound ammonium cyanate 14. (c)
Heat 15. (b) The successive members of a homologous series
NH4CNO æææ
Æ NH2CONH2
Ammonium Urea
differ by a – CH2 unit.
cyanate 16. (a) Correct molecular formula of icosane is C20H42
4. (c) According to vital force theory, organic compounds Correct molecular formula of heptane is C7H16
could only be produced by living matter by a vital 17. (c) (iii) is the only correct method of selecting parent
chain.
force. It was in 1828, Friedrich Wholer heated NH4CNO
18. (b) Correct order of decreasing priority is
(derived from inorganic substance) and obtained urea – COOH, – SO3H, – COOR, – OH.
(an organic compound). 19. (d) 20. (c) 21. (d) 22. (c) 23. (c)
5. (c) Wholer synthesized urea from ammonium cyanate in 24. (d) 2, 2,3-trimethyl pentane
1828. Kekule proposed catenation and structure of
benzene. Liebig is a history maker in sports science 1 1
(energy metabolism). CH3 CH3
1 2 | | 1
6. (d) Antoine-Laurent de Lavoisier (August 26, 1743 – May H3C H 2 C CH C CH 3
8, 1794) is known as the “father of modern chemistry.” 3 |4
He was a French nobleman prominent in the histories CH3
of chemistry, finance, biology, and economics. He 1
stated the first version of the Law of conservation of
1
mass, co-discovered, recognized and named oxygen CH 3
(1778) as well as hydrogen, disproved the phlogiston 1 | 2 1
4
theory, introduced the Metric system, invented the first 25. (d) CH 3 C CH 2 CH 3
|
periodic table including 33 elements, and helped to CH 3
reform chemical nomenclature. 1
7. (c) Hybridisation on the particular carbon can be Thus number of secondary hydrogens is two.
established by number of and bonds attached to it. CH3 CH3
Bond Bond Hybridisation | |
4 – sp3 26. (d) CH 3 C C CH 2 CH 3
| |
3 1 sp2 CH3 CH3
2 2 sp
(a )
1 2 3 4
C H2 CH CH C H2 CH3
3 3 3 3 |
1 1 1 1 CH 3 – C – CH 2 CH 3
|
sp 2 sp 2 sp 2 sp 2 CH3
Both carbon atoms forming C—C single bond (C2 and ( b)
C3) are sp2 hybridised
EBD_7207
196 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY – SOME BASIC PRINCIPLES & TECHNIQUES
CH3 CH3 Cl
1 | 3
| | CH3 — C — CH3
2
43. (c)
CH 3 C C HCH 2 CH 3 |
| CH3
CH3
2-chloro-2-methyl propane
(c )
44. (a)
CH 3 45. (d) (CH 3 ) 2 CHCH 2CH 2

3-methylbutyl group
|
CH 3 C HCH 2 CH 2CH 3 46. (a)
(d )
27. (d) In isopentane, (CH3)2CH CH2 CH3, every carbon is CH3
having hydrogen atom(s). 1 2| 3 4 5 6 7 8
47. (d) CH3CH CH 2CH CH CH CH CH CH3
H H H H H 2,8-Dimethyl-4,6-decadiene |
9 10
1° | 2° | 2° | 3° |3° |2° 1°
28. (a) H3C – C – C – C – C – C – CH3 CH2 — CH3
| | 1°| 1°| |
H H CH3 CH3 H
Ketonic group
3, 4-dimethylheptane
4 3 2 1
There are four 1° C-atoms, three 2° C-atoms and two 48. (a) CH3 CH CO CH3
3° C-atoms
29. (c) The structure of neopentane is CH3 methyl group
CH 3 3-methyl-2-butanone
H3C — C— CH3 CH3

49. (a)
|1
CH3 2 3
H3C C CH3
|
It has 1 quaternary and 4 primary carbons. CH3
30. (b) 31. (d) 32. (c) 33. (d) Neopentane
or 2, 2- Dimethylpropane
1 2 3
34. (a) CH 3 O CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 O CH 2 CH 3 50. (b)
3-ethoxy-1-methoxypropane 51. (b) The compound is a derivative of benzoic acid. The
35. (c) The correct name is 3 - methylbutan - 2 - ol positions of substituents attached to benzene nucleus
are represented by number of C-atoms and not by
Cl
1
ortho, meta and para.
6 2 52. (a) C3H6 has 2 structural isomers.
36. (a)
5 3 Br CH 3 CH CH 2 and H 2 C CH 2
4 propene
3-bromo-1chlorocyclohexene CH 2
cyclopropane
OH
1 2 3| 53. (c) C7 H7 Cl has 4 isomers
37. (c) CH3 CH 2 C CH 3
5 |4 CH3
CH3 CH 2 |
CH3 CH3 CH 2 Cl
3 Methyl pentan 3 ol | | |
Cl
|
38. (a) The IUPAC name of the given compound is |

5-chlorohex-2-ene. Cl Cl
|
39. (b) The compound is a derivative of butane. o-Chlorotoluene m-Chlorotoluene p-Chlorotoluene benzyl chloride
40. (b) The compound contains longest chain of 6C atoms 54. (b) Alcohols and ethers are functional isomers.
and amino group. Hence it is an alkanamine. 55. (b) Structures (a), (c) and (d) have the same molecular
41. (d) The compound is an ester. Its IUPAC name is derived formula (C6H12O) while (b) has C6H10O as molecular
from alkyl alkanoate. formula
42. (d) The compound is an aldehyde containing longest 56. (d)
chain of 6 C-atoms and side chains.
57. (b) CH3CH2CH2C CH,(CH3)2CHC CH, CH3CH2C CCH3 +
I II III CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2
58. (b) CH3CH2CH=CH2 CH3CH=CHCH3 (CH3)2C=CH2
1-butene (i) 2- butene (ii), (iii) 2-methylpropene
(cis,- trans) (iv)
CH3
Resonating structures of benzyl carbocation
whereas in alkyl carbocations dispersal of positive

charge on different hydrogen atoms is due to
hyper conjugation hence the correct order of stability
cyclobutane (v) methylcyclopropa ne (vi) will be
59. (b) 2, 2, 4, 4 - Tetramethylhexane has 10 carbon atoms,
only 4-isopropylheptane has also 10 carbon atoms so CH2
these two are isomers.
60. (a) 61. (c) 62. (a) 63. (b) 64. (d) > CH 2 CH C H 2 CH3 CH 2 CH 2
65. (c) Allyl Propyl
66. (b) The two isomers differ in the position of the double bond so Benzyl
they are called position isomers. 73. (b) Structure (b) is a 3º carbocation, while (a) is 2º and (c)
67. (b) and (d) are 1º carbocations; thus (b) is the most stable.
68. (b) The order of stability of carbocations is : 74. (a)
75. (a) Higher the possibility of delocalisation, greater is its
(CH3 )3 C (CH 3 )2 CH CH 3
stability; in C6 H5CHC6 H5 , +ve charge can delocalise
69. (c)
70. (d) Greater the number of alkyl groups attached to a over two benzene rings.
positively charged C atom, greater is the 76. (d) The organic reaction which proceed through
hyperconjugation (no bond resonance) and stable is heterolytic bond cleavage are called ionic or
the cation. heteropolar or just polar reactions.
77. (b) In carbocations, carbon bearing positive charge is
Thus order of decreasing stability of carbocation is,
always sp2-hybridised
tert – Alkyl > Sec-Alky > Pri-Alkyl > Methyl.
78. (b) Methyl carbanion is sp3 hybridised, with three bond
71. (a) Carbonium ions are electron deficient species. More
pairs and one lone pair same is the case with NH3.
the number of alkyl groups attached to it, more will be
stability due to + I effect. Cl
– – – –
79. (b) C Cl > C6H5CH2 > (CH3)2 CH > (CH3)3C
CH3 C CH3 > Cl
| –ve charge –M effect +I effect of CH 3 group
highly dispersed delocalises intensifies the –ve charge
CH3 due to – I effect –ve charge
3°carbonium ion
(+ve charge dispersed to maximum extent) 80. (c) In homolytic fission each of the atoms acquires one
(9 hyperconjugative H's) of the bonding electrons producing free radicals
(species having one unpaired electron).
CH 3 C– H > CH3CH 2 C H2 A B A + B
| 1° carbonium ion
(+ve charge least dispersed) 81. (b) Homolytic fission of the C – C bond gives free radicals
CH 2CH3 (2 hyper. H's) in which carbon is sp2- hybridised.
2° carbonium ion 82. (b) The carbon atom of alkyl free radicals which is bonded
(5 hyper. H's) to only three atoms or groups of atoms is sp 2 -
Alternatively, above order of stability order can be hybridized. Thus free radicals have a planar structure
explained in terms of hyperconjugation. with odd electrons situated in the unused p-orbital at
72. (d) Higher stability of allyl and aryl substituted methyl right angles to the plane of hybrid orbitals.
carbocation is due to dispersal of positive charge due
to resonance R
R 120°
CH 2 CH C H 2 CH 2 CH CH 2
Resonating structures of allyl carbocation
R
EBD_7207
83. (c) 103. (c) Resonance effect is the polarity produced in the
84. (a) On exposure to UV light, Cl2 molecule undergoes molecule by the interactions of two – bonds or
homolytic fission, to form chlorine free radicals. between a – bond and a lone pair of electrons
U.V. . present on an adjacent atom.
Cl Cl 2Cl 104. (b) Electromeric effect is purely a temporary effect and is
(Chlorine free radicals) brought into play only at the requirement of attacking
85. (b) The order of stability of free radicals reagent, it vanishes out as soon as the attacking
• • • • reagent is removed from reaction mixture.
(C 6 H 5 ) 3 C (C 6 H 5 ) 2 CH (CH 3 ) 3 C (CH 3 ) 2 C H
105. (b)
The stabilisation of first two is due to resonance and 106. (b) Alkyl groups with at least one hydrogen atom on the
last two is due to inductive effect. -carbon atom, attached to an unsaturated carbon
86. (d) Free radicals are stabilized by hyperconjugation, thus atom, are able to release electrons in the following
3° free radicals having maximum number of way.
hyperconjugative structures are the most stable, and
primary free radical the least.
.
87. (b) C6 H5CHCH3 is a 2º benzylic free radical, hence
stabilized most due to resonance. Note that the delocalisation involves and bond
88. (b) Dichlorocarbene, : CCl2 (a carbene) is the electrophile orbitals (or p orbitals in case of free radicals) ; thus it
formed as an intermediate in Reimer-Tiemann reaction. is also known as – conjugation. This type of
89. (d) Order of stability of free radicals is electron release due to the presence of the system
H—C—C = C is known as hyperconjugation
3° > 2° > 1° > C H3 107. (b) The stability of carbocation on the basis of hyper-
90. (c) The strength of nucleophile depends upon the nature conjugation can be explained as hyperconjugation
of alkyl group R on which nucleophile has to attack stabilises the carbocation because electron density
and also on the nature of solvent. The order of strength from the adjacent -bond helps in dispersing the
of nucleophiles follows the order : positive charge.
CN– > I– > C6H5O– > OH– > Br– > Cl–
91. (c) 92. (d)
H H H H H H H H
93. (a) Electrophile is positivly charged or electron deficient | | | | | | | |
species. Lewis acids are electron acceptors that is H C C H C C HC C H C C
| | | | | | |
electron deficient species. H H H
H H H H H
94. (b) Electrophiles are electron deficient or positively
charged species. In general greater the number of alkyl groups attached
95. (d) BF3 and R3C – X are electrophile while (CH3)3N and to a positively charged carbon atom, the greater is the
C2H5O– are nucleophile hyperconjugation interaction and stabilisation of the
96. (b) –CH3 group has +I effect, as number of –CH3 group cation. Thus, we have the following relative stability
increases, the inductive effect increases. of carbocation.
97. (d) Due to – I effect of the – CHO group, oxygen acquires-
CH3
- charge and the terminal carbon acquires + charge. |
CH3 C (CH3 ) 2 CH CH3 CH 2 CH3
CH2 = CH – C = O |
CH3
H
98. (c) All resonating structures should have same number Hence, stability of carbocation is directly proportional
of electron pairs. to number of alkyl group directly attached to
99. (a) The two structures involve only movement of carbocations.
electrons and not of atoms or groups, hence these are 108. (b) Stability order of different alkyl carbocations on the basis
resonating structures. of hyperconjugation is :
100. (b) Only structure (b) has a conjugated system, which is 3° > 2° > 1° > methyl
necessary for resonance. In t-butyl cation, the C-atom bearing the positive charge
101. (c) is attached to three methyl groups therefore it possess
nine -hydrogens. It will give maximum nine
102. (b) – OH shows + R effect while C = O shows – R hyperconjugative structures leading to maximum
effect. stability.
109. (b) In elimination reactions one or two molecules are lost contact with a “two phase system”. One phase is
from the substrate to form a multiple bond. Dehydration stationary and the other is moving or mobile. The
of ethanol is an example of elimination reaction. stationary phase may be a solid packed in a tube or a
Conc piece of paper. The mobile phase may be liquid of
C2 H5 OH CH 2 CH 2 H2O . gaseous.
H 2SO4
110. (a) 111. (d) 112. (a) 128. (b) 129. (b)
113. (b) Coloured impurities are removed by adsorbing over 130. (b) Carbon and hydrogen are detected by heating the
activated charcoal. compound with copper (II) oxide. Carbon present in
114. (a) This method is applied for the purification of the compound is oxidised to CO2 and hydrogen to
substances which (i) are insoluble in water, (ii) are H2O.
volatile in steam, (iii) are associated with non steam 131. (b)
volatile impurities, (iv) have high molecular weights 132. (b) Hydrazine (NH2NH2) does not contain carbon and
and (v) possess a fairly high vapour pressure at about hence on fusion with Na metal, it cannot form NaCN;
the boiling point of water e.g. Aniline. consequently hydrazine does not show Lassaigne’s
115. (a) Aniline is purified by steam distillation. test for nitrogen.
A mixture of water and aniline boils at 371 K and 760 133. (a) Prussian blue Fe 4 [Fe(CN) 6 ]3 is formed in lassaigne
mm pressure which is less than boiling point of water. test for nitrogen.
116. (b) Among the given compounds naphthelene is volatile
but benzoic acid is non-volatile (it forms a dimer). So, 3Na 4 [Fe(CN)6 Fe 3
the best method for their separation is sublimation,
which is applicable to compounds which can be Fe 4 [Fe(CN) 4 ]3 12Na
converted directly into the vapour phase from its solid Prussian blue
state on heating and back to the solid state on cooling. 134. (d)
Hence it is the most appropriate method. 135. (d) Kjeldahl method is not applicable to any of the given
117. (d) compounds. As nitrogen of these compounds does
118. (b) If there is a small difference (10 or less) in the boiling not change to ammonium sulphate on heating with
points of liquids fractional distillation is used e.g. ac- conc. H2SO4.
etone b.p. 333 K and methanol b.p. 338 K. 136. (c) 137. (b)
119. (a) Fractional distillation is used for the distillation of pe- 138. (b) In Kjeldahl’s method nitrogen is converted into
troleum. This method is used for separating a mixture (NH4)2 SO4, then to NH3
of two or more miscible, volatile liquids having close 139. (d) To increase the bpt of H2SO4,K2SO4 is added
(less than 40 degrees) boiling points. (For example, a
mixture of acetone, b.p., 56°C and methanol, b.p. 65°C) 1.4 N V
140. (b) N%
120. (c) If any liquid decomposes at its boiling point, it can be wt.of organic compound
purified by vacuum distillation.
121. (c) Glycerol decomposes at its boiling point, hence it 1.4 29 1/ 5
16.24%
should be purified by distillation under reduced 0.5
pressure.
32 0.233
122. (c) Vaccum distillation means distillation under reduced 141. (b) % of S 100 10 %
pressure. 233 0.32
123. (c) 142. (c) As in above question,
124. (a) The latest technique for the purification of organic 40 13.33 46.67
compounds is chromatography. These are of various C 3.33; H 13.33; N 3.34
12 1 14
types like column, paper and gas-chromatography.
125. (d) Both silica gel and alumina are used as adsorbents Relative No. of atoms,
in adsorption chromatography. 3.33 13.33 3.34
126. (a) Chromatography paper contains water trapped in it, C 1; H 4; N 1
3.33 3.33 3.33
which acts as the stationary phase.
Empirical formula = CH4N
127. (c) The mixture of sugars is a homogenous one.
Homogeneous mixtures of a solvent and one or more 62 wt . of Mg 2 P2 O 7
solutes (dissolved substances) are often separated by 143. (b) Percentage of P = × × 100
222 wt. of compound
chromatography. Chromatography works to separate
a mixture because the components of a mixture 62 1.332
distribute themselves differently when they are in = × × 100 = 13.33%
222 2.79
EBD_7207
144. (a) % of element Relative Simple ratio
no. of atoms
38.8 154. (b) 155. (c) 156. (a) 157. (c) 158. (a)
C 38.8 3.2 1
12 159. (a) 160. (d) 161. (a) 162. (b) 163. (d)
16 164. (c) 165. (a)
H 16.0 16.0 5
1
ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS
45.28
N 45.28 3.2 1
14 166. (c) – CN is a secondary suffix.
145. (b) Compound heat O2 + Other gaseous products 167. (b)
1373K 168. (d) The correct name of the given compound is

2C O 2 2CO
(A) 2, 5, 6 -trimethyloctane
169. (c) 170. (d)
I 2O 5 5CO I 2 5CO 2
(B) (A) (C) 171. (c) Benzene has a uniform C – C bond distance of 139
pm, a value intermediate between the C – C single.
STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS (154 pm) and C = C double (134 pm) bonds.
146. (c) A carbon having an sp hybrid orbital with 50% 172. (a) It is fact that aniline is better nucleophile than anilium
s-character is more electronegative than carbon ion. Anilium ion contain +ve charge, which reduces
atoms having sp2 and sp3 hybrid orbitals with 33% the tendency to donate lone pair of electron
and 25% s-character respectively.
In CH2 = C = CHCH3 C6 H5 NH3+ .
Number of bonds : Anilium ion
C – C = 3, C – H = 6, total = 6 + 3 = 9
Number of bonds = 2 173. (d) Resonance structures contain the same number of
unpaired electrons. However, they differ in the way of
heat or
147. (a) R–X R +X distribution of electrons.
light
Above equation is an example of homolytic cleavge 174. (d) 175. (a) 176. (a) 177. (c)
148. (c) – CH3 is an electron donating group.
149. (b) The resonance structures have same positions of CRITICAL THINKING TYPE QUESTIONS
nuclei and same number of unpaired electrons.
178. (a) It is derivative of ethanamide having N-phenyl group.
150. (b) Fractional distillation method is used if the difference
in boiling points of two liquids is not much. 179. (b) The compound contains longest chain of 5C - atoms
151. (d) For statement (ii), and e of ene is retained as the suffix name starts with
Distance moved by the substance from baseline constant
RF = Distance moved by the solvent from base line
CH3 CH3
3|
For statement (iv), amino acids sports may be
180. (d) CH3 sp sp 2 sp3 | sp
detected by spraying the TLC plate with ninhydrin C CH CH CH — C C H
7 6| 5 4 3 2 1
solution. CH3
152. (b) K 2SO 4 raises bpt. and CuSO 4 acts as catalyst.
153. (d) When organic compound contains nitrogen, upon 181. (d) F *1
combustion it will produce oxides of nitrogen soluble 5
in KOH solution. The copper will convert them into Br
2
**
N2 4 3
2NO + 2Cu 2CuO + N 2 * **

The numbering of C-atom starts from C or C . But
2 NO 2 + 4Cu 4CuO + N 2 etc.
*
Halogens will be removed as AgX. In case of sulphur numbering from C give minimum locant (2) to Br which
SO 2 formed will be removed as PbSO 4 . is correct.
191. (c) Metamerism shown among compounds of the same

182. (a) functional group.
192. (b) – I group destablises carbocation and since inductive
No. of bonds = 12 ; No. of bonds = 3 effect decreases with increasing length of carbon
chain. Therefore (b) is the correct option.
Ratio of : bonds = 3 : 12 = 1 : 4
193. (d) –NO2 group, being strong electron-withdrawing,
183. (a) In compounds (i), (iii) and (iv), all carbon atoms are
disperses the –ve charge, hence stabilizes the
sp3, sp2 and sp hybridised, respectivley. However,
concerned carbanion.
compound (ii) has sp2 and sp3 hybridised carbon atoms;
194. (b) In the presence of UV rays or energy, by boiling chlorine,
sp 3
sp 2
sp 2
sp 3 free radical is generated which attack the methyl carbon
CH 3 CH CH CH 3 atom of the toluene.
184. (a) CH3 CH2
x +H
185. (c) See the number of bonds formed by C in each case.
benzyl free
radical
x x x x
In HCOOH , (H2 N)2CO and CH3C HO,C forms 3
2Cl•
h
Cl 2
bonds an d 1 bond, hybridisation is sp 2. In
•CH CH2Cl
x x 2 •
(CH3 )3COH , C forms 4 bonds, hence hybridisation + Cl
is sp3
195. (c) Cl– is the best leaving group among the given option.
196. (a) Nucleophilicity increases down the periodic table.
186. (a) 1 3 IUPAC name – 3, 3-Dimethyl -1 I Br Cl F
2
HO 197. (b) H2C CHCl is capable of showing resonance which
cyclohexanol develops a partial double bond character on C–Cl bond,
187. (d) The compound contains longest chain of 3 C - atoms thereby making it less reactive toward nucleophilic
and three -COOH groups and one -OH group attached substitution.
to it (latest convention). .. _
H 2C CH Cl
..
: H 2 C CH Cl
188. (c) C5H10 has 1º degree of unsaturation since the isomers
are acyclic, all of these are alkenes. For writing the
isomers, first introduce the double bond at different 198. (d) CH3 Br CH3 Br
possible positions, and then consider the possibility
of branching in the alkyl group. CH 3 Cl CH 3 Cl
CH3CH2CH2CH =CH2 CH3CH2CH=CHCH3
199. (d) To convert covalent compounds into ionic compounds
1-pentene (i) 2- pentene, (cis,- trans) (ii), (iii) such as NaCN, Na2S, NaX, etc.
CH3 CH3 200. (d) The boiling point of o-nitrophenol is less than para-
| | nitrophenol due to presence of intramolecular hydrogen
CH 3 CH CH CH 2 CH 3 CH 2 C CH 2 bonding. Since p-nitrophenol is less volatile in than o-
nitrophenol due to presence of inter molecular hydrogen
3-methyl-1-butene, (iv) 2-methyl-1-butene, (v)
bonding hence they can be separated by steam
CH3 distillation.
|
CH 3 C CHCH 3
201. (b) Na2S and NaCN, formed during fusion with metallic
sodium, must be removed before adding AgNO3,
2-methyl-2-butene, (vi) otherwise black ppt. due to Na2S or white precipitate
189. (b) 190. (d) due to AgCN will be formed and thus white precipitate
of AgCl will not be identified easily.
EBD_7207
203. (b) Percentage of N in a compound
Na 2S 2AgNO3 2NaNO3 Ag 2S
Black 1.4 Normality of acid Volume of acid used
=
Mass of the substance taken
NaCN AgNO 3 NaNO 3 AgCN
White Given, 0.5 M H2SO4 is used.
Normality = Molarity × n
NaCl AgNO 3 NaNO 3 AgCl
Mol.mass 98
where n 2
white Eq.mass 49
boil Normality = 0.5 × 2 = 1 N H2SO4

Na 2S 2HNO 3 2 NaNO 3 H 2S
Volume of acid used to neutralise
boil NH3 = 10 cm3
NaCN HNO 3 NaNO 3 HCN
Mass of organic compound taken = 0.25 g
202. (d) The compounds with odd number of N-atoms have
odd masses and with even number of N-atoms have 1.4 1 10
%N 56.
even masses. This is “nitrogen rule”. 0.25
204. (d)
EBD_7207
216 HYDROCARBONS
FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS H
–
H–C–H
1. (d) LPG is used as a domestic fuel with the least pollution. H H
–— —–
H H H H
2. (b) LPG mainly contains butane.
– –
– –
– –
– – –
– –
– –
H –C—C —C –C –H H – C –— C –— C – H
3. (a) Natural gas is a mixture of CH4, C2H6 and C3H8.
4. (a) 5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (d) 8. (d) H H– C –H H H H H
H H–C–H
1° 1°
–
9. (d) CH3 CH3 H
17. (b)
Both carbon atoms in ethane are primary. 18. (a) CH4 has only one carbon atom, hence it can’t be
10. (a) prepared by Wurtz reaction, which involves two
11. (c) Pentane (C5H12) exists as three chain isomers molecules of alkyl halide.
CH3CH 2 CH 2CH 2 CH3 CH3 CH CH2 CH3 19. (a) When alkyl halide is treated with sodium metal in
n -pentane | presence of ether, alkane is obtained, this reaction is
CH3 called as Wurtz reaction.
2 methylbutane (iso pentane)
dry ether
R X 2Na X R ' R R ' 2 NaBr
dry ether
CH3 CH3–Br + 2Na+Br–CH3
|
H3C C CH3 CH 3 CH 3 2 NaBr
| 20. (c) Other three methods can be used for the preparation
CH3 of alkane having at least two carbon atoms.
2,3-dimethylpropane (neo pentane)
21. (b) Sodium salts of carboxylic acids on heating with soda
lime (mixture of sodium hydroxide and calcium oxide)
H H H H H give alkanes containing one carbon atom less than the
1° | 2° | 2° | 3° |3° |2° 1°
12. (a) H3C – C – C – C – C – C – CH3 carboxylic acid. This process of elimination of carbon
| | 1°| 1°| | dioxide from a carboxylic acid is known as
H H CH3 CH3 H
decarboxylation
3, 4-dimethylheptane
CaO
CH3COO Na NaOH CH 4 Na 2CO3
There are four 1° C-atoms, three 2° C-atoms and two
3° C-atoms Sodium ethanoate Methane
13. (c) 14. (d) 22. (a) Higher is the branching lesser will be the boiling point
15. (d) CH4, C2H6 and C3H8 can have only one structure but further increase in molecular weight increases boiling
C4H10 can have more than one structure. Possible point in alkane. Hence 2, 2– dimethyl propane will have
structures of C4H10 are following least boiling point.
H H H H CH3
1 2 3 4
|
H C C C C H CH3 C CH 3
|
H H H H CH3
Butane (n- butane), (b.p. 273 K)
23. (a) n-octane has highest boiling point due to unbranched
H H H chain and maximum carbon atoms. It has max. Van der
1 2 3
H C C C H Waal forces.
HH C HH 24. (c)
hv
H 25. (a) Cl2 2Cl•
Chain initiation
2-Methylpropane (isobutane)
(b.p.261 K) CH3
|
16. (b) Possible isomers of C5H12 are 26. (d) Neo-pentane, H3C C CH3 , has only 1° hydrogen
H H H H H |
CH3
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
H–C–C–C–C–C–H
and hence gives only one monochloro derivative.
H H H H H
HYDROCARBONS 217
27. (d) 5 4 3 2
44. (b) CH 3 CH CH C 1CHO
CH3 CH3 | |
|
Br2
| OH CH 3
28. (c) CH3 CH CH2 CH3 CH3 C CH2CH3
4-Hydroxy-2-methylpent-2-en-1-al
sunlight |
Br 45. (b) H3C CH3 H3C
2 bromo 2 methyl butane H
C=C C=C
Ease of replacement of H-atom 3° > 2° > 1°.
29. (a) Complete combustion of all organic compounds leads H H H CH3
to formation of CO2 + H2O. 46. (d) Alkenes having double bonds with two different
30. (b) CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 groups on each end of the double bond show
geometrical isomerism. A2b2c2, A2b2cd, A2bcde.
Aromatisation
Br Br
C C 1,2-dibromopropene
Benzene H CH3
Aromatisation is a process in which aromatic
compounds are formed from open chain compounds. Br Br
C C 2,3-dibromobut-2-ene
31. (b) During cracking higher hydrocarbons (liquid) are H3C CH3
converted to lower gaseous hydrocarbons. 47. (b) The two isomers differ in the position of the double
32. (c) n-Alkanes on heating with anhydrous aluminium bond so they are called position isomers.
chloride and hydrogen chloride gas isomerise to 48. (b) CH3CH2CH=CH2 CH3CH=CHCH3 (CH3)2C=CH2
branched chain alkanes. 1-butene (i) 2- butene (ii), (iii) 2-methylpropene
33. (b) Methane reacts with steam at 1273 K in the presence (cis,- trans) (iv)
of nickel catalyst to form carbon monoxide and CH3
dihydrogen. This method is used for industrial
preparation of dihydrogen gas.
34. (c) A conformation is defined as the relative arrangement
of atoms or groups around a central atom, obtained by
the free rotation of one part of the molecule with respect cyclobutane (v) methylcyclopropa ne (vi)
to rest of the molecule. For a complete rotation of 360º, 49. (a) As sketched in the above question , C5H10 may be
one part may rotate through any degree say 0.1º, 0.5º, monosubstituted (i) and (iv), disubstituted as in (ii),
1º etc. giving rise to infinite number of relative (iii) and (v) and trisubstituted as in (vi)
arrangements of group (atom) around a central atom, 50. (c) The condition for geometrical isomerism is
keeping other part fixed. a a a e
C=C or C = C
35. (d) Spatial arrangements of atoms which can be converted
b b b d
around a C – C single bond are called conformations 51. (a)
or conformers or rotamers.
36. (a) 52. (d) CH3 CH2 Br KOH CH 2 CH 2 KBr H 2O
(alc)
37. (d) 53. (c)
38. (a) As predicted by the VSEPR model of electron pair
repulsion, the molecular geometry of alkenes Br
includes bond angles about each carbon in a double |
bond of about 120°. 54. (d) CH3– CH – CH2 – CH3 alc. KOH
2-Bromobutane
39. (c) Double bond in between carbon-carbon is present in +
alkenes whose general formula is CnH2n. CH3–CH–CH2–CH3
+
6 5 4 3 2 1 –H
40. (d) H3C CH CH 2 CH CH CH3 H3C H
| C=C
H CH3
Cl trans-2-butene
IUPAC name : 5- chlorohex-2-ene conc. H 2SO 4
41. (a) 55. (c) C2 H5 OH C2H 4 H 2O
KMnO4
1 2 3 Note : If ethyl alcohol is taken in excess and the reaction
42. (c) CH2= CH–CH2Cl is carried out at a temperature of 433-443 K diethyl
43. (a) Since b (from bromo) comes earlier in alphabetical order ether is formed.
than c (from chloro), the correct name should be 2, 3- conc. H2SO4
dibromo-1, 4-dichlorobutene-2 and not 1,4-dichloro- 2C2 H5OH C2H5OC2H5 H2O
433 443 K
2, 3-dibromobutene-2. (excess)
EBD_7207
218 HYDROCARBONS
56. (d) Alcoholic KOH is used for dehydrohalogenation e.g. H3C
| CH – CH = CH2
|
alc. H3C 3– methyl-1-butene
CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 Cl
KOH
CH3 CH 2 CH CH 2 CH3 +
| CH – CH2 – CH2 (1°)
|
57. (b) Paraffins or alkanes are non-polar compounds. Hence + CH3
soluble in benzene. +H
CH3 +
58. (a) Peroxide effect is observed only in case of HBr. | CH – CH – CH3
|
CH3 (2°)
Therefore, addition of HCl to propene even in the
presence of benzyoyl peroxide occurs according to of the two possibilities 2° carbocation is more stable
Markovnikov’s rule : so the product of the reaction expected was
HCl predominantly one formed by 2° carbocation i.e.
CH3 CH CH 2
(C6 H5CO)2 O 2 CH3 – C – CH – CH3
| |
CH 3 CHCl CH 3 CH3 Br
59. (b) Markonikov’s way of addition : i.e. 2– Bromo-3-Methylbutane
CH 3 CH CH 2
A B However some electrophilic addition reaction form
CH3 CH CH 2
| | products that are clearly not the result of the addition
B A of electrophile to the sp2 carbon bonded to the most
60. (d) Since given alkene on ozonolysis gives 2 moles of hydrogens and the addition of a nucleophile to the
propanone hence alkene should have a double bond other sp2 carbon.
between two equivalent C atoms i.e. the formula should In the above cases the addition of HBr to 3-methyl-1-
be butene the two products formed are shown below.
H 3C CH3 CH3
C C i.e. |
H 3C CH3 CH3 – C – CH – CH = CH2 + HBr
H3C CH3 CH3 CH3
C C +O3 Zn/H 2O | |
H3C CH3 CH3 – CH – CH – CH3 + CH3 – C – CH2 – CH3
2, 3-dimethyl but-2-ene
| |
Br Br
2-Bromo-3-methylbutane 2-Bromo-2-methylbutane
O
In this case the major product formed is 2- Bromo-2-
2CH3 —C—CH3
Propanone methylbutane i.e. option (b) is correct answer.
(Note: The unexpected product results from a
H CH3 H O CH3 rearrangement of carbocation intermediate. Please note
O3
61. (a) CH3– CH2– C C CH3– CH 2– C– C that all carbocation do not rearrange.
CH3
CH3 O O 64. (c) Alkenes combine with hydrogen under pressure and
O O
in presence of a catalyst (Ni, Pt or Pd) and form alkanes.
CH3– C – CH 3+ CH3 – CH2 – CHO (–H2O)
2 H / Pd
62. (d) In presence of peroxide, HBr adds on alkenes in Butene - 1 Butane
anti–markovnikov’s way, thus 65. (a) Alkenes are unsaturated hydrocarbon having double
Peroxide
bond so generally gives addition reaction.
H3CCH CH 2 HBr H3CCH 2CH 2 Br 66. (c)
Pr opene n propyl bromide
67. (d) A doubly bonded carbon atom having an alkyl group
Kharasch observed that the addition of HBr to is oxidised to aldehyde which is further oxidised to
unsymmetrical alkene in the presence of organic carboxylic acid.
peroxides follows an opposite course to that suggested
by Markownikoff . This is termed anti-Markownikoff (i) KMnO 4 ,OH
CH3CH 2CH CH CH3
or peroxide effect. (ii) H
63. (b) We know that in case of an unsymmetrical alkene there
is the possibility of forming two products. In such CH3CHO CH3CH 2CHO
cases the formation of major product is decided on the
basis of Markownikoffs rule which is rationalized in CH3COOH CH3CH 2COOH
terms of stability of the intermediate carbocation. Also
remember that 3° carbocation is more stable than 2° 68. (b) Polythene is manufactured by heating ethylene to
carbocation and 2° carbocation is more stable than 1° 473K under a pressure of 1500 atmosphere and in the
carbocation. presence of a trace of oxygen.
HYDROCARBONS 219
473K,1500atm
(–CH 2 – CH 2 –)n CH3CH CHCH3
n(CH 2 CH 2 )
Trace of oxygen 2 butene
The polythene manufactured in this way is called low H O

O3 H
density of polythene. C C
69. (a) CH 2 = CH 2 + H - O - SO2 OH O O

H 2SO 4
Zn / H 2O 2CH3CHO
CH 3 CH 2 OSO 2 OH CH 3CH 2 OSO 2 OH
Ethyl hydrogen sulphate 74. (a) The addition of HBr takes place according to anti-
Addition of sulphuric acid takes place according to Markovnikoff’s rule in presence of peroxide for
Markownikoff’s rule. Alkanes do not absorb cold conc. unsymmetrical alkenes.
The addition of HBr to symmetrical alkenes is not
H 2SO4 .
affected by the presence or absence of peroxide.
70. (c) According to Markownikoff’s rule, "in case of addition
of an unsymmetrical reagent (H– X), the positive part 75. (d) CH 2 CH 2 KMnO4 OH
get attached to the C which is least substituted or
which bears larger number of hydrogen atoms." CH2 CH 2
| | + MnO 2 KOH
H H OH OH
R H | | Glycol
C=C +H X R C C H 76. (b) When unsymmetrical unsaturated hydrocarbon reacts
H H with unsymmetrical reagent, then negative part of
|
H reagents attacks that carbon which has less H-atom.
[Markownikoff's rule]
Markownikoff’s rule is based on the stability of
I
carbocations (3° > 2° > 1° > methyl). |
400 C
71. (c) As per Markovnikoff’s law, the positive part (e.g. H CH 3 CH CH 2 HI CH 3 CH CH 3
of HX) or the less negative part of the reagent adds Propene-2 2-Iodopropane
to that carbon atom of alkene which has more
number of hydrogen atoms (the rich gets richer). So CCl4
77. (a) CH 2 CH 2 Br2 CH 2 CH 2
(c) is the correct option as the two carbons | |
containing the double bond have one H atom each Br Br
i.e. symmetric. 1, 2-dibromo ethane
72. (d) Completing the sequence of given reactions,

HOCl aq. NaHCO3
O3
78. (b) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2
CH 3 – CH CH CH 3 | |
Cl OH
O
CH 2OH
Zn / H 2O
|
CH3– CH CH – CH3 CH 2OH
Glycol
O O
79. (c) By adding bromine water to a solution, if the colour of
‘A’ bromine water decolourise then the compound is
(ozonide)
unsaturated. This is a confirmatory test for unsaturation.
2CH3CHO H 2 O ZnO Conc. H 2 SO4

80. (b) CH 3 CH CH 2 H 2O
Markonikoff's rule
'B '
Thus ‘B’ is CH3CHO CH 3 CH CH3
Hence (d) is correct answer. |
OH
73. (c) The given molecular formula suggests that the aldehyde Isopropyl alcohol
formed will be acetaldehyde hence the alkene will be
EBD_7207
220 HYDROCARBONS
81. (b) Greater the s-character of C, higher is its
95. (c) CaC2 + 2H2O HC CH + Ca (OH)2
electronegativity, shorter and stronger will be the bond Calcium Acetylene
formed by it. Thus C C is the strongest bond. carbide
82. (b) General formula for alkynes is CnH2n–2 96. (d) Among isomeric alkanes, the straight chain isomer
83. (c) When both double and triple bonds are present, then has higher boiling point than the branched chain
triple bond is considered as the principal group. isomer. The greater the branching of the chain, the
CH3 CH CH C CH lower is the boiling point. Further due to the presence
5 4 3 2 1 of electrons, these molecules are slightly polar and
84. (b) Three alkynes are possible for the formula C5H8. hence have higher boiling points than the
CH3CH2CH2C CH corrosponding alkanes.
97. (a) Terminal alkyenes give a white precipitate easily on
CH3
reaction with ammonical silver nitrate solution.
CH3 98. (b) dil H 2SO 4
CH CH H 2 O
HgSO 4 .60 C
CH3CH2C CCH3
85. (c) If both the double and triple bonds are present, the [CH 2 CHOH] CH3CHO
compound is regarded as derivative of alkyne. Further unstable
if double and triple bonds are at equidistance from 99. (b) HCl
CH CH HCl CH 2 CH Cl
either side, the preference is given to double bond.
86. (d) C2H2 and C3H4 are homologue because they differ by Cl
– CH2 group. Both have triple bond in their molecule.
CH3 – CH
Cl
87. (a) 1, 1-dichloroethane
88. (d) In CH CH triple bond consists of one and two 100. (b) Alkynes having terminal –C H react with Na in
bonds. liquid ammonia to yield H2 gas. CH3CH2C CH can
89. (c) In C2H6, C – C bond length is 1.54 Å. react with Na in liquid NH3 so the correct answer is (b).
90. (c) Acetylene molecule can be represented as, Na in
CH3CH 2 C CH
liquid NH3
H C C H
1
CH3CH 2C C – NaH2 (g )
So, it contains 3 and 2 bonds. 2
91. (d) We know that carbon having 101. (a) Acetylene reacts with the other three as:
(i) 4 bonds correspond to sp3
CH2
(ii) 3 and 1 bond correspond to sp2 CH CNa Na
CH CH +HCl
(iii) 2 and 2 bonds correspond to sp liq. NH3
CHCl
(1) (2) (3) (4) CH3
H3 C C C CH3 +HCl
(1) (2) (3) (4) CHCl CHCl2
No. of bonds : 4 2 2 4 [AgNO3+NH4OH]
– 2 2 – CH CH AgC CAg + NH4NO3
white ppt.
Hybridisation : sp3 sp sp sp3
Thus, butyne-2 has sp and sp3 hybridised carbon 102. (c) 103. (d)
atoms. 104. (c) 40% H 2SO4
CH3 C CH H 2O
1% HgSO4
92. (b) C C C C C C
1.20A 1.34A 1.54A
Rearrangement
93. (a) As the number of bonds between carbon atoms CH3 C CH 2 CH3 C CH3
increases, electronegativity of that carbon also |
OH O
increases due to increasing active power of electrons. Acetone
Also sp hybrid is more electronegative than sp2 which
is more electronegative than sp 3 ( s character CH3 CH CH3
decreases) Hence, option (a) is correct.
C C
94. (c) On heating ethylene chloride (1, 1 dichloro ethane)
105. (a) 3CH 3 C CH
with alcoholic potash followed by sodamide alkyne is
CH CH
obtained
alc.KOH C
R CH 2 CCl 2 R R CH CCl R
NaNH 2 CH3
R C C R Mesitylene or 1, 3, 5-trimethyl benzene
HYDROCARBONS 221
106. (b) CH CH H 2
Lindlar's
CH 2 CH 2 Y Y
Acetyle Catalyst
Pd. BaSO4 Ethylene +
X
124. (a)
Ni
107. (d) Addition – CH CH 3H 2 CH 3 CH 3 X
m-isomer
Substitution – (> 60%)
1 Y = –COOH because it is meta directing group while
CH CH Na CH C Na H2
2 –NH2, – OH and –Cl are o and p directing groups.
Polymerization – 125. (a) – NO2 is a meta-directing group. As it is also a
deactivating group so no chance of introduction of
hot Cu tube
3CH CH C6 H 6 second – Br atom.
Polymerization
Benzene 126. (c) Cl exhibits –I effect and +M effect.
Br + 3H2
Ni
|
108. (b) CH3C CH 2HBr CH3 C CH3 127. (b)
| Benzene Cyclohexane
Br 128. (d)
109. (b) CH3
110. (b) Thin film of polyacetylene can be used as electrodes
anhydrous AlCl3
in batteries. These films are good conductors, lighter 129. (c) + CH3Cl + HCl
and cheaper than the metal conductors.
111. (b) 130. (b) Benzene can be obtained by polymerisation of
112. (d) Amongst all tropolone is a non-benzenoid aromatic acetylene.
compound.
113. (c) Red hot tube
3HC CH
114. (c) Kekule in 1865 suggested a ring structure of benzene 500 C
in which the ring was composed of six carbon atoms, 131. (a) In electrophilic substitution reaction an electrophile
each of which carries one atom of hydrogen. To satisfy
(in this case NO2 ) replaces another atom (in this case
the fourth valency of the carbon atom, he suggested
three alternate double bonds. H) from the substrate (benzene).
H NO 2
CH
HC CH HNO3 H 2SO 4
HC CH Nitrobenzene
C 132. (a) This is an example of Friedel - Craft alkylation.
H 133. (d)
115. (a) O O
O
116. (c) Benzene do not show addition reactions like other O
unsaturated hydrocarbons. However it show 134. (c) + O3 O
O
substitution reactions. Due to resonance all the C – C O
bonds have the same nature, which is possible because O O
of the cyclic delocalisation of -electrons in benzene. Benzene triozonide
Monosubstitution will give only a single product. 135. (b) Friedel- Craft reaction occurs in presence of an
117. (a) In the benzene molecule all the six carbons are sp2 attacking reagent which is an electrophile (AlCl3).
hybridised as each C has one double bond.
118. (c) They have a relatively high percentage of carbon. STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS
119. (a) 120. (c) 121. (c)
122. (d) Benzene can be obtained by all the compounds given. 136. (a) According to experimental evidences, electrophilic
123. (a) This is an example of decarboxylation reaction. substitution reactions are supposed to proceed via the
following three steps:
COONa
(1) Generation of the electrophile
NaOH + CaO
(2) Formation of carbocation intermediate
+ Na2CO3 (3) Removal of proton from the carbocation intermediate
EBD_7207
222 HYDROCARBONS
137. (b) 149. (b) For statement (ii), alkynes on reduction with Pd/C form
H cis-alkenes. For statement (iv), Propyne on reduction
.. + -
HO3SO - H + H - O
.. - NO 2 H-O
.. - NO2 + HSO 4 with Pd/C form propene. Propene does not show
geometrical isomerism. Only those compounds show
H geometrical isomerism which have two different atoms
+
H O
.. NO 2 H 2O NO 2 or groups attached to each carbon atom.
Protonated Nitronium ion CH3 H

nitric acid C C
In the process of generation of nitronium ion, sulphuric H H
Propene
acid serves as an acid and nitric acid as a base.
138. (a) -electrons of benzene rings are delocalised 150. (d) Polynuclear hydrocarbons are not produced in human
throughout the molecule. This makes the molecule very body by any biochemical reaction as when they enter
stable. The stability resists breaking of double bonds
into human body they undergo various biochemical
for addition.
reactions which finally damage DNA and cause cancer.
139. (b) Natural gas is found in upper strata during drilling of
oil wells. The gas after compression is known as
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG).
140. (b) 151. (a) Among the infinite number of conformations in the
141. (c) In methane carbon atom is sp3 hybridized. staggered conformation hydrogen atoms are as far as
142. (b) Dihydrogen gas adds to alkenes and alkynes in the apart as possible. While in eclipse conformation
presence of finely divided catalysts like platinum, hydrogen atoms are perfectly eclipsed.
palladium or nickel to form alkanes. These metals
In skew conformation, hydrogen atoms are closer than
adsorb dihydrogen gas on their surfaces and activate
the hydrogen-hydrogen bond. Platinum and palladium in staggered but away than in eclipsed conformation.
catalyse the reaction at room temperature but relatively Pt/Pd/ Ni
higher temperature and pressure are required with 152. (a) CH 2 CH 2 H2 CH3 CH3
nickel catalyst. Ethene Ethane
143. (b) For statement (iii), Fluorination is too violent to be
controlled. For statement (iv), Iodination is very slow Zn, H
and a irreversible reaction. It can be carried out in the CH3 Cl H 2 CH 4 HCl
Chloromethane Methane
presence of oxidizing agents like HIO3 or HNO3
CH 4 I2 CH 3 I HI dry ether
CH3Br 2Na BrCH3 CH3 CH3 2NaBr
5 HI HIO3 3I 2 3H 2O Bromomethane Ethane
144. (c) Pyrolysis and cracking are same process.
145. (b) Rotation around a C-C single bond is not completely CaO
CH 3COO Na NaOH CH 4 Na 2 CO3
free. It is hindered by a small energy barrier of 1-20 kJ
mol-1 due to weak repulsive interaction between the 153. (c)
adjacent bonds. Such a type of repulsive interaction is
154. (a) Pd/C
called torsional strain. CH CH H 2 CH 2 CH 2
146. (b) Eclipsed form has maximum torsional strain while Ethyne Ethene
staggered form has the least.
H H H H
147. (b) For statement (ii), Alkenes are also known as olefins. alc.KOH
For statement (iv), Carbon–Carbon double bond in H C C H C =C
alkene consists of one sigma and one pi bond. H X H H
H H (X Cl, Br, I)
C C
H H
CH 2 Br CH 2 Br Zn CH 2 CH 2 ZnBr2
148. (a) For statement (i), cis form of alkenes have significant
dipole moment whereas dipole moment of trans form is
almost zero. For statement (iv), due to different H H
Conc.H 2SO 4
arrangements of atoms or groups in space cis and trans H C C H CH 2 CH 2 H2 O
isomers differ in their properties like melting point, H OH Ethene
boiling point, dipole moment, solubility etc. Ethanol
HYDROCARBONS 223
Cl 161. (b) The assertion that chlorination of CH4 does not take
place in dark is correct because it is a free radical
Anhy. AlCl3 reaction and free radicals are obtained in presence of
155. (b) + Cl2 + HCl
sun light.
Chlorobenzene 162. (b) Iodination is reversible since formed HI is a strong
reducing agent and reduces the alkyl iodide back to
CH2Cl
alkane. CH4 + I2 CH3I + HI
+ CH2Cl2
Anhy. AlCl3
+ H2O
Iodination can be done only in presence of strong
oxidising agents like iodic acid which destroys the
Benzyl hydriodic acid.
chloride 163. (d) The two hydrogen atoms on first carbon and the two
Cl H-atoms on the third carbon atom lie in perpendicular
Cl Cl planes. The central carbon atom is sp-hybridized while
Anhy. AlCl3 terminal carbon atoms are sp2-hybridized
+ 6Cl2 + 6HCl
dark, cold 164. (c) (4n + 2) electrons and planar structure are the
Cl Cl essential conditions for aromaticity.
Cl
Hexachlorobenzene CRITICAL THINKING TYPE QUESTIONS
(C6Cl6)
Cl 165. (d) ; ;
Cl Cl
uv
+ 3Cl2
500 K |
Cl Cl In all these we find CH 2 group i.e. correct answer
|
Cl
Benzene hexachloride. is (d).
(BHC) 166. (c) The structure of neopentane is
AlCl3
156. (a) (A) C6H 6 Cl 2 C6H5Cl CH 3
(Benzene) (Chlorobenzene)
H3C — C— CH3
AlCl3
(B) C6 H6 CH3Cl C6H5CH3 HCl
CH3
(Toluene)
It has 1 quaternary and 4 primary carbons.
(C) C6 H6 CH3COCl C6H 5COCH3 HCl 167. (a)
methyl phenyl 168. (b) For the compounds with same molecular mass, boiling
ketone
point decreases with increase in branching. The boiling
KMnO4 point also increases steadily with increase in molecular
(D) C6 H5 CH3 C6H5COOH
NaOH mass. Hence 2-methyl propane will have lowest boiling
(Toulene)
point
157. (d) 158. (a) 159. (b)
CH3 —CH—CH3
CH3
2-methyl propane
160. (a) This reaction is followed by anti Markownikoff rule
H H H H 169. (d)
Peroxide CH3 CH3
H – C – C – C = C + HBr | |
170. (c) H3C – C – CH2Br + 2Na + Br – CH2– C – CH3
ether
H H H | |
–2NaBr
1 Butene CH3 CH3
H H H H
neo-pentyl bromide
H–C–C–C–C–H
H H H Br CH3 CH3
| |
1-Bromobutane H3C – C – CH 2 – CH2 – C – CH3
In this reaction anti Markownikoff’s addition is | |
CH3 CH3
explained on the basis of the fact that in the presence
2,2,5,5-tetramethylhexane
peroxides, addition takes place via free radical
mechanism rather than the ionic mechanism.
EBD_7207
224 HYDROCARBONS
171. (a) Electrolysis of a concentrated aqueous solution of CH3CH2CH2CH =CH2 CH3CH2CH=CHCH3
either sodium or potassium salts of saturated mon- 1-pentene (i) 2- pentene, (cis,- trans) (ii), (iii)
carboxylic acids yields higher alkane at anode. CH3 CH3
Electrolyt ic | |
2RCOOK 2RCOO 2K
Oxidation Anode Cathode CH 3 CH CH CH 2 CH 3 CH 2 C CH 2
3-methyl-1-butene, (iv) 2-methyl-1-butene, (v)
At anode 2RCOO 2RCOO 2e –
R — R 2CO 2 CH3
|
At Cathode 2K 2e – 2K CH 3 C CHCH 3
2K H2O 2KOH H2 2-methyl-2-butene, (vi)
(Kolbe's Method) 179. (b) Stability of an alkene depends upon the heat of
172. (a) Given hydrogenation of an alkene. The heat of hydration is
Cl 2 alc. / KOH O3 / H 2 O the standard enthalpy change in hydrogenation of on
A B C CH 2 O
alkene. The lower the heat of hydrogenation of an
Hydrocarbon alkene higher will be stability.
Since hydrocarbon C give only CH2O, on ozonolysis, Order of stability Heat of hydrogenation
C should be CH2 = CH2 hence going backward A (kJ/mol)
should be ethane. Thus the reactions are trans-2-butene – 115.5
CH 3CH 3
Cl 2 / h
CH 3CH 2Cl alc. cis-2-butene – 119.6 and
KOH ... 1-butene – 126.8 respectively.
(A) (B)
180. (c) In compounds
CH 2 CH 2 O3 / H 2 O HCHO
(C ) ( D) CH3 CH3
CH 3
173. (b) CH 3 — C— CH 3 first has more dipole moment than second.

Therefore its boiling point will be higher. Melting point
CH 3
2,2-dimethyl Propane depends on symmetry therefore I has higher melting
point than II. Steric crowding in I is more than II
All hydrogen atoms are equivalent in 2, therefore I is more stable than II.
2-dimethylpropan e. So it forms only one
181. (b)
monochlorinated product.
174. (c) In the eclipsed conformation of ethane, the dihedral CH3
H+/ Heat
angle between hydrogen atoms of adjacent methyl 182. (b) CH3 — CH — CH — CH3
groups is 0º.
OH
HH H
CH3 CH3
H
H CHH— CH — CH — CH H / Heat
CH3 — C = CH — CH3 + CH3 — CH — CH = CH2
H H H H H 2 methyl 3 methyl
H butene-2 butene-1 (20%)
(80%) (B)
175. (a) The bond is formed by the sideways overlapping of
two p-orbitals of the two carbon atoms. (A)
The molecular plane does not have any electron In this case dehydration is governed by Saytzeff’s
density as the p-orbitals are perpendicular to the plane rule according to which hydrogen is preferentially
containing the ethene molecule. The nodal plane in eliminated from the carbon atom with fewer number of
the -bond of ethene is located in the molecular plane. hydrogen atoms i.e., poor becomes poorer. Thus, 2-
176. (c) methyl butene-2 is the major product.
4 5 CH3
177. (a) Cl CH2CH3 HBr, dark
C=C CH3 — C = CH — CH3
2 3 in absence
CH3 I (A) of peroxide
1
Correct IUPAC name of above compound is trans-2-
chloro-3-iodo-2-pentene
178. (c) C5H10 has 1º degree of unsaturation since the isomers CH3
are acyclic, all of these are alkenes. For writing the (CH3)2 — CH — CH — CH3 + CH3 — C — CH2 – CH3
isomers, first introduce the double bond at different
possible positions, and then consider the possibility Br Br
of branching in the alkyl group. (Minor) (Major)
HYDROCARBONS 225
This reaction is governed by Markownikoff’s rule
according to which when an unsymmetrical reagent OH | |
C C KMnO 4 C C + MnO 2 KOH
e.g. HBr adds to an unsymmetrical alkene, then the | |
OH OH
negative part of the reagent is added to that carbon 1,2 diols
atom of the double bond which bears the least number
of hydrogen atom. Thus, in above case. 2-methyl 2- This test is known as Baeyer test.
bromo butane will be the major product. 188. (b) CH 2 CH 2 Cl HCl CH 3CHCl 2
183. (a) When 3, 3 dimethyl 2-butanol is heated with H2SO4 Addition of HCl takes place according to
the major product obtained is 2, 3 dimethyl 2-butene. Markownikoff’s rule. (H goes to C which is least
substituted)
CH3
|
Conc.H 2SO 4 CH 2 CH3 H 2O
CH3 CH C CH 3 189. (a) H 2SO 4 |
| | CH 2 CH 2 H 2SO4
OH CH3
3,3 dimethyl 2-butanol CH3
| H 2SO 4
CH3 CH3 CH 2OH
+
CH3 – CH – C – CH3 CH3 – CH – C – CH3 Except ethyl alcohol, no other primary alcohol can be
OH2 CH3 prepared by this method as the addition of H2SO4
+
CH3
follows Markownikoff’s rule. Generally secondary and
CH3 CH3 tertiary alcohols are obtained.
+
CH3 – CH – C – CH3 190. (c) Electrophilic addition reactions are shown by alkenes
CH3 – C = C – CH3
or alkynes, in these reactions attacking species is
H CH3 CH3 electrophile
2, 3 dimethyl -2-butene Slow
CH 3 CH CH 2 H CH 3 CH CH 3
184. (d) CH3 CH3 2° carbonium ion
C=O+O=C
CH3 C2 H5 CH 3 CH CH3 Br
Fast
CH 3 CH CH 3
|
Br
CH3 CH3 2-Bromopropane
C=C 191. (c)
CH3 CH2 CH3
192. (d) Nature of halogen atom and the alkyl group both
2,3-Dimethyl-2-pentene
determine rate of reaction.
185. (d) Addition of hydrogen halide to alkene is an example of
193. (a) (i) HC C CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH3
electrophilic addition involving carbocations as
intermediates. Hex 1 yne
HBr (ii) CH3 C C CH 2 CH 2 CH3

CH3 CH CH 2 CH3 —CH—CH3
in absence of Hex 2 yne
peroxide
Br
(Markownikoff addition)
(iii) CH3 CH 2 C C CH 2 CH3
186. (a) Addition reaction occurs on a double bond.
Hex 3 yne
The compound containing double bonds are also
undergo polymerisation. So, the correct option are both (iv) HC C CH CH 2 CH3
(a) and (d) e.g. |
CH3
CH 2 CH 2 HOCl CH 2OH CH 2 Cl 3- Methylpent -1-yne
(addition reaction)
(v) HC C CH 2 CH CH3
Polymerisation
CH 2 CH 2 n
|
nCH 2 CH 2 CH3
Polyethene
4- Methylpent -1-yne
187. (b) Alkenes react with cold alkaline KMnO4 solution to
form glycols. During this reaction KMnO4 (violet) gets (vi) CH3 C C CH CH3
|
converted to MnO2 (brown ppt.) and therefore the CH3
colour of KMnO4 is disappeared.
4- Methylpent -2-yne
EBD_7207
226 HYDROCARBONS
CH3 201. (c) Due to the maximum percentage of s character (50%),

| the sp hybridised orbitals of carbon atoms in ethyne
(vii) HC C C CH 3 molecules have highest electronegativity; hence, these
| attract the shared electron pair of the C-H bond of
CH3 ethyne to a greater extent than that of the sp 2
3,3- Dimethylbut-1-yne hybridised orbitals of carbon in ethene and the sp3
194. (a) Ethylene has restricted rotation, acetylene has no hybridised orbital of carbon in ethane. Thus in ethyne,
rotation, hexachloroethane has more rotation than hydrogen atoms can be liberated as protons more easily
ethylene but less than ethane because of greater size as compared to ethene and ethane.
of the substituent (chlorine) in hexachloroethane than 202. (c) In arenes, electrons are delocalised, hence arenes do
in ethane (substituent is hydrogen). not undergo addition reactions easily. Aromatic
195. (a) The acidity of acetylene or 1–alkyne can be explained compounds (Arenes) are highly stable and show
on the basis of molecular orbital concept according to resonance. eg. Benzene is the simplest example.
which formation of C—H bond in acetylene involves 203. (c) Compounds having same molecular formula but
sp-hybridised carbon atom. Now since s electrons are different functional groups in their molecules are called
closer to the nucleus than p electrons, the electrons functional isomers.
present in a bond having more s character will be 204. (d) In benzene due to delocalisation of - electrons, all
correspondingly more closer to the nucleus. the C – C bond lengths are equal as each C– C bond
Thus owing to high s character of the C—H bond in has some double bond character and thus the bond
alkynes (s = 50%), the electrons constituting this bond length is between single and double bond, i.e., between
are more strongly held by the carbon nucleus i.e., the C2H6 and C2H4.
acetylenic carbon atom or the sp orbital acts as more 205. (a)
electronegative species than the sp2 and sp3 with the 206. (c) Benzene has 12 and 3 bonds.
result the hydrogen present on such a carbon atom Ratio of bonds to bonds = 12/3 = 4
( C—H) can be easily removed as a proton. 207. (d) Presence of 6p orbitals, each containing one
196. (b)
unpaired electron, in a six membered cyclic structure
197. (d) Br2 in CCl4 (a), Br2 in CH3 COOH (b) and alk. KMnO4
is in accordance with Huckel rule of aromaticity.
(c) will react with all unsaturated compounds, i.e., 1, 3
and 4 while ammonical AgNO3 (d) reacts only with 208. (a)
terminal alkynes, i.e., 3 and hence 3 can be distinguished Cl
from 1, 2 and 4 by. ammonical AgNO3 (d).
198. (c) This reaction occurs according to Markownikoff’s rule + HCl
Subtitution, Cl2, anly AlCl3
which states that when an unsymmetrical alkene
undergo hydrohalogenation, the negative part goes Cl
Addition, 3Cl2, sunlight Cl
to that C-atom which contain lesser no. of H-atom. Cl
Benzene
CH3 CH 2 C CH HCl
Cl Cl
CH3 CH 2 C CH 2 Cl
|
Cl 209. (b) –Cl group is o-, p-directing due to +R effect ; however
it is deactivating due to strong –I effect of Cl (difference
I
| from other o-, p-directing groups which are activating).
HI
CH3 CH 2 C CH3 The net result is that chlorobenzene undergoes o, p-
| substitution, but with difficulty
Cl
210. (b) C6 H5COOH NaOH C6 H 5COONa H 2O
199. (a) Only terminal alkynes show acidic nature. Ethyne is (X)
more acidic than propyne. But-2-yne is not acidic as it
distill
does not contain any hydrogen attached to sp C6 H5OH Zn C6 H 6 ZnO
(Y)
hybridised carbon.
200. (a) 211. (a) Huckel rule is not obeyed. It has only four electrons.
Further it does not have continous conjugation.
EBD_7207
236 ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY
FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS caused by human emissions of sulfur and nitrogen
compounds which react in the atmosphere to produce
1. (d) DDT causes air, water and soil pollution. acids. In recent years, many governments have
2. (d) DDT is a non-biodegradable pollutant. introduced laws to reduce these emissions.
3. (d) The uppermost region of atmosphere is exosphere. 26. (c) pH of normal rain water is 5.6 as CO2 present in
4. (b) The coldest region is mesosphere (temp. –27ºC to atmosphere combines with moisture to form H2CO3.
– 92ºC) 27. (d)
5. (c) Air pollution greatly affect the troposphere. 28. (b) Large amounts of CH4 are released in paddy fields,
6. (c) Troposphere contains water vapour. coal mines and by fossil fuels.
7. (b) High concentration of SO2 leads to stiffness of 29. (b) The oxidised hydrocarbons and ozone in presence of
flower buds. humidity cause photochemical smog.
8. (c) The irritant red haze in the traffic and congested Hydrocarbons + O2, NO2, NO, O, O3 Peroxides
places is due to presence of oxides of nitrogen.
30. (d) 31. (a) 32. (b)
9. (c)
33. (a) Smog is caused by oxides of sulphur and nitrogen.
10. (b) CO2 is generally not regarded as pollutant.
34. (c) 35. (a) 36. (a) 37. (a) 38. (c)
11. (c) CO and oxides of Nitrogen are poisnous gases present
39. (c) 40. (a) 41. (a) 42. (b) 43. (a)
in automobile exhaust gases.
44. (d) 45. (b)
12. (b) Nitric oxide (NO) which may be produced at the ground
level due to human activity or natural sources or is 46. (a) PAH (Poly Aromatic Hydrocarbon)
produced in large amounts in the exhaust gases by the 47. (c) Usually catalytic converters are used in the
engine of supersonic transport planes and introduced automobiles, which prevent the release of nitrogen
directly into the strateosphere. oxide and hydrocarbons to the atmosphere. Certain
plants e.g., Pinus, Juniparus. Quercus, Pyrus and
NO O3 NO 2 O2
Vitis can metabolise nitrogen oxide and therefore,
13. (d) CO is highly toxic and impairs respiration. CO combine their plantation could help in this matter.
with haemoglobin of blood and reduces its O2 carry
48. (a) NO and freons are responsible for ozone depletion.
capacity.
49. (c) The ozone layer, existing between 20 to 35 km above
14. (d)
the earth’s surface, shield the earth from the harmful
15. (a) CO2 causes green house effect.
U. V. radiations from the sun.
16. (c)
Depletion of ozone is caused by oxides of nitrogen
17. (a) Radiation coming from sun or outerspace have high
energy or short wavelength, which are allowed to enter N 2O + h NO + N
by green house gases. However, radiation emitted by reactive nitric oxide
earth is in infrared region, having long wavelength, NO + O 3 NO 2 + O2
are reflected back by the envelope of green house O3 + h O2 + O
gases.
18. (d) NO 2 + O NO + O 2
19. (a) Green house gases such as CO2, ozone, methane, the
2 O3 + h 3 O 2 (Net reaction)
chlorofluorocarbon compounds and water vapour form
a thick cover around the earth which prevents the IR The presence of oxides of nitrogen increase the
rays emitted by the earth to escape. It gradually leads decomposition of O3.
to increase in temperature of atmosphere. 50. (d) Ozone layer acts as a shield and does not allow
20. (a) CO2 is a green house gas. ultraviolet radiation from sun to reach earth. It does
21. (a) 22. (d) not prevent infra-red radiation from sun to reach earth,
23. (d) Acid rain contains H2SO4 > HNO3> HCl. thus option (d) is wrong statement and so it is the
24. (a) Normal rain water has pH 5.6. Thunderstorm results in correct answer.
the formation of NO and HNO3 which lowers the pH. h •
51. (c) CF2 Cl 2 CF2 Cl Cl
25. (c) Acid rain is rain or any other form of precipitation that
is unusually acidic. It has harmful effects on plants, • •
Cl O3 Cl O O2
aquatic animals, and infastructure. Acid rain is mostly
ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY 237
52. (a) In antarctica ozone depletion is due to formation of 91. (d)
acrolein. 92. (b) This represents a great step forward for green
53. (d) Depletion of ozone layer causes skin cancer. chemistry.
54. (b) They create holes in ozone layer. 93. (b) Replacement of earlier used tetra-chloroethene as
55. (d) Ozone hole is reduction in ozone layer in stratosphere. solvent for dry cleaning by liquid CO2 results in less
56. (a) 57. (c) harm to ground water.
58. (d) Ozone absorbs U.V. radiations harmful to human life. 94. (b) Ethanal is commerically prepared by one step
59. (d) oxidation of ethene in the presence of ionic catalyst
60. (b) In cold water, dissolved oxygen can reach a in aqueous medium with an yield of 90%.
concentration upto 10 ppm, whereas oxygen in air is Catalyst
about 200, 000 ppm. CH2 = CH2 + O2 Pb(II)|Cu(II)
CH3CHO
61. (a) Pesticides cause water pollution. (in water)
62. (d) Minamata is caused by Hg poisoning.
63. (c) 64. (c) 65. (a) 66. (b) STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS
67. (b) Domestic sewage constitute biodegradable pollutants.
68. (c) 95. (c) For statement (iii), Stratosphere lies above
69. (b) Sewage water is purified by micro-organisms. troposphere between 10 and 50 km above sea level
70. (c) Water is often treated with Cl2 to kill germs. cloud formation takes place in troposphere.
71. (d) Decrease in D.O causes death of fish. For statement (iv), Troposphere is a turbulent, dusty
72. (b) Strength of sewage or degree of water pollution is zone containing air, much water vapour and clouds.
measured in terms of BOD (Biochemical oxygen For statement (v), Stratosphere contains dinitrogen,
demand) value. dioxygen, ozone and little water vapour.
73. (d) 96. (d)
74. (b) The ideal value of D.O for growth of fishes is 8 mg/ . 97. (a) Classical smog is also called reducing smog.
98. (d) For statement (iii), Methemoglobinemia (blue baby
7mg / is desirable range, below this value fishes get
syndrome) is caused due to excess of nitrate in
susceptible to disease. A value of 2 mg/ or below is
drinking water.
lethal for fishes.
For statement (iv), Excessive sulphate (> 500 ppm) in
75. (b) Water pollution is mainly caused by industrial wastes,
drinking water causes laxative effect, otherwise at
sewage, insecticide, herbicides, etc.
moderate levels it is harmless.
76. (a)
99. (d) All the given statements are true for about waste
77. (d) Addition of phosphate fertilizers to water leads to
recycling.
nutrient enrichment (eutrophication).
78. (a) BOD of pond is connected with microbes and organic MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS
matter.
79. (d) 100. (c) 101. (a) 102. (b)
80. (a) Excessive concentration of nitrate in drinking water is 103. (a) 104. (a) 105. (a)
harmful and can cause methemoglobinemia (blue baby
syndrome). ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS
81. (a) Eutrophication causes reduction in D.O
106. (a) The presence of particulate matter in polluted air
82. (a) Pesticides cause water pollution.
catalyses the oxidation of SO2 to SO3
83. (d) Decrease in D.O causes death of fish
107. (b) At high altitudes when lightening strikes dinitrogen
84. (d)
and dioxygen combine to form oxides of nitrogen.
85. (d) DDT is a non-biodegradable pollutant.
108. (c) Other gases like CFCs, ozone, water vapour and nitrous
86. (c) 87. (d)
oxide also show green house effect.
88. (b) Pesticides and synthetic fertilizers pollute the soil.
109. (c) 110. (b) 111. (a)
89. (a) Lower trophic level has lower toxins deposition than
112. (b) SPM (Suspended Particulate Matter) is defined as
higher trophic level.
particles floating in the air with a diameter below 10
90. (b) Green chemistry may be defined as the programme of
m. Studies have shown that high SPM concentrations
developing new chemical products and chemical
in the air can have a detrimental impact on respiratory
processes or making improvements in the already
organs. SPM is generated from natural sources (e.g.,
existing compounds and processes so as to make less
volcanoes or dust storms) and human activities
harmful to human health and environment. This means
(vehicles, incinerators and industrial plants).
the same as to reduce the use and production of
hazardous chemicals.
EBD_7207
238 ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY
SPM Other aerosols 122. (d) Carboxyhaemoglobin is 300 times more stable than
oxyhaemoglobin.
Less than 10 m Less than 100 m 123. (a) 124. (c)
Tend to float longer in Tend to settle fairly 125. (a) Haemoglobin has great affinity for NO.
air due to small size quickly due to comparative 126. (c)
heaviness 127. (c) The beauty of Taj Mahal is endangered due to air
pollutants like SO2 released from oil refinery.
Catalytic converters is a device designed to reduce
128. (b) When SO2 pollution in air is much higher. Sometimes,
the amount of emissions from automobiles. The current
SO2 mixes in the air with small particles of metals near
(so-called three-way) systems use a heated metal
the factories and gets oxidised into sulphur trioxide
catalyst to reduce the emissions of carbon monoxide
SO3. These gases are harmful and they react with water
(CO), hydrocarbons, and nitric oxide (NO), all of which
to form sulphuric acid (H2SO4) or sulphurous acid
contribute to the formation of photochemical smog. In
(H2SO3) and come down to earth with rain water, it is
an automobile’s exhaust system, a catalytic converter called acid rain or acid precipitation.
provides an environment for a chemical reaction where 129. (b)
unburned hydrocarbons completely combust. 130. (d) London smog is formed in morning during winter.
113. (b) 114. (d) 115. (a) 116. (c) 131. (a) The average residence time of NO is 4 days.
117. (b) Eutrophication is a natural process which literally 132. (a) PSCs react with chlorine nitrate and HCl to give HOCl
means well nourished or enriched. It is a natural state and Cl2.
in many lakes and ponds which have a rich supply of 133. (d) 3CH4 + 2O3 3CH2= O + 3H2O
nutrients. Eutrophication become excessive, however Formaldehyde
when abnormally high amount of nutrient from sewage, CH2 == CHCH == OCH3COONO2
fertilizers, animal wastage and detergent, enter streams ||
and lakes causes excessive growth or blooms of O
microorganisms. With increasing eutrophication, the Acrolein Peroxyacetyl nitrate (PAN)
diversity of the phytoplankton community of a lake 134. (b) Thermal pollution is caused by power plants. Power
increases and the lake finally becomes dominated by plant requires a larger quantity of water for cooling.
blue - green algae. The water after cooling is left in the water body. The
118. (a) The F– ions make the enamel on teeth much harder temperature of left water is generally very high and
by converting hydroxyapatite, [3(Ca 3 (PO4)] 2 . affects aquatic life.
Ca(OH)2]. the enamel on the surface of the teeth, 135. (c) The excess of fluorine in water causes fluorosis. The
into much harder fluorapatite, [3(Ca3(PO4)2. CaF2]. symptoms of fluorosis are mottling of teeth (yellowish
streaks) and abnormal bones liable to fracture etc. It is
CRITICAL THINKING TYPE QUESTIONS an example of endemic disease.
119. (c) H2, He and ionic oxygen are present in exosphere. 136. (b) 137. (a)
120. (c) Solar energy is not responsible for green house effect 138. (c) Because they are very sensitive to sulphur dioxide
instead it is a source of energy for the plants and and in cities the amount of SO2 is high so lichen do
not grow in cities.
animals.
139. (a) BOD of pond is connected with microbes and organic
121. (c) CO is converted into CO2 by microorganism present
matter.
in soil.
140. (b) 141. (a)
THE SOLID STATE 249
FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS 31. (c)

1. (b) Intermolecular forces are strong in solids.
2. (d) Crystals show good cleavage because their constituent
particles are arranged in planes.
3. (b) Crystalline solids are anisotropic in nature that is some
of their physical properties like electrical resistance
or refractive index show different values when
measured along different directions in the same
crystals.
4. (a) In crystalline solid there is perfect arrangement of the
constituent particles only at 0 K. As the temperature An isolated fcc cell is shown here. Each face of the
increases the chance that a lattice site may be cell is common to two adjacent cells. Therefore, each
unoccupied by an ion increases. As the number of face centre atom contributes only half of its volume
defects increases with temperature solid changes into and mass to one cell. Arranging six cells each
liquid. sharing the remaining half of the face centred atoms,
constitutes fcc cubic lattice. e.g., Cu and Al.
5. (b)
32. (b) For orthorhombic system 90
6. (c) Glass is amorphous solid. 33. (a) It is based on the definition of the cubic lattice.
7. (b) Amorphous solids are isotropic, because these 34. (b) For tetragonal a b c , 90
substances show same properties in all directions.
35. (c) The no. of atoms is a unit cell may be calculated by the
8. (c) Glass is amorphous solid. the formula
9. (b) 10. (d) 11. (b) nc nb n f ne
Z
12. (b) On heating, amorphous solids become crystalline at 8 1 2 4
some temperature. The milky appearance of glass is Where nc = no. of atom at the corner
because of some crystallisation. nb = no. of atoms at body centre
13. (c) Amorphous silicon is used as best photovoltaic nf = no. of atoms at face centre
material available for conversion of sunlight into ne = no. of atoms at edge centre.
An fcc crystal contains
electricity.
14. (c) Solid CH4 is a molecular solid. In this, the constituent 8 6
= + = 4 atoms in a unit cell.
molecules are held together by van der Waal’s forces. 8 2
15. (a) Si is an example of covalent crystalline solid among 36. (c) H
the given choices. Si atoms are covalently linked in G
E
tetrahedral manner.
16. (a) Covalent as in case of diamond. F
a
17. (b) Among the given crystals, only silicon exists as a
covalent solid. It has diamond like structure.
C
18. (c) Covalent bond force A
19. (b) In graphite, the electrons are spread out between the a a
sheets. B
20. (d) 21. (c) 22. (c) 23. (a) 24. (a) An isolated fcc cell is shown here. Each face of the
25. (b) 26. (d) 27. (a) 28. (a) cell is common to two adjacent cells. Therefore, each
29. (c) There are only 14 possible three dimensional lattice. face centre atom contributes only half of its volume
These are called Bravais lattices. and mass to one cell. Arranging six cells each
sharing the remaining half of the face centred atoms,
30. (b) constitutes fcc cubic lattice. e.g., Cu and Al.
EBD_7207
250 THE SOLID STATE
37. (b) In bcc structure, 57. (d) Packing fraction of bcc = 68%
no. of atoms at corner = (1/8) × 8 = 1 Empty space = 100 – 68 = 32%
no. of atoms at body centre = 1 58. (c) The hcp arrangement of atoms occupies 74% of the
Total no. of atoms per unit cell = 1 + 1 = 2. available space and thus has 26% vacant space.
38. (b) hcp is a closed packed arrangement in which the unit 59. (b) In AB AB packing spheres occupy 74%. 26% is empty.
cell is hexagonal and coordination number is 12. 60. (d) In NaCl the Cl– and Na+ touch along edge of cube the
39. (c) ABAB...... is hexagonal close packing.
40. (b) In ZnS structure, sulphide ions occupy all fcc lattice a
distance between ions is
points while Zn 2+ ions are present in alternate 2
tetrahedral voids. 61. (a)
41. (b) Metals such as copper and silver crystallise in fcc 62. (b) For body centred cubic lattice Z = 2
structure while metals Mg and Zn crystallise in hcp Atomic mass of unit cell = 133 + 80 = 213 a.m.u
structure. Volume of cell = (436.6 × 10–10)3 cm3
42. (d)
ZM
43. (a) Co-ordination number in hcp and ccp arrangement Density, =
is 12. a3 NA
44. (a) 45. (c) 2 213
46. (d) It represents ccp arrangement. (436.6 10 10 )3 6.02 1023
47. (b) 48. (c) 49. (d) 50. (b) = 8.50 g/cm3
51. (c) hcp and ccp structures have maximum packing 63. (a) There are two atoms in a bcc unit cell.
efficiency = 74%.
So, number of atoms in 12.08 × 1023 unit cells
For bcc = 68%
= 2 × 12.08 × 1023 = 24.16 × 1023 atoms.
For simple cubic = 52.4%
52. Total volume of atoms present in bcc unit cell is. 3 2d 2 4.52
64. (d) For bcc, d a or a 5.219Å
16 3 4 3 2 3 1.732
(a) r (b) r = 522 pm
3 3
z M
8 3 12 3
(c) r (d) r a 3
N A 10 30
3 3
52. (c) For bcc structure total number of atoms = 2. 2 39
3
4 3 (522) (6.023 1023 ) 10 30
Total volume = 2 r
3
0.91g / cm3 910 kg m 3
8 3
= r ZM
3 65. (b)
53. (b) The face centered cubic unit cell contains 4 atom NA V
4 3 16 3 NA V 8.92 6.02 1023 (362)3 10 30
Total volume of atoms 4 r r Z
3 3 M 63.55
54. (c) As CsCl is body-centred, d 3a / 2. =4
55. (d) Number of atoms per unit cell = 1 It has fcc unit cell
a
Atoms touch each other along edges. Hence r = 66. (a) For bcc lattice body diagonal = a 3 .
2
The distance between the two oppositely charged ions
( r = radius of atom and a = edge length)
a
4 = 3
r 2
3
Therefore % fraction = 387 1.732
(2 r )3 6 = 335pm
2
56. (b) Packing fraction is defined as the ratio of the volume
ZM
of the unit cell that is occupied by the spheres to the 67. (a) For b.c.c., Z = 2, Now, d = and V = a3
total volume of the unit cell. NV
P.F. for cpp and bcc are 0.74 and 0.68 respectively. 2 56
d= = 7.92 g ml–1
So, the free space in ccp and bcc are 26% & 32% 23
(6.02 10 ) (2.861 10 8 ) 3
respectively.
THE SOLID STATE 251
82. (c) The vacancy created due to missing of equal no. of
68. (b) Z M 2 100
atoms or ions form normal lattice point is called
NA a 3 6.023 10 23 (400 10 10 ) 3 Schottky defect. In this type of defect electrical
neutrality of ionic crystal is maintained.
5.188 g / cm 3 83. (a) In stoichiometric Frenkel defects occurs in those
3 compound which have
d1 (a 2 )3 z1 3 4 (i) Low C.N.
69. (c) 1.46
d2 3 z2 3.5 2
(a1 ) (ii) Large difference in size of cations and anions
70. (d) Ionic solids must always maintain electrical neutrality. 84. (b) Transition metals exhibit this defect due to metal
Ionic solids show vacancy or interstitial defects as deficiency, the compound obtained are non
Frenkel and Schottky defect. stoichiometric e.g. It is difficult to prepare ferrous oxide
with the ideal composition of FeO what we actually
71. (b)
obtain is Fe0.95O or FexO with x = 0.93 to 0.96
72. (d) In KCl, co-ordination number of cation and anion is 6
85. (c) AgBr exhibit Frenkel defect.
and 6 respectively. KCl is highly ionic so Schottky
86. (c) KBr does not exhibit Frenkel defect.
defect is common.
87. (d) No change in density
Note : Schottky defect is common in compounds having
88. (c) Frenkel defect is due to dislocation of ion from its usual
high coordination nummber while Frenkel defect is
lattice site to interstitial position.
common in compounds with low coordination number.
89. (c) 90. (a)
73. (a) Schottky defects are found in solid.
91. (d) When insulators (non metal atoms) interact to form a
74. (d) When electrons are trapped in anion vacancies, these solid, their atomic orbitals mix to form two bunch of
are called F-centre. orbitals, separated by a large band gap. Electrons
cannot therefore be promoted to an empty level, where
they could move freely.
+ve –ve
e– ion ion 92. (b) 93. (d) 94. (b) 95. (a) 96. (b)
97. (a) p-type of semiconductors are produced
F- centre in crystal (i) due to metal deficiency defects
(ii) by adding impurity containing less electrons (i.e.,
75. (d) If in an ionic crystal of the type A+, B–, equal number atoms of group 13)
of cations and anions are missing from their lattice
Ge belongs to Group 14 and In to Group 13. Hence on
sites so that the electrical neutrality is maintained. The doping, p-type semicondutor is obtained.
defect is called Schottky defect.
98. (d) The semiconductors formed by the introduction of
76. (d) The appearance of colour in solid alkali metal halide is impurity atoms containing one elecron less than the
due to presence of F-centre found as defect in the parent atoms of insulators are termed as p-type
crystal structure. semiconductors. Therefore silicon containing 14
77. (b) When equal number of cations (Na+) and anions (Cl–) electrons is to be doped with boron containing 13
are missing from their regular lattice positions, we have electrons to give a p-type semi-conductor.
Schottky defect. 99. (d) For n-type, impurity added to silicon should have more
78. (d) Schottky defect occurs in ionic crystals of type A+ B, than 4 valence electrons.
when equal number of cations and anions are missing 100. (b) n-type, since electron is set free.
from their lattice sites so that the electrical neutrality is 101. (d) Extrinsic semiconductor
maintained. This defect generally appears in highly 102. (c) Pure silicon doped with phosphorus is a n-type
ionic compounds which have high coordination semiconductor, as n-type extrinsic semiconductor (Si)
number. NaCl, KCl and CsCl all have high coordination is made by doping the semiconductor with pentavalent
numbers i.e., 6, 6 and 8 respectively. So, Schottky defect element.
appear in all of the given compounds. 103. (a) MnO2
79. (b) More is the Schottky defect in crystal more is the 104. (c) Rhenium oxide ReO3 is like metallic copper in
decrease in density. conductivity.
80. (d) Frenkel defect does not lower the density of the crystal 105. (d) 106. (a) 107. (b)
since the ions do not leave the crystal lattice. 108. (d) Ferrimagnetism is observed when the magentic
81. (c) Frenkel and Schottky defects are crystal defects. It moments of the domains in the substance are aligned
arises due to dislodgement of cation or anion from in parallel and antiparallel directions in unequal
their places in the crystal lattice. numbers.
EBD_7207
252 THE SOLID STATE
109. (c) Ferrimagnetic substances lose ferrimagnetism on 137. (c) Tetrahedral void is so called because it is surrounded
heating and become paramagnetic. by four spheres tetrahedrally while octahedral void is
110. (a) An element containing an odd number of electrons is so called because it is surrounded by six spheres
paramagnetic. octahedrally.
111. (c) 112. (d) 113. (b) 114. (a) 115. (a) 138. (b)
139. (a) Schottky defect is due to missing of equal number of
STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS cations and anions.
140. (a) In case of semiconductors, the gap between valence
116. (c) Quartz glass is an example of amorphous solid and band and the conduction band is small and therefore
crystalline solids are anisotropic in nature. some of the electrons may jump from valence band to
117. (d) Covalent solids are insulator of electricity. Graphite is conduction band and thus on increasing temperature
a covalent solid but it is a conductor of electricity due conductivity is also increased.
to its structure. 141. (a) All magnetically ordered solids (ferromagnetic,
ferrimagnetic and antiferromagnetic solids) transform
118. (d) Total number of atoms per unit cell for a face centered
to the paramagnetic state at high temperature due to
cubic unit is 4.
the randomisation of spins.
The atom at the body center completely belongs to
the unit cell in which it is present. CRITICAL THINKING TYPE QUESTIONS
119. (b)
142. (b)
120. (c) Frenkel defect does not change the density of the
143. (d) Excess of lithium makes LiCl crystal pink.
solid.
144. (b) Out of the given substances, only Li has high electrical
AgBr shows both Frenkel and Schottky defects. and thermal conductivity as Li is a metallic solid.
121. (d) LiCl crystals are pink because its anionic sites are 145. (a) 146. (a)
147. (a) Diamond is like ZnS. In diamond cubic unit cell, there
occupied by unpaired eonline . Zinc oxide shows metal
are eight corner atoms, six face centered atoms and
excess defect due to presence of extra cations at four more atoms inside the structure.
interstitial sites. Number of atoms present in a diamond cubic cell
122. (a) Electrical conductivity of semiconductors increases
1 1
with rise in temperature. Insulators have = 8¥ + 6¥ + 4 = 8
8 2
conductivities ranging between 10–20 to 10–10 ohm–
1 m–1 (corners) (face (inside
. centered) body)
123. (b) Due to release of electrons, the crystal can conducts 148. (d) The bcc cell consists of 8 atoms at the corners and one
electricity but conductivity is not as high as that of atom at centre. Contribution of each atom at each corner
metals. Its conductivity is very low and because
conduction is due to electrons so it is n-type 1
is equal to .
semiconductor, also excitation of these electron give 8
rise to yellow color in crystal. 1
124. (c) CrO2 is a ferromagnetic whereas O2 is paramagnetic. n 8 1 2
8
The fcc cell consists of 8 atoms at the eight corners
and one atom at each of the six faces. This atom at the
125. (d) 126. (b) 127. (c) 128. (a) 129. (a) face is shared by two unit cells.
130. (a) 131. (c) 132. (c) 133. (d) 1 1
n 8 6 4
8 2
1 1 1
134. (b) In crystalline solids constituents are arranged in 149. (b) A : B : C = 8: 2: 4 =1:1:2
8 2 2
definite orderly arrangement. This regular arrangement
of constituents extends throughout the three 1
150. (d) In a unit cell, W atoms at the corner 8 1
dimensional network of crystal. Thus crystalline 8
substances said to have long range order. Whereas 1
O-atoms at the centre of edges 12 3
amorphous solids have no regular arrangement. 4
135. (a) Na-atoms at the centre of the cube = 1
136. (d) Tetrahedral holes are smaller in size than octahedral W : O : Na = 1 : 3 : 1
Hence, formula = NaWO3
holes. Cations usually occupy less space than anions.
THE SOLID STATE 253
151. (a) Potassium crystallises in bcc lattice.
3
152. (a) From the given data, we have Area of hexagonal 6 (2r)2
Number of Y atoms in a unit cell = 4 4
2 16
Number of X atoms in a unit cell 8 3
3 3 =6 4r 2
4
From the above we get the formula of the compound
as X16 / 3Y4 or X 4 Y3 6 3 r2
1 2 r2
153. (b) No. of M atoms = 4+1=1+1=2 % occupied by 100
4 6 3 r2
1 1 2 3.14
No. of X atoms = ×6+ ×8=3+1=4 100 60.43%
2 8 6 3
So, formula = M2X4 = MX2 158. (d) Packing efficiency
1
154. (a) Number of A atoms = 8 1 = Area occupied by circles within the square
8 Area of square
1 2 r2 2 r2
Number of B atoms = 6 3 100 100 =
2 = 100 78.54%
L2 2( 2 r ) 2
4
Formula AB3
159. (a) In fcc structure one unit cell consist 4 atoms, hence
155. (a)
density × a3 = The mass of four atoms
156. (a) Following generalization can be easily derived for
= 8.92 × (3.608 × 10–8)3
various types of lattice arrangements in cubic cells
= 4.18 × 10–22
between the edge length (a) of the cell and r the radius
of the sphere. ZM
160. (a)
a NA V
For simple cubic : a = 2r or r
2 NA V 2 6 1023 (5 10 8 )3
For body centred cubic : Z
M 75
4 3 Z = 2, which represents bcc structure
a r or r a
3 4 3 3
r a 5 2.165Å 216.5 pm
For face centred cubic : 4 4
1 217 pm
a 2 2r or r a
2 2
a3 N A 10 30
Thus the ratio of radii of spheres for these will be 161. (d) M
Z
simple : bcc : fcc
a 3 1 10 (100)3 6.02 1023 10 30
= : a: a 15.05
2 4 2 2 4
i.e. option (a) is correct answer.
6.02 1023
Number of atoms in 100 g = 100
157. (a) 15.05
= 4 × 1025
162. (b) The volume of the unit cell
= (2.88 Å)3 = 23.9 × 10–24 cm3.
The volume of 100 g of the metal
m 100
Let radius of the sphere = r = = = 13.9 cm3
7.20
Area occupied by sphere in hexagonal close packing
Number of unit cells in this volume
1
r2 6 r2 2 r2 13.9 cm3
6 = 24 = 5.82 × 1023
23.9 10 cm3
EBD_7207
254 THE SOLID STATE
163. (b) Density is given by 165. (a) Given: Atoms are present in the corners of cube = A
and atom present at body centre = B. We know that a
Z M
d ; where Z = number of formula units present cubic unit cell has 8 corners. Therefore contribution of
NA a 3
1
in unit cell, which is 4 for fcc each atom at the corner = . Since number of atoms
a = edge length of unit cell. M = Molecular mass 8
per unit cell is 8, therefore total contribution =
4 M 10
2.72 = ( 1pm 10 cm) 1
23 10 3 8 1 . We also know that atoms in the body centre,
6.02 10 404 10
8
therefore number of atoms per unit cell = 1. Thus
2.72 ¥ 6.02 ¥ (404)3
M= = 26.99 = 27 gm mole–1 formula of the compound is AB.
4 ¥107
166. (a) In first case conduction is due to hole,while in second
Z M case it is due electron.
164. (d) = , 167. (a) BaTlO3
No a3
168. (b) Substances which are weakly repelled by external
Z 27 magnetic field are called diamagnetic substances, e.g.,
2.7 = 23
Z=4 H2O.
6.02 10 ( 4.05) 3 10 24
169. (d) Ferrimagnetic substance become para-magnetic on
Hence it is face centred cubic unit lattice. heating. This is due to randomisation of spins on
Again 4r = a 2 = 5.727 Å heating.
r = 1.432 Å 170. (b) 171. (a)
EBD_7207
266 SOLUTIONS
FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS Number of moles

14. (c) Molarity
Volume of solution (L)
1. (d)
2. (c) Sodium fluoride is used as rat poison. Mass 1000
Moles of water 55.6
3. (b) Almost all the processes in our body occur in liquid Molar mass 18
solution.
4. (c) In homogeneous mixtures composition and properties 55.6
Molarity = = 55
both are uniform throughout the mixture. 1
5. (a) Hexane is not water soluble, hence solution is not 15. (b) 10 g glucose is dissolved in = 100 ml solution.
formed. 180 g (g mole) is dissolved in
6. (d) Dilute, concentrated and saturated terms are 100
qualitative methods of description of concentration = 180 = 1800 ml = 1.8 L
of solution whereas molar or molarity is quantitative 10
method. Mass of solute
16. (d) ppm 106
7. (d) Mass of solution
8. (b) Density = 1.17 gm/cc (Given)
Mass 10
As d = ppm 106 10 ppm
Volume 106
volume = 1cc mass = d = 1.17g p p
17. (a) xsolute
No. of moles 1.17 ¥1000 p
Molarity = =
Volume in litre 36.5 ¥1 Given, p° = 0.8 atm, p = 0.6 atm, xsolute = ?
1170 0.8 0.6 0.2
= =32.05M xsolute or xsolute ,
36.5 0.8 0.8
9. (c) From molarity equation or xsolute = 0.25
M1V1 + M2V2 = M3(V1 + V2)
1× 2.5 + 0.5 × 3 = M3 × 5.5 No. of moles of solute 5
18. (b) Molarity 2M
4 Volume in litres 2.5
M3 = = 0.73M 19. (b) One molal solution means one mole of solute is present
5.5
in 1 kg (1000 g) solvent
10. (b) Relation between molality and mole fraction is
i.e., mole of solute = 1
1000 x2 1000 .2
m 3.2 1000g 1000
x1M1 0.8 78 Mole of solvent (H2O) = =
Thus, X (m) = 3.2 18g 18
Wt 1000 7.1 1000 1
11. (b) M ; M 0.5M 18
M.Wt . V 142 100 Mole fraction of solute = = = 0.018.
1000 1008
p n2 n2 1
640 630 0.0156 18
12. (a) or
p n1 n2 n1 n2 640 1
20. (d) NV = N1V1 + N2V2 + N3V3
or 1 mole i.e., 78g benzene contains solute = 0.0156 mol
1 1 1
or, 1000N 1 5 20 30 or N .
0.0156 103 2 3 40
Molality of solution = 0.2 m
78 21. (a) For HCl
Moles of solute M = N = 0.1
13. (d) Normality N1V1 = N2V2 ; 25 × N1 = 0.1 × 35
Volume of solution in litre
0.1 35 0.1 35
Given mass of solute = 4.0 g N1 ; M 0.07 .
No. of moles of NaOH = 4/40 25 25 2
Volume of solution = 100 ml = 100/1000 L 22. (b) 1 molal solution means 1 mole of solute dissolved in
1000 gm solvent.
4 / 40 nsolute = 1 wsolvent = 1000 gm
Normality 1N
100 /1000
SOLUTIONS 267
1000 33. (a)

nsolvent = = 55.56 34. (c) In a given solution sum of all the mole fraction is unity
18
i.e.,
1 (a) x1 + x2 + x3 + x4 = 1
xsolute = = 0.0177
1 55.56
n3
23. (d) H3PO4 is tribasic so N = 3M = 3 × 1N = 3N. (b) n n x3
24. (c) N1V1 + N2V2 = NV 1 2 n3 n 4
4x + 10 (1 – x) = 6 × 1; –6x = –4 ; x = 0.67 35. (d) Volume is temperature dependent, hence expression
Thus 0.67 litre of 4N HCl involving volume term (normality, molarity and
1 – x = 1 – 0.67 = 0.33 litre of 10 N HCl formality) varies with temperature
Molarity
25. (c) Molality (m) geq of solute
Molarity Molecular mass Normality =
Density vol. of solution in L
1000
moles of solute
18 Molarity =
5000 vol. of solution in L
18 98
1.8
1000 formula mass
26. (d) No. of millimoles = 500 × 0.2 = 100 Formality =
vol. of solution in L
Thus, molarity of diluted solution
moles of solute
100 Molality =
mass of solvent in kg
700
(Molarity = No. of moles L–1 = No. of millimoles mL–1) Since molality does not include the volume term, it is
independent of temperature.
0.1428 M
36. (b) An increase in temperature of the solution increases
wt 1000 the solubility of a solid solute.
27. (d) Molarity (M) =
mol. wt. vol (ml) The amount of solute that dissolve depends on what
type of solute it is.
wt. 1000 For solids and liquid solutes, changes in pressure have
2
63 250 practically no effect on solubility.
63 37. (d)
wt. = gm 38. (b) Number of solute particles going into solution will be
2
equal to the solute particles separating out and a state
100 of dynamic equilibrium is reached.
wt. of 70% acid = 31.5 = 45 gm
70 solute + solvent solution.
28. (b) More than theoretical weight since impurity will not i.e., rate of dissolution = rate of crystallization.
contribute. 39. (d) The maximum amount of solute dissolved in a
29. (c) Applying the law of equivalence, given amount of solvent is its solubility.
N1V1 N 2V2 N3V3 N RVR 40. (d)
N N N 41. (b) According to Le-chateliers principle, for an exother
50 30 10 N R 1000
10 3 2 mic reaction ( < 0) increase in temperature decreases
5 N 10 N 5 N = 1000 N R the solubility.
N 42. (c) On increasing the pressure over the solution phase
NR
50 by compressing the gas to a smaller volume (in fig b)
30. (c) 40 g NaOH = 1 mole increase the number of gaseous particles per unit
moles of the solute volume over the solution and also the rate at which
1
molality = = 1 molal the gaseous particles are striking the surface of
mass of the solvent in kg 1
solution to enter it. The solubility of the gas will
31. (b) Both molality and mole fraction are not related to the increase until a new equilibrium is reached resulting
volume of solution, thus they are both independent of in an increase in the pressure of a gas above the
temperature. solution and thus its solubility increases.
32. (a) Given w = 10 g Mol. mass = 40
43. (d)
Weight of solvent = 1250 × 0.8 g = 10000 g = 1 kg
44. (a) According to Henry’s law at a constant temperature,
10 the solubility of a gas in a liquid is directly proportional
molality 0.25
40 1 to the pressure of the gas.
EBD_7207
268 SOLUTIONS
45. (d) According to Henry’s law, 62. (a) For example, decrease in the vapour pressure of water
m=k×p by adding 1.0 mol of sucrose to one kg of water is
given KH = 1.4 × 10–3 nearly similar to that produced by adding 1.0 mol of
pO2 = 0.5 or urea to the same quantity of water at the same
temperature.
pO2 KH x O2
63. (d)
0.5 64. (a) Given V.PP = 80 torr
x O2 3
1.4 10 V.PQ = 60 torr
m Ptotal = V·PP × xp + V·Pq × xq
No. of moles; n
M
0.7 10 4
m 3 2
32 = 80 60 = 16 × 3 + 12 × 2
5 5
4
m 22.4 10 g 2.24 mg Ptotal = 48 + 24 = 72 torr
46. (c)
47. (b) [ Hint : If added substance dissolves, the solution is 65. (b) Moles of glucose 18
0. 1
unsaturated. If it does not dissolve solution is 180
saturated. If precipitation occurs solution is
supersaturated.] Moles of water 78.2
9.9
48. (c) 18
49. (b) Body temperature of human beings remains constant. Total moles = 0.1 + 9.9 = 10
50. (a) 51. (b) 52. (a)
53. (c) The partial pressure of the gas in vapour phase (p) is pH2O = Mole fraction × Total pressure 9.9
760
proportional to the mole fraction of the gas (x). 10
p = KH .x = 752.4 Torr
Where KH is Henry’s constant. 66. (d) p = pAxA + pBxB
54. (d) To increase the solubility of CO2 in soft drinks and = pAxA + pB (1 – xA)
soda water, the bottle is sealed under high pressure. pAxA + pB – pBxA
55. (d) Scuba divers must cope with high concentrations of pB+ xA (pA – pB)
dissolved gases while breathing air at high pressure
underwater. Increased pressure increases the solubility 67. (b) pA ? , Given p B 200 mm of Hg, xA = 0.6,
of atmospheric gases in blood. When the divers come
towards surface, the pressure gradually decreases. xB = 1 – 0.6 = 0.4, P = 290 of Hg
This releases the dissolved gases and leads to the P = PA + PB = PA x A PB xB
formation of bubbles of nitrogen in the blood. This
blocks capillaries and creates a medical condition 290 = PA × 0.6 + 200 × 0.4 p A = 350 mm of Hg.
known as bends, which are painful and dangerous to
life. To avoid bends, as well as, the toxic effects of 68. (b) ptotal pA xA pB x B
high concentrations of nitrogen in the blood, the tanks
1 3
used by scuba divers are filled with air diluted with 550 pA p
helium (11.7% helium, 56.2% nitrogen and 32.1% 4 B 4
oxygen). pA 3 pB 550 4 ...(i)
56. (a) At high altitudes the partial pressure of oxygen is In second case
less than that at the ground level. This leads to low
1 4
concentrations of oxygen in the blood and tissues of ptotal pA pB
people living at high altitudes or climbers. Low blood 5 5
oxygen causes climbers to become weak and unable pA 4 pB 560 5 ...(ii)
to think clearly, symptoms of a condition known as Subtract (i) from (ii)
anoxia.
pB 560 5 550 4 600
57. (c)
58. (a) Raoult’s law becomes special case of Henry’s law when pA 400
KH become equal to p ∞. 69. (d) According to given information
1
59. (c) 60. (d) pX = 80 Torr
61. (b) In the solution, the surface has both solute and solvent pY = 60 Torr
molecules; thereby the fraction of the surface covered nX = 3 moles
by the solvent molecules gets reduced. Consequently, nY = 2 moles
the number of solvent molecules escaping from the
surface is correspondingly reduced, thus, the vapour nX 3 3
mole fraction of X(xX)
pressure is also reduced. nX nY 3 2 5
SOLUTIONS 269
On adding benzene, its molecules come between
nY 2 2
mole fraction of Y(xY) ethanol molecules there by breaking H-bonds which
nX nY 3 2 5 weaken intermolecular forces. This results in increase
Total Pressure, P = pXxX + pYxY in vapour pressure.
3 2 80. (a) A solution of acetone in ethanol shows positive
80 60 = 48 + 24 = 72 Torr.. deviation from Raoult's law. It is because ethanol
5 5
molecules are strongly hydrogen bonded. When
70. (a) Total vapour pressure = vapour pressure of pure acetone is added, these molecules break the hydrogen
benzene + vapour pressure of toluene bonds and ethanol becomes more volatile. Therefore
= 100 + 50 = 150 mm its vapour pressure is increased.
We know, 81. (a) Acetone and chloroform shows negative deviation
PC6H6 P xC6 H6 from Raoult's law when these are mixed, the hydrogen
bonding takes place between the two molecular species
100 150 xC6 H 6 due to which escaping tendency of either liquid
molecules becomes less and boiling point of solution
100 increases.
xC6 H 6 0.67
150 82. (b)
71. (c) These two components A and B follows the condition 83. (b) For this solution intermolecular interactions between
of Raoult’s law if the force of attraction between A and n-heptane and ethanol are weaker than n-heptane-n-
B is equal to the force of attraction between A and A or heptane & ethanol-ethanol interactions hence the
B and B. solution of n-heptane and ethanol is non-ideal and
72. (b) According to Raoult’s law “The partial pressure of a shows positive deviation from Raoult’s law.
volatile component of a solution is directly proportional 84. (a) For an ideal solution Smix > 0
to its mole fraction in solution at any temperature”. 85. (b)
p = Px 86. (d) Azeotropic mixture is constant boiling mixture, it is not
where, p = Partial pressure of component possible to separate the components of azeotropic
P° = Vapour pressure of component in pure form mixture by boiling.
x = mole fraction of component in solution. 87. (c)
73. (c) For an ideal solution, H 0 , V 0 88. (a) Minimum boiling azeotrope is formed by solution
Hence, option (c) is incorrect. showing positive deviation. e.g. acetone – ethanol.
74. (c) For ideal solution, 89. (b)
Vmixing 0 and H mixing 0. 90. (c) Relative lowering of vapour pressure depends upon
the mole fraction of solute.
75. (d) C2H5I and C2H5OH form non-ideal solution.
P P
76. (d) i.e., mole fraction of solute
77. (a) On adding acetone, its molecules get in between the P
host molecules and break some of the hydrogen bonds 91. (b) According to Raoult's law, the relative lowering in
between them. Due to weakening of interactions, the vapour pressure of a dilute solution is equal to the mole
solution shows positive deviation from Raoult's law. fraction of the solute present in the solution.
78. (d) A solution containing A and B components shows p p n
negative deviation when A–A and B–B interactions Mole fraction of solute
p n N
are weaker than that of A–B interactions. For such
92. (a) Given vapour pressure of pure solvent
solutions.
H = –ve and V = –ve (P°) = 121.8 mm Hg; Weight of solute (w) = 15 g
79. (b) Positive deviations are shown by such solutions in Weight of solvent (W) = 250 g; Vapour pressure of
which solvent-solvent and solute-solute interactions solution (P) = 120.2 mm Hg and Molecular weight of
are stronger than the solute-solvent interactions. In solvent (M) = 78
such solution, the interactions among molecules From Raoult’s law
becomes weaker. Therefore their escaping tendency Po P w M
increases which results in the increase in their partial o
P m W
vapour pressures.
In pure methanol there exists intermolecular 121.8 120.2 15 78
H–bonding. 121.8 m 250
---O – H--- O—H --- O—H--- 15 78 121.8
or m 356.2
| | | 250 1.6
CH3 CH3 CH3
EBD_7207
270 SOLUTIONS
P P n2 0.1 180 100

93. (d) 100. (c) Kb 1K/m
P n1 n2 1.8 1000
101. (b) Tb = Kb × i × m
640 600 2.5 x
Where Tb = Elevation in boiling point
640 39 78 Kb = molal elevation constant
640 78 2.5 i = vant Hoff factor
x 80
39 40 Tb molality..
94. (c) According to Raoult's law 102. (a) Tf = i × Kf × m
p p Van't Hoff factor, i = 2 for NaCl, m = 0.01
xB
p hence Tf = 0.02 Kf which is maximum in the present
case.
.2 1 Hence Tf is maximum or freezing point is minimum.
xB Mole fraction of solute
.2 .8 5 103. (c)
p 60 mm of Hg K f W2 1000 1 1000
T Kfm 5.12 0.4K
p 1 p M 2W1 250 51.2
or 4 p ( p) 5
p 5
104. (d) ( HX H X , i = 1.3); Tf = Kf × m × i
60¥5 1 0.3 0. 3 0.3
fi p° = = 75mm of Hg
4 Tf = 1.85 × 0.2 × 1.3 = 0.481º C
o n w M
P Ps Tf = T f T f = 0 – 0.481ºC = – 0.481ºC
95. (c) =
Po N m W 105. (b) Benzoic acid exists as dimer in benzene.
12 18 106. (b) T f K f m 1.86 0.5 0.93 C; T f 0.93 C
0.1 =
m 108
107. (b) As Tf = Kf. m
12 18 Tb = Kb. m
m= 20
0.1 108
Tf Tb
P P w2 M1 Hence, we have m
96. (b) 100 100 10 Kf Kb
P M2 w1
Kf
w 2 18 or Tf Tb
100 10 or w2 = 60 g Kb
60 180
Thus, 60 g of the solute must be added to 180 g of [ Tb 100.18 100 0.18 C]
water so that the vapour pressure of water is lowered
1.86
by 10%. = 0.18 × = 0.654°C
97. (a) The vapour pressure of a solution of glucose in water 0.512
can be calculated using the relation As the Freezing Point of pure water is 0°C,
p ps Tf = 0 –Tf
Moles of glucose in solution
0.654 = 0 – Tf
ps Moles of water in solution Tf = – 0.654
17.5 ps 18/180 Thus the freezing point of solution will be – 0.654°C.
or [ p 17.5 ] 108. (d) Addition of solute to water decreases the freezing point
ps 178.2/18
of water (pure solvent).
0.1 ps When 1% lead nitrate (solute) is added to water, the
or 17.5 – ps or ps = 17.325 mm Hg. freezing point of water will be below 0°C.
9.9
Hence (a) is correct answer.
1000W2 1.86×1000×68.5
98. (c) Osmotic pressure is a colligative property. 109. (a) Tf Kf = = 0.372
M 2W1 342×1000
99. (c) Tb Kb m
Elevation in boiling point is a colligative property, Tf = T °f – Tf
which depends upon the no. of particles Tf = – 0.372°C
(concentration of solution). Thus greater the number 110. (d) Tf = Kf × m
of particles, greater is the elevation in boiling point 1000 K f w 2 solute
and hence greater will be its boiling point. M
Tf w1 solvent
Na2SO4 2Na+ + SO42–
Since Na2SO4 has maximum number of particles (c) 1000 1.86 1.8
M = 180
hence has maximum boiling point. 0.465 40
SOLUTIONS 271
Molecular formula = (empirical formula)n 124. (d) 125. (c)
Molecular mass 180 126. (c) Na2SO4 2Na+ + SO 24
n 6
Empirical formula mass 30 Mol. before dissociation 1 0 0
Molecular formula = (CH2O)6 = C6H12O6. Mol. after dissociation 1 – 2 1
111. (b) Blood cells neither swell nor shrink in isotonic solution. i 1 2 1 2
As isotonic solutions have equal concentration 127. (d) The salt that ionises to least extent will have highest
therefore there is no flow of solvent occurs and hence freezing point. [ i.e., minimum Tf ]
solvent neither enters nor flow out of the blood cells. 128. (b) AlCl3 furnishes more ions than CaCl2 and thus possess
112. (a) Isotonic solutions have same molar concentration at higher boiling point i.e., t1 > t2.
given temperature provided the Van't Hoff factor (i) is 129. (a) Concentration of particles in CaCl2 solution will be
same. maximum as i = 3 for CaCl2 and i = 2 for KCl.
113. (b) Glucose and Urea do not dissociate into ions, as they
114. (a) The solution which provide same number of ions are are nonelectrolytes.
isotonic.
130. (a) K 4 [Fe(CN) 6 ] and Al 2(SO 4 )3 both dissociates to
Ca (NO3)2 Ca2+ + 2 NO3–
give 5 ions or i = 5
Total ions produced = 3
K4 [Fe(CN)6] 4K+ + [Fe(CN)6]4–
Na2SO4 2 Na+ + SO42–
Total ions produced = 3 and Al2 (SO4 )3 2Al3+ + 3SO 4--
0.1 M Ca (NO3)2 and 0.1 M Na2SO4 are isotonic. 131. (a) Depression in freezing point No. of particles.
115. (d) Osmotic pressure is a colligative property. Hence (when concentration of different solutions is equal)
resulting osmotic pressure of the solution is given by Al 2 (SO4 )3 provides five ions on ionisation
T = 1 + 2 + 3 ..........
Al 2 (SO 4 ) 3 2 Al 3 3SO 42 –
T = 1.64 + 2.46 = 4.10 atm.
116. (a) According to Boyle-van't Hoff law, while KCl provides two ions
C (at constant temp) KCl ææ Æ K + + Cl-
117. (c) Isotonic solutions have same osmotic pressure C6 H12 O6 and C12 H22 O11 are not ionised so they
glucose = unknown solute
have single particle in solution.
Hence, Al2(SO4)3 have maximum value of depression
m1 m2 5 2
or M2 72 in freezing point or lowest freezing point.
M1 M2 180 M2
118. (b ) Tf = Kf × m No. of particles after ionisation
132. (a) (i) i
Kf is a characteristic of a particular solvent i.e., it will No. of particles before ionisation
be different for different solvents. (ii) Tb = i × Kb × m
119. (b)
120. (c) During osmosis water flows through semipermeable CuCl2 Cu2+ + 2Cl
1 0 0
membrane from lower concentration to higher
concentration. (1 ) 2
121. (a) As both the solutions are isotonic hence there is no 1 2
net movement of the solvent occurs through the i , i=1+2
1
semipermeable membrane between two solutions.
Assuming 100% ionization
122. (c) If compound dissociates in solvent i > 1 and on
association i < 1. So, i = 1 + 2 = 3
123. (a) Van’t Hoff equation is 13.44
Tb = 3 0.52 0.1 = 0.156 0.16 [m 0.1]
V = inRT 134.4
For depression in freezing point.
133. (d) Tf i.k f .m ; Tb i.k b .m
Tf = i × Kf × m
For elevation in boiling point. Tf kf
Tb = i × Kb × m Tb kb
For lowering of vapour pressure,
Tf 0 ( 0.186 C) 0.186 C
Psolvent Psolution n
i . 0.186 1.86 0.52 0.186
N n Tb 0.052
Psolvent Tb 0.52 1.86
EBD_7207
272 SOLUTIONS
STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS 156. (a) Mole fraction of any component A in solution
134. (d) No. of moles of A

x
135. (b) Molarity include volume thus with increase Total No. of moles of solution
intemperature increases’ volume increases, hence As total no. of moles of solution > No. of moles of A
molarity decreases while in case of molality mass of
Thus x can never be equal to one or zero.
solvent is taken, which is not effected by temperature.
157. (d) According to Henry’s law the mass of a gas dissolved
136. (c) As temperature increases solubility of gas decreases,
per unit volume of solvent is proportional to the
so dissolution of gas can be considered as exothermic
process. pressure of the gas at constant temperature m = K p
i.e. as the solubility increases, value of Henry’s law
137. (c) Solubility of gases increase with decrease of
temperature. constant decreases. Since CO2 is most soluble in water
among the given set of gases. Therefore CO2 has the
138. (c) A solute dissolves in a solvent if intermolecular
lowest value of Henry’s law constant.
interactions are similar in the two or we may say like
dissolves like. 158. (d) Let the mass of methane and oxygen = m gm.
139. (c) The vapour pressure of a liquid increases with Mole fraction of O2
increase of temperature.
Moles of O2
140. (b) =
Moles of O 2 + Moles of CH 4
141. (d) Colligative properties depends upon the no. of
particles. Since methanol is non electrolyte hence m / 32 1
m / 32
cannot be considered. = = =
m / 32 m /16 3m / 32 3
142. (b) Osmotic pressure is a colligative property as it
depends on the number of solute molecules and not Partial pressure of O2 = Total pressure × mole fraction
on their identity. For dilute solutions, during osmosis 1 1
solvent molecules always flow from lower of O2 , PO2 = P × = P
3 3
concentration to higher concentration of solution.
159. (a) kH = 100 kbar = 105 bar, p = 1 bar
MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS p = k H × xA
143. (d) 144. (c) 145. (b) 146. (a) 147. (a) p 1 5
xA = 10
kH 100 103
148. (a) 1000
Moles of water = 55.5
149. (c) Both the solute and solvent will form the vapours but 18
vapour phase will become richer in the more volatile Weight of water = 1000 g ( 1000 mL = 1000 g)
component.
150. (b) 151. (b) 152. (d) 153. (a) 154. (b) x
Mole fraction = 10–5 =
55.5 x
CRITICAL THINKING TYPE QUESTIONS As 55.5 >>> x, thus neglecting x from denominator
155. (c) Equivalent weight of orthophosphoric acid 5 x
10 x 55.5 10 5 moles
3 31 64 98 55.5
(H3PO4) =
3 3 or 0.555 millimoles.
Now 100 gm solution contains 70 gm H3PO4 160. (c)
161. (a) % of N2 in atmosphere = 78.9%
100 70
litre of solution contains gm % of O2 in atmosphere = 20.95%
1000 1.54 98 / 3
Partial pressure of N2 = 0.789 atm = 0.799 bar
equivalent of H3PO4
Partial pressure of O2 = 0.2095 atm = 0.212 bar
Normality of solution
According to Henry’s law,
70 3
70 3 0.212 6
98 10 1.54 33 N P (K H )O2 x x O2 6.08 10
= (34.86 1000)
1 98
10 1.54
SOLUTIONS 273
167. (d)
0.799 5
P (K H ) N 2 x x N2 1.0447 10 168. (b) According to Raoult's law
(76.48 1000)
p n
n O2 n N2 (mole fraction of solute)
: p n N
n O2 n H 2O n N2 n O2 n H 2O n N2
10
x O2 : x N 2 0.2 p° = 50 mm of Hg
p
6.08 10 6 :1.04 10 5 For other solution of same solvent
= 1 : 1.71
20 n
162. (a) According to idea of Raoult’s law “partial pressure of (Mole fraction of solute)
one of the component is proportional to mole fraction p n N
of that component in the solution.” 20
Mole fraction of solute
P = P1∞ x1 + P2∞ x 2 50
600 = 450 x1 + 700 x2 Mole fraction of solute = 0.4
4.5 x1 + 7x2 = 6 As mole fraction of solute + mole fraction of solvent = 1
x1 + x2 = 1 Hence, mole fraction of solvent = 1 – 0.4 = 0.6
x1 = 0.6 x2 = 0.4 169 (b) Relative lowering of vapour pressure is given by :
x1 = 0.4, x2 = 0.6
P – Ps w/m
163. (a) The solutions (liquid mixture) which boils at constant
P w/ m W / M
temperature and can distil as such without any change
in composition are called azeotropes. where, P° = vapour pressure of pure solvent
Solution of HNO3 and H2O will form maximum boiling Ps = vapour pressure of solution
point azeotrope. Maximum boiling azeotropes show w = mass of solute
negative deviation from Raoult’s law. m = molecular mass of solute
Composition (%) Boiling Point W = mass of solvent
HNO3 68.0 359 K M = molecular mass of solvent
H2O 32.0 373 K For dilute solution
Boiling point of the azeotrope of these two solutions 121.8 120.2 15/ m 15 78 2
is 393.5 K. = 1.3 10
121.8 250 / 78 m 250
164. (a) m = 356.265
165. (a) Since formation of hydrogen bonding takes place, due
170. (a) From Raoult law
to this bond energy is supposed to be released and
hence change in enthalpy is negative,so reaction is p –p
exothermic. p
166. (a) According to Raoult’s law,
PT = xAp°A + xBp°B No.of moles of solute
=
Given, = PT1 500 mm Hg No. of moles of solvent+ No. of moles of solute
nA = 1 and nB = 2 xA = 1/3 and xB = 2/3 When the concentration of solute is much lower than
the concentration of solvent,
1 2
500 pA pB p p No. of moles of solute
3 3
p No. of moles of solvent
1500 pA 2pB ...(i)
Tb = Kb × m
Also given Qn that one more mole of B is added to the
Number of moles of the solute
solution, the pressure of the ideal solution increases m 1000
by 25 mm Hg. Mass of solvent in grams
PT2 = 500 + 25 = 525 mm Hg Number of moles of the solute
Tb Kb × 1000
Also, nB = 3 xA = 1/4 and xB = 3/4 Mass of solvent in grams
1 3 Number of moles of solute

525 pA pB ...(ii)
4 4 Tb Mass of solvent in grams
Subtract (i) and (ii), K b 1000
2100 PA 3PB
p°B = 600 mm Hg 2 100
0.26,
p°A + 2p°B = 1500 p°A = 300 mm Hg. 0.76 1000
EBD_7207
274 SOLUTIONS
100 For HBr
Number of moles of solvent 5.56
18 HBr H Br
760 p 0.26 1 0 0
From equation (i) we get, (1 )
760 5.56 = 90% = 0.9
On solving, p = 724.46 724 i = 1 + = 1 + 0.9 = 1.9
171. (d) (100 + Tb) – (0 – Tf) = 105 T f = Kf × m × i
Tb + Tf = 5
m (kb + kf) = 5 moles of solute
= 1.86 × × 1.9
mass of solvent in kg
5 5
m i.e., moles in 1000 g water
2.37 2.37 8.1/ 81
= 1.86 × 1.9
5 100 /1000
(or) moles in 100 g water = 1.86 × 1 × 1.9 = 3.534K
2.37 10
Tf Tf Tf
5
Wt. of sucrose 342 = 72g or Tf = 0 – 3.534 K
2.37 10
172. (b) Given kb = x K kg mol–1 Tf = – 3.534K
176. (d) 1% solution contains 1 g of the solute in 100 g of
Tb = kb × m solution.
y= x × m Osmotic pressure, = CRT
y The value of R and T is same for all the solute however,
m all of them undergo 100% dissociation
x
i×C
We know
iKCl = 2, iNaCl = 2, iBaCl = 3 and iurea = 1.
Tf = kf × m nKCl = 1/74.5
2
On substituting value of m,
1/ 74.5
CKCl 1000 0.13
yz 100
Tt =
x or KCl = 2 × 0.13 = 0.26
173. (d) Mass of non-volatile solute = 1g 1
Molar mass of solute = 250g mol–1 nNaCl=
58.5
Mass of benzene = 51.2g, Kf = 5.12 K kg mol–1
1/ 58.5
Kf 1000 w 2 C NaCl 1000 0.17
Tf 100
M 2 w1
NaCl = 2 × 0.17 = 0.34
where, w2= mass of the solute 1
n =
M2 = molar mass of solute BaCl2 208.4
w1 = mass of the solvent
1/ 208.4
5.12 1000 1 CBaCl2 1000 0.048
On substituting given values, Tf 100
51.2 250
or BaCl2 3 0.048 0.14
Tf 0.4K
1
174. (d) Tb = iKb m n urea
60
Given, ( Tb)x > ( Tb)y
ix Kb m > iyKb m (Kb is same for same solvent) Curea
1/ 60
1000 0.16
ix > iy 100
So, x is undergoing dissociation in water. urea = 1 × 0.16 = 0.16
175. (b) Given mass of solute = 8.1 g BaCl2 urea KCl NaCl
Mass of solvent = 100 g or III < IV < I < II
ELECTROCHEMISTRY 287
FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS 20. (c) As the value of standard reduction potential decreases
the reducing power increases i.e.,
1. (c) Electrochemical reactions are more energy efficient Z X Y
and less polluting. Thus study of electrochemistry is ( 3.0) ( 1.2) ( 0.5)
important to create new eco-friendly technologies. 21. (b) Given ESn 4 2 = + 0.15 V
Sn
2. (a) We know that in the internal circuit of a galvanic cell
ions flow whereas in the external circuit, the electrons E Cr 3
Cr = – 0.74 V
flow from one electrode to another.
3. (a) Anode has negative polarity.
4. (b) E cell E ox E red
5. (d) When both the electrodes are kept in the same solution = 0.74 + 0.15
there will be no requirement of salt bridge. = 0.89 V
6. (d) 22. (a) Higher the value of reduction potential higher will be
Reduction the oxidising power whereas the lower the value of
reduction potential higher will be the reducing power.
7. (d) It shows reduction reaction. 23. (d) E°Cell = E°OP + E°RP
Zn 2+ 2e- Zn
= 0.76 + 0.314 = 1.10 V
8. (a) 24. (b) Follow ECS, A will replace B.
9. (b) The cell in which Cu and Zn rods are dipped in its
solution is called Daniel cell. 25. (c) Gold having higher E oRe d and oxidises Fe Fe .
10. (c) The magnitude of the electrode potential of a metal is 26. (c) 27. (d)
a measure of its relative tendency to loose or gain
electrons. i.e., it is a measure of the relative tendency RT ln[Fe 2 ]2
28. (c) Nernst equation Ecell = E ocell Zn 2
3
nF [Fe ] 2
to undergo oxidation (loss of electrons) or reduction
(gain of electrons). increasing [Fe2+] will decrease the Ecell.
M M n
ne (oxidation potential) 0.0591
29. (d) E log K
M n
ne M (reduction potential) n
11. (b) 2AgCl(s) H 2 (g) 2HCl(aq) 2Ag(s) Here, n 2, E 0.295
The activities of solids and liquids are taken as unity 2 0.295
and at low concentrations, the activity of a solute is log K = 9.98 10 or K 1010
0.0591
approximated to its molarity.
The cell reaction will be 30. (b) RHS : 2H+ + 2e– H2 (P2)
LHS : H2(P1) 2H+ + 2e–
Pt(s) | H 2 (g),1bar | H (aq)1M | AgCl(aq)1M | Ag(s) overall reaction : H2 (P1) H2(P2)
12. (b) Eocell o
Ecathode o
Eanode Eoright o
E left RT P2 RT P2 RT P1
E = E∞- n = 0- n = n
nF P1 nF P1 nF P2
Eocell 0.25 0.52 0.27V
13. (b) 14. (c) 0.059 1
31. (a) E E log
15. (d) Cu is anode and Ag+ is cathode. n [H ]
16. (d) Calomel electrode is used as reference electrode.
17. (b) Electrode potential is considered as zero. 0.059 1
=0 log 0.236V
18. (b) Without losing its concentration ZnCl 2 solution 1 10 4
cannot kept in contact with Al because Al is more RT
reactive than Zn due to its highly negative electrode 32. (d) Ecell Ecell ln Q
nF
reduction potential.
At equilibrium,
19. (c) From the given data we find Fe3+ is strongest oxidising
Ecell = 0 and Q = Kc
agent. More the positive value of E°, more is the
tendency to get oxidized. Thus correct option is (c).
Ecell Ecell
EBD_7207
288 ELECTROCHEMISTRY
33. (c) The E°cell is given by 0.059 1.10 2
40. (b) E ocell log K C or log K C
0.0591 2 0.059
E°cell log Keq
n KC 1.9 1037
0.0591 G
0.591 log Keq 41. (c) G nFE ; E ;
1 nF
0.591 ( 50.61kJ)
or log Keq = = 10 E 0.26V
0.0591 2 96500 10 3
or Keq = 1 × 1010 42. (d) Molarity = 0.01 M ; Resistance = 40 ohm;
34. (b) For the given cell l -1
Cell constant = 0.4cm .
0.059V [Zn 2 ( aq )] A
Ecell = E°cell log
2 [Cu 2 ( aq)] Specific conductivity ( )
The cell potential will decreases with increase in
cell constant 0.4
[Zn 2+ (aq)] and will increases with increase in = = 0.01 ohm 1 cm 1
[Cu2+(aq)]. resistance 40
35. (d) Here n = 4, and [H+] = 10– 3 (as pH = 3) 1000
Applying Nernst equation Molar conductance ( m)
Molarity
0.059 [Fe 2 ]2 1000 0.01

E = Eº – log 103 ohm 1 cm 2 mol 1
n [H ]4 ( pO2 ) .01
43. (b) Specific conductance of the solution ( ) = 0.012 ohm–1
0.059 (10 3 )2 cm–1 and resistance (R) = 55 ohm.
1.67 log
4 (10 3 ) 4 0.1 Cell constant = Specific conductance × Observed
0.059 resistance
= 1.67 - log107 = 1.67 – 0.103 = 1.567
4 = 0.012 × 55= 0.66 cm–1.
44. (b) ohm–1 cm2 (geq)–1
36. (b) Cell reaction is, Zn Cu 2 Zn 2 Cu
1000 1 l 1000
° RT [Zn 2 ] 45. (a) eq =
Ecell Ecell n N R a N
nF [Cu 2 ]
1 1000 1 1000
= cell constant = 0.88
2 R N 220 0.01
( Zn )
Greater the factor 2 , less is the EMF = 400 mho cm2 g eq–1
(Cu )
46. (c) Molar conductance of solution is related to specific
Hence E1 > E2 conductance as follows :
37. (b) For Zn2+ Zn 1000
m = ....(a)
2.303RT Zn C
E E log
Zn 2 /Zn Zn 2 /Zn where C is molar concentration.
nF Zn 2
Putting = 6.3 × 10–2 ohm–1 cm–1 and
C = 0.1M
0.06 1 1000
0.76 log 0.76 0.03 = (6.3 × 10–2 ohm–1 cm–1) ×
2 0.1 m
(0.1mol / cm3 )
E 0.79V = 6.3 × 10–2 × 104 ohm–1cm2 mol–1
Zn 2 /Zn = 630 ohm–1 cm2 mol–1
38. (d) emf will decrease. 1
47. (b) Cell constant
o RT [C]c [D]d R
39. (b) E cell E cell ln .
nF [A]a [B]b Cell constant = × R; 0.012 × 55 = 0.66 cm–1.
48. (d) ohm–1 cm–1
RT [C]c [D]d 49. (a) The specific conductance increases with concentration.
Hence E ocell E cell ln
nF [A]a [B]b The number of ions per cm–3 increase with increase of
concentration.
50. (d)
60. (b) 248 10 4 Sm 2 mol 1
51. (c) Correct matching for pair (iii) will be Na OH
[G (conductance) – siemens or ohm–1(S).]
52. (d) Conductivity does not depend upon mass or weight 126 10 4 Sm 2 mol 1
Na Cl
of material.
4
53. (d) 280 10 S m 2 mol 1
Ba 2 2Cl
54. (c) (i) represents weak electrolyte
Now, Ba(OH) 2 BaCl2 2 NaOH 2 NaCl
(ii) represents strong electrolyte.
55. (b) 426.2 (i) Ba(OH)2 280 10 4 2 248 10 4 2 126 10 4
HCl
(ii) Ba(OH) 2 524 10 4 Sm 2 mol 1.

AcONa 91.0
61. (c) ClCH 2COONa HCl ClCH 2COOH NaCl
NaCl 126.5 (iii)
LClCH 2COONa + LHCl = LClCH 2COOH + L NaCl
AcOH (i) (ii) (iii)
224 + 203 = LClCH2COOH + 38.2
[426.2 91.0 126.5] 390.7
56. (d) Kohlrausch’s Law states that at infinite dilution, each LClCH 2COOH = 427 - 38.2
ion migrates independent of its co-ion and contributes
to the total equivalent conductance of an electrolyte a = 388.8 ohm-1cm 2gm eq-1
definite share which depends only on its own nature. 9.54
M
From this definition we can see that option (d) is the 62. (b) = = = 0.04008 = 4.008 %.
238
correct answer. M
63. (d) Cell constant = l/a
57. (c) Conductivity of an electrolyte depends on the mobility Unit = m/m2 = m–1.
of ions and concentration of ions. The motion of an
64. (d) Larger the size, lower the speed.
ionic species in an electric field is retarded by the
oppositely charged ions due to their interionic 2 1
65. (a) m 57 73 130 Scm mol
attraction. On dilution, concentration of electrolyte 66. (b) At anode :
decreases and the retarding influence of oppositely
1
charged ions decreases. Therefore mobility of ions 2HO– H 2O + O2
2
increases.
67. (b) Given current (i) = 0.5 amp;
Time (t) = 100 minutes × 60 = 6000 sec
58. (d) m NH 4Cl m NH m Cl
4 Equivalent weight of silver nitrate (E) = 108.
According to Faraday's first law of electrolysis
m NaOH m Na mOH
Eit 108 0.5 6000
W 3.3575 g.
96500 96500
m NaCl m Na m Cl
68. (d) 1 mole of e– = 1F = 96500 C
27g of Al is deposited by 3 × 96500 C
m NH m OH 5120 g of Al will be deposited by
4
3 96500 5120
= 5.49 10 7 C
27
m NH m Cl m Na
4
69. (c) Electrorefining and electroplating are done by
electrolysis.
m OH m Na m Cl 70. (d) WA WB 1.6 Wt. of Ag

;
EA EB 8 108
Wt . of Ag 21.6 g
m NH 4OH m NH 4Cl m NaOH m NaCl
71. (b) Cu+2 + 2e– Cu (s)
2 × 96500 C 63.6g
59. (d) CH 3COOH CH3COONa HCl NaCl
63.6
= 91 + 425.9 – 126.4 = 390.5 S cm2mol–1 9650 C will deposit = 9650 = 3.18 g
2 96500
EBD_7207
72. (a) Charge = 0.2 × 1 Faraday NaCl (s) Na+ (l) + Cl– (l)
= 0.2 × 96500 coulombs Na+ + e– Na (l) (at cathode)
= 19300 = 1.93 × 104 coulombs Cl– (l) Cl (g) + e– (at anode)
73. (d) Ag e Ag Cl (g) + Cl(g) Cl2 (g)
96500 coulombs deposit = 108 g of Ag 86. (b) Pt4+ + 4e–— Pt
108 4F electricity is required to deposit 1 mole of Pt.
965 coulombs deposit = 965 1.08 g Ag 0.80 F of electricity will deposit
96500
= 1/4 × 0.80 moles of Pt = 0.20 mol.
74. (d) C 6 H 5 NO 2 + 6H + + 6e- æ æ
Æ C 6 H 5 NH 2 + 2H 2 O
87. (d) 1F 11.2 L Cl2 at STP
123 9.65 5 60 60
E C6 H 5 NO 2 (eq.wt) = = 20.5 No. of Faradays = 1.8
6 96500
w ¥96500 Vol. of Cl2 = 1.8 × 11.2 L = 20.16
Number of coulombs required = 88. (b) W = Zit
Eq. wt
where Z = Electrochemical equivalent
12.3¥ 96500
= = 57900 C 63
20.5 Eq. wt. of copper = 31.5
2
75. (a) According to Faraday law's of electrolysis, amount of
31.5
electricity required to deposit 1 mole of metal Z=
96500
= 96500 C = 1 F
i.e., for deposition of 108g Ag electricity required = 1 F 31.5
W = Zit = 1.5 10 60 0.2938g
76. (a) For deposition of silver, reaction is 96500
Ag+ + e– Ag ( 6) ( 7)
1 mol of Ag will be deposited by 89. (c) MnO 24 MnO4 e
= 1 F = 96500 C = 9.65 × 104 C 0.1 mole
Since 1 equivalent weight of Ag is also equal to the Quantity of electricity required
weight of its 1 mol, hence 1 equivalent weight of Ag = 0.1F = 0.1 × 96500 = 9650 C
will be deposited by = 9.65 × 104 C 90. (d) wO = nO × 32
77. (b) A current of 96500 coulombs liberate 1 mole of O2. 2 2
96500 C liberates = 22.4 L of O2 at NTP 5600
wO = 32 8g
22.4
2 22400
9650 C liberates = ¥ 9650 = 1 equivalent of O2
96500
= 2.24 L of O2 at NTP = 1 equivalent of Ag = 108
91. (a) Electrolysis of these (i), (ii) and (iii) salt release Chlorine
2 56 which is yellowish in colour while Br2 is reddish brown
78. (b) Fe 2e Fe; E Fe 28
2 in colour
1 Faraday liberates = 28 g of Fe 92. (b) Electronic conductance decreases with increase in
3 Faraday liberates = 3 × 28 = 84 gm temperature whereas electrolytic conductance
79. (c) increases with increase in temperature as no. of ions
80. (d) Charge (Coulombs) pass per second = 10–6 or charge carriers increases with increase in
number of electrons passed per second temperature.
10 6 93. (a) Gold is an inert metal. Electrodes made up of inert
19
6.24 1012 metals does not participate in chemical reaction.
1.602 10
81. (d) 94. (b) Reaction A is preferred for electrolysis of dilute
sulphuric acid and B is preferred for electrolysis of
82. (d) Charge on one mole of electrons = 96500 C.
concentrated sulphuric acid.
83. (a) When platinum electrodes are dipped in dilute solution
H2SO4 than H2 is evolved at cathode. 95. (b) Iron can be easily reduced with carbon it does not
require electrochemical reduction.
84. (b) In electrolysis of NaCl when Pt electrode is taken then
H2 liberated at cathode while with Hg cathode it forms 96. (b) H2SO4 is regenerated.
sodium amalgam because more voltage is required to 97. (b) During charging, the lead storage battery behaves like
reduce H+ at Hg than Pt. an electrolytic cell. So, at anode the reaction is
85. (a) When molten or fused NaCl is electrolysed, it yields PbSO 4 2H 2 O PbO 2 4H SO 42 2e
metallic sodium and gaseous chlorine. Reactions
98. (c) 2NH 4 Cl Zn 2NH 3 ZnCl 2 H2 .
involved are as follows:
99. (b) In H 2 O 2 fuel cell, the combustion of H2 occurs to MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS
create potential difference between the two
118. (b) 119. (a) 120. (b) 121. (d) 122. (b)
electrodes.
100. (d) Primary cells are those cells, in which the reaction ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS
occurs only once and after use over a period of time, it
becomes dead and cannot be reused again. e.g.,
Leclanche cell and mercury cell. 123. (b) We know, R or R , where proportionality
A A
101. (c) The electrolyte used in Leclanche cell is moist paste of
NH4Cl and ZnCl2. constant is called resistivity. If = 1m and A = 1m2,
102. (d) A device that converts energy of combustion of fuels, then R = i.e., Resistance = Resistivity..
directly into electrical energy is known as fuel cell. 124. (d) The specific conductivity decreases while equivalent
103. (c) and molar conductivities increase with dilution.
104. (b) H2 – O2 fuel cell supply power for pressure. 125. (a) Zinc metal which has a more negative electrode
105. (d) Prevention of corrosion by zinc coating is called potential than iron will provide electrons in preference
galvanization. of the iron, and therefore corrodes first. Only when all
106. (a) Cathodic protection is best method to prevent iron the zinc has been oxidised, the iron start to rust.
from rusting. In this method iron is made cathode by
application of external current. CRITICAL THINKING TYPE QUESTIONS
Saline water is highly conducting and hence
126. (a) Salt bridge allows the flow of current by completing
accelerates the formation of rust.
circuit. No current will flow and voltage will drop to
107. (b) Magnesium provides cathodic protection and prevent zero, if salt bridge is removed.
rusting or corrosion.
127. (d) In electrolytic cell the flow of electrons is from anode
108. (c) Mercury cell being primary in nature can be used only
to cathode through internal supply.
once.
109. (c) 128. (b) E∞ = -0.15V > E∞ = -0.92
110. (d) Fuel cells produce electricity with an efficiency of Sn 2+ / Sn 4+ Hg 22+ / Hg 2+
about 70% compared to thermal plants whose Hence, Sn 2+ is stronger reducing agent than Hg 22 .
efficiency is about 40%.
129. (a) Option (ii) and (iv) are correct.
130. (a) The value of E ∞ for given metal ions are
M 2+ M
111. (a) Statement (ii) is false as in Figure 2 equal potential is
applied from either side thereby making his cell
non-functional. Figure 3 represents electrolytic cell E∞ = -1.18 V,
Mn 2+ Mn
as current flows from anode to cathode.
112. (d) According to an accepted convention anode is written E∞ = -0.9 V,
on the left side and cathode on the right while Cr 2+ Cr
representing the galvanic cell.
113. (c) Because reduction potential of water is higher than E∞ = -0.44 V and
Fe2+ Fe
that of Na+ so H2 will be evolved and no reduction of
metal ions occurs.
E∞ = -0.28 V.
114. (a) All statements given above are correct. Co 2+ Co
115. (d) CaX2 is a strong electrolyte thus its molar conductivity
increases slowly on dilution. Th e correct order of E ∞ 2+ values without
M M
116. (c) We consider,
considering negative sign would be
96487Cmol 1 96500Cmol 1 for approximate Mn2+ > Cr2+ > Fe2+ > Co2+.
calculations not for accurate calculations.
0.591
117. (c) Reaction occurring at anode 131. (d) E red E ored log[M n ]
n
2Fe s 2Fe2 4e Lower the concentration of Mn+, lower is the reduction
Reaction occuring at cathode potential.
O2 g 4H aq 4e 2H 2 O Hence order of reduction potential is :
Q> R>S >P
EBD_7207
132. (a) Cell reaction 136. (c) Using the relation,
1 2.303RT 0.0591
cathode : H 2O( ) O2 ( g ) 2e 2OH (aq) E°cell = log K c log K c
2 nF n
anode : 0.0591
H2 ( g ) 2H ( aq ) 2e 0.295 V = log K c
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2
1 2 0.295
H 2 O( ) O2 ( g ) H2 ( g ) 2H (aq) 2OH (aq ) or log Kc = 10
2 0.0591
Also we have or Kc = 1 × 1010
1 137. (a) Apply Nernst equation to the reaction
H2 ( g ) O2 (g ) H 2O( ) ; Pb + Sn2+ Pb2+ + Sn
2
0.059 [Sn 2 ]
Gf 237.2 kJ / mole or E° + log Ecell
2 [Pb 2 ]
H 2O( ) H ( aq ) OH ( aq ); G 80 kJ / mole [Sn 2 ] 0.01 2
Hence for cell reaction or log 2
0.3 ( Ecell 0)
[Pb ] 0.059
G 237.2 (2 80) 77.20 kJ / mole
[Sn 2 ]
G 77200 or antilog (0.3)
E 0.40V [Pb 2 ]
nF 2 96500
133. (b) (i) A3+ + e– –––– A2+, G1 = – 1 F y2 138. (d) Ecell = 0; when cell is completely discharged.
(ii) A2+ + 2e– –––– A, G2 = –2F(–y1) = 2Fy1
Add, (i) and (ii), we get 0.059 Zn 2
Ecell = E°cell log
A3+ + 3e– –––– A ; 2 Cu 2
G3 = G1 + G2
–3FE° = –Fy2 + 2Fy1
–3FE° = –F (y2 – 2y1)
0.059 Zn 2
y 2 y1 or 0 = 1.1 log
E° = 2 2 Cu 2
3
134. (c) 2
2 Cu Cu Cu
Zn 2 2 1.1
º
2e Cu 2
Cu ; E1 0.34V; ... (i) log
2
37.3
Cu 0.059
2 º
e Cu Cu ; E2 0.15V; ... (ii)
Cu e Cu; E3º ? ... (iii) Zn 2

1037.3
2
Now, G1º nFE1º 2 0.34F Cu
G2º 1 0.15F , G3º 1 E3º F 139. (a) The Half cell reaction is Zn 2e Zn .
Again, G1º G2º G3º o 0.059 1
E cell E cell log
2 [Zn ]
0.68F 0.15F E3º F
= 0.059 1
E3º 0.68 0.15 0.53V 0.763 log 0.822V
2 0.01
º
Ecell º
Ecathode º
(Cu / Cu) Eanode (Cu 2
/ Cu ) Eoxi = 0.822 V
= 0.53 – 0.15 = 0.38 V. 140. (d) 2H 2e H2
135. (a) + 2+
Zn( s) + 2H (aq) Zn (aq) + H 2 ( g ) 0.059 1
o ;
E Re d E Red log
0.059 [Zn 2 ][H 2 ] n [H ]2
Ecell E cell log
2 [H ]2 0.059 1
E Re d 0 log ; ERed = –0.059 V,,
Addition of H2SO4 will increase [H+]and Ecell will also 2 (0.1) 2
increase and the equilibrium will shift towards RHS. Eoxi = 0.059 V.
141. (c) When the concentration of all reacting species kept 146. (d) C 0 8
unity, then Ecell E cell and the given relation will 1 1000
become C
R A N
rG nFE cell 0.4 1000
R = 500 Ohms
142. (b) Here, R = 31.6 ohm 8 0.1
1 1 147. ( b)
Conductance = ohm 1 = 0.0316 ohm–1 148. (d) Charge on Mg and Ca ion is greater than that of Na
R 31.6
Specific conductance = conductance × cell constant. and K, so Mg and Ca ions possess higher conductivity,
= 0.0316 ohm–1 × 0.367 cm–1 also solvation of metal ion decreases as we move down
the group, hence conductivity increases)
= 0.0116 ohm–1 cm–1
149. (d) The conductivity of electrolytic solution depends
Now, molar concentration = 0.5M (given)
upon all of the given factors.
= 0.5 × 10–3 mole cm–3
150. (c) Correct Nernst equation is
0.0116
Molar conductance = 2.303RT
0.5 10 3C E Eo log a M n .
nF
= 23.2 S cm2 mol–1 151. (a) 2H+ + 2e– æ æÆ H2
143. (b) According to Kohlrausch’s law, molar conductivity of
weak electrolyte acetic acid (CH3COOH) can be 2 22400
EH (Eq. wt) = =1 g = = 11200 ml (STP)
calculated as follows: 2 2
96500¥112
CH3COOH CH3COONa HCl NaCl Total charge passed = = 965
11200
Value of NaCl should also be known for
Q = It = 965
calculating value of CH 3COOH . 965
I= = 1amp.
965
1
144. (a) 152. (c) Using Faraday’s second law of electrolysis,
R A
Weight of Cu deposited Equ. wt. of Cu
1
1.3 Weight of Ag deposited Equ. wt. of Ag
50 A
w Cu 63.5 1
1
65m 0.18 2 108
A
63.5 18
1000 wCu = = 0.0529 g.
2 108 100
molarity
153. (c) According to the definition 1 F or 96500 C is the charge
[molarity is in moles/litre but 1000 is used to convert carried by 1 mol of electrons when water is electrolysed
liter into cm3] 2H2O 4H+ + O2 + 4e–
1 So, 4 Faraday of electricity liberate = 32 g of O2.
65 m 1 1000 cm 3
260 Thus 1 Faraday of electricity liberate
0.4 moles 32
= g of O2 = 8 g of O2
4
650 m 1 1
m3 154. (b) H 2O H+ + OH-
260 4 mol 1000
1
= 6.25 × 10–4 S m2 mol–1 H+ + e- ææ Æ H2
2
145. (b) for CH3COOH
0.5 mole of H2 is liberated by 1 F = 96500 C
= CH3COO Na H Cl Na Cl 0.01 mole of H2 will be liberated by
= 96500
CH3COO H = ¥0.01 = 1930 C
0.5
= 90 + 425 – 125 = 390 mho cm2 mol–1.
Q=I ×t
c
m 7.8 Q 1930 C
Degree of dissociation ( ) = 0.02 t= = = 19.3¥10 4 sec
390
m I 10 ¥10-3 A
EBD_7207
1 158. (a) The charge carried by 1 mole of electrons is one faraday.
155. (b) At Anode, Cl Cl e Thus for a reaction
2 2
Mn ne M
35.5 2
Equivalent wt. of chlorine (ECl2 ) 35.5 nF = 1 mole of M
2
Al3 3e Al
ECl2 I t 35.5 2 30 60 3F 1 mol
WCl2 1.32 gm. 1F 1/3 mol
96500 96500
Cu 2 2e Cu
W Q 2F 1 mol
156. (a) By Faraday's 1st Law of electrolysis, = 1F 1/2 mol
E 96500
Na e Na
(where Q it = charge of ion ) 1F 1 mol
We know that no. of gram equivalent The mole ratio of Al, Cu and Na deposited at the
W it 1 965 1 1 1
respective cathode is : :1 or 2 : 3 : 6.
E 96500 96500 100 3 2
(where i= 1 A, t = 16×60+5 = 965 sec.) 159. (a)
Since, we know that 160. (b) Total of 6 electrons are required to form 2 moles of
Cr3+ therefore to form 1 mole 3F of charge is required.
1
Discharge
Normality No. of gram equivalent 100 = 0.01 N 161. (d) Pb PbO 2 2H 2SO 4 2PbSO 4 2H 2 O.
Recharge
Volume (in litre) 1
Sulphuric acid is consumed on discharging.
157. (b) Quantity of charge passed = 0.5 × 30 × 60 = 900 coulomb 162. (d) This is because zinc has higher oxidation potential
900 coulomb will deposit = 0.2964g of copper than Ni, Cu and Sn. The process of coating of iron
96500 coulomb will deposit surface with zinc is known as galvanization. Galvanized
0.2964 iron sheets maintain their lustre due to the formation
= 96500 = 31.75 g of copper of protective layer of basic zinc carbonate.
900
Thus, 31.75 is the eq. mass of copper 163. (c) At cathode reduction occurs according to following
At. mass = Eq. mass × Valency reaction.
63.56 = 31.75 × x 4 3
x = + 2. MnO 2 NH 4 e MnO OH NH3
CHEMICAL KINETICS 309
FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS 24. (a) For a zero order reaction.
rate =k[A]º i.e. rate = k
1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (a) 5. (c) hence unit of k = M.sec–1
For a first order reaction.
d[C]
6. (d) In the given options will not represent the rate = k [A]
3dt k = M.sec–1/M = sec–1
reaction rate. It should not have –ve sign as it is product. 25. (d) The reaction involving two different reactant can never
1 dC be unimolecular.
since show the rate of formation of product C
3 dt 26. (b) For reaction 3A B C
which will be positive. If it is zero order reaction r = k [A]0, i.e the rate remains
7. (a) If we write rate of reaction in terms of concentration of same at any concentration of 'A'. i.e independent upon
NH3 and H2,then concentration of A.
1 d[ NH 3 ] 1 d[H 2 ] 27. (c) k = (mol lit –1 ) 1–n time –1 . For given reaction
Rate of reaction n = 2. k = mol–1 lit sec–1
2 dt 3 dt 28. (b) The order of a chemical reaction is given by
d[ NH 3 ] 2 d[H 2 ] concentration of reactants appearing in the lowest
So, step.
dt 3 dt
29. (b) Velocity constant ‘k’ is characteristic constant of a
d[C] reaction and depends only on temperature and catalyst.
8. (d) In the given options will not represent the
3.dt 30. (b) Given dx/dt = 2.400 × 10–5 mol litre–1 sec–1
k = 3.10 × 10–5 sec–1
reaction rate. It should not have –ve sign as it is product.
For first order reaction
1 dC 2N 2 O 5 2NO 2 O2
since show the rate of formation of product C
3 dt
dx
which will be positive. k [N 2 O 5 ]
9. (c) Rusting of iron is a slow change. dt
10. (c) The feasibility of a chemical reaction can be predicted or 2.4 × 10–5 = 3.0 × 10–5 [N2O5]
by thermodynamics. Extent to which a reaction will 2.4 10 5
proceed can be determined from chemical equilibrium. or [N2O5] = 5
= 0.8 mol. litre–1
Speed of a reaction i.e. time taken by a reaction to 3.0 10
reach equilibrium, can be predicted by chemical kinetics dx
31. (a) For zero order reaction, k [reactant]0
11. (c) 12. (d) 13. (c) 14. (a) 15. (b) dt
16. (c) 17. (c) 18. (d) Thus the rate of zero order reaction is independent of
19. (d) The rate of a reaction is the speed at which the concentration of reactants.
reactants are converted into products. It depends 32. (c) Rate1 = k [A]n [B]m; Rate2 = k [2A]n [½B]m
upon the concentration of reactants. e.g for the
reaction Rate 2 k [2A]n [½B]m
= [2]n [½]m = 2n.2–m = 2n–m
A + B ææ Æ Product ; r µ [A][B] Rate1 k [A]n [B]m
20. (a) k remains constant at constant temperature and CO 33. (a) 2A + B A2B
does not effect the rate of reaction. r1 = k[A]2 [B] ...(i)
21. (d) order of reaction may be zero, whole number or B
fractional. When, [A] = [2A], [B] =
2
22. (b) 2 NO (g) + Cl2(g) 2 NOCl(g)
Rate = k [NO]2 [Cl] 2 B 2 [B]
r2 = k 2A = k 4[A]
The value of rate constant can be increased by 2 2
increasing the temperature.
23. (d) Order of reaction is equal to the number of molecules = k 2[A]2[B] = 2r1 r1 k[A]2[B]
whose concentration is changing with time. It can be
zero or in fractions or an integer. Rate of reaction is increased two times.
EBD_7207
310 CHEMICAL KINETICS
34. (c) Let us consider a reaction, 44. (a) Let the rate law be r = k [A]x[B]y
xX+yY aA+bB 0.10 [0.024]x [0.035] y
rate = [X]x [Y]y Divide (3) by (1)
0.10 [0.012]x [0.035] y
It is given that order of reaction w.r.t. component Y is
zero. 1 = [2]x, x = 0
Hence, rate = [X]x 0.80 [0.024] x [0.070] y
i.e., rate becomes independent of the concentration of Y. Divide (2) by (3)
0.10 [0.024] x [0.035] y
0
35. (a) rate [preactant ] 8 = (2)y , y = 3
i.e., rate = k Hence, rate equation, R = k[A]0[B]3 =k[B]3
So, the order of reaction will be zero. 45. (a) Given r = k [A]3/2 [B]–1/2
3 1 2
36. (b) r k[A]n Order = 3/2 – 1/2 = =1
2 2
if n = 0 46. (b) The order w.r.t. I2 is zero because the rate is not
r k [A]0 dependent on the concentration of I2.
47. (c) As we know that, units of rate constant.
or r = k thus for zero order reactions rate is equal to
= (unit of conc.)1–n (unit of time)–1
t h e
rate constant. = (mol L–1)1–n (sec)–1
On comparing these units with the given units of rate
37. (c) Since rate of reaction becomes four times on doubling
constant, we get
concentration of reactant, it is second order
(mol L–1)1–n (sec)–1 = L mol–1 sec–1
reaction.
38. (b) Order is the sum of the power of the concentration fi Ln–1 mol1–n sec–1 = L mol–1 sec–1
terms in rate law expression. On comparing the powers, we get
Hence the order or reaction is = 1 + 2 = 3 n–1=1 fi n=2
39. (a) Rate = k[A]° So, reaction is of second order.
Unit of k = mol L–1 sec–1 48. (d) In case of (II) and (III), keeping concentration of [A]
constant, when the concentration of [B] is doubled,
1 the rate quadruples. Hence it is second order with
40. (c) N 2O N2 O2
2 respect to B. In case of I & IV Keeping the
concentration of [B] constant. when the concentration
dx
[N 2 O]1 of [A] is increased four times, rate also increases four
dt times. Hence, the order with respect to A is one. hence
i.e. order of reaction = 1
Rate = k [A] [B]2
41. (a) From the first set of data (i) and (ii) it is observed that
3
on keeping concentration of [B] constant and on 49. (a) The order of reaction is and molecularity is 2.
doubling the concentration of [A] rate does not 2
changes hence order of reaction with respect to A is 50. (b) O3
Fast
O2 O; O O 3
Slow
2O 2
zero.
From the second set of data (i) and (iii) it is observed [O 2 ][O]
k (I) Rate = k' [O3][O] put [O] from (I)
that rate becomes 4 times on doubling the concentration [O 3 ]
of [B] keeping [A] constant hence order with respect to
k '[O 3 ]K[O 3 ]
[B] will be 2 r k[O 3 ]2 [O 2 ] 1
rate = k[A]0 [B]2 [O 2 ]
42. (c) Order is the sum of the powers to which the Note intermediates are never represented in rate law
concentration terms are raised in the rate equation. equation.
43. (d) If rate = k[A]x [B]y [C]z 51. (c)
From first two given data 52. (c) Thermal decomposition of HI on gold surface is an
8.08 × 10–3 = k [0.2]x [0.1]y [0.02]z .... (1) example of zero order reaction.
2.01 × 10–3 = k [0.1]x [0.2]y [0.02]z .... (2) 53. (c) For zero order reaction,
Divide (1) by (2) we get, 4 = 2x (1/2)y rate, r = k[R]°
Similarly, from second and third data dR
(9)y (9)z = 3 k
dt
2y + 2z = 1 . R = kt + R0
From first and fourth data 4z = 8 = 23 where R0 is the concentration of reactant at time t = 0.
2z = 3. So z = 3/2, y = – 1, x = 1 Thus [R] increases with time
54. (a) Plots of conc. [A] Vs time, t n
1
61. (c) [A] [A]0
Zero First 2
order order
1 1
log [A]
where [A]0 = initial concentration
[A] Second Third
[ A] [ A]2
order order n
t t t 1 1
1 ;n=3
8 2
1
55. (d) t1/2
a2 t1/ 2
0.693
3 = 100 sec
6.9 10
1
We know that t1/ 2 n 1 T n t1/ 2 = 3 × 100 = 300 sec.
a
i.e. n = 3 62. (b) Given: 75% reaction gets completed in 32 min
Thus reaction is of 3rd order. 2.303 a 2.303 100
56. (a) For a zero order reaction Thus, k = log = log
t (a x ) 32 (100 75)
a 2.303
t1/ 2 = log 4 = 0.0433 min–1
2k 32
57. (a) t1/2 = 4s T = 16s Now we can use this value of k to get the value of time
T 16 required for 50% completion of reaction
n 4 ( T = n × t½)
t1/ 2 4 2.303 a 2.303 100
t= log = log
k (a x ) 0.0433 50
Ê 1 ˆn Ê 1 ˆ4 0.12
[ A] = [ A]o ÁÁ ˜˜˜ = 0.12¥ÁÁ ˜˜˜ = = 0.0075 M 2.303
ÁË 2 ¯ ËÁ 2 ¯ 16 = log 2 = 16 min
0.0433
Where [A] o = initial concentration an d [A]
= concentration left after time t 63. (d) Unit of k for Ist order reaction is (Time)–1
58. (b) A B For a first order reaction 2.303 1 2.303 4
64. (c) t1/ 4 log log
Given a = 0.8 mol, (a – x) = 0.8 – 0.6 = 0.2 k 3/ 4 k 3
2.303 0.8 2.303 2.303
k log or k = 2.303 log 4 (log 4 log 3) (2log 2 log 3)
1 0.2 k k
again a = 0.9, a – x = 0.9 – 0.675 = 0.225
2.303 0.29
2.303 0.9 (2 0.301 0.4771)
k log k k
t 0.225 65. (c) For a first order reaction
2.303 2.303 a
2.303log 4 log 4 k log
t t a x
Hence t = 1 hour when t = t½
59. (b) For a first order reaction, A products
2.303 a
r k log
r k[A] or k t½ a a/2
[A]
2.303 ln 2
2 or t½ log 2
1.5 10 k k
k = 3 × 10–2
0.5 66. (b) Since doubling the concentration of B does not change
half life, the reaction is of 1st order w.r.t. B.
0.693 0.693
Further, t1/ 2 2
23.1 Order of reaction with respect to A = 1 because rate of
k 3 10 reaction doubles when concentration of A is doubled
0.693 keeping concentration of B constant.
60. (c) For first order reaction, k Order of reaction = 1 + 1 = 2 and units of second
t1/ 2
order reaction are L mol–1 sec–1.
where k = rate constant 67. (c) Half life time (t1/2) for nth order reaction is given by,
t1/2 = half life period = 480 sec. t1/2 [a]1– n
0.693 where n is the order of reaction and a is concentration
k = 1.44 × 10–3 sec–1 of reactant.
480
EBD_7207
As decomposition of N2O5 follows 1st order kinetic. 77. (b) As the rate of reaction get doubled for every 10°C rise
So, in temperature. Hence the increase in reaction rate as a
t1/2 [a]1 – 1 t1/2 a0 result of temperature rise from 10°C to 100°C is equal
68. (c) For a first order reaction to = 29 = 512
2.303 a 78. (a) As per Arrhenius equation (k Ae Ea / RT ) , the rate
k log10
t a x constant increases exponentially with temperature.
when t = t½ 79. (b) For a reversible reaction,
2.303 a H = Ea (forward) – Ea (backward)
k log10 H = 150 – 260 = –110 kJ mol–1
t½ a a/2
80. (c) We know that the activation energy of chemical
2.303 ln 2 r e a c t i o n
or t ½ log10 2
k k k2 Ea T2 T1
is given by formula = , where
2.303 a k1 2.303R T1T2
69. (a) t log
k a x k1 is the rate constant at temperature T1 and k2 is the
2.303 2.303 rate constant at temperature T2 and Ea is the activation
or t log a log(a x)
k k energy. Therefore activation energy of chemical
reaction is determined by evaluating rate constant at
n 1 n 1
(t1/ 2 )1 a2 120 4 10 2 two different temperatures.
70. (c) ; ;n 2
(t1/ 2 )2 a1 240 8 10 2 81. (b) In equation k = Ae Ea / RT ; A = Frequency factor
71. (b) k = velocity constant, R = gas constant and Ea = energy
72. (b) In Haber’s process, ammonia is manufactured from N2 of activation
and H2 using iron as catalyst with molybdenum as 82. (d) In Arrhenius equation k = Ae Ea / RT , Ea is the energy
promoter at high temperature and pressure of activation, which is required by the colliding
Fe 2O3 (catalyst) molecules to react resulting in the formation of
N 2 3H 2 2NH3
Mo (catalytic promoter) products.
83. (d)
k Ea 1 1
73. (b) log 2 = 84. (b) When the temperature is increased, energy in form of
k1 2.303R T1 T2 heat is supplied which increases the kinetic energy of
the reacting molecules. This will increase the number
Ea 1 1 of collisions and ultimately the rate of reaction will be
log 2 =
2.303 8.314 293 308 enhanced.
85. (a) Arrhenius equation is given by
Ea 15
0.3 =
2.303 8.314
×
293 308 k = Ae Ea /(2.303 RT )
Taking log on both sides, we get
0.3 2.303 8.314 293 308
Ea = . Ea
15 log k = log A –
2.303 RT
= 34673 J mole–1
= 34.7 J mole–1 1
Arrhenius plot a graph between log k and whose
T
74. (b) H = Ea f Ea b = 0
Ea
75. (d) The activation energy depends upon the nature of slope is .
2.303 R
chemical bonds undergoing rupture during chemical
reaction and is independent of enthalpies of reactants k2 E a T2 T1
and products. 86. (a) 2.303log
k1 R T1T2
E /RT
76. (b) k = Ae– a
lnk = ln A – Ea/RT k2 9.0 103 308 298
log
For ln k vs 1/T k1 2.303 2 308 298
ln A = intercept
– Ea/R = slope = –2 × 104 K k2
1.63; k 2 1.63k1;
Ea = 8.3 × 2 × 104 J mol–1 k1
= 16.6 × 104 J mol–1 or 166 kJ mol–1
k2 k1 108. (b) For a 10 K rise in temperature, collision frequency

Increase in k1 100 increases merely by 1 to 2% but the number of
k1
effective collisions increases by 100 to 200%.
1.63k1 k1
= 100 63.0% 109. (a) 110. (b) 111. (c)
k1
87. (b) H Ea ( f ) Ea (b) STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS

Thus energy of activation for reverse reaction depend 112. (b) For the given reaction
upon whether reaction is exothermic or pt(s)
endothermic. 4NH 3 (g) 5O 2 (g) 4NO(g) 6H 2O(g)
If reaction is exothermic, H ve , Ea(b) Ea( f ) NH 3 O2 NO H 2O
1 1 1 1
Rate = =
If reaction is endothermic, H ve Ea(b) Ea ( f ) 4 t 5 t 4 t 6 t
88. (d) 89. (c) 90. (c) 91. (a) 92. (d) 113. (a) For given reaction x and y may or may not be equal to
93. (d) p and q respectively.
114. (a) Average rate depends upon the chan ge in
94. (d) k Ae E a / RT
concentration of reactants or products and the time
Ea taken for that change to occur. Average rate cannot
95. (b) ln k = ln A – , intercept is ln A.
RT be used to predict the rate of a reaction at a particular
96. (c) The rate constant doubles for 10º C rise in temperature. instant as it would be constant for the time interval for
For 20º C rise, the rate constant will be 4 times which it is calculated. So, to express the rate at a
k1 = 4k2 or k2 = 0.25 K1 particular moment of time we determine the
Ea 1 instantaneous rate. It is obtained when we consider
97. (d) k Ae E a / RT log k = log A – . the average rate at the smallest time interval say dt (
2.303R T
i.e. when it approaches zero).
Ea
Equation of straight line slope = . 115. (d) Molecularity is defined as the number of reacting
2.303R
species taking part in an elementary reaction,
98. (c) Applicable to bimolecular reactions. 116. (b) Molecularity cannot be fractional or zero. Correct units
99. (a)
of rate constant for second order reaction are mol–1 Ls–1.
100. (d) All the statements are correct (see text).
117. (d) For zero order reaction, rate of reaction as well as rate
101. (c) Activation energy is lowered in presence of +ve
constant are independent of reactant concentration.
catalyst.
102. (c) [R]0
103. (a) Threshold Energy = Energy of activation + Internal 118. (a) For a first order reaction log varies linearly with
[R]
energy
time as shown below.
Ea 1
104. (b) k Ae E a / RT log k = log A .
2.303R T
1 slop = k/2.303
[R]0
[R]
Plot of log k Vs.

T
log
Ea
Straight line Slope = 0
2.303R Time
105. (d) Enthalpy of reaction ( H) = Ea – Ea 119. (a)
(f) (b)
for an endothermic reaction H = +ve hence for H to 120. (b) According to Arrhenius equation, k = Ae–Ea/RT
be positive when Ea = 0, k = A
Ea < Ea
(b) (f)
106. (a) Presence of catalyst does not affect enthalpy change Also ln k s 1/T is a straight line with slope = –Ea/R.
of reaction H R E f E b = 180 – 200 = – 20 kJ/mol Statements (ii) and (v) are correct.
121. (b)
107. (c) For the exothermic reaction the energy of products is
always less than the reactants. If Ea is the energy of 122. (b) Rate constant gets doubled with every 10°C in
activation for the forward reaction, the energy of temperature for chemical change only not for physical
activation for backward reaction is Ea + H change.
EBD_7207
123. (b) Correct formula for calculation of Ea is 137. (d) A2 B2 2AB ;
k Ea T2 T1
log 2 A2 A A ( Fast );
k1 2.303R T1T2
The word catalyst should not be used when the added A B2 AB B (Slow )
substance reduces the rate of reaction. The substance
is then called inhibiter. Rate law = k[A][B 2 ] put value of [A] from Ist reaction
124. (d) The relevant expressions are as follows.
since A is intermediate k[A 2 ] A
H 1
log Kp = I
R T Rate law equation K k[A 2 ][B2 ]
log [X] = log [X]0 + kt
P/T = constant (V constant) 1 3
Order 1
PV = constant (T constant) 2 2
138. (d) From 1st and 2nd sets of data - no change in rate is
observed with the change in concentration of ‘C’. So
125. (a) 126. (b) 127. (a) 128. (c) 129. (b) the order with respect to ‘C’ is zero.
130. (a) 131. (d) From 1st and 4th sets of data
Dividing eq. (4) by eq. (1)
3 x
1.25 10 0.005
1 d[Br ] 1 d[Br2 ] 3 0.010
132. (c) 5.0 10
5 dt 3 dt
or 0.25 = (0.5)x or (0.5)2 = (0.5)x
d[Br2 ] 3 d[Br ] x=2
dt 5 dt The order with respect to ‘A’ is 2 from the 1st and 3rd
133. (b) The curve Y shows the increase in concentration of sets of data dividing eq. (1) by eq. (3)
products with time.
3 y
134. (b) Rate of disappearance of reactants = Rate of appearance 5.0 10 0.005
of products 2 0.010
1.0 10
1 d(N 2 O5 ) 1 d(NO2 ) d(O 2 ) or (0.5)1 = (0.5)y y= 1
2 dt 4 dt dt The order with respect to ‘B’ is 1
1 1 So the order with respective the reactants A, B and C
k(N 2 O5 ) k (N 2 O5 ) k (N 2 O5 )
2 4 is 2, 1 and 0.
k k 139. (N) None of the given options is correct.
k
2 4 The given reaction is : 2X + Y — Z
k d[X] d[Z]
k = 2k, k –
2 2dt dt
135. (b) Rate law has to be determined experimentally as Cl2 is Rate of formation of Z is half of the rate of
1 disappearance of X.
raised to power in rate law whereas its stichiometric
2 d[X] d[Y]
coefficient in balanced chemical equation is 1. 2dt dt
136. (d) As the slowest step is the rate determining step thus
Rate of disappearrance of X is not equal to rate of
the mechanism B will be more consistent with the given
disappearance of Y.
information also because it involve one molecule of
H2 and one molecule of ICl it can expressed as 140. (a) Rewriting the given data for the reaction
r = k [H2][ICl] H
CH 3COCH 3 ( aq ) Br2 ( aq )
Which shows that the reaction is first order w.r.t. both
H2 & ICl. CH3COCH 2 Br(aq) H ( aq) Br ( aq)
S. Initial concent Initialconcentr Initialconcentr Rate of d [ A]

No. -ration of -ation of Br2 -ation of H disappearance
144. (c) Rate law : k [ A]x [ B ] y
CH3COCH3 in M
dt
in M of Br2 in Ms 1
in M
Doubling [A], rate is doubled. Hence 2x = 2, x =1
d dx
i.e. [Br2 ]or d [ A]
dt dt Similarly y = 1; k [ A][ B ]
dt
1 0.30 0.05 0.05 5.7 10 5
2 0.30 0.10 0.05 5.7 10 5 rate 2.0 10 4

k 1
3 0.30 0.10 0.10 1.2 10 4 [ A][ B ] 1 10 2 2 10 2
4 0.40 0.05 0.20 3.1 10 4
(rate)2 k (2[ A])(2[b])
4
Actually this reaction is autocatalyzed and involves (rate)1 k[ A][ B ]
complex calculation for concentration terms.
145. (d) For a zero order reaction,
We can look at the above results in a simple way to t1/2 a0 (initial concentration or initial pressure)
find the dependence of reaction rate (i.e., rate of (t1/2)1 P1
disappearance of Br2). (t1/2)2 P2
From data (1) and (2) in which concentration of
t1/2 P2 t1/2 2 16
CH3COCH3 and H+ remain unchanged and only the 2 ,
concentration of Br 2 is doubled, there is no change in t1/2 1
P1 45 4
rate of reaction. It means the rate of reaction is
16
independent of concentration of Br2. (t1/2)2 = 45 180 min
Again from (2) and (3) in which (CH3CO CH3) and 4
146. (a) Given initial concentration (a) = 2.00 M; Time taken
(Br2) remain constant but H+ increases from 0.05 M to
(t) = 200 min and final concentration (a – x) = 0.15 M.
0.10 i.e. doubled, the rate of reaction changes from
For a first order reaction rate constant,
5.7×10–5 to 1.2 × 10–4 (or 12 × 10–5), thus it also
becomes almost doubled. It shows that rate of reaction 2.303 a 2.303 2.00
k log log
is directly proportional to [H+]. From (3) and (4), the t a x 200 0.15
rate should have doubled due to increase in conc of 2.303
[H+] from 0.10 M to 0.20 M but the rate has changed (0.301 0.824) 1.29 10 2 min 1 .
200
from 1.2× 10–4 to 3.1×10–4. This is due to change in
Further
concentration of CH3COCH3 from 0.30 M to 0.40 M.
Thus the rate is directly proportional to [CH3 COCH3]. 0.693 0.693
(t1/ 2 ) 53.72 min .
We now get k 1.29 10 2
rate = k [CH3COCH3]1[Br2]0[H+]1 147. (d) t1/2 = 5 years, T = 15 years hence total number of half
= k [CH3COCH3][H+]. 15
life periods 3.
141. (d) Overall order = sum of orders w.r.t each reactant. 5
Let the order be x and y for G and H respectively
64
Amount left 8g
[G]mole [H]mole rate(mole ( 2) 3
Exp.No. 1 1
litre litre litre time 1 )
Slope k / 2.303
1 a b r
2 2a 2b 8r 148. (b)
log C
3 2a b 2r
For (1) and (3), the rate is doubled when conc. of t

G is doubled keeping that of H constant i.e.,
149. (b) Let x torr of C2H4O decompose after 20 min. Then,
rate [G] x=1 80 – x + 2x =120 ; x = 40 torr = 50% of initial pressure.
From (2) and (3), y = 2 Hence t1/2 = 20 min. For 75% reaction, fraction left
Overall order is 3. 2
25 1 1
142. (a) As doubling the initial conc. doubles the rate of =
100 4 2
reaction, order =1
143. (a) No. of half lives = 2. Time needed for 75% reaction.,
2 × 20 = 40 min
EBD_7207
150. (d) 156. (b) T2 = T (say), T1 = 25°C = 298K,
151. (d) The integrated rate equations are different for the Ea = 104.4 kJ mol–1 = 104.4 × 103 J mol–1
reactions of different reaction orders. We shall k1=3 × 10 – 4, k2 = ?,
determine these equations only for zero and first order
chemical reactions. k2 Ea 1 1
log
k1 2.303 R T1 T2
r T2 T1 100 10
100 C
152. (b) 2 10 2 10
29 512 (where 2 is
r
10 C
k2 104.4 103 J mol 1
1 1
log 4 1 1
3 10 2.303 (8.314 J K mol ) 298 T
temperature coefficient of reaction)
Ea 1
153. (d) log k log A …(1) As T , 0
2.303RT T
1 k2 104.4 103 J mol 1
Also given log k 6.0 (2000) …(2) log
T 3 10 4 2.303 8.314 298
On comparing equations, (1) and (2)
k2 k2
log A = 6.0 A = 106 s–1 log 18.297, 1.98 1018
3 10 4 3 10 4
Ea
and 2000 ;
2.303 R k2 (1.98 1018 ) (3 10 4 ) 6 1014 s 1
Ea = 2000 × 2.303 × 8.314 = 38.29 kJ mol–1 157. (d)

154. (b) We know more will be activation energy lesser will be 158. (b) For 10°C rise of temperature the rate is almost doubled.
rate constant. Thus if E 1 > E 2 then k 1 < k2 . As Ea / RT
temperature increases, it will effect both rates in similar 159. (c) k1 A1e 1 .........(i)
way.
Ea2 / RT
1 k2 A2e ........(ii)
155. (b) A graph plotted between log k vs for calculating
T On dividing eqn (i) from eqn. (ii)
activation energy is shown as
k1 A1
( Ea2 Ea1 ) / RT ........(iii)
k2 A2
log k
Given Ea2 = 2Ea1
1/T On substituting this value in eqn. (iii)
from Arrhenius equation Ea / RT
k1 k2 A e 1
Ea
log k log A 160. (a) 161. (b) 162. (b) 163. (b) 164. (b)
2.303 RT
EBD_7207
328 SURFACE CHEMISTRY
20. (a) Adsorption of a gas on solid is represented by

following equilibria,
1. (d) The substance which is adsorbed is called adsorbate. Gas (Adsorbate) + Solid (Adsorbent)
2. (b) Adsorption is an exothermic process. Gas adsorbed on solid + Heat
3. (a) On increasing temperature physical adsorption of a Initially adsorption increases with increase in pressure
gas on surface of solid decreases. Solid adsorb greater at a particular temperature then got slow. After attaining
amount of gas at lower temperature. equilibrium adsorption become independent of
4. (a) Chemical adsorption involves formation of monolayer. pressure.
5. (a) Chemisorption involves strong chemical forces. 21. (d)
6. (d) In physisorption, gas molecules are held on the solid
22. (a) According to Freundlich adsorption isotherm
surface by weak van der Waal’s forces.
1
7. (b) x
8. (d) Adsorption is accompanied by evolution of heat as kP n
m
the residual forces acting along the surface of
adsorbent decrease i.e., adsorption is accompanied by 1
at low pressure =1
decrease in enthalpy. n
9. (b) The more readily soluble and easily liquefiable gases x
P1
such as NH3, HCl and SO2 are adsorbed more than the m
so called permanent gases like O2. This is due to the 1
van der Waals or intermolecular forces which are at high pressure =0
n
involved in adsorption.
x
10. (c) Adsorption is an exothermic process i.e. DH of P
adsorption is always negative. When a gas is adsorbed, m
the freedom of movement of its molecules becomes i.e., the value of n varies between 0 to 1.
restricted i.e. DS is negative. Hence adsorption 23. (b) The gases having higher values for critical temperature
accompanied by decrease in enthalpy as well as are easily liquified and are adsorbed to the greater
decrease in entropy of the system. extent. CO2 has highest critical temperature of 304K.
11. (d) The heat evolved in physisorption is quite low varying 24. (b) According to Freundlich equation.
generally between 20-40 kJ mol–1. x x
p1/ n or Kp1/ n
12. (c) 13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (d) 16. (b) m m
17. (a) 18. (b) x x 1
19. (d) According to Freundlich adsorption isotherm. or log log Kp1/ n or log log K log p
m m n
At intermediate pressure, extent of adsorption
25. (a) According to Freundlich adsorption isotherm
x x 1
kP1/ n or log log k log P; x
m m n kp1/n (wheren n > 1)
m
At very high pressure x/m = kp0
1 26. (a) On increasing temperature adsorption of a gas on
e = n surface of solid decreases. Solid adsorb greater amount
S lop of substances at lower temperature.
27. (c)
m
x
log
28. (a) For adsorption to occur G = –ve as in adsorption

H = –ve, S = –ve. –T S is positive for adsorption.
29. (d) For a reaction in equilibrium, the increase in rate of
reaction in forward direction by catalyst increases the
Intercept = log k concentration of product(s) and thus the rate of
log P backward reaction also increases with the same
magnitude and allow the equilibrium to be achieved
quickly.
plot of log x vs log P is linear with slope = 1
m n
SURFACE CHEMISTRY 329
30. (d) The catalytic poisons decrease the activity of the 52. (b) Colloid Dispersed phase Dispersion medium
catalyst because they are preferentially adsorbed on Sol Solid Liquid
the surface of catalyst. Gel Liquid Solid
31. (a) A catalyst increases the rate of reaction by decreasing Emulsion Liquid Liquid
the activation energy. Foam Gas Liquid
32. (c) Active charcoal has more adsorption power due to 53. (d) Emulsions are liquid-liquid colloidal systems, Generally
greater surface area. one of the two liquids is water.
33. (c) Adsorption theory is applied to heterogeneous 54. (b) Butter is an example of gel.
catalysis. 55. (c) Cheese is a liquid dispersed in solid phase.
34. (a) According to the adsorption theory of catalysis, the 56. (d) Air is a homogeneous mixture of gases, mainly nitrogen
activity of catalysis is due to the presence of free and oxygen.
valencies on its surface due to which surface of catalyst 57. (c) When the dispersed phase and dispersion medium both
has chemical force of altraction. When a gas comes in are liquid, the colloidal system is called as an emulsion
contact with this surface molecules get attached like milk, vasnishing cream etc.
attached through these valencies. Further the rate of 58. (b) Cloud consists of fine droplets of water suspended in
reaction is always increases by decreases in activation air.
energy. When any of the reactants is strongly 59. (d) Blood is a –vely charged colloidal system. Rest of the
adsorbed on the surface of catalyst, the rate becomes compounds, i.e., NaCl, urea & cane sugar form true
inversely proportional to the concentration of that solution in water.
reaction. The reaction is then said to be inhibited by 60. (a) Suspension particles are visible under a microscope
such reactant. The lowering of activation energy always and sometimes even to a naked eye.
leads to the increase in speed of reaction.
61. (a) Fog is a colloidal system consisting water droplets
35. (b) Catalyst decreases the activation energy of the dispersed in air.
reaction by forming an intermediate product. So no of
62. (a) A collidal solution is biphasic and heterogeneous. It is
molecules having activation energy increases hence
composed of two phases :
rate of reaction increases.
1. Dispersed phase; 2. Dispersion medium.
36. (c) A catalyst can affect reversible reaction by attaining
63. (c) Smoke is solid gas system, solid (D. P) and gas (D.M.)
equilibria in both directions.
Note : D.P. : Dispersed phase
37. (d) In acid hydrolysis of methyl acetate all are present in
D.M. : Dispersion medium
one phase (liquid).
64. (c) The critical micelle concentration is the lowest
38. (d) Enzymes are specific biological catalysts possessing
concentration at which micelle formation appears when
well - defined active sites.
surfactants are present above that CMC, they can act
39. (a) Enzymes are biological catalysts.
as emulsifiers that will solubilise a compound which is
40. (d) Enzymes are biological catalysts and enhance the rate normally insoluble in the solvent being used.
of biochemical reactions.
41. (c) Hydrolysis of urea can be represented as follows
Urease 65. (a) Polarhead
H 2 N C NH 2 H 2O 2NH3 CO 2 Non-polar tail
|| (enzyme)
O (micelle)
Since it involves biological catalyst (enzyme) so it is
an example of biochemical catalysis. 66. (a) Surface tension of lyophilic sols is lower than water
42. (d) Efficiency of catalysing property of a catalyst is (dispersion medium).
inversely proportional to activation energy. 67. (b) Gum is lyophilic colloid.
43. (b) Molybdenum acts as a promoter for iron which is used 68. (c) Lyophobic colloids are irreversible colloids. They are
as a catalyst in Haber’s process. protected by lyophilic colloids.
44. (c) Second step involves adsorption of reactant 69. (c) Example of multimolecular colloid system is a gold
molecules on the surface of the catalyst. dispersed in water.
45. (b) 70. (a) On shaking with the dispersion medium, colloids
46. (a) Milk is a emulsion in which liquid is dispersed in liquid. directly form the colloidal sol. Hence they are called
47. (c) In butter (liquid – solid) water is dispersed in fat. intrinsic colloids. i.e., glue.
48. (c) Size of colloidal particles is 10–5 - 10–7 cm. 71. (d) Sodium stearate is a soap. Soaps and detergents are
49. (a) surface agents which when dissolved in a medium,
50. (d) Mist is a colloid (aerosol) in which liquid is dispersed forms aggregated particles, called associated colloids.
in gas. 72. (d) The formation of micelles takes place only above a
51. (c) Alloy is an example of solid solution. particular temperature called kraft temperature (TK).
EBD_7207
73. (c) 94. (a) Smaller the charge on anion, lesser will be its
74. (b) Electrolytes are used for neutralising charge on coagulating power.
colloidal particles. KBr have Br– with least charge of – 1 on Br thus
75. (c) The osmotic pressure of sea water is 25 atm at 15°C. KBr is least effective in coagulating Fe(OH)3.
When pressure greater than 26 atm is applied on sea 95. (b) 96. (a)
water separated by a rigid emipermeable membrane, 97. (b) The size of colloidal particles is between 1 nm and
pure water is obtained. 1000 nm i.e., it is not always greater than 100 nm. So (b)
76. (a) Blood is purified by dialysis. is not a property of colloidal solution. All others are
77. (d) The use of membrane for separating colloidal particles the properties of colloidal solution.
is termed as dialysis. Hence it is clear that colloidal 98. (c) According to Hardy-Schulze rule "The amount of
particle cannot pass through animal membrane. Hence electrolyte required to coagulate a fixed amount of a
only solvent molecules and ions (in case of sol depends upon the sign of charge and valency of
electrodialysis) can diffuse. the flocculating ion."
78. (d) Electrolytic (Ionic) impurities can be most easily Thus, the coagulating power vary in the order.
removed on application of electric field. Al3+ > Zn++ > Na+
79. (a) Formation of colloid from suspension is known as 99. (c)
peptization. 100. (d) A negative ion causes the precipitation of positively
80. (d) The separation of colloidal particles of molecular charged sol and vice-versa. Since As2S3 is a negative
dimension is known as dialysis. It is a purification sol so more will be the positive charge on cation more
method of colloid. effective it will be in causing coagulation of As2S3 sol.
81. (c) Electrodialysis involves movement of ions towards Among the given ions, Al3+ has the greatest valency
oppositely charged electrodes. and thus is the most effective coagulating agent.
Urea being a covalent compound does not dissociate 101. (c) Electrodialysis involves movement of ions towards
to give ions and hence it cannot be removed by oppositely charged electrodes.
electrodialysis.However all the other given compounds Urea being a covalent compound does not dissociate
are ionic which can undergo dissociation to give to give ions and hence it cannot be removed by
oppositely charged ions and thus can be separated. electrodialysis.However all the other given compounds
82. (b) The motion of a liquid through a membrane under the are ionic which can undergo dissociation to give
influence of an applied electric field is known as electro- oppositely charged ions and thus can be separated.
osmosis. 102. (a) Brownian movement is exhibited by colloidal system.
83. (d) 103. (b) Brownian movement is random motion.
84. (c) Peptization comes under dispersion methods of 104. (c) Sugar forms homogeneous solution hence no Tyndall
preparation of colloids. effect is exhibited.
85. (c) Colloidal gold is prepared by Bredig's arc method. 105. (c) Emulsion show the tyndal! effect. Refers to ans 280.
86. (b) Peptisation is disintegration of colloidal aggregate. 106. (c)
87. (c) According to this law the coagulating effect of an ion 107. (b) For gel dispersed phase is liquid and dispersion
on dispersed phase of opposite charge increases with medium is solid.
the increase in valency of the ion. The precipitating 108. (d) 109. (c) 110. (c)
power of Al3+ , Ba++, Na+ ions is in order Al3+ > Ba2+ 111. (c) Protein is an emulsifying agent for O/W emulsion.
> Na+. 112. (d)
88. (a) Tyndall effect is shown by sols.
89. (c) It is due to impact of molecules of dispersion medium STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS
on the colloidal particles.
113. (d) Adsorption is a surface phenomenon.
90. (b) It is due to Tyndall effect.
114. (b) Statements (i) and (iv) are incorrect. A given surface
91. (a) Tyndall effect is the simplest way to check colloidal of an adsorbent does not show any preference for a
system since path of light beam becomes visible due particular gas as the van der Waal’s forces are
to scattering of light. universal.
92. (d) Fe(OH)3 is positive sol. K3[Fe(CN)6 ] will provide Finely divided metals are better adsorbent as compared
[Fe(CN)6]3– for coagulation having highest magnitude to solid metals because they have large surface area
of –ve charge among given options. and extent of adsorption increases with surface area.
93. (d) According to the Hardy schulze rule the coagulating 115. (a) As chemisorption involves compound formation, it is
effect of an ion on dispersed phase of opposite charge usually irreversible in nature.
increases with the valency of the ion. Therefore more
116. (a)
the charge on oppositely charged ion higher is the
117. (c) Zeolites are found in nature as well as synthesised
coagulation value.
for catalytic selectivity.
SURFACE CHEMISTRY 331
118. (b) Optimum pH for the enzyme catalysis is 5-7. Catalyst 139. (c) Physical adsorption involves weak forces, physical in
used in Ostwald’s process is platinised asbestos at nature with small heat of adsorption. Thus low
573 K. temperature and high pressure favours physical
119. (b) S8 forms a multimolecular colloid. Micelles are formed adsorption.
above kraft temperature and above a particular 140. (a)
concentration called Critical Micelle Concentration 141. (b) The adsorption of methylene blue on activated
(CMC). charcoal is an example of physiosorption which is
120. (a) Values of colligative properties for colloids are of small exothermic, multilayer and does not have energy barrier.
order as compared to values shown by true solution. 142. (d) Freundlich’s isothermal adsorption equation can be
Most acceptable phenomena to account for the charge given as
of sol particles in preferential adsorption.
x
kp1/n
MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS m
121. (a) 122. (a) x 1 1

log log k log p; slope 0
123. (a) (A) V2O5 is used as a catalyst during the preparation m n n
of H2SO4
x
(B) Ziegler-Natta is used as a catalyst during the Thus, kp 0
m
preparation of HDPE.
(C) Peroxide is used as a catalyst durin g the 143. (d)
preparation of polyacrylonitrile. 144. (c) Both adsorption and absorption can take place
(D) Finely divided Fe is used as a catalyst during the simultaneously. The term sorption is used to describe
preparation of ammonia. both the processes.
124. (a) 125. (d) 126. (a) 127. (a) 128. (c) 145. (c) Homogenous catalysis does not involves adsorption.
129. (a) 130. (b) 146. (b) A catalyst can not initiate a reaction.
131. (d) Argyrol is used as an eye lotion. 147. (a)
Antimony is used in Kalazar. 148. (d) Enzymes are most reactive at optimum temperature.
Collidal gold is used in intramuscular injection. The optimum temperature for enzyme activity lies
Milk of magnesia is used in the stomach disorder. between 40°C to 60°C.
149. (c) V2 O 5 is used as catalyst in contact process of
ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS manufacturing H2SO4.
150. (c) The theory of heterogeneous catalysis is based upon
132. (c) Assertion is true, reason is false. When several lines the phenomenon of adsorption. The activity of catalyst
1 is due to the presence of free valencies on its sufrace
have the same value of , then the lines by which due to which surface of catalyst has force of attraction.
n
151. (b) ZSM-5 is a shape selective catalyst. Zeolites are good
their adsorption isotherms can be represented will be
shape selective catalysts because of the honey comb
parallel and will not meet at a point.
like structure.
133. (d) Assertion is false but Reason is true. The enthalpy
152. (b) Given reactions shows that the selectivity of different
of chemisorption is of the order of 40 - 400 kJmol –1
catalysts for same reactants is different.
while for physical adsorption it is of the order of
20 - 40 kJmol–1. 153. (a) Soap lather is a colloid containing gas as a dispersed
phase and liquid as a dispersion medium.
134. (c) Assertion is true but Reason is false.
154. (a) Chlorophyll. Smoke is an example of solid-gas colloid
Freundlich adsorption isotherm gives an empirical
system Ruby glass is an example of solid-solid colloid
relationship between the quantity of gas adsorbed by
system. Milk is an liquid -liquid colloid system.
unit mass of solid adsorbent and pressure at a particular
temperature. 155. (c) Starch molecules have colloidal dimensions whereas
NaCl, glucose and Ba(NO3)2 are crystalloids and
135. (a) 136. (c)
soluble in water.
137. (a) Colligative properties depend upon number of
156. (d) Cetyl trimethyl ammonium bromide,
particles.
[C16 H33 (CH3 )3 N Br ] is a cationic micelle.
CRITICAL THINKING TYPE QUESTIONS 157. (d) Linseed oil, lanolin and glycogen attract water hence
138. (c) Adsorption is an exothermic process, hence H will contain a hydrophilic structure but rubber does not
always be negative. attract water and thus does not contain a hydrophobic
structure.
EBD_7207
158. (a) Multimolecular colloids consist of aggregates of atoms 166. (c) As colloidal particles move towards anode so these
or small molecules. Sulphur sol is an example of particles are negatively charged and coagulated by
multimolecular colloids cations of electrolyte.
159. (b) Bredig’s arc method is suitable for the preparation of
According to Hardy Schulze rule,
colloidal solution of metals like gold, silver, platinum
etc. An arc is struck between the metal electrode under Coagulation power charge of ion
the surface of water containing some stabilzing agent Order of coagulation power is Al3+ > Ba2+ > Na+
such as a trace of KOH. However, Fe does not react 167. (b) In first case the given compounds have same anion
with alkalies that is why it is not obtained by Bredig’s- but different cations having different charge hence
arc method. they will precipitate negatively charged sol i.e. ‘A’.
160. (d) Colloidal solutions are not purified by electrophoresis.
In second case the given compounds have similar
Movement of colloidal particles under the influence of
cation but different anion with different charge. Hence
electric field is called electrophoresis. So, it can make
easier. Electrophoresis is the property of colloids not they will precipitate positively charged sol. i.e. ‘B’.
the purification method. 168. (b) Brownian movement is zig zag motion of sol particles.
161. (d) Gold by Bredig’s method (Dispersion method) and by 169. (a) 170. (a) 171. (b)
reduction method 172. (c) A gas mixed with another gas forms a homogeneous
AuCl3 + Tannic acid Gold sol mixture and hence is not a colloidal system.
162. (a) Proteins are coagulated by some heavy metal ions like
173. (d) Tannin used in leather industry contains negatively
Ag+, Hg2+ and Pb2+.
charged colloidal particles.
163. (d) Al(OH)3 is a positive sol so salt having anion with
maximum negative charged (i.e. phosphate ion) will be 174. (b) Gold sol is prepared by reduction as
most effective in coagulation. 2AuCl3 3HCHO 3H 2 O
Reduction
164. (a) Colloid of liquid in liquid is called emulsion. Colloid of
liquid in solid is gel. 2Au sol 3HCOOH 6HCl
165. (b) When oppositely charged sols are mixed their charges 175. (b) Eosin dye, sol of charcoal, As2S3 and copper sol are
are neutralised. Both sols may be partially or example of negatively charged sol.
completely precipitated.
GENERAL PRINCIPLES AND PROCESSES OF ISOLATION OF ELEMENTS 341
FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS 25. (a)

26. (b) Leaching is a process used for concentration of ore. In
1. (a) Argentite or silver glance (Ag 2S) is an ore of Ag. this process, a powdered ore is treated with a suitable
reagent (such as acids, bases or other chemicals)
2. (a) Cinnabar (HgS) is an ore of Hg.
which can selectively dissolve the ore, but not the
3. (a) Bauxite ore of aluminium is Al 2 O3.2H 2O . impurities.
4. (a) 27. (d) Au and Ag can be extracted from their native ores by
5. (b) Al is most abundant metal on the surface of the earth. leaching (Mac-Arthur Forrest cyanide process).
6. (c) Carborundum - SiC 28. (c)
Epsomite or Epsom salt - MgSO4.7H2O 29. (c) Cinnabar is sulphide ore (HgS). Hence purified by froth
Cassiterite - SnO2 floatation process.
Spodumene - Ore of lithium 30. (a) Ag is leached by cyanide process.
7. (a) Chalcopyrite : CuFeS2 31. (c) Pyrolusite is MnO2. Hence not concentrated by froth
Fool's gold : FeS2 floatation process.
Carnalite : KMgCl3.6H2O 32. (c) Froth reduces the surface tension of water and the
Bauxite : Al2O3.2H2O solution forms froth.
8. (c) Haematite is Fe2O3. Thus it is the ore of iron (Fe). 33. (a) Froth flotation process is based on wetting properties
9. (c) Azurite is a basic carbonate ore of copper. of ore particles.
2CuCO3. Cu(OH)2 34. (c) The surface of particles not wetted hence they float at
10. (d) Fe3O4 – Magnetite the surface
CuCO3·Cu(OH)2 – Malachite 35. (a) To remove moisture and non-metallic impurities like S,
Pyrolusite – MnO2 and Cassiterite – SnO2. P and As are oxidised and are removed as volatile
11. (a) substances.
12. (a) The formula of magnetite is Fe3O4. S8 8O 2 8SO 2 ; P4 5O2 P4 O10
13. (c) Impurities associated with minerals are called gangue
4As 3O2 2As2O3
or matrix.
36. (c) In this process sulphide ores are converted into oxide
14. (c)
ores.
15. (b) Malachite is an ore of copper Cu OH 2 .CuCO3 . 2ZnS + 3O2 2ZnO + 2SO2
16. (d) Cassiterite is an ore of Sn also known as tin stone 37. (a) 38. (d)
SnO2. 39. (a) Carbon reduction, Fe2O3 + 3 C 2Fe + 3CO
17. (a) Galena is an ore of lead. It is PbS. 40. (b) Flux + Gangue Slag
18. (a) Gold being least reactive found native. 41. (a) Calcination is heating ore in absence of air to remove
19. (a) moisture and volatile impurities. Carbonate ores
20. (c) Zincite is ZnO. decomposed to corresponding oxides as a result of
21. (c) Galena is PbS and thus purified by froth floatation calcination.
method. 42. (d) Calcination is a process of heating a substance to a
Froth flotation method is used to concentrate sulphide high temperature but below the melting or fusion point,
ores. This method is based on the fact that the surface causing loss of moisture, reduction or oxidation and
of sulphide ores is preferentially wetted by oils while dissociation into simpler substances.
that of gangue is preferentially wetted by water. 43. (b) Since silica is acidic impurity the flux must be basic.
22. (d) Froth floatation process is used for the concentration CaO SiO2 CaSiO3
of sulphide ores. 44. (b) To remove acidic impurities basic flux is added which
23. (b) Cassiterite contains the magnetic impurities of FeSO 4 is CaCO3 .
and thus concentrated by electromagnetic separation. 45. (d) Decomposition of carbonates and hydrated oxides.
24. (d) Cyanide process is used in the metallurgy of Ag 46. (d) 2CuO CuS 3Cu SO 2 (Self - reduction)
2Ag 2S 8 NaCN O 2 2 H 2 O 47. (a) For example, Ag2S is converted into Na[Ag(CN)2].
4 Na[ Ag (CN ) 2 ] 4 NaOH 2S When Zn is added, Ag is displaced.
48. (b)
2 Na [ Ag ( CN ) 2 ] Zn Na 2 [ Zn (CN ) 4 ] 2 Ag
EBD_7207
342 GENERAL PRINCIPLES AND PROCESSES OF ISOLATION OF ELEMENTS
49. (c) Cresol is used as froth stabiliser. 68. (a) 69. (c) 70. (a)
50. (b) Calcination involves heating when the volatile matter 71. (d) Blister-Copper contains 1 – 2 % impurities. It is
escapes leaving behind the metal oxide. obtained after Bessemerisation of crude copper.
51. (b) In the graph of r G° vs T for formation of oxides, the 72. (a)
Cu2O line is almost at the top. So, it is quite easy to 73. (b) Pig iron contains 4% carbon and many impurities in
reduce oxide ores of copper directly to the metal by smaller amount.
heating with coke both the lines of C, CO and C, CO 2 74. (d) 75. (c) 76. (a)
are at much lower temperature (500 - 600 K). 523K 1700K
77. (a) Ti 2I2 TiI4 Ti 2I 2
Cu 2 O C 2Cu CO Volatile Pure metal
52. (d) Stable compound
53. (c) Ellingham diagram normally consists of plots of fGº 78. (c) Liquation process, Mond’s process and, van Arkel
Vs T for the formation of oxides of elements. process these are the refining processes that are applied
54. (c) depending upon the nature of the metal under treatment
55. (b) Fe2 O3 3CO 2Fe 3CO 2 and nature of the impurities whereas amalgamation
56. (c) process is used for the extraction of noble metals like
gold, silver, etc, from native ores. The metal is
57. (c) In blast furnace at about 1270 K, calcium carbonate is
recovered from the amalgam by subjecting it to
almost completely decomposed to give CaO which acts
distillation, where the mercury distils over leaving
as a flux and combines with SiO2 present as impurity
behind the metal.
(gangue) in the ore to form calcium silicate (fusible
slag) Hg-vapours
CaO(s) (basic flux) + SiO2 (s) (acidic flux) Ore + Hg Amalgam Distilled
CaSiO3 (s) (slag) Metal
58. (b) These are the substances which can withstand very 79. (b) Zr and Ti are purified by van Arkel method.
high temperature without melting or becoming soft. 870K
Zr(s ) 2I2 ( g ) ZrI4 ( g )
59. (a)
2075K
60. (d) Cast iron is different from pig iron and is made by ZrI4 ( g ) Zr(s ) 2I 2 ( g )
Tugsten filament
melting pig iron with scrap iron and coke using hot air
Ti(s) + 2I2(s) 523K TiI4(g)
blast. It has slightly lower carbon content (about 3%)
and is extremely hard and brittle.
1700K
61. (a) Cuprous oxide formed during roasting of cuprous
sulphide is mixed with few amount of cuprous sulphide Ti(s) + 2I2(g)
and heated in a reverberatory furnace to get metallic Pure titanium
copper. 80. (a) Zone refining is based on the difference in solubility
2Cu 2O Cu 2S 6Cu SO2 of impurities in molten and solid state of the metal.
This method is used for obtaining metals of very high
62. (b) Extraction of Zn from ZnS (Zinc blende) is achieved
purity.
by roasting followed by reduction with carbon.
81. (d) Si obtained by reduction of SiCl4 with H2 is further
2ZnS + 3O2 2ZnO + 2SO2 purified by zone refining method to get Si of very high
ZnO + C Zn + CO purity. Silicon is purified by zone-refining process
63. (d) Decomposition of carbonates and hydrated oxides. because the impurities present in it are more soluble in
64. (b) Aluminothermite process involves reduction of oxides the liquid phase than in the solid phase.
which are not satisfactorily reduced by carbon such 82. (c) 83. (a)
as Fe 2 O 3 , Mn 3 O 4 , Cr 2 O 3 , etc. to metals with 84. (c) Mobile phase cannot be solid.
aluminium. 85. (b) Zinc dust is used as a reducing agent in the manufacture
Cr2 O3 2Al Al 2 O 3 2Cr H ve of dye-stuffs, paints etc.
65. (c) Because Na is very reactive and cannot be extracted
by means of the reduction by C, CO etc. So it is extracted STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS
by electrolysis. 86. (a) For ore containing mixture of ZnS and PbS, depressant
66. (c) NaCN allows PbS to come with froth and prevents
67. (c) Fused alumina (Al2O3) is a bad conductor of electricity. ZnS from coming to the froth.
Therefore, cryolite (Na3AlF6) and fluorspar (CaF2) are 87. (b) Ellingham diagram represents plot between G and T
added to purified alumina which not only make alumina therefore with increase in temperature phase change
a good conductor of electricity but also reduce the Gas Liquid is not possible. Ellingham diagram does
melting point of the mixture to around 1140 K. not give any information about kinetics of the reduction
reaction.
GENERAL PRINCIPLES AND PROCESSES OF ISOLATION OF ELEMENTS 343
88. (c) 110. (d) Leaching is the selective dissolution of the desired
89. (c) Van Arkel method involves heating crude Zr with mineral leaving behind the impurities in a suitable
iodine to form corresponding iodide. The metal iodide dissolving agent e.g.,
being more covalent volatilises. Argentitie or Silver glance, Ag2S is an ore of silver.
Silver is extracted from argentite by the mac-Arthur
MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS and Forest process (leaching process).
90. (a) 91. (c) 92. (a) 93. (b) 94. (a) Ag 2S 4NaCN 2Na[Ag CN 2 ] Na 2S
95. (b) Cyanide process is for gold (A - s); floatation process
- pine oil (B - q); Electrolytic reduction - Al (C - r); 4Au 8KCN 2H 2O O 2 4K[Au CN 2 ] 4KOH
Zone refining -Ge (D - p). 111. (d) 112. (d)
96. (b) 97. (a) 113. (b) The reactions involved in cyanide extraction process
are :
Ag 2 S + 4NaCN 2Na [Ag(CN)2] + Na2S
98. (c) Assertion is true but reason is false. (argentite)
Oxide ores being heavier than the earthy or rocky
4Na2S + 5O 2 + 2H2O 2Na2SO4 + 4NaOH + 2S
gangue particles, settle down while lighter impurities
Oxiding
are washed away. agent
99. (a)
2Na[Ag(CN)2] + Zn Na2 [Zn(CN)4] + 2
100. (d) Assertion is false but reason is true. Leaching is a (reducing
agent)
process of concentration.
101. (b) Both assertion and reason are true but reason is not Ag
the correct explanation of assertion. Non fusible mass 114. (b)
present in ore in mixing with suitable flux are fused 115. (d) The sulphide ore is roasted to oxide before reduction
which are then reduced by coke to give free metal.
because the Gof of most of the sulphides are greater
102. (a) Both assertion and reason are correct and reason is
than those of CS2 and H2S, therefore neither C nor H
the correct explanation of assertion.
can reduce metal sulphide to metal. Further, the
103. (a) standard free energies of formation of oxide are much
less than those of SO2. Hence oxidation of metal
sulphides to metal oxide is thermodynamically
104. (c) Malachite is CuCO3 . Cu(OH)2 it is ore of copper. favourable.
105. (a) (a) Zinc Calamine is ZnCO3 116. (d) Ellingham diagrams are based on thermodynamic
(b) Silver Ilmenite is FeTiO3 concepts. It does not tell anything about the kinetics
(c) Magnesium Cassiterite is SnO2 of the reduction process.
(d) Tin Azurite is 117. (d) For a spontaneous reaction , Gº must be negative
and it can be possible only in this case when x < y
[2CuCO3.Cu (OH)2]
118. (b) The two equation are:
106. (c) Cuprite : Cu2O; Chalcocite : Cu2S; Chalcopyrite : CuFeS2;
Malachite: Cu(OH)2 .CuCO3. We see that CuFeS2 4 2
Al(s) O 2 (g) Al2 O3 (s), f Gº 827kJ mol 1
contains both Cu and Fe. 3 3
107. (a) Silver, copper and lead are commonly found in earth's … (1)
crust as Ag2S (silver glance), CuFeS2 (copper pyrites) 4 2
and PbS (galena) Cr(s) O 2 (g) Cr2 O3 (s), f Gº 540kJ mol 1
3 3
108. (b) Except chromium all the given metals exists as their
… (2)
sulphides.
Subtracting equation (ii) from equation (i) we have,
Zn exists as zinc blende ZnS.
Silver exists as silver glance Ag2S. 4 2 2 4
Al(s) Cr2O3 (s) Al 2O 3 (s) Cr(s),
Iron exists as iron pyrites FeS2. 3 3 3 3
Mercury exists as mercuric sulphide HgS. 1
rG 287kJ mol
109. (a) MnO2 is pyrolusite (oxide ore).
EBD_7207
344 GENERAL PRINCIPLES AND PROCESSES OF ISOLATION OF ELEMENTS
119. (a) FeO is capable forming slag with SiO2 126. (c) Extraction of non-metals are based on oxidation. For
example extraction of chlorine from brine.
SiO 2 FeO FeSiO 3
2Cl–(aq) + 2H2O(l) 2OH–(aq) + H2(g) + Cl2(g)
120. (a) In blast furnace Fe2O3 is finally reduced to Fe at 993°C 127. (a) (iii) and (iv) reactions occur in the temperature range of
121. (c) 122. (b) 123. (b) 900 – 1500K in blast furnace.
124. (b) This process is also called autoreduction process or 128. (b) For each kg of Al produced, about 0.5 kg of carbon
air reduction process. The sulphide ores of less anode is burnt away.
electropositive metals are heated in air to convert part 129. (d) Na reacts vigorously with water (exothermic process )
of the ore into oxide or sulphate which then react with 130. (b) During the process of electrolytic refining of copper
the remaining sulphide ore to give the metal and Ag and Au are obtained as anode mud.
sulphur dioxide. 131. (d)
2Cu 2S 3O2 2Cu 2O 2SO2 132. (d) Metals of high purity are obtained by zone refining
Cu 2S 2Cu 2O 6Cu SO2 e.g., silicon, germanium, boron, gallium, indium.
133. (b) During electrolytic refining of copper electrolyte used
125. (c) The iron obtained from blast furnace is pig iron with
is acidified solution of copper sulphate.
4% carbon and impurities like S, P, Mn etc., in small
134. (a) Wrought iron is used in making anchors, wires, bolts
amount.
chains and agricultural implements.
p-BLOCK ELEMENTS (GROUP 15, 16, 17 AND 18) 359
FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS 20. (d) Bi forms basic oxides whereas N and P form acidic and
As and Sb form amphoteric oxides.
1. (d) Ionic radii increases down the group 21. (b) The basic character decreases from NH3 to BiH3. The
2. (b) In case of nitrogen, d-orbitals are not available. basic nature is due to the presence of lone pair of
3. (a) Collectively these elements are called pnicogens and electrons on the central atom. NH3 is the strongest
their compound pniconides. electron pair donor due to its small size as the electron
4. (d) Metallic character increases down the group, Bi is density of the electron pair is concentrated over a small
most metallic region. As the size increases the electron density gets
5. (b) The melting point in group 15 increases upto arsenic diffused over a large region and hence the ability to
and then decreases upto bismuth. donate the electron pair (basic nature) decreases.
6. (d) Bismuth forms metallic bonds in elemental state. 22. (a) NCl5 in not possible because N does not contain
7. (a) –3, +3, +5 d-orbitals.
8. (d) N2 molecule contains triple bond between N atoms
Only nitrogen has a tendency to form p – p multiple
having very high dissociation energy (946 kJ mol–1)
due to which it is relatively inactive. bonds. Other forms d – p multiple bonds easily..
9. (a) Nitrogen due to small size is able to show p -p lateral 23. (c) 24. (b)
overlap forming N N, rest elements due to bigger size
Heat
are not able to show p -p lateral overlap. 25. (d) NH 4 Cl NaNO 2 NH 4 NO 2
NaCl
10. (c) Catenation tendency is higher in phosphorus when
Heat
compared with other elements of same group. N2 2H 2O.
11. (c) Nitrogen form N2 (i.e. N N) but phosphorus form 26. (a)
P4, because in P2, p — p bonding is present which
is a weaker bonding. 27. (b) In Haber’s process for manufacture of NH3, finely
12. (d) The cause of inert nature of N2 is the presence of divided iron is used as catalyst and molybdenum is
.. .. used as catalytic promoter
triple bond N N Fe Mo
13. (b) N2 ( g ) 3H2 ( g ) 800K, High P
2NH 3 ( g )
14. (b) Phosphorous can achieve coordination number 5 due
28. (d) N2H4 and NH4Cl are obtained by reaction of ammonia
to vacant d atomic orbitals in valence shell which is
with hypochlorite anion.
not possible in nitrogen
15. (b) The order of boiling points of the group 15 hydrides 3NH 3 NaOCl N 2 H 4 NH 4 Cl NaOH
is : BiH3 > SbH3 > NH3 > AsH3 > PH3 29. (a) HNO3 and CuSO4 are not drying agents, while P2O5
16. (a) Oxide in which central atom has higher charge and reacts with NH3. The moisture present in NH3 is
more electronegativity is more acidic, i.e. removed by passing it through a tower packed with
N2O5 > N2O4 > P2O5 > As2O3. quicklime (CaO).
17. (a) Order of dipole moment 30. (b) Ammonia has pyramidal shape with sp3 hybridisation.
NH3 > PH3 > AsH3 > SbH3
31. (b) 3CuO 2 NH 3 3Cu 3H 2 O N 2 ,
(Based upon electronegativity)
18. (c) As the size of central atom increases the lone pair of O.S. of N in NH3 is –3 and in N2 is zero. Hence loss of
electrons occupies a larger volume. In other words 3 electrons
electron density on the central atom decreases and 32. (b) NH3 is not used as anaesthetic
consequently its tendency to donate a pair of electrons 33. (b) Liquid ammonia has high vapour pressure which is
decreases along with basic character from NH3 to
lowered down by cooling, otherwise the liquid will
BiH3.
bump.
19. (a) NF 5 does not exist because N does not form
pentahalides due to the absence of d-orbital in its 34. (c) By Haber’s process
valence shell. While P, As and Sb form pentahalides of 35. (a) Only nitrates of heavy metals and lithium decompose
the general formula MX5 (where, M = P, As and Sb) on heating to produce NO2.
due to the presence of vacant d-orbitals in their 36. (d) N2O3, N2O4 and N2O5 are acidic oxides. Only N2O is
respective valence shell. neutral oxide.
EBD_7207
360 THE p-BLOCK ELEMENTS (GROUP 15, 16, 17 AND 18)
56. (b) White phosphorous is most reactive
O O
57. (b) White phosphorous is P4 and tetrahedral
37. (b) N–O–N 58. (a) Except (a) all other properties are shown by white
phosphorous.
O O 59. (b) White phosphorus on heating readily catches fire in
The structure clearly shows the presence of covalent air to give dense white fumes of P4O10.
and co-ordinate bonds. P4 + 5O2 P4O10.
38. (d) NO2 is reddish brown coloured gas. Rest of the oxides
are colourless. 60. (c) Monoclinic sulphur is stable above 369 K.
39. (c) Compound O.S. of N 61. (c) Ca3P2 + 6H2O 3Ca(OH)2 + 2PH3 ; i.e 2 moles of
N2O +1 phosphine are produced from one mole of calcium
phosphide.
NO +2
NO2 +4 62. (d) PH3 is covalent hydride
NO3– +5 63. (b) Red P does not react with NaOH to give PH3.
NH4+ –3 64. (d) PH3 is not obtained when metaphosphoric acid is
Therefore increasing order of oxidation state of N is: heated.
65. (a) The combustibility of PH3 is due to presence of P2H4.
NH 4 < N2O < NO < NO2 < NO3 . The pure PH3 is not combustible.
40. (c) In N2O (nitrous oxide) two N atoms are covalently 600 C
bonded through triple bond 66. (d) 2H 3 PO 4 2 HPO 3
2H 2O
[N N O]
41. (b) FeSO 4 NO FeSO 4 .NO 67. (d) P2 O 5 3H 2 O 2 H 3 PO 4
42. (b) 68. (b) Orthophosphoric acid, H 3PO 4 contains three P – OH
43. (a) N2O is used as anaesthetic bonds and is therefore, tribasic.
44. (c) 2NO O 2 2 NO 2 brown O
||
45. (b) Phosphorus from stable P4 molecule.
P
| OH
|
Pt. gauge
46. (a) 4NH 3 5O 2 4NO 6H 2 O OH
47. (b) The slow decomposition of HNO3 is represented by orthophosphoric acid
the eqn. 69. (b) PCl3 + H2O POCl3 + 2HCl
4HNO3 4NO2 + 2H2O + O2 POCl3 + 3H2O H3PO4 + 3HCl
(yellow-brown)
70. (c) H 3PO 2 is named as hypophosphorous acid. It is
48. (d) For nitrogen, only NF3 is known to be stable.
monobasic as it contains only one P – OH bond, its
49. (a) 8NH3 3Cl2 6NH 4Cl N 2
basicity is one.
(excess)
NH3 3Cl 2 NCl3 3HCl O
||
excess
P
H | OH
|
50. (c) BiH3 is the strongest reducing agent while NH3 is the
weakest reducing agent. H
51. (d) The oxides of the type E 2 O 3 of nitrogen and 71. (a) We know that empirical formula of hypophosphorus
phosphorus are purely acidic. acid is H3PO2. In this only one ionisable hydrogen
52. (d) NH3 is not used in the pickling of stainless steel. atom is present i.e. it is monobasic. Therefore option
O (a) is correct structural formula of it.
O
=
53. (d) N O N–N = O

=
(i) (ii) O ||
O O P
O O
=
N–N N–O–N O
O
=
O
=
O O O 72. (d)
(iii) (iv) O
O P P O
||
54. (d) 4 Zn + 10 HNO3 (dil.) 4 Zn(NO3)2 + 5H2O + N2O

||
Zn + 4 HNO3 (conc.) Zn(NO3)2 + 2H2O + 2NO2 O

O P
55. (a) Both white and red phosphorus are not soluble in CS2
|| O
only white phosphorus is soluble in CS2.
O
73. (c) Structure of hypophosphorous acid O
O
H
| P
H O P O (b) (c) HO P O
| HO H
HPO3
H H
H3PO2
Two H-atoms are attached to P atom.
74. (c) In cyclic metaphosporic acid number of P–O–P bonds O O
is three.
O OH (d) P (e) P
P HO OH H OH
O O
O OH OH
O
P P H 3PO 4 H3PO3
O OH
HO The H–atom of the –OH group is ionisable whereas
75. (d) H–atom which is directly linked to P–atom is non-
76. (b) O ionisable. Thus H3PO3 is dibasic acid.
85. (a) Pyrophosphorous acid (H4P2O5) is a dibasic acid as it
bridging P bridging contains two P—OH bonds.
O
O O
O
O
H—P—O—P—H
P O
OH OH
O P
O 86. (b) Formula of cyclotrimetaphosphoric acid is (HPO3)3
O P O Oxidation state of ‘P’ is 3(+ 1 + x + 3 (– 2)) = 0
bridging
O bridging x+ –6+1 =0 x= +5
oxygen
87. (a) O O
O HO — P — P — OH
HO OH
77. (b) H P H Hypophosphorous acid (H3PO2) is a Hypophosphoric acid
O
OH OH
H
monobasic acid. i.e., it has only one ionisable hydrogen O P O P O

atom or one OH is present. OH OH
1 Pyrophosphoric acid
78. (c) Hybridisation in PCl5 = 5 5 0 0 5 sp3d
2
HO O OH
79. (c) H5P5O15 (HPO3)5. It is metaphosphoric acid which is P P
a cyclic phosphate. O O O
80. (b) H4P2O5 is pyrophosphorous acid it contains P–O–P Metaphosphoric acid
bond
O
81. (c) H3PO4 is tribasic
82. (a) Hypophosphorous acid is H3PO2 in which O.S. of P HO P OH
is +1
83. (c) OH
84. (d) Structures of given oxyacids are following Orthophosphoric acid
88. (a) 89. (c) 90. (d)
O O
91. (a) Electron affinity increases from left to right in period
and decreases from top to bottom in a group but
P P
electron affinity of O is less than S due to small size.
(a) HO O OH
OH 92. (d) All exhibit polymorphism
OH
H4P2O7
93. (a)
EBD_7207
94. (d) H2O is liquid but H2S is a gas. This can be attributed 120. (c) SO 2 2H 2 O H 2SO 4 2H . Bleaching action is
to the presence of intermolecular hydrogen bonding
due to reduction.
in case of H2O.
95. (b) 121. (d) Caro’s acid is H 2SO 5 which contains one S – O
96. (a) – O – H peroxy linkage. It is also known as
97. (a) H2O (due to intermolecular H - bonding) permonosulphuric acids.
98. (b) Oxygen being more electronegative
99. (a) SnO2 is an amphoteric oxide because it reacts with O
||
acids as well as with bases to form corresponding salts. H – O – O – S – OH
SnO2 + 2H2SO4(conc) Sn(SO4)2 + 2H2O ||
SnO2 + 2NaOH Na2SnO3 + H2O O
100. (d) All hexafluorides of group 16 elements are gaseous in Caro's acid
nature. 122. (d)
101. (b) Oxygen can be prepared by heating oxides of Hg, Pb,
Ag, Mn and Ba. 123. (c) Oleum is H 2S2 O 7 ( H 2SO4 SO3 ) which is obtained
by dissolving SO3 in H2SO4 and is called fuming
2HgO 2Hg + O2 sulphuric acid.
102. (c) It is paramagnetic with two unpaired electrons 124. (c) 125. (a) 126. (c)
103. (c) Total number of electrons in O2 is 16. It has 2 unpaired 127. (c) It is H2SO5.
electrons, the rest 14 are paired.
128. (c) HO.SO 2OH 2PCl5 ClSO2Cl 2POCl3 2HCl
104. (b) 2KClO 3 2 KCl 3O 2 Sulphuryl chloride
105. (c) In KMnO4 manganese is already present in its highest 129. (b) 2Ag 2H 2SO 4 2H 2 O SO 2 Ag 2SO 4 .
possible oxidation state i.e. +7.So no further oxidation
Au, Pt does not react. Pb forms insoluble PbSO4
is possible.
130. (c)
106. (c) Ozone layer is beneficial to us, because it stops
harmful ultraviolet radiations from reaching the earth. O
||
107. (b) 2KMnO 4 K 2 MnO4 4MnO 2 O 2 131. (a) H O S O H; 6 &2
||
108. (d) Ozone is an allotrope of oxygen. O
109. (d) 2Ag2O (s) 4Ag (s) + O2 (g)
2Pb3O4 (s) 6PbO (s) + O2 (g) 132. (a) In H 2SO 4 , the S atom is present in its highest
2PbO2 (s) 2PbO (s) + O2 (g) oxidation state of +6. Hence H 2SO 4 can act an oxidant
110. (a) Mn2O7 is an acidic oxide. BaO and Na2O are basic only by gain of electrons
oxides while N2O is a neutral oxides. 133. (d) Ionisation potential decreases down the group.
111. (c) It is 8 134. (a)
112. (c) S2 is paramagnetic. It contains two unpaired electrons 135. (d) The lesser the bond energy, the weaker is the bond
in the antibonding * orbital 136. (b) 3s2 3p5 is electronic configuration of Cl
113. (a) 2SO2(g) + O2(g) V2O5
2SO3(g) 137. (c) The electron gain enthalpy order for halogens is
Cl > F > Br > I
O O Due to small size of fluorine the extra electron to be
=
114. (b) O = S–O–O–S=O added feels more electron-electron repulsion.

OH OH Therefore fluorine has less value for electron affinity
than chlorine.
Peroxodisulphuric acid
138. (d)
(H2S2O8)
139. (a) Reactivity follows the order F > Cl > Br > I
115. (b) Conc. H2SO4 is a strong dehydrating agent due to
140. (d)
which carbohydrates becomes charred on reaction with
141. (b) Except ionisation potential other factors are true to
conc. H2SO4 acid.
116. (b) The key step in the manufacture of H2SO4 is catalystic explain the oxidising (strong) behaviour of F2 .
oxidation of SO2 with O2 to give SO3 in presence of 142. (b)
V2O5 . 143. (d) Fluorine exhibit -ve oxidation state
117. (a) In SO3, sp2 hybridisation 144. (a) Since F2 is most oxidising, it is easily reduced
118. (c) Cu 2H 2SO 4 (conc) CuSO 4 SO 2 2H 2O 145. (c) Chlorine shows O.S. from –1,+1 to +7, whereas others
show O.S. as Na +1 ; K +1 ; F –1
119. (b) 2 , one see structure
146. (c) Fluorine always exhibit –1 oxidation state. 0 1 +5
0 1 1
166. (b) 6NaOH + 3Cl2 5NaCl + NaCl O3 + 3H 2O
147. (b) H 2O Br2 HOBr HBr 167. (c) 6NaOH + 3Cl2 5NaCl + NaClO3 + 3H2O
Thus here oxidation number of Br increases from 0 to (hot and conc.)
+1 and also decreases from 0 to –1. Thus it is oxidised 168. (a) Rn because it is radioactive element obtained by the
as well as reduced. disintegration of radium
148. (d) Since all the halogens have a strong tendency to 226
88 Ra Rn 222 2 He4
86
accept electrons. Therefore halogens act as strong
oxidising agents and their oxidising power decreases 169. (b) Radon is the last member of family
from fluorine to iodine. 170. (d)
149. (b) On moving from top to bottom of halogen group the 171. (d) Electronic configuration of He is 1s2
bond dissociation energy of hydrogen h alides 172. (a) Inert gases do not contain unpaired electrons
decreases and so the heat of formation of halogen 173. (b) Ionization potential of inert gases is highest in periodic
acids also decreases. table due to stable electronic configuration.
150. (a) HF, due to intermolecular H-bonding is weakest among 174. (a) Ionisation energy decreases as we move away from
HX acids nucleus due to less electrostatic attraction between
151. (c) Volatile character HCl > HBr >HI > HF electrons and nucleus
152. (d) Due to hydrogen bonding HF is a liquid 175. (a) The smaller the size the least is the polarisability
153. (d) Bleaching action of chlorine is due to oxidation in 176. (c) The differentiating electron enter in s subshell in case
presence of moisture. of He, hence it is s- block element. Its electronic
Cl 2 H 2O HCl HClO configuration l s2 makes it inert in nature hence it is
HClO HCl O placed with inert gases.
Colouring matter + | O | Colourless matter 177. (c) Ar is the most abundant in atmosphere
154. (b) Cl2 + 2NaOH NaCl + NaClO + H2O 178. (d) Due to weak van der Waal’s forces, He has lowest
(cold & dil) boiling point
3Cl2 + 6NaOH 5NaCl + NaClO3 + 3H2O 179. (d) The larger the size the more is the polarisiability
(hot & conc.)
180. (d) He was observed in the spectrum of the sun
155. (a) 2NaOH Cl2 NaCl NaOCl H 2 O
226
181. (b) 88 Ra 86 Rn 222 2 He 4 . Both are inert gases
hence Cl and OCl
182. (d) Electron gain enthalpy for noble gases is positive and
156. (d) K 2 Cr2O 7 conc.HCl Cl2 it becomes less positive with increase in size of atom.
157. (d) MnO2 or KMnO4 with conc HCl give Cl2. Value of electron gain enthalpy
He – 48 kJ mol–1, Ne – 116 kJ mol–1
7 2
158. (d) 2 KMnO 4 16HCl 2 MnCl 2 2 KCl 8H 2 O 5Cl 2 Ar, Kr – 96 kJ mol–1, Xe – 77 kJ mol–1
O.S of Mn changes from +7 to +2 hence reduction Hence, Ne has highest positive electron gain enthalpy.
occurs and Cl2 is formed. 183. (b)
184. (a) As size increases, van der Waal's forces of attraction
159. (d) 6CaOCl 2 Ca (ClO3 ) 2 5CaCl 2
between n oble gas atoms also increases.
It is autooxidation. Consequently, ease of their liquefaction increases.
160. (d) HCl acid at 25º C is a gas and polar in nature 185. (c) Solubility increases from He to Rn
161. (d) In gaseous state the HCl is covalent in nature while in
186. (d) Xe forms maximum compounds hence it is most
aqueous solution it ionises to give H+ and C l ions reactive
162. (d) As the oxidation state of the central halogen atom 187. (b) Noble gases exhibit low chemical activity
increases, the halogen-oxygen bond becomes more 188. (d)
and more covalent. As a result the thermal stability of 189. (b) In XeOF4, Xenon is sp3d 2 hybridised and has one
the oxoacid increases. Thus, HClO4 is most stable to
heat, whereas HClO is least stable to heat. lone pair of electrons.
163. (c) The bond energy of interhalogen compounds is less 190. (a)
than the bond energy of halogens. 191. (d) The products of the concerned reaction react each
164. (d) Interhalogen compounds are not highly volatile other forming back the reactants.
1 XeF6 3H 2 O XeO3 6HF .
165. (a) ICl7. The hybridisation is 7 7 0 0 7 (sp3d3 )
2
EBD_7207
198. (d) Hybridisation in
F 1
XeF4 (8 4 0 0) 6 sp3d 2
2
199. (b) XeOF4 square pyramidal
200. (c) Hybridisation of XeF2 is sp3d
192. (c) XeF2 : Xe 201. (b) XeF4 is planar
202. (a) In XeO3 the hybridisation is sp3
F
F 203. (a) XeF2 has Xe structure hence number of lone
3lp
F
pair of electrons 3
F F 204. (c) Hybridisation of XeF4 is sp3d2 and structure is square
planar
XeF4 : 205. (a) XeF2 XeF4 XeF6
Xe
Valence electrons of Xe 8 8 8
F F Electrons involved 2 4 6
in bond formation
2lp Lone pairs left 3 2 1
206. (c) Hybridisation in each case is XeF4sp3d2, XeF2sp3d,
207. (c) He is obtained during radioactive decay
F
208. (c) The geometry of XeF6 is distorted octahedral in which
F all the six positions are occupied by fluorine atoms
and the lone pair of electrons of Xe atom is present at
XeF6 : F Xe F the corner of one of the triangular faces.
F
F F
F F
Xe
F F
F
209. (b) The hybridization of XeO3F2 is sp3d and its structure
XeO3 : Xe is trigonal bipyramidal in which oxygen atoms are
situated on the plane and the fluoride atoms are on the
top and bottom.
O O
O F
O
1 lp
Hence XeF2 has maximum no. of lone pairs of electrons.

O Xe
193. (d) XeO2F2 has trigonal bipyramidal geometry, but due to
presence of lone pair of electrons on equitorial position,
its actual shape is see-saw. O
F
F 210. (b) The shape of XeO3 is Trigonal Pyramidal.
O
Xe
Xe (Trigonal Pyramidal Structure)
O O O
F O
194. (b) XeF4 H 2O 2HF XeOF2 211. (c) Argon is used in high temperature welding and other
operations which require a non-oxidising atmosphere
195. (a) No compound of He as yet been reported and the absence of nitrogen.
196. (a) No compound of Ar as yet been reported with F2 212. (b) Neon gives a distinct reddish glow when used in either
197. (c) XeF6 3H 2 O 6HF XeO 3 low-voltage neon glow lamps or in high voltage
discharge tube.
213. (c) Helium is twice as heavy as hydrogen it is inflammable MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS
but not lighter than hydrogen. Helium has the lowest
melting and boiling point of any element which makes 230. (b) 231. (a) 232. (a) 233. (c) 234. (a)
liquid helium an ideal coolant for many extremely low 235. (b) 236. (b) 237. (b) 238. (b) 239. (a)
temperature application such as super conducting 240. (c) 241. (a)
magnet and cryogenic research where temperature
close to absolute zero are needed. He is used in gas ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS
cooled atomic reactors as a heat transfer agent.
242. (c) At higher temperatures, dinitrogen combines with
214. (c) Coloured discharge tubes mainly contain Neon metals to form ionic nitrides.
215. (a) Breathing mixture is (O2 + He) 243. (c)
216. (a) Mixture of (He + O2) is used for asthma patient 244. (a) Both assertion and reason are true and reason is the
217. ( b) 218. (c) 219. (d) correct explanation of assertion.
STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS M

(metal)
HNO3 MNO3 H
(conc.) (metal nitrate) (nascent hydrogen)
220. (a) Phosphorus occurs in minerals of the apatite family,

2HNO3 2H 2NO2 2H 2 O
Ca9(PO4)6, CaX2 (X = F, Cl or OH) which are main (nascent hydrogen)
components of phosphate rocks whereas arsenic and 245. (b) White phosphorus exists as P4 tetrahedral molecule
antimony are found as sulphide minerals. The increase having P-P-P bond angle 60º. Hence the molecule is
in covalent radii from N to P is greater in comparison under strain and more reactive. On the other hand red
to increase from As to Bi. phosphorus exists as P4 tetrahedra which are joined
221. (c) For nitrogen oxidation states from +1 to +4 together through covalent bonds giving polymeric
disproportionate in acidic solution only. Oxidation structure.
state of phosphorous in P2O5 is + 5 whereas in P2O5 246. (c) Bond angle of H2 S (92°) < H2O (104°31). As the
is +3 thus P2O5 is more acidic than P2O3. electronegativity of the central atom decreases, bond
222. (b) angle decreases. In the present case, S is less
electronegative than oxygen. Thus bond pairs in H2S
223. (a) Oxygen shows oxidation state of +2 in OF2. H2O which
are more away from the central atom than in H2O and
is a hydride of oxygen element of group 16 is neutral
thus repulsive forces between bond pairs are smaller
in nature.
producing smaller bond angle.
224. (c) 247. (a) 248. (a)
O O
O O– –O O
249. (b) With the decrease in the electronegativity of central
Ozone is diamagnetic in nature (due to presence of
paired electron) and both the O – O bond length are atom the bond angle decreases
equal. It has a bent structure. 250. (d)
251. (b) CuSO 4 4NH 3 [Cu ( NH 3 ) 4 ] SO 4
225. (b) NH3 being basic reacts with acidic H2SO4 thus H2SO4
cannot be used for drying NH3. Blue complex due to Cu(NH 3 ) 2
226. (b) Physical state of iodine is different from other halogens 4
as iodine is solid, bromine is a liquid whereas fluorine 252. (b) 2NO + N2O4 250K 2N2O3
and chlorine are gases. 253. (b) The slow decomposition of HNO3 is represented by
227. (b) At 298K, ClF exits as a gas. the eqn.
228. (d) 4HNO3 4NO2 + 2H2O + O2
229. (c) For statement (iii) preparation of XeF2 requires Xe in (yellow-brown)
excess amount 254. (a)
255. (c) [Fe(H2O)5NO]2+ ion is formed
673K,1 bar 256. (b) Ag+ (aq) + Cl– (aq) AgCl(s)
Xe g F2 g XeF2 s
excess Colourless White ppt
AgCl (s) + 2NH3 (aq) [Ag(NH3 )2] Cl (aq)
For statements (iv)
White ppt Colourless
2XeF2(s) + 2H2O(l) 2Xe(g) + 4HF(aq) + O2(g)
257. (b) NO2 and N2O4 has + 4 oxidation state for nitrogen.
6XeF4 + 12H2O 4Xe + XeO3 + 24HF + 3O2 258. (c) 3CuSO4 + 2PH3 Cu3P2 + 3H2SO4
XeF6 + 3H2O XeO3 + 6HF 3HgCl2 + 2PH3 Hg3P2 + 6HCl
EBD_7207
259. (d) SH–bond is weaker than, O–H bond. Hence H2S will 266. (c) 2F2 (g) + 2H2O (l) 4H+ (aq) + 4F– (aq) + O2 (g)
furnish more H+ ions Cl2 (g) + 2H2O (l) HCl (aq) + HOCl
260. (c) Air is liquified by making use of the joule-Thompson 1 5 1
effect (cooling by expansion of the gas) Water vapour 267. (d) NaClO NaClO3 2NaCl All statements are
and CO2 are removed by solidification. The remaining correct as evident from the reaction
major constituents of liquid air i.e., liquid oxygen and
liquid nitrogen are separated by means of fractional 268. (b) 2KMnO 4 16HCl 2KCl 2MnCl 2 8H 2 O 5Cl 2
distillation (b.p. of O2 = –183°C : b. P. of N2 = – 195.8°C) 269. (d)
261. (d) Formal charges help in the selection of the lowest 270. (c) XeF6 + 3H2O XeO3 + 6HF
energy structure from a number of possible Lewis
Complete hydrolysis of XeF6 gives XeO3 (an
structures for a given compound. The lowest energy
explosive).
structure means the structure with the smallest formal
271. (d) (i) The first ionization energy of xenon (1, 170 kJ mol–
charge on each atom of the compound. A Lewis dot 1) is quite close to that of dioxygen (1,180 kJ mol–1).
structure is preferable when all formal charges are zero.
262. (c) From the given options we find option (a) is correct. The (ii) The molecular diameters of xenon and dioxygen are
oxidising power of halogens follow the order almost identical.
F2 > Cl2 > Br2 > I2. Option (b) is incorrect because it in Based on the above similarities Barlett (who prepared
not the correct order of electron gain enthalpy of O2+[PtF6]– compound) suggested that since oxygen
halogens. combines with PtF6, so xenon should also form similar
The correct order is Cl2 > F2 > Br 2 > I2. The low value compound with PtF6.
of F2 than Cl2 is due to its small size. 272. (c) 2XeF6 SiO 2 SiF4 2XeOF4
Option (c) is incorrect. The correct order of bond
273. (c) Xenon undergo sp3 hybridization.
dissociation energies of halogens is
Cl2 > Br2 > F2 > I2. (ground
Option (d) is correct. It is the correct order of state)
5s 5p 5d
electronegativity values of halogens. Thus option (b)
and (c) are incorrect. (third excited
263. (c) The H–X bond strength decreases from HF to HI. i.e. state)
HF > HCl > HBr > HI. Thus HF is most stable while HI 5s 5p 5d
is least stable. The decreasing stability of the hydrogen In the fourth excited state xenon atom, has 8 unpaired
halide is also reflected in the values of dissociation electrons
energy of the H–X bond
H F H Cl H Br H I
135kcal mol 103kcal mol 87 kcal mol 71kcal mol 5s 5p 5d
264. (c) MI > MBr > MCl > MF. As the size of the anion 3
One s and three p orbital undergo sp hybridization.
decreases covalent character also decreases. Four sp3 hybrid orbitals form four bonds with oxygen
265. (a) Metal halides with higher oxidation state are more atoms. They are sp3 – p. Four p – d bonds are also
covalent than the one in lower oxidation state. formed with oxygen atoms by the unpaired electrons.
THE d-AND f-BLOCK ELEMENTS 377
FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS 16. (b) Zn [Ar]3d10 4s1,Fe 2 [Ar]3d 6 4s0 , Ni [Ar]3d 8 4s1,
1. (c) General electronic configuration of transition elements
Cu [Ar]3d10 4s 0 ;
1 10 1 2
is ( n 1) d ns
Fe 2 contain maximum number of unpaired electrons.
2. (b) Cr (24) = 1s , 2 s2 2 p 6 , 3s 2 3 p 6 , 3d 5 , 4 s1 ,
2
3. (b) Configuration of Fe ( Z = 26) 17. (a) Ni 28 Ni Ar 3d8 4s 2 contain 2 unpaired electrons.

1s2, 2s2, 2p6, 3s2, 3p6, 3d 6, 4s2 18. (c) Zn, Cd, Hg do not show properties of transition
4. (d) Ni 3+
: [Ar] 3d 7 elements hence they are known as non typical
transition elements.
Mn3+ : [Ar] 3d 4 19. (c) The outer electronic configuration of the given ions is
as
Fe3+ : [Ar] 3d 5
Co3+ : [Ar] 3d 6 d s
5. (c) Ag belongs to second transition series. Ti2+
6. (c) 7. (a) d s
8. (d) Transition elements due to similar (almost) sizes exhibit Fe2+
both vertical and horizontal similarities. d s
9. (a) Group number is given by ns n 1 d electrons. Cr+
2 3 5 d s
Cu+
10. (a) 3d series starts from Sc Z 21 and ends with
Zn(Z –30).
20. (c) 21. (a)
11. (d) Since transition metals can lose electrons from
22. (a) Mn7+ = 25 – 7 = 18e– = [Ar]
n 1 d ns orbitals hence they are valence orbitals. 0 unpaired electrons.
12. (b) Atomic no. of Ni = 28
23. (b) Co [Ar]3d 7 4s 2
Ni (Ground state) = 1s2, 2s2, 2p6, 3s2, 3p6, 3d 8, 4s2,
2 2 6 2 6 8 0
Ni 2 = 1s , 2s , 2p , 3s , 3p , 3d , 4s
Since it contains three unpaired electrons. Hence it is
3d
paramagnetic.
24. (a) The outermost electronic configuration of Fe is
It has 2 unpaired electrons Fe = [Ar] 3d6 4s2
13. (c) Cerium (Ce) belongs to lanthanide series and is member Fe2+ = [Ar] 3d6 4s0
of inner-transition metals.
14. (c) Mn3+ = [Ar]3d4
= [Ar] Since Fe2+ has 4 unpaired electrons it is paramagnetic
in nature.
Number of unpaired electrons = 4 Zn = [Ar] 3d10 4s2 —— no unpaired e–
Cr3+ = [Ar]3d3
Hg2+ = [Ar] 4f 14 5d10 —— no unpaired e–
= [Ar] Ti4+ = [Ar] 3d0 4s0 —— no unpaired e–
No. of unpaired electrons = 3 25. (c) Due to d 5 configuration, Mn has exactly half filled
V3+ = [Ar]3d2 d-orbitals. As a result the electronic configuration is
stable means 3d electrons are more tightly held by the
= [Ar] nucleus and this reduces the delocalization of electrons
No. of unpaired electrons = 2 resulting in weaker metallic bonding.
15. (a) 26. (d) All statements are correct.
EBD_7207
378 THE d-AND f-BLOCK ELEMENTS
27. (d) The minimum oxidation state in transition metal is equal 37. (b) 30Zn and 80Hg have their d orbitals completely filled
to the number of electrons in 4s shell and the maximum so they do not show any variable valency.
oxidation state is equal to the sum of the 4s and 3d 38. (a) Highest O.S. by Mn (+7)
electrons. 39. (c) Zinc does not show variable oxidation state due to
Ti = [Ar] 3d24s2 completely filled d-orbitals.
Hence minimum oxidation state is +2 and maximum 40. (d) Sc does not show variable valency.
oxidation state is +4. Thus the common oxidation states 41. (b) 42. (d)
of Ti are +2, +3 and +4 43. (b) Transition metals are generally paramagnetic since they
28. (a) Os shows maximum oxidation state of +8. contain unpaired electrons.
44. (b) Since reduction potential of fluorine is highest
29. (b) Mn - 3d 5 4s2
transition metals exhibit highest oxidation state with
The no. of various oxidation states possible are + 2, fluorine.
+ 3, + 4, + 5, + 6 and + 7. 45. (a) Zn, Cd and Hg due to presence of completely filled
30. (c) Due to lanthanide contraction, the size of Zr and Hf d-orbitals in ground state as well as in their common
(atom and ions) become nearly similar. oxidation states are not regarded as a transition metals
31. (a) but they are studied along with the transition metals.
32. (d) Fe3+ is easily hydrolysed than Fe2+ due to more 46. (a) The +7 oxidation state of Mn is not represented in
positive charge. simple halides but MnO3F is known
33. (c) Electronic configuration 47. (d) Transition metals exhibit variable valency
3d 4s 48. (b) In transition metals d electrons also take part in
V2+ –3d 3 4s0 bonding, so they show variable oxidation states.
49. (d) For chromium ion + 3 oxidation state is most stable.
Cr – 3d 4 4s0 50. (c) The melting points of the transition element first rise
Mn – 3d 5 4s0 to a maximum and then fall as the atomic number
increases manganese have abnormally low melting
Fe – 3d 6 4s0 point.
For third ionization enthalpy Mn has stable 51. (a) They may or may not be diamagnetic
configuration due to half filled d-orbital. 52. (a) Mn++ –5 unpaired electrons
34. (d) (n – 1)d 5ns2 attains the maximum O.S. of + 7. Fe++ – 4 unpaired electrons
35. (a) The ionisation energies increase with increase in Ti++ – 2 unpaired electrons
atomic number. However, the trend is some irregular Cr++ – 4 unpaired electrons
among d-block elements. On the basis of electronic Hence maximum no. of unpaired electron is present in
configuration, the Mn++.
Zn : 1s 2 2s 2 p 6 3s 2 p6 d 10 4s 2 Magnetic moment µ number of unpaired electrons
53. (d) E 3 2 = – 0.41 V
E 3 2 = + 0.77 V
Cr / Cr Fe / Fe
Fe : 1s 2 2s 2 p 6 3s 2 p 6 d 6 4s 2
E E 3
Mn3 / Mn 2 = + 1.57 V,, Co / Co 2 = + 1.97 V
Cu : 1s 2 2s 2 p6 3s 2 p 6 d 10 4s1 2+
54. (d) Since Mn contains maximum number of unparied
2 2 6
Cr : 1s 2s p 3s p d 4s 2 6 5 1 electrons hence it has maximum magnetic moment
IE1 follows the order : Zn > Fe > Cu > Cr 55. (d) Magetic moment n n 2 where n = number of
36. (a) In a period on moving from left to right, ionic radii
decreases. unpaired electrons 15 nn 2 n=3
(a) So order of cationic radii is
Cr2+ > Mn2+ > Fe2+ > Ni2+ and 56. (c) Magnetic moment n n 2 BM
(b) Sc > Ti > Cr > Mn (correct order of atomic radii)
1.73 n n 2 n 1 , it has one unpaired electron
(c) For unpaired electrons
Mn 2 (Five) Ni 2 (Two) hence electronic configuration is Ar 3d 1 and
Co 2 (Three) Fe2 (Four) electronic configuration for Z = 22 is Ar 3d 2 4s2 .

(d) For unpaired electrons > Hence charge on Ti is +3
2
Fe (Four) Co (Three) >2 57. (b) The more the number of unpaired electrons, the more
is magnetic moment.Therefore the answer is (b).
Ni2 (Two) Cu 2 (One) 58. (a)
59. (d) Fe3+(d5) has 5 unpaired electrons therefore magnetic
79. (b) 2Fe3+ + 2I– 2Fe2+ + I2
moment n(n 2) 5(5 2) 5.91 which is
maximum among given options. As Sc3+, Ti3+, Cr 3+, 2Fe 2 S2 O82 2Fe3 2SO 24
V3+ contains 0, 1, 3, and 2 number of unpaired electrons 80. (a)
respectively. 81. (b)
60. (b) 61. (b)
82. (a) Cr2 O 72– 2OH – 2CrO 42 H 2O
62. (a) Sc3+ 3d 04s 0
Hence CrO 24 ion is obtained.
Fe2+ 3d 6 4s 0
83. (b) CrO3 2NaOH Na 2CrO 4 H2O
Ti3+ 3d 14s 0
2 + 3+
84. (a) Cr2O 7 + 6I + 14H 3I 2 + 7H 2 O + 2Cr
Mn2+ 3d 5 4s 0 oxidation state of Cr is +3.
In Sc3+ there is/are no unpaired electrons. So the 2–
aqueous solution of Sc3+ will be colourless. 85. (d) O O
63. (a) Transition elements form coloured ions due to d-d
transitions. In the presence of ligands, there is splitting Cr Cr
of energy levels of d-orbitals. They no longer remain O O O
O O
degenerated. So, electronic transition may occur Dichromate ion
between two d-orbitals. The required amount of energy There are six equivalent Cr — O bonds and one
to do this is obtained by absorption of light of a Cr — O — Cr bond.
particular wavelength in the region of visible light. 86. (c) Solid potassium dichromate when heated with
64. (c) The transition metals and their compounds are used concentrated sulphuric acid and a soluble chloride
as catalysts. Because of the variable oxidation states gives orange red vapours of a volatile oily liquid
they may form intermediate compound with one of the CrO2Cl2
readtants. These intermediate provides a new path with K2Cr2O7 + 4NaCl + 6H2SO4
lowe activation energy. V2O5 + SO2 V2O4 + SO3 2KHSO4 + 4NaHSO4 + 2CrO2Cl2
2V2O4+ O2 2V2O5 chromyl chloride
65. (d) Since Sc3+ does not contain any unpaired electron it 87. (c) Mn2O7 is acidic, V2O5 is amphoteric acid and CrO is
is colourless in water. basic.
88. (a) CrO2 is amphoteric in nature
66. (b) Cu 2 Ar 3d 9 , Ti 4 Ar 3d 0 , Co 2 Ar 3d 7 , Fe 2 Ar 3d 6
89. (a) 90. (c)
1, 3, 4 are coloured ions hence the answer is b. 91. (b) In neutral or faintly alkaline medium thiosulphate is
67. (a) In interstitial compounds small atoms like H, B and C quantitatively oxidized by KMnO4 to SO42–
enter into the void sites between the packed atoms of 8KMnO4 + 3Na2S2O3 + H2O
crystalline metal. They retain metallic conductivity and 3K2SO4 + 8MnO2 + 3Na2SO4 + 2KOH
are chemically inert. 92. (b) HCl and SO2 are reducing agents and can reduce
68. (d) A covalent bond is formed between small interstial MnO4–. CO2 which is neither oxidising and nor
non-metal and transition metal which make it hard reducing will provide only acidic medium. It can shift
69. (c) If non metal is added to the interstital site the metal reaction in forward direction and reaction can go to
becomes less malleable due to formation of covalent completion.
bond between metal and non metal 93. (c) In laboratory, manganese (II) ion salt is oxidised to
70. (c) Gun metal is an alloy of Cu, Zn and Sn. It contains 88% permagnate ion in aqueous solution by
Cu, 10% Sn and 2% Zn. peroxodisulphate.
71. (b) Brass is an alloy of Cu and Zn 2Mn 2 S2O82 8H 2O 2MnO4 10SO42 16H
72. (b) Cu, Ag and Au are called coinage metals. peroxodisulphate ion
73. (b) Bronze is an alloy of Cu and Sn.
74. (b) Bronze - 10% Sn, 90% Cu 94. (a) Pyrolusite (It is MnO 2 )
(Sn is a non transition element) 95. (a) 2KMnO4 H 2SO4 Conc
4 4 5 6 K 2SO 4 Mn O H 2O
2 7
75. (b) VO2 Ti O2 VO2 Cr O42 Explosive
76. (b)
96. (c) In acid medium MnO4 8H 5e Mn 2 4H 2O
77. (d) Ti4+ (3d0) and Zn2+ (3d10) are colourless.
78. (d) (O.S. of Mn changes form +7 to +2)
EBD_7207
97. (c) [Xe]4f7 6s2 – 7 unpaired e–
98. (b) Mn2+ (d5)is more stable than Mn 3+ (d4), thus Yb2+(Z = 70)
[Xe]4f14 6s2 – 0 unpaired e–
E ve
Mn 3 /Mn 2 Ce2+(Z = 58)
99. (a) As the oxidation state of metal associated with oxygen [Xe]4f 5d 6s – 2 unpaired e–
1 1 2
increases, the acidic character of oxide increases. Only Yb2+ is diamagnetic.

100. (d) 118. (b) Amongst the given elements, only Gd is a lanthanide .
101. (d) PdCl2 is used as a catalyst in Wacker’s process. 119. (d) Mischmetal is an alloy which contains rare earth
102. (c) Only Cu in its +2 oxidation state is able to oxidizes the elements (94-95%), iron (5%) and traces of sulphur,
I– to I2 carbon, silicon, calcium and aluminium. It is used in
103. (c) The number is 28(14 lanthanide +14 Actinides) gas lighters, tracer bullets and shells.
120. (b) Cerium is the most common lanthanide
104. (b) La 3+ : 54 e– = [Xe] 121. (a) La ( lanthanum ) is non lanthanide atom
Ti3+ : 19 e– = [Ar] 3 d 1 (Coloured) 122. (b) Eu 2 has electronic configuration Xe 4f 7 hence
Lu 3+ : 68 e– = [Xe] 4 f 14 stable due to half filled atomic orbitals.
123. (d) Actinides have variable valency due to very small
Sc3+ : 18 e– = [Ar] difference in energies of 5f, 6d and 7s orbitals. Actinides
105. (c) A regular decrease in the size of the atoms and ions in are the elements from atomic number 89 to 103.
lanthanoid series from La3+ to Lu3+ is called lanthanide 124. (c) Ac (89) = [Rn] [6d1] [7s2]
contraction. The similarity in size of the atoms of Zr 125. (b) The main reason for exhibiting larger number of
and Hf is due to the lanthanide contraction. oxidation states by actinoids as compared to
106. (d) We know that lanthanides La, Gd shows +3, oxidation lanthanoids is lesser energy difference between 5 f and
state, while Eu shows oxidation state of +2 and + 3. Am 6d orbitals as compared to that between 4f and 5d
shows +3, +4, +5 and +6 oxidation states. Therefore orbitals.
Americium (Am) has maximum number of oxidation In case of actinoids we can remove electrons from 5f
states. as well as from d and due to this actinoids exhibit larger
107. (c) Lanthanides are 4 f-series elements starting from cerium number of oxidation state than lanthanoids.
(Z= 58) to lutetium (Z = 71). These are placed in the 126. (c) Actinoids exhibit variable oxidation states, which vary
sixth period and in third group. from +3 to +7.
108. (b) In lanthanides, there is poorer shielding of 5d electrons 127. (c) 128. (b ) 129. (c)
by 4 f electrons resulting in greater attraction of the 130. (d) Mischmetall consists of a lanthanoid metal
nucleus over 5 d electrons and contraction of the atomic (~95%) and iron (~ 5%) and traces of S,C,Ca and Al.
radii. 131. (d)
109. (d) On going from left to right in lanthanoid series ionic, 132. (b) Curium (Cm) has configuration 5f 7 6d1 7s2.
size decreases i.e. 133. (d)
Ce+3 > Tb+3 > Er+3 > Lu+3. 134. (a) Tb4+ = 4f 7 — 3 unpaired e–
110. (d) 3+
Lu = 4f 14 — 0 unpaired e–
111. (c) Lanthanide contraction results into decrease in atomic 4+
Ce = 4f 0 — 0 unpaired e–
and ionic radii. 3+ 0
La = 4f — 0 unpaired e–
112. (a)
113. (a) 4f orbital is nearer to nucleus as compared to 5 f orbital STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS
therefore, shielding of 4 f is more than 5 f.
114. (d) 135. (b) (i) Outer electronic configuration of Mn is 3d54s2 and
115. (d) The configuration of Gd is [xe] 4f 7 5d1 6s2. hence exhibits +7 oxidation state.
116. (c) In lanthanide series there is a regular decrease in the (ii) Zinc does not form coloured ions as it has
atomic as well as ionic radii of trivalent ions (M3+) as completely filled 3d104s7 configuration.
the atomic number increases. Although the atomic radii (iii) In [CoF6]3–, Co3+ is a d7 system. Fluoride is a weak
do show some irregularities but ionic radii decreases field ligand and hence does not cause pairing of
from La(103 pm) to Lu (86pm). Y3+ belong to second electrons.
transition series there fore have greater ionic radii then Co3+ ; Paramagnetic
other ions of third transition series.
(iv)Sc can form a maximum of +3 oxidation state as it
117. (c) Sm2+(Z = 62)
has an outer electronic configuration of 3d14s2.
[Xe]4f6 6s2 – 6 unpaired e–
(v) Zn exhibits only +2 oxidation state as this O.S. is
Eu2+(Z = 63)
the most stable one.
136. (d) Thus options (a) and (c) are discarded; now let us
137. (b) In any row the melting points of transition metals rise observe the second point of difference.
to a maximum at d5 except for anomalous values of 4
:1s 2 2s 2 p6 3s 2 p 6 d1
23 V
Mn and Tc and falls regularly as the atomic number
Thus option (b) is discarded
increases.
3
138. (a) Aqueous solution formed by Ti3+ ions has purple 23 V :1s 2 2 s 2 p 6 3s 2 p 6 d 2
colour. 4
24 Cr :1s 2 2s 2 p6 3s 2 p 6 d 2
139. (a) Steel is an alloy of Fe and C (non-metal). Interstitial
5
compounds are chemically inert. 25 Mn :1s 2 2 s 2 p 6 3s 2 p 6 d 2
140. (b) Heavier members of d-block elements unlike p-block 154. (a) 155. (d)
elements shows higher oxidation states. For example
156. (c) Eo = 0.34 V
W(VI) is more stable than Cr(VI). Cu 2 / Cu
141. (b) As a result of lanthanide contraction Zr 4+ and Hf4+ other has – ve E oR.P.
possess almost the same ionic radii. Ce4+ is an
oxidising agent. Ce4+ gains electron to acquire more Eo
Co / Co = – 0.28 V
stable Ce3+state. La(OH)3 is the most basic among
lanthanide hydroxides. Eo = – 0.25V
Ni / Ni
142. (b) Ce4+ is a strong oxidant reverting to the common +3
state. Eo = – 0.44V
Fe / Fe
Ho does not show oxidation state of +4. Lanthanoids
157. (c) E nE
showing +4 oxidation state are Ce, Pr, Nd, Dy and Tb.
2
143. (a) Both Np and Pu shows oxidation state of +7. Mn 2e Mn 1.18 2.36 V
144. (a) Atomic mass of Hf is greater than that of Zr, Hf is a Mn 3 e Mn 2 1.51 1.51 V
series 3 metal, so for almost similar radius Hf has greater Mn 3 3e Mn 0.28 0.85 V
density, Lanthanoid contraction is responsible for
158. (a) Given magnetic moment of transition metal
almost similar radii.
= n n 2 5.92
MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS i.e., n = 5
145. (b) 146. (c) 147. (a) 148. (d) Number of unpaired electrons in Mn2+ = 5
Number of unpaired electrons in Ti3+ = 1
ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS Number of unpaired electrons in Cr3+ = 3
Number of unpaired electrons in Cu2+ = 1
149. (d) Number of unpaired electrons in Co2+ = 3
150. (c) The assertion is correct but the reason is false. Actually Thus Mn2+ have magnetic moment = 5.92 BM
transition metal show variable valency due to very 159. (a) Mn++ = 3d5 i.e. no. of unpaired e– = 5
small difference between the ns2 and (n – 1)d electrons. Cu++ = 3d9 i.e. no. of unpaired e– = 1
151. (b) Due to larger surface area and variable valencies to Fe++ = 3d6 i.e. no. of unpaired e– = 4
form intermediate absorbed complex easily, transition Zn++ = 3d10 i.e. no. of unpaired e– = 0
metals are used as catalysts. Ni++ = 3d8 i.e. no. of unpaired e– = 3
152. (b) The magnetic moments are lesser than the fact that 5f Higher the number of unpaired electrons higher will be
electrons of actinides are less effectively shielded the magnetic moment. Hence Mn ++ having maximum
which results in quenching of orbital contribution. unpaired electrons will have the maximum magnetic
moment.
CRITICAL THINKING TYPE QUESTIONS 160. (d) Sc3+ : 1s2, 2s2p6, 3s2p6d0, 4s0; no unpaired electron.
Cu+ : 1s2, 2s2p6, 3s2p6d 10, 4s0; no unpaired electron.
153. (d) The electronic configuration of different species given
Ni2+: 1s2, 2s2p6, 3s2p6d 8, 4s0;
in the question are unpaired electrons are present.
(a) 22 Ti3 :1s2 2s2 p6 3s2 p6 d1 Ti3+ : 1s2, 2s2p6, 3s2p6d 1, 4s 0;
unpaired electron is present
(b) 22 Ti :1s 2 2s 2 p6 3s 2 . p6 d 2 4s1
Co2+ : 1s2, 2s2p6, 3s2p6d 7, 4s0;
(c) 22 Ti4 :1s2 2s2 p6 3s 2 p6 unpaired electrons are present
2 So from the given options the only correct combination
(d) 22 Ti :1s 2 2 s 2 p 6 3s 2 p 6 d 2
is Ni2+ and Ti3+.
EBD_7207
161. (d) The ions with unpaired electrons are colourled and 165. (a) The green colour appears due to the formation of
those with paired electrons are colourless. Cr+++ion
Zn 2 = 1s 2, 2s2p6, 3s2 p6 d10 Cr2 O72– 3SO32– 8H 3SO 2–
4 2Cr 3 4H 2 O
(No. of e s 28)
166. (b) Na2Cr2O7 is hygroscopic.
Cr 3 = 1s 2, 2s2p6, 3s2 p6 d3 167. (c) Mn2O7 acidic
(No. of e s 21) CrO basic
V2O4 amphoteric
Ni 2 = 1s2, 2s2p6, 3s2 p6 d8 Cr2O3 amphoteric
(No. of e s 26)
168. (d) Oxide Mn2O7 : Oxidation state of metal + 7
Thus Zn 2 , Cr 3 and Ni 2 have zero, 3 and 2 Oxide V2O3 : Oxidation state of metal + 3
unpaired electrons respectively. Oxide V2O5 : Oxidation state of metal + 5
10 Oxide CrO : Oxidation state of metal + 2
162. (d) In Cu Ar 3d there is no unpaired electron,
Oxide Cr 2O3 : Oxidation state of metal + 5
Cu 2 Ar 3d 9 contains one unpaired electron hence 169. (b) KMnO4 reacts with H2SO4 to form Mn2O7 which is
coloured. highly explosive substance.
163. (d) V2+ – violet, V3+ – green V4+ – blue 2KMnO4 + H2SO4 K2SO4 + Mn2O7 + H2O
Fe2+ – green Fe3+ – yellow 170. (b) 2MnO2 + 4KOH + O2 2K 2 MnO4 2H 2O
164. (a) dark green
(a) V = 3d 3 4s 2 ; V2+ = 3d 3 = 3 unpaired electrons 171. (d)

Cr = 3d 5 4s 1 ; Cr 2+ = 3d 4 = 4 unpaired electrons
172. (b) 5Fe2+ + MnO4 +8H+ Mn2+ +4H2O + 5Fe3+
Mn = 3d 5 4s2 ; Mn2+ = 3d 5 = 5 unpaired electrons
Fe = 3d 6 4s 2 ; Fe2+ = 3d 6 = 4 unpaired electrons 5NO 2 2MnO 4 6H 2Mn 2 5NO 3 3H 2O
Hence the correct order of paramagnetic behaviour
173. (d) As the oxidation state increases the acidity increases.
V2+ < Cr 2+ = Fe2+ < Mn2+
174. (d) If KMnO4 was added slowly than option a was correct,
(b) For the same oxidation state, the ionic radii generally
but at a moment due to addition of large amount of
decreases as the atomic number increases in a
KMnO4, reduction of whole KMnO4 added does not
particular transition series. hence the order is
take place, it also react with Mn 2+ which had formed
Mn++ > Fe++ > Co++ > Ni++
in the solution to give MnO2.
(c) In solution, the stability of the compound depends
2MnO4 + 3Mn2+ + 2H2O 5MnO2 + 4H+
upon electrode potentials, SEP of the transitions metal
ions are given as 175. (b) Most of the Ln 3+ compounds except La3+ and Lu3+
Co3+ / Co = + 1.97, Fe3+ / Fe = + 0.77 ; are coloured due to the presence of f-electrons.
Cr3+ / Cr2+ = – 0.41, Sc 3+ is highly stable as it does not 176. (c) 177. (a)
show + 2 O. S. 178. (b) Down the group metallic character increases hence
tendency to loose electron increases.
(d) Sc – (+ 2), (+ 3)
Ti – (+ 2), (+ 3), (+ 4) 179. (c) I– is converted to IO3 by neutral or faintly alkaline
Cr – (+ 1), (+ 2), (+ 3), (+ 4), (+ 5), (+ 6) MnO 4 as shown below..
Mn – (+ 2), (+ 3), (+ 4), (+ 5), (+ 6), (+ 7) 2MnO 4 H2O I 2MnO 2 2OH IO 3
i.e. Sc < Ti < Cr = Mn
COORDINATION COMPOUNDS 395
FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS 14. (d) [EDTA]4– is a hexadentate ligand, because it has six
donor atoms and donate 6 pairs of electrons to central
1. (a) The primary valencies are ionisable and represented metal atom in the complex.
by dotted line. 15. (d) In Fe(CO)5, Fe is in minimum oxidation state (zero).
2. (c) 16. (d) In the given complex we have two bidentate ligands
3. (a) CrCl3 has primary valence of 3. (i.e en and C2O4), so coordination number of E is 6
4. (d) Co (NH3)5 Cl3 [Co(NH3)5Cl]+2 + 2Cl- (2 × 2 + 1 × 2 = 6)
Structure is [Co (NH3)5 Cl] Cl2. Let the oxidation state of E in complex be x, then
Now [Co(NH3 )5 Cl]Cl2 2AgNO3 [x + (–2) = 1] or x – 2 = 1
or x = + 3, so its oxidation state is + 3
[Co(NH3 )5 Cl](NO3 )2 2AgCl Thus option (d) is correct.
5. (a) Since the precipitate of AgCl shows two ionisable 17. (a) Salt may be complex salt. Metal atom present in the
chloride ion the complex must have the structure. coordination sphere appears in the form of complex
ion and not as simple cation
[Co( NH 3 ) 5 Cl]Cl 2 2AgNO 3
18. (b) Coordinate number is = 2 (number of bindentate ligands
[Co( NH 3 )5 Cl]( NO 3 ) 2 2AgCl C.N. of Ni = (2 × 3) = 6
Hence two chlorine atoms satisfy the primary valency 19. (b) In the complex formation the ligands whether negative,
and one, secondary valency neutral or positive always donate electrons to the
6. (c) The ions present in the ionisation sphere are precipited central metal atom hence they act as Lewis bases.
20. (c) K[Co(CN)4] let the O. N. of Co be x then
Hence [CrCl 2 (H 2O) 4 ]Cl.2H 2 O contains 1/3 Cl in
1 × (+1) + 1(+x) + 4(–1) = 0 x = + 3
ionisation sphere to be precipited by AgNO3 as AgCl 21. (c) Number of donor atoms (N) in N(CH2CH2NH2)3 are
7. (b) Complex compounds do not dissociate into constituent four.
ions. So, N(CH2CH2NH2)3 is a tetradentate ligand.
K4[Fe(CN)6] 4K+ + [Fe(CN6)]4– 22. (d) Ambidentate ligands are those unidentate ligands
It is a complex because no CN– is formed on which contain more than one coordinating atoms.
dissociation. Thiocyanate is an example of such a ligand.
8. (b) It is a double salt: M SCN M NCS
Thiocyanato Isothiocyanato
FeSO 4 . NH 4 2 SO 4 .6H 2 O
23. (c) 24. (d)
Fe2 2SO24 2NH 4 25. (c) Ambident ligand has two donor atoms, either of two
9. (a) can form a coordinate bond.
10. (a) Let the o.s. of Ni in K4[Ni(CN)4] be = x then 26. (c)
4 (+ 1) + x + (–1) × 4 = 0 4+x–4=0 27. (c) Na+ is not a ligand.
28. (d) These are facts about glycinato ligand.
x=0
29. (c) BF3 has incomplete octet and is Lewis acid; it cannot
11. (c) The coordination number of central metal atom in a
donate electron pair.
complex is equal to number of monovalent ligands,
twice the number of bidentate ligands and so on, COO
30. (a) It has two donor atoms, i.e., |
around the metal ion bonded by coordinate bonds. COO
Hence coordination number = no. of bonds formed 31. (b) 32. (b)
by metals with ligands 33. (b) O2 is a bidentate ligand.
12. (d) Oxidation state of Cr in [Cr ( NH 3 ) 4 Cl 2 ] . 34. (c) 35. (a) 36. (b) 37. (c) 38. (b)
39. (a)
Let it be x, 1 × x + 4 × 0 + 2 × (–1) = 1 Therefore x =3.
40. (c) EDTA4– can bind through two nitrogen and four
13. (c) The oxidation state of metal in metal carbonyls is always
oxygen atoms to a central metal ion.
zero.
EBD_7207
396 COORDINATION COMPOUNDS
– 57. (d) The optical isomers are pair of molecules which are
CH2COO non superimposable mirror images of each other.
H2C N –
CH2COO en en
–
CH2COO
H2C N –
CH2COO
en Co Co en
41. (b) IUPAC name is Potassium trioxalatoaluminate (III).
42. (a) Chlorodiaquatriamminecobalt (III) chloride is
[CoCl( NH 3 )3 (H 2O) 2 ]Cl 2 . en en
43. (c) K 3[Fe(CN ) 6 ] is Potassium hexacyanoferrate (III). [Co(en)3]3+ [Co(en)3]3+

Mirror
(dextro) (laevo)
44. (b) [Co(ONO)(NH3)5]Cl2
pentaamminenitrito-N-cobalt (III) chloride The two optically active isomers are collectivity called
45. (b) K2[Pt Cl6] enantiomers.
Potassium hexachloroplatinate (IV) 58. (b) The chemical formula of Pentaminenitrochromium (III)
Oxidation state of Pt is + 4 in the complex and anion is chloride is
present in form of complex. Cr NH3 5 NO2 Cl2
46. (c) The correct IUPAC name of the given compound is
tetramminenickel (II) - tetrachloronickelate (II) thus (c) It can exist in following two structures
is the correct answer. Cr NH 3 5 NO 2 Cl2 and
47. (d) [Co(H2O)4(NH3)2]Cl3
= Diamminetetraaquacobalt (III) chloride. Cr NH3 5ONO Cl 2
48. (d)
Therefore the type of isomerism found in this
49. (d) [Co(H2O)4(NH3)2]Cl3
compound is linkage isomerism as nitro group is linked
= Diamminetetraaquacobalt (III) chloride.
through N as –NO2 or through O as – ONO.
50. (d) Chemical formula of iron (III) hexacynaoferrate (II) is
59. (b)
Fe4[Fe(CN)6]3
51. (b) IUPAC name of K3[Ir(C2O4)3] is 60. (c) cis-[Co(en)2Cl2]+: cis-[M(aa)2b2] can show optical
potassium trioxalato iridate (III) isomerism.
61. (a)
52. (b) Na 3[Co(ONO) 6 ] IUPAC name is
sodium hexanitritocobaltate (III) 62. (c) NH3 NH3
53. (d) According to IUPAC nomenclature anionic ligands H3N ONO H3N NO2
will end with – ido so that chloro would become Co Co
H3N NH3 H3N NH3
chlorid.
NH3 NH3
54. (a) Pt(NH3)2Cl2 is a disubstituted complex and shows only
cis-& trans-isomers Here more than one atom function as donor, as oxygen
Cl NH3 NH3 Cl in first one and nitrogen in second, so they show
linkage isomerism.
Pt Pt 63. (b) Co-ordination isomerism is caused by the interchange
Cl of ligands between cation and anion complexes.
Cl NH3 NH3
cis trans 64. (c) Change in composition of co-ordination sphere yield
55. (c) [Cr(SCN ) 2 ( NH 3 ) 4 ] shows linkage, geometrical and ionisation isomers.
[Cr(H2O)6]Cl3 and [CrCl3(H2O)3].3H2O
optical isomerism. Hence produces maximum no. of
65. (a) The octahedral coordination compounds of the type
isomers.
MA3B3 exhibit fac-mer isomerism.
56. (a) MA3B3 – 2 geometrical isomers
66. (c) Coordination isomerism occurs when cationic and
MA2B4 – 2 geometrical isomers
anionic complexes of different metal ions are present
MA4B2 – 2 geometrical isomers
in a salt. The two isomers differ in the distribution of
The complexes of general formula MA6 and MA5B ligands in cation and anion e.g.,
having octahedral geometry do not show geometrical [Co (NH3)6] [Cr (CN)6] is an isomer of [Co (CN)6]
isomerism.
[Cr (NH3)6]
67. (a) Complexes of the type MABCD may exist in three

3+
isomeric forms. NH 3
A B A C
en Co en
M M
D C D B NH 3
(I) (II)
trans-
A C A C 72. (b) Ionisation isomer of [Cr(H2 O) 4 Cl(NO 2 )]Cl is
[Cr(H2O)4Cl2]NO2.
73. (c) Ma 2 b2 c 2 can show both optical & geometrical
M M isomerism.
74. (a) The compound shows linkage isomerism because the
ligand in the compound is an ambidenate ligand that
D B B D can bond at more than one atomic site.
(III)
i.e., NCS and SCN
Similarly, [Pt (py) (NH3) BrCl] may exist in three isomeric 75. (d) [Pt(en)2Cl2] is a complex of the type M(AA)2 B2 which
form in which is octahedral Such compounds exhibit optical and
M = Pt, A = Py, B = NH3, C = Br, D = Cl. geometrical isomerism both
68. (a) Complexes with dsp2 hybridisation are square planar. 76. (a) [Co(NH3)3(NO2)3] is of the type MA3B3. They give
So, [PtCl4]2– is square planar in shape. two geometrical Isomers
69. (a) The SCN– ion can coordinate through S or N atom 77. (d) [Cr(NH3)3Cl3] is of the type MA3B3 and exists in two
giving rise to linkage isomerism isomeric forms.
M SCN thiocyanato 78. (d) Square planar complex of the formula Mabcd give three
geometrical isomers
M NCS isothiocyanato.
79. (b)
70. (b) Option (b) shows optical isomerism [Co(en)3]3+
80. (d) The complex ion [Cr(SCN)2(NH3)4]2+ can exhibit
3+ 3+ geometrical and linkage isomerism
en en
81. (c) [PtCl2(NH3)4]Br2 and [PtBr2(NH3)4]Cl2 are ionisation
isomers
en Co Co en 82. (c) Octahedral complex of the type MA5B do not show
en
geometrical isomerism
en
83. (c) Similarity between optical and geometrical isomerism
d–form Mirror –form is that both are included in stereo isomerism
Complexes of Zn++ cannot show optical isomerism as 84. (b) The compound is [Cr(NH3)5NO2]Cl2 and can exhibit
they are tetrahedral complexes with plane of symmetry. O
3 linkage isomerism due to NO2 group (– N or
Co(H2 O)4 (en) have two planes of symmetry
O
hence it is also optically inactive.
O – N= O)
[Zn(en)2]2+ cannot show optical isomerism
85. (b)
en 3+ 86. (b) Given compound shows meridional isomerism.
71. (b)
NH3 87. (a)
88. (c) Ni(CO)4 Ni(PPh3)2 Cl2
Co O.S. Ni0 Ni2+
E.C. [Ar]3d84s2 [Ar]3d84s0
NH3
en Pairing of e– No pairing of e–
cis Hybridization sp3 (tetrahedral) sp3 (tetrahedral)
EBD_7207
89. (d) In [Cr (NH3)6]Br3, Cr is in +3 oxidation state 98. (a) Paramagnetic species has unpaired electron. More the
3d 4s 4p no. of unpaired electrons, more will be paramagnetic
Cr character.
24 Complex O. S. of metal
d2sp3 hybridized
2
3d 4p Mn H 2 O Mn 2+
4s 6
+3
Cr
21 2
Cu NH3 4
Cu2+
Its ion is octahedral in nature. Due to the presence of
three unpaired electrons it is paramagnetic. 4
90. (c) [Cr(NH3)6]Cl3 is an inner orbital complex, because in Fe CN 6
Fe2+
this complex inner d-orbital is used for hybridisation
2
(d2 sp3 ) Cu H 2 O Cu2+
4
91. (b)
Electronic configuration of the ion present in complex
No. of
Atom/Ion Configuration
unpaired
Magnetic 3d 4s 4p
Complex nature 2+
electrons Mn
3d 4s 4p
2+ 8
Ni (d ) 2 No. of unpaired electrons = 5
2–
[NiCl4]
2 Cu2+
sp3
[Ni(CN)4]
2–
0 No. of unpaired electron = 1
Rearrangement 2 Fe2+
dsp
8 2 2
Ni (d s )
[Ni(CO)4]
However, CN– is a strong ligand, so pairing of electrons
0
will occur in the complex having CN– ions.
Rearrangement
sp
3 Fe2+ in presence of CN–
92. (b)
93. (b) As in [NiCl4]–2 chloride ion being a weak ligand is not No. of unpaired electron = 0
able to pair the electrons in d orbital. Thus [Mn (H2O)6]2+ having maximum no. of unpaired
94. (d) Cr 3+ has 4so 3d3 electronic configuration with 3 electrons has maximum paramagnetic nature.
unpaired electrons, hence paramagnetic. In other cases 99. (c) In Na2[CdCl4], Cd has oxidation state +2.
pairing of d-electrons take place in presence of strong So, its electronic configuration is 4d105s0
field ligands such as CO or CN–. or all the 4d orbitals are fully filled.
In Cr(CO)6 molecule 12 electrons are contributed by Hence, there will be no d-d transition. So, it is
CO group and it contain no odd electron colourless.
95. (b) CN– is a strong field ligand as it is a pseudohalide ion. 100. (c)
These ions are strong coordinating ligands and hence 2
have the tendency to form -bond (from the pseudo 101. (a) Ni(CN)4 : Number of unpaired electrons = 0
halide to the metal) and -bond (from the metal to 3
pseudo halide) Cr(NH3 ) 6 : Number of unpaired electrons = 3
: 2
96. (a) Co3+ Fe(H 2 O) 6 : Number of unpaired electrons = 4
[Co(CN)6]3– : 2
Ni(H 2O)6 : Number of unpaired electrons = 2
CN–
is a strong field ligand and it causes pairing of
102. (b) Ni++ = 3d 8 4s0
electrons as a result number of unpaired electrons in
Co3+ becomes zero and hence it has lowest value of
paramagnetic behaviour.
97. (a) Sc = [Ar] 3d 1, 4s2 Since, the coordination number of Ni in this complex is
Oxidation state of Sc in [Sc(H2O)6]3+ is Sc3+ 4, the configuration of Ni++ at first sight shows that
Sc3+ = [Ar] 3d 0, 4s0. the complex is paramagnetic with two unpaired
It does not have unpaired electron electron. However, experiments show that the complex
Sc3+ is diamagnetic and colourless.
is diamagnetic. This is possible when the 3d electrons 109. (c) Electronic configuration of Ni2+ is [Ar] 3d8 4s0 4p0.
rearrange against the Hund’s rule as shown below. CN– is strong ligand and will do pairing of electrons
This is in accordance with the fact that the ligand so will have one d orbital left empty. C.N. is 4 so dsp 2
involved here is strong i.e., CN– ion. hybridisation will take place which is square planar,
Ni++ (after rearrangement) Ni(CO)4 and [Ni(CN)4]2– are tetrahedral.
4s 4p 110. (d)
111. (b) [Co(C2O4 )3]3– is dimagnetic as oxalate is a strong
ligand causing pairing of 3d electrons in Co3+thereby
leading to d2sp3 hybridisation.
Hence, now dsp2 hybridization involving one 3d, one
4s and two 4p orbitals, takes place leading to four dsp2 3d 4s 4p
hybrid orbitals, each of which accepts four electron Orbitals of
3+
pairsfrom CN– ion forming [Ni (CN)4]2– ion. Co ion
[Ni (CN)4]2– 2 3 3d 4s 4p
d sp hybridised
3+
×× ×× ×× ×× ×× oribitals of Co
2 3
2 d sp hybrid
four dsp hybrid bonds
Thus, the complex is diamagnetic as it has no unpaired 112. (b) [Ni(CO4)] tetrahedral
electron.
[PtCl4]2– square planar
103. (a) [Ni(NH3)6]2+
113. (c) [Mn(CN)6 ]3– and [Fe(CN) 6 ] 3– are inner orbital
Ni2+ = 3d 8, according to CFT = t 62g eg2 therefore, complexes and paramagnetic while [Co(C2O4)3]3– is
hybridisation is sp3d 2 and complex is paramagnetic. diamagnetic in nature.
104. (d) 105. (a) 114. (d)
106. (d) In [Co(CN)6]3– O.N. of Co is +3 115. (a) Cl– is a weak field ligand.
Co+3 = 3d6 4s0 116. (c) Higher the oxidation state of the metal, greater the
CN– is a strong field ligand crystal field splitting energy. In options (a), (b) and
Pairing of electrons occurs so in this complex no (d), Co is present in + 2 oxidation state and in (c) it is
unpaired electron is present and it is low spin present in + 3 oxidation state and hence has a higher
complex. value of CFSE.
107. (a) 117. (a) In octahedral complex the magnitude of o will be
Complex Configuration No. of unpaired highest in a complex having strongest ligand. Out of
electrons the given ligands CN– is strongest. So, o will be
[CoF6] 3– 4 highest for [Co(CN)6]3–. Thus option (a) is correct.
[Co(NH3)6]3+ 0 118. (a) Ligands can be arranged in a series in the orders of
increasing field strength as given below :
[Ni(NH3)4]2+ 0
Weak field ligands :
3d 4s 4p
[Ni(CN)4]2– : : : : : 0
I Br S2 SCN Cl N3 , F
2
Rearrangement dsp < Urea, OH– < oxalate
Magnetic moment = n n 2 , Strong field ligands
where n = no. of unpaired electrons O H 2O NCS EDTA Py, NH3 <

[CoF6]3– has highest magnetic moment (4.8) due to
en = SO3– < bipy, Phen NO2 CH3
the presence of 4 unpaired electrons.
108. (c) [Co(C2O4)3]3– has Co3+ (d6 system) C6 H 5CN CO
due to presence of stronger C2O42– chelating ligand
pairing of electrons occurs in this case. Such a series is termed as spectrochemical series. It is
an experimentally determined series based on the
Co3+ :
absorption of light by complexes with different ligands.
; Diamagnetic. 119. (b) Due to d5 configuration CFSE is zero.
EBD_7207
120. (b) The crystal field splitting in tetrahedral complexes is 137. (d)
lower than that in octahedral complexes, and 138. (a) Structure of [Co2(CO)8]
4
t 0. O
9
121. (a) 122. (c)
CO C CO
123. (d) CN– is a strong field ligand and form low spin
complexes thus o > P. CO Co Co CO
124. (b) According to spectrochemical series C2 O24 F . CO C CO
125. (c) CO is a strong field ligand and for strong field ligands
O
o > P.
126. (b) In the absence of ligand , crystal field splitting does Total M – C bonds = 10, Total M – M bonds = 1
not occur and hence the substance is colourless.
127. (a) 1 [X][Y]3
128. (d) Magnetic moment can be calculated by using the 139. (a) Overall stability constant = K K K =
1 2 3 [XY3 ]
relation n(n 2)B.M. Where n = number of
140. (b) = K1K2K3K4
electrons and B.M. is Bohr magneton.
log = log (K1 K2 K3 K4)
5.9 = n(n 2)
n=5 log = logK1 + logK2 + logK3 + logK4
129. (c) Energy for excitation ( ) = hc /wavelength. logK3 = 11.9– (3.20 + 2.0 + 4.0)
Therefore lower the wavelength of light higher will be logK3 = 2.7
the energy for excitation, ( ) i.e crystal field splitting
energy. STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS
correct order will be b < a < c < d
141. (a)
130. (a) Triethoxyaluminium has no Al – C linkage
142. (a) Macromolecules like proteins can acts as ligand.
O CH 2 CH 3 [EDTA]4– can bind through two nitrogen and four
Al O CH 2 CH 3 oxygen atoms.
O CH 2 CH 3 143. (d)
144. (b) Complexes of Ma3B3 type shows fac– meridional
131. (d) Due to some backbonding by sidewise overlapping isomerism.
between d-orbitals of metal and p-orbital of carbon, Solvate isomerism is refered to as a hydrate isomerism
the Fe–C bond in Fe(CO)5 has both and character. when solvent is water.
132. (c) In case of [Ni(CO)]4, the ligand CO, is neutral thus the
charge on Ni is zero. 145. (b) [Ti(H 2O)6 ]3 gives violet colour if light
133. (a) Ni(CO) 4 . The O. S. of Ni is Zero. Electronic corresponding to the energy of blue-green region of
configuration is [Ar] 3d8 4s2 4p0 . In presence of wavelength 498 nm is absorbed by it.
strong ligand CO the paring of electrons take place Irrespective of prediction of crystal field theory on
and electronic configuration will be [Ar] 3d10 4s0 4p0.
the basis of experimental observation shows that
Hence unpaired electrons is zero .
anionic ligands are found at the low end of the
134. (d) Fe(CO)5 (Z=26) O. S. of Fe is zero . Electronic
spectrochemical series.
configuaration is [Ar]] 3d6, 4s24p0. After pairing of
electrons of d and s orbitals, we have one d atomic 146. (d)
orbital empty. C. N. is 5 so hybridisation is dsp3 which
is trigonal bipyramidal.
147. (c)
135. (b) For the reaction of the type M 4L ML4 , larger
148 (d) A – (p), B – (r), C – (s), D – (q)
the stability constant, the higher the proportion of 149. (a) [NiCl4]2– is sp3 hybridised and paramagnetic in nature
ML4 that exists in solution. [Ni(CN)4 ]2– is square planar and diamagnetic.
136. (c) The chlorophyll molecule plays an important role in Chlorophyll contains Mg2+ Ziegler – Natta catalyst
photosynthesis, contain porphyrin ring and the metal contains Ti4+ Deoxyhaemoglobin is nonplanar and
Mg not Ca.
oxyhaemoglobin planar.
150. (d) Crystal field splitting energy increases with increase 161. (c) [CuCl2{(O = C(NH2)2}2]
in ligand field strength i.e., with increase in no. of ‘en’ 162. (a) IUPAC name of sodium nitroprusside Na2[Fe(CN)5NO]
groups and wavelength of absorbed light decrease is sodium pentacyanonitrosylferrate (III) because in it
with increase in ligand field strength NO is neutral ligand. Hence
[Ni(H2O)4(en)]2+(aq) will absorb light of higher 2×O.N. of Na + O.N. of Fe + 5×O.N. of CN
wavelength i.e., Red. 1×O.N. of NO = 0
[Ni(en)3]2+ will absorb light of lower wavelength i.e., 2×(+1) + O.N. of Fe + 5 ×(–1) +1×0 = 0
blue-green and [Ni(H2O)4(en)2]2+ will absorb yellow O.N. of Fe = 5 – 2 = +3, Hence ferrate (III)
orange light. 163. (d) The total number of isomers for the complex compound
151. (a) 152. (a)
[Cu II ( NH 3 ) 4 ][Pt II Cl 4 ] is four..
ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS These four isomers are
153. (c) It is correct statement that NF3 is a weaker ligand than [Cu ( NH 3 )3 Cl] [Pt ( NH 3 )Cl 3 ],
N(CH3 ) 3 , the reason is that fluorine is highly
[Cu ( NH 3 )Cl 3 ] [Pt ( NH 3 ) 3 Cl] ,
electronegative therefore, it with draw electrons from
nitrogen atom. Hence, the lone pair of nitrogen atom [CuCl 4 ][Pt ( NH 3 ) 4 ]
cannot be ligated. While N(CH3)3 is a strong ligand
because CH3 is electron releasing group. and Cu(NH3 )4 PtCl4 .
154. (b) Both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not The isomer [Cu (NH3)2 Cl2][Pt (NH3)2 Cl2] does not
the correct explanation of statement-1. [Fe(CN)6]3– is exist due to both parts being neutral.
weakly paramagnetic as it has unpaired electrons while 164. (b) Non superimposable mirror images are called optical
[Fe(CN)6]2– has no unpaired electron. isomers and may be described as “chiral’. They are
It is diamagnetic. also called enantiomers and rotate plane polarised light
155. (a) Both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is the in opposite directions.
correct explanation of statement-1. [Sc(H2O6]3+ has
Cl Cl
no unpaired electron in its d subshell and thus d–d
Cl Cl
transition is not possible whereas [Ti(H2O)6]3+ has
one unpaired electron in its d subshell which gives
en Co Co en
rise to d–d transition to impart colour.

en en
156. (c) As it forms two moles of silver chloride thus it has two
moles of ionisable Cl. 165. (b)
[Co(NH 3 )5 NO 2 ]Cl 2 [Co(NH 3 )5 NO 2 ] 2Cl

2Cl 2AgNO3 2AgCl 2NO 3
157. (b) Pt Cl2.2NH3= [Pt(NH3)2Cl2]
CoCl3.4NH3= [Co(NH3)4Cl2] Cl
NiCl2.6H2O = [Ni(H2O)6]Cl2.
158. (b) CN– is coordinated to cobalt as the ligand and trans (green)
coordinated compounds have different properties
than the individual species. Cl +
HN
3 Cl
159. (b) Since complex compound gives 2 moles of AgCl on
treatment with AgNO3.
most probable structure is (b). Co
160. (a) Total number of electron count in Ni(CO)4
= Atomic number – oxidation state + 2 × no. of ligands HN
3 NH3
NH3
= 28 – 0 + 2 × 4 = 36
Similarly for Fe(CO)5, cis (violet)
= 26 – 0 + 10 = 36
EBD_7207
NH3 NH3 F Cl
166. (c) NH3
NH3
en en M
Co Co
Br I
en en 174. (b) Non –superimposable mirror images are optically
active, hence rotate plane polarized light.
3
Enantiomers of cis- Co(en) 2 (NH 3 ) 2
a a
167. (b) It is optically active.
168. (a) The given compound may have linkage isomerism due
M M
to presence of NO2 group which may be in the form d
b d b
–NO2 or –ONO. c c
It may have ionisation isomerism due to presence of whatever angle
175. (c) Complex is not superimposable onofitsmolecule
mirror image
two ionisable group –NO2 & –Cl. It may have
hence optically active i.e., rotate plane polarized light.
geometrical isomerism in the form of cis-trans form as
follows : 180°
[Co(NH3)4Cl(NO2)]NO2 & [Co(NH3) (NO2)2]Cl 3+ 3+
––– Ionisation isomers. en en
[Co(NH3)5(NO2)2]Cl & [Co(NH3)5(ONO)2]Cl
––– Linkage isomers en Co Co en
NO2 NO2
en en
H3N H3N
180°
NH3 NO2 cannot be
Co Co superimposed en 3+
NH3 NH3 NH3 NH3 non-superimposable en Co

en
NO2 NH3
Trans-form Cis-form
Geometrical isomers 176. (d) Nickel in Ni(CO)4 is sp3 hybridised therefore geometry
169. (c) The complex compound [Co(en)2NO2Cl] Br can have of Ni(CO)4 is tetrahedral whereas in [Ni(CN)4]2– nickel
NO2 group differently linked to central metal atom – is dsp2 hybridised therefore geometry of [Ni(CN)4]2–
O is square planar.
N or O – N = O 177. (d) Hybridisation
O
170. (a) Geometrical isomerism is possible only in square planar [Fe(CN)6 ]4 ,[Mn(CN)6 ]4 ,
complexes of the type MA2B2 and MA2BC and for d 2 sp3 d 2 sp 3
octahedral complexes of the type MA4B2 and MA4BC.

[Co(NH 3 ] 3 ,[Ni(NH 3 ) 6 ] 2
Hence only (ii) will show geometrical isomerism.
d 2 sp 3 sp 3d 2
171. (a)
172. (b) Geometrical isomers of following type of square Hence [ Ni( NH 3 ) 6 ]2 is outer orbital complex.
planar complexes is possible. Ma2b2 type, Ma2bc
type and Mabcd type. 178. (c) Cr2+ d4 4
173. (b) Three isomer are possible.
Mn2+ d5 5
F Cl F I
Fe2+ d6 4
M M
Co2+ d7 3
I Br Br Cl
Minimum paramagnetic behaviour = [Co (H2O)6]2+
179. (b) In carbonyls O.S. of metal is zero

In [Ni(CO)4], the oxidation state of nickel is zero. Its = 3(5) = 15 = 3.87 B.M.
configuration in Ni(CO)4 is d 4– in weak ligand field
3d 4s 4p
[Ni(CO)4] ; t2g eg
sp3 hybridisation = 4(4+2) = 24 = 4.89

d 4– in strong ligand field
In [Ni(CN)4]2– the oxidation state of Ni is 2+ and its
configuration is
3d 4s 4p t2g eg
2
[Ni(CN)4]
= 2(4) = 8 = 2.82.
182. (b) Lesser is the number of unpaired electrons smaller will
dsp2 hybridisation
be the paramagnetic behaviour. As Cr ++, Mn++, Fe++
Thus the hybridisations of nickel in these compounds and Ni++ contains.
are sp3 and dsp2 respectively.
Cr++ (3d 4) =
Hence (b) is the correct answer.
180. (c) [Co(NH3 )6 ]3+ , Co3+ (27 –3 = 24) = 4 unpaired e–.
Mn++ (3d 5) =
2
d sp3 (inner octahedral = 5 unpaired e–.
complex & diamagnetic)
Fe++ (3d 6) =
[Cr(NH3 )6]3+ , Cr 3+ (24 –3 = 21)
= 4 unpaired e–.
2 Ni++ (3d 8) =
d sp3 (inner octahedral
complex & paramagnetic) = 2 unpaired e–.
[Ni(NH3 )6]2+ , Ni2+ (28 – 2 = 26) As Ni++ has minimum no. of unpaired e– thus this is
least paramagnetic.
183. (d) In case of diamagnetic complexes the electrons are
2 paired. In case of Ni (CO)4 3d orbital is fully filled give
sp3d (outer octahedral
complex & paramagnetic) rise to sp3 hybridisation while in case of [Ni(CN)4]2–
nickel is in +2 oxidation state, so one d-orbital is vacant
[Zn(NH3)6]2+ , Zn 2+ (30 – 2 = 28) give rise to dsp2 hybridization which is square planar
in nature.
184. (d) Number of unpaired electrons in [MnCl6]3– and
sp3d 2 (outer octahedral [Mn(CN)6]3– respectively are 4 and 2
complex &diamagnetic) Magnetic moment will respectively be 4.8 and 2.8
181. (d) d 5 –––– strong ligand field [MnCl6]3– is sp3d2 hybridised and [Mn(CN)6]3– will
be d2sp3 hybridised.
185. (c) In octahedral field the crystal field splitting of d- orbitals
t2g eg of a metal ion depends upon the field produced by the
ligands. In general ligands can be arranged in a series
= n(n 2) = 3 = 1.73BM in the order of increasing fields and splittings which
d 3–– in weak as well as in strong field they produce around a central metal ion. A portion of
the series is given below.
cyanide > ethylene - diamine > ammonia > pyridine >
t2g eg thiocyanate > water > oxalate > hydroxide > fluoride >
chloride > bromide > iodide.
EBD_7207
Out of the given ligands water, ammonia, cyanide and Where, x electrons in t2g orbital
oxalate, we can find from the above series of ligands that y electrons in eg orbital
the maximum splitting will occur in case of cyanide (CN–)
i.e. the magnitude of 0 will be maximum in case of CFSE = [0.6 × 1] + [–0.4 × 3] = – 0.6 0
[Co(CN)6]3+. 188. (b) d 6 – t2g 2, 2, 2 e 0,0 (in low spin)
g
186. (b) Since Cr3+ in the complex has unpaired electrons in
the d orbital, hence it will absorb visible light and will
C.F.S.E = – 0.4 × 6 0 + 3P
be coloured
Ti = [Ar]3d 2 4 s2 ; Ti4 + = 3d 0 12
Cr = [Ar] 3d 5 4s1; Cr3+ = 3d 3 = 0 + 3P
5
Zn= [Ar] 3d 10 4s2; Zn2+= 3d 10
189. (a) As positive charge on the central metal atom increases,
Sc = [Ar] 3d 1 4s2; Sc3+ = 3d 0
the less readily the metal can donate electron density
187. (d) d 4 in high spin octahedral complex
into the * orbitals of CO ligand (donation of electron
eg — density into * orbitals of CO result in weakening of
C – O bond). Hence, the C – O bond would be
t 2g strongest in [Mn(CO)6]+.
CFSE = (–0.4x + 0.6y) 0 190. (b) 191. (b)
HALOALKANES AND HALOARENES 415
14. (c) For the same alkyl group, the boiling points of alkyl
halides decrease in the order :
1. (d) Neohexyl chloride is a primary halide as in it Cl-atom is RI RBr RCl RF
attached to a primary carbon. This is because with the increase in size and mass of
halogen atom, the magnitude of van der Waal's forces
CH3
increases.
CH3 C CH2 CH2Cl 15. (a)
16. (a) C2H6 UV light
Cl2 C2 H5Cl+HCl
CH3
17. (b)
2. (b) CHCl 2 CH 2 Cl 18. (d) Ethylene dichloride can be prepared by adding HCl to
| | ethylene glycol (CH2OH. CH2OH).
CH3 CH 2 Cl
19. (b) When ethyl alcohol is treated with PCl 5 , then ethyl
(gem-dihalide) (vic-dihalide)
3. (b) Gem-dihalides are those in which two halogen atoms chloride is formed.
are attached on the same carbon atom. CH 3 CH 2 OH + PCl 5
4. (a)
CH 3 CH 2 Cl + HCl + POCl 3
1 1 20. (c) The best method for the conversion of an alcohol into
CH3 CH3
1 | | 2 1 an alkyl chloride is reaction of the alcohol with thionyl
5. (b) CH3 CH C CH 2 CH 3 chloride (SOCl2) in the presence of pyridine.
3
4
|
Cl R – OH + SOCl2 Pyridine RCl + SO2 + HCl
3-chloro-2-3-dimethylpentane SO2 and HCl being gases escape leaving behind pure
1 alkyl halide.
CH 3
| 21. (a) Boiling point of CH3I is 42°C which indicates that it is
6. (b) 2
H 3C C Cl liquid at room temperature. CH3I is larger molecule so
| it has stronger vander Waal’s force of attraction than
3 CH
3
others.
IUPAC name : 2-Chloro-2-methylpropane. 22. (c) In preparation of an alkyl chloride by the action of dry
Br HCl, the catalyst generally used is anhydrous ZnCl2.
| 23. (a)
7. (a) CH3 CH 2 C CH Cl
2 24. (c)
4 3
2 - bromo - 1 - chloro but - 1 - ene + –
NH2 N NCl Cl
8. (d) CH 2 CH CH 2Cl
(3 chloro 1 propene)
HNO2 Cu2Cl2
2
9. (a) Isopropyl chloride CH3 CH CH3 chlorine atom is HCl Sandmeyer’s reaction
(Diazotization)
|
Cl 25. (d) Para-di-chlorobenzene has most symmetrical structure
attached to 2° carbon atom. than others. It is found as crystalline lattice form,
10. (a) 11. (d) therefore, it has highest melting point (52°C) due to
12. (c) Because of the small size of F, the C–F bond is strongest symmetrical structure.
in CH3F. Cl
13. (b) CH3Cl has higher dipole moment than CH3F due to
much longer C–Cl bond length than the C–F bond.
The much longer bond length of the C–C bond
outweighs the effect produced by lower
electronegativity of Cl than that of F. Cl
EBD_7207
416 HALOALKANES AND HALOARENES
Para-chlorobenzene 39. (c) Isopropyl chloride, being 2° alkyl halides, can undergo
SN1 as well as SN2 mechanism.
acetone
26. (b) R X NaI R I NaX 40. (b) Due to steric hindrance tertiary alkyl halide do not
Soluble in react by S N2 mechanism they react by S N 1
(CH 3OH, Me 2CO)
mechanism. SN2 mechanisam is followed in case of
primary and secondary alkyl halides of
R X NaI R I NaX
CH3 – X CH3 – CH2X (CH3)2 – CH.X (CH3)3– C–X
Insoluble in
(CH 3OH, Me 2CO) 41. (c) In SN2 mechanism transition state is pentavalent. Thus
bulky alkyl group will be sterically hindered and smaller
(where X = Cl or Br) alkyl group will favour the SN2 mechanism. So the
27. (a) CH3COOAg Br2
CS2
CH3Br AgBr CO 2 decreasing order of reactivity of alkyl halides is
RCH2X > R2CHX > R3CX
28. (d) In nucleophilic substitution, a nucleophile provides
42. (c) Inversion in configuration occurs in SN2 reactions.
an electron pair to the substrate and the leaving group
departs with an electron pair. H
|
43. (c) H3C CH 2 C* CH3
|
These are usually written as S N (S stands for Cl
substitution and N for nucleophilic) and are common
in aliphatic compounds especially in alkyl halides and The compound containing a chiral carbon atom i.e., (a
acyl halides. carbon atom which is attached to four different atoms
29. (c) SN1 reactions involve the formation of carbocations, is known as a chiral carbon atom) is optically active.
hence higher the stability of carbocation, more will be A s
reactivity of the parent alkyl halide. Thus tertiary 2-chlorobutane contains a chiral C* atom hence it is
carbocation formed from (c) is stabilized by two phenyl
optically active.
groups and one methyl group, hence most stable.
44. (c) Diastereomers since they have different melting points,
Dry
30. (c) CH3 CH 2 I Mg CH 3 CH 2 MgI boiling points, solubilities etc.
Ether
Ethyl magnesium
iodide 45. (a)
46. (b) Compound which are mirror image of each other and
31. (d) Chlorobenzene does not undergo hydrolysis by SN1
are non superimposable are termed as enantiomers.
mechanism because in this halogen is present on sp2
hybridised carbon atom, such halogens are relatively CH3 CH3
inert. H OH HO H
32. (a) For a given alkyl group, the order of reactivity is HO and H OH
H
R – I > R – Br > R – Cl > R – F CH3 CH3
increasing bond energy
These are enantiomers
decreasing halogen reactivity. 47. (b) The compound has two similar assymmetric
This order depends on the carbon-halogen bond C-atoms. It has plane of symmetry and exist in meso
energy; the carbon-fluorine bond energy is maximum form.
and thus fluorides are least reactive while carbon-
iodine bond energy is minimum hence iodides are most
reactive. Plane of symmetry
33. (c) More stable the carbocation, more reactive will be the
parent alkyl halide towards SN1 reaction.
3° > Benzyl > Allyl > 2° > 1° > methyl Meso - 2, 3 dichlorobutane
34. (d) SN1 reaction involves carbocation which are planar 48. (a) Compounds having chiral carbon atom are optically
(sp2 hybridised) and thus can be attacked on either active.
face of the carbon.
H
35. (d) Weaker the C–X bond, greater is the reactivity. |
36. (a) Only 1° alkyl halides (i.e. CH3Br) undergo SN2 reaction. CH3 C* COOH (* is chiral carbon atom)
37. (b) |
Cl
38. (a) 1° Alkyl halides (having least steric hindrance at
-carbon atom) are most reactive towards SN2 reaction. 49. (a) A mixture of equal amounts of the two enantiomers is
called a racemic mixture.
50. (c) 51. (d) Br
52. (c) C2H5Br and C 2 H5Cl are ethylating agents, while |
Alc. KOH
C6H5Cl is inert. 59. (c) CH3 CH CH 2 CH3
53. (a) Although all the three compounds can be used for CH3 CH CH CH3 HBr
preparing Grignard reagents, diethyl ether is
The formation of 2-butene is in accordance to
considered as the best because it provides electron
Saytzeff’s rule. The more substituted alkene is formed
pairs to Mg of the reagent fully for coordination, in
in major quantity.
case of C6H5OCH3 and C6H5N(CH3)2 electron pair
on O and N are partialy delocalised over the benzene C2 H5OH
60. (b) (CH3)2CHCH2MgBr (CH3)2CHCH3
and hence are less available for coordination with Mg.
OC2H5
R O(C2H5)2
Mg + Mg
X O(C2H5)2 Br
61. (b) The order of atomic size of halogens decrease in the
54. (c) Potassium ethoxide is a strong base, and 2- bromopentane order I > Br > Cl > F. On moving down a group atomic
is a 2º bromide, so elimination raction predominates size increases. Further the bond length of C-X bond
OC 2 H 5 decreases in the order
CH 3 CH (Br )CH 2 CH 2 CH 3
C – I > C – Br > C – Cl > C – F
CH 3 CH CHCH 2 CH 3 CH 2 CHCH 2 CH 2 CH 3 and hence the bond dissociation energy decreases in
Pentene - 2(major) trans Pentene 1(min or ) cis
the order
Since trans- alkene is more stable than cis. Thus R – F > R – Cl > R – Br > R – I
trans-pentene -2 is the main product. hence R – I being a weakest bond break most easily.
55. (c) Wurtz reaction : It involves the interaction of two hence R – I is most reactive.
molecules of an alkyl halide (preferably bromide or 62. (a) Alkylhalide formation in the reaction of alcohol with
iodide) with metalic sodium in presence of dry ether to HCl undergoes SN1 reaction in which formation of
form symmetrical alkanes containing double the number the carbocation as intermediate occurs. Stability of
of carbon atoms present in the alkyl halide. For example, carbocation is greatest for (C6H5)3 C+ due to
Dry ether resonance effect, and stability of tertiary carbocation
R X 2Na X R R R 2NaX
Alkyl halide Alkane is greater than the secondary carbocation hence the
option (a) shows the correct order.
Br 63. (d) Except (d) all contain abstractable proton
|
56. (d) alc KOH CH3
CH 3 CH CH 2 CH 3
CH 2 CH CH 2 CH 3 Anhyd.
64. (d) + CH3Cl + HCl
In this reaction both hydrogen and halogen atom has AlCl3
been removed so it is known as dehydro halogenation Toluene
reaction. Mg
65. (b) C6 H 5 Cl C6 H 5 MgBr
57. (d) CH3CH 2 CH 2 Br Mg CH3CH2CH2MgBr CH 3CH 2OH
(Pr opyl Bromide) C6 H 6 CH 3CH 2OMgBr
CH3CH 2CH 2 MgBr + H2O CH3CH2CH3 + CH 3
Anhyd.
|
OH 66. (d) C6 H 6 CH3CH 2 CH 2Cl C6 H 5 CH CH 3
AlCl3 Isopropyl benzene
Mg 67. (a) Friedel-Craft’s reaction is mainly applied on benzene.
Br 3 AlCl
C6H6 + CH3CH2Cl C6H5C2H5 + HCl
CH3 CH3 68. (d) On sulphonation of chlorobenzene, ortho and para
58. (a) CH3 – C – Cl + 2Na + Cl – C – CH3 chlorobenzene is formed because – Cl group is para
CH3 CH3 and ortho directing.
t-Butyl chloride
Cl Cl Cl
Wurtz
Rxn
SO3 H
CH3 CH3 CH3 CH3
CH3 – C – C –CH2Cl Mono
CH3– C – C – CH3
H 2S 2O 7 +
Clorination
Fuming H 2SO4
CH3CH3 CH 3
CH3
SO3 H
EBD_7207
69. (c) Due to resonance in chlorobenzene.
70. (a) N-Phenylacetanilide, C6H5N(C6H5)COCH3, Cl
Cl
precipitates out to a complex with anhydrous AlCl3. 84. (c) Cl 3C–C=O + conc. H2SO4
Cl3C–CH
71. (d) More the stability of the carbocation, higher will be H Cl
Cl Cl
the reactivity of the parent chloride. Allyl chloride >
Vinyl chloride > Chlorobenzene DDT
72. (c) SN1 reactions involve the formation of carbocations,
hence higher the stability of carbocation, more will be 85. (a) Cl3C H HO NO 2 Cl3C NO 2
reactivity of the parent alkyl halide. Thus tertiary Chloropicrin (used
as an insecticide)
carbocation formed from (c) is stabilized by two phenyl
groups and one methyl group, hence most stable. 86. (d) Chlorofluorocarbons, e.g. CF 2 Cl 2 , CHF 2 Cl 2 ,
HCF2CHCl2. These are non-inflammable colourless
HONO CuCl
73. (d) C6H5NH2 C6H5N2Cl C6H5Cl and stable upto 550ºC. These are emitted as propellants
HCl
74. (b) This method is not applicable for the preparation of in aerosol spray, cans refrigerators, fire fighting reagents
aryl halides because the C–O bond in phenol has a etc. They are chemically inert and hence do not react
partial double bond character and is difficult to break with any substance with which they come in contact
being stronger than a single bond. and therefore float through the atmosphere and as a
result enter the stratosphere. There they absorb UV-rays
75. (d) Due to resonance, the electron density increases more
at ortho- and para-positions than at meta-positions. and due to this they produce free atomic chlorine which
Further, the halogen atom because of its – I effect has results decomposition of ozone which cause depletion
some tendency to withdraw electrons from the benzene of ozone layer.
ring. As a result, the ring gets somewhat deactivated 87. (b) Haloform compounds with the formula CHX3, where
as compared to benzene and hence the electrophilic X is a halogen atom.
substitution reactions in haloarenes occur slowly and Haloforms are trihalogen derivatives of methane.
require more drastic conditions as compared to those Example : Chloroform CHCl3.
in benzene. 88. (d) Under ordinary conditions freon is a gas. Its boiling
76. (d) Chloropicrin is nitrochloroform. It is obtained by the point is –29.8°C. It can easily be liquified. It is chemically
nitration of chloroform with HNO3. intert. It is used in air-conditioning and in domestic
HNO 3
refrigeratiors for cooling purposes (as refrigerant)
HCCl 3 O 2 NCCl 3 89. (b) Chloroform (CHCl3) is used as industrial solvent.
Chloroform Chloropicr in
90. (a) Chloroform is an organic compound which does not
Chloropicrin is a liquids, poisonous and used as an ionise in water. Since it can not provide Cl–, therefore,
insecticide and a war gas it is not precipitated with AgNO3.
77. (c) 78. (c) 91. (c) When chloroform is exposed to light it is oxidised to a
79. (c) Freon (CCl2F2) is an odourless, non-corrosive, non poisonous gas known as phosgene.
toxic gas which is stable even at high temperatures
2 CHCl 3 2O 2 2 COCl 2 Cl 2
and pressures. It has low b.p. low specific heat and
can be easily liquified by applying pressure at room 92. (c) 93. (b)
temperature. It is therefore, widely used as refrigerant
(cooling agent) in refrigerators and air conditioners. Cl
80. (c) Chlorofluorocarbon is used in air-conditioners and in
94. (a) CCl3CH
domestic refrigerators for cooling purposes. Its main
drawback is this, it is responsible for ozone depletion. Cl
81. (d) Its vapours are non-inflammable (i.e. do not catch fire). (DDT)
Hence used as fire extinguishers under the name
pyrene. 95. (d) Freons are chlorofluorocarbons.
82. (c) Tetrachloromethane (carbon tetrachloride) is also used CClF3, CFCl3 and CCl2F2, all are freons.
as feedstock in the synthesis of chlorofluorocarbon 96. (b)
and other pharmaceutical manufacturing and general 97. (c) Freons are chlorofluorocarbon.
solvents etc. 98. (d) 99. (d)
83. (d) Dichloromethane is widely used as solvent as a paint
remover, as a propellant in aerosols and as a process STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS
solvent in the manufacture of drugs. It is also used as 100. (b) In alkyl halides halogen atom(s) is attached to sp3
a metal cleaning and finishing solvent. hybridised carbon atom.
101. (a) Aryl chlorides and bromides can be easily prepared 108. (d) tert-Alkyl halides undergo SN1 reactions, hence they
by electrophilic substitution of arenes with chlorine involve the formation of quite stable carbocations, and
and bromine respectively in the presence of Lewis not the transition state. In S N1 reactions, the
acid catalysis like iron or iron (III) chloride. nucleophile is not involved in rate determining (first)
The ortho and para isomers can be easily separated step, hence its stronger or weaker nature does not
due to large difference in their melting points. influence the reaction rate. In SN1, the product has
Reactions with iodine are reversible in nature and more percentage of the inverted configuration than
require the presence of an oxidising agent (HNO3, the retained configuration, i.e. only partial racemization
HIO4) to oxidise the HI formed during iodination. takes place, hence the product will be having some
Fluoro compounds are not prepared by this method optical activity.
due to high reactivity of fluorine.
102. (a) MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS
103. (d) The boiling points of isomeric haloalkanes decrease
with increase in branching. For example, 2-bromo-2- 109. (c) In allylic halides hydrogen atom is bonded to sp3
methylpropane has the lowest boiling point among hybridized carbon atom. Whereas in vinylic halide,
the three isomers. hydrogen atom is bonded to sp2 hybridized carbon
CH3 atom.
CH3CHCl2 CH 2 CH 2
| | |
CH3CH 2CH 2CH 2Br CH3CH 2CH CH3 H3C C CH 3 Ethylidene chloride Cl Cl
| | (gem-dihalide) Ethylene dichloride (vic-dihalide)
Br Br
b.p. / K 375 364 346 110. (a) Alkyl iodides are often prepared by the reaction of
Boiling points of isomeric dihalobenzenes are very alkyl chlorides/bromides with NaI in dry acetone. This
nearly the same. However, the para-isomers are high reaction is known as Finkelstein reaction.
melting as compared to their ortho and meta-isomers. R X NaI R I NaX
It is due to symmetry of para-isomers that fits in crystal X = Cl, Br
lattice better as compared to ortho- and meta-isomers. NaCl or NaBr thus formed is precipitated in dry
Cl Cl Cl acetone.
It facilitates the forword reaction according to le
Cl
chatelier’s principle. The synthesis of alkyl fluorides
is best accomplished by heating an alkyl chloride/
Cl bromide in the presence of a metallic fluoride such as
Cl AgF, Hg2F2, CoF2 or SbF3. The reaction is termed as
Swarts reaction.
b.p/K 453 446 448
H 3C Br AgF H 3C F AgBr
m.p.K 256 249 323
111. (b) 112. (b)
104. (b) SN2 reaction follow a 2nd order kinetic ie the rate
depends upon the concentration of both the reactants, 113. (b) Chloramphenicol, produced by soil microorganism is
where in SN1 reactions rate depends only upon the very effective for the treatment of typhoid fever. Our
concentration of only one reactants. body produces iodine containing hormone thyroxine,
The order of reactivity order of alkyl halides for SN2 the deficiency of which causes a disease called goiter.
reaction 3° > 2° > 1° and for SN1 reactions 3° < 2° < 1° Synthetic halogen compounds, viz chloroquine is used
105. (a) In SN1 reactions step 1 is slow and reversible and the for the treatment of malaria; halothane is used as an
slowest step is the rate determining step anaesthetic during surgery. Certain fully fluorinated
106. (b) If the compound rotates the plane polarised light to compounds are being considered as potential blood
the right, i.e., clockwise direction, it is called substitutes in surgery.
dextrorotatory (Greek for right rotating) or the d-form
and is indicated by placing a positive(+) sign before ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS
the degree of rotation. If the light is rotated towards
114. (d) Assertion is false, because aryl halides do not undergo
left (anticlockwise direction), the compound is said to
nucleophilic substitution under ordinary conditions.
be laevorotatory or the l-form and a negative (–) sign
This is due to resonance, because of which the carbon–
is placed before the degree of rotation.
chlorine bond acquires partial double bond character,
107. (a) If a 50 : 50 mixture of the (A) and (B) is obtained then
hence it becomes shorter and stronger and thus cannot
the process is called racemisation and the product is
optically inactive, as one isomer will rotate light in the be replaced by nucleophiles. However Reason is true.
direction opposite to another. 115. (c) Alkyl halides give polyalkylation products.
EBD_7207
116. (b) Carbon tetrachloride rises to atmosphere and deplete 124. (d) First draw possible different structures obtained on
the ozone layer. This depletion of ozone layer increases monochlorination of 2-methylbutane,
exposure of UV rays to human being which lead to CH3CH(CH3)CH2CH3.
increase of skin cancer, eye diseases and disorder with CH3
CH3
discruption of the immune system. | |
117. (c) CHCl3 is stored in dark bottles to prevent oxidation of (i) ClCH 2 * C HCH 2 CH3 (ii) CH 3 C CH 2 CH 3
CHCl3 in presence of sunlight. |
Optically active Cl
118. (d) CCl4 is used as a fire extinguisher. The dense, non
combustible vapours cover the burning substance and Optically inactive
prevents the availability of oxygen around burning CH 3 Cl CH 3
material. | |* |
(iii) CH 3 CH CH CH 3 (iv) CH 3 CH CH 2 CH2 Cl
CRITICAL THINKING TYPE QUESTIONS Optically active Optically inactive
Thus structures (i) and (iii) are optically active, each
Cl
has one chiral carbon; so each structure will give one
1 enantiomeric pair; thus total enantiomeric pairs will
2 be two.
119. (c)
125. (b) Addition of HBr of 2-pentyne gives two structural
3 Br isomers (I) and (II)
HBr
120. (c) The compound is C3H 6Cl 2 and the number of CH3 C C CH 2 CH 3
possible isomeric compunds is 5 CH3C(Br) CHCH 2 CH 3 CH3CH C(Br)CH 2CH3
asymmetric carbon atom (I) (II)
H H H H H H Each one of these will exist as a pair of geometrical
| | | | | | isomers. Thus, there are two structural and four
H C C C H H C C* C H
| | | | | | configurational isomers.
Cl H Cl Cl Cl H 126. (c) Thionyl chloride is preferred because the other two
(d.l pair)
products formed in the reaction are escapable gases.
H H H H Cl H Hence the reaction gives pure alkyl halides
| | | | | | ROH + SOCl2 R–Cl + SO2 + HCl
Cl C C C H H C C C H
| | | | | | 127. (d) This compound have only one type of hydrogen
Cl H H H Cl H available.
121. (d) 4-Bromobut-l-ene is not an allylic halide 128. (b) Chlorine atom is highly reactive so it will react with
all type of hydrogen available while the Br atom is
BrH 2C —CH 2 —CH CH 2
4 Bromobut 1 ene highly selective so it will react with that hydrogen
122. (c) Primary and secondary alkyl chlorides are prepared which give the highly stabilize tertiary alkyl radical
from the respective alcohols by using HCl gas and so only one product is formed.
anhydrous ZnCl2 (Groove’s process). CH3 CH3
129. (a) CH3 – C – CH2OH HCl CH3 – C – CH2 – OH2+
– –
– –
123. (d) Chlorination of n-butane taken place via free radical

formation i.e., Cl2 h • • CH3 CH3
Cl Cl
Neopentyl alcohol
Cl 2 / h CH3
CH3 — CH2 — CH2 — CH3 –H2O
– –
CH3 – C – CH2
CH3 CH3 CH3
H — C — Cl + Cl — C — H 1, 2 shift
C2H5 C2H5 +
d l CH3 – C – CH2.CH3
–
Racemic mixture CH3

50% d form + 50% l form
Cl• may attack on either side and give a racemic mixture CH3 – C = CH – CH3 Cl
– –
–
of 2 chloro butane which contain 50% d form and 50% CH3 CH3 – C – CH2 – CH3
l-form. 2-methyl-2-butene CH3
2, chloro-2-methyl butane
+ Since S N 1 reactions involve the formation of
NH2 N2 Cl–
carbocation as intermediate in the rate determining
•
Na NO 2 HCl HBF4 step, more is the stability of carbocation higher will
130. (d) be the reactivity of alkyl halides towards SN1 route.
0 5º diazotisation
Now we know that stability of carbocations follows
N2+BF4– F the order : 3° > 2° > 1°, so SN1 reactivity should also
follow the same order.
+ BF3+ N2 3° > 2° > 1° > Methyl (SN1 reactivity)
135. (c) SN1 reactions involve the formation of carbocations,
Benzene diazonium (Balz-Schiemann order of stability of carbocation is 3° > 2° > 1° hence
tetrafluoroborate reaction)
higher the stability of carbocation, more will be the
131. (d) CH 2 = CH - Cl reactivity of the parent alkyl halide. Moreover the
(Vinyl Chloride) tertiary carbocation formed from (c) is stabilized by
The halogen atom in vinyl chloride is not reactive as in two phenyl groups.
other alkyl halides. The non-reactivity of chlorine atom 136. (a) A strong nucleophile favours the SN2 reaction and a
is due to resonance stabilisation. The .p. on Cl-atom weak nucleophile favours the SN1 reaction.
can participate in delocalisation (Resonance) to give First reaction is SN1 reaction because C2H5OH is used
two canonical structure. as solvent which is a weak nucleophile.
Second reaction is SN2 reaction because C2H5O– is
Q +
CH 2 = CH - Cl ææ
Æ CH 2 - CH = C l strong nucleophile.
137. (d) SN2 reaction is favoured by small groups on the carbon
132. (d) The rate of SN2 substitution reaction is maximum in atom attached to halogen.
case of CH3CH2Br because SN2 mechanism is followed So, the order of reactivity is
in case of primary and secondary halides i.e., SN2 CH 3 Cl (CH 3 ) 2 CHCl (CH 3 )3CCl
reaction is favoured by small groups on the carbon
atom attached to halogens so (C 2 H 5 )2CHCl
CH3 CH2 Br > CH3 CH2 CH2 Br > SN2 reaction is shown to maximum extent by primary
halides. The only primary halides given is CH3Cl so
CH3 the correct answer is (d).
|
CH3– CH – Br > CH3 – C – Br 138. (a) Primary halide < Secondary halide < Tertiary halide.
| | 139. (b) Since SN1 reaction involve the formation of carbocation
CH3 CH3 as intermediate in the rate determining step. More stable
133. (d) Smaller the R group reactivity will be higher towards the carbocation, more is the reactivity of the halide
SN2 reaction. For alkyl halides containing similar alkyl toward SN1 route. As we know that the stability of the
group better will be the leaving group, more facile is carbocations decreases in the order :
the nucleophilic substitution reaction. Benzyl 2º > 1°.
Amongst the halide ions, the order in which the leaving Hence the correct order of stability is
groups depart follows the sequence : III > II > I
I– > Br – > Cl– > F– 140. (b) Cyanides and nitrites possess two nucleophilic
centres and are called ambident nucleophiles. Actually
It is because of this reason that the order of reactivity
cyanide group is a nucleophile in two different ways
of haloalkanes follows the sequence :
iodoalkanes > bromoalkanes > chloroalkanes > [ C N : C N ] . Similarly nitrite ion also
fluoroalkanes represents an ambident nucleophile with two different
134. (a)
+ –
points of linkage [ O N O]. The linkage through
Me Br ionisation +Br
Me oxygen results in alkyl nitrites while through nitrogen
(A) atom, it leads to nitroalkanes.
141. (d) In case of optically active alkyl halides, the product
Me Me formed as a result of SN2 mechanism has the inverted
ionisation Me
+ + Br – configuration as compared to the reactant. This is
Br
because the nucleophile attaches itself on the side
(B)
opposite to the one where the halogen atom is present.
Me In case of optically active alkyl halides, SN1 reactions
ionisation Me – are accompanied by racemisation. The carbocation
Me + Br
Me +
Br formed in the slow step being sp2 hybridised is planar
(C) (achiral).
EBD_7207
142. (d) —NO2 group is electron attractive group, so it is able SbCl5
145. (d) 3CCl4 2 SbF5 2SbCl3 3CCl 2 F2
to deactivate the benzene ring.
freon 12
Cl C,FeCl3
CCl 4 2H 2HCl CCl 2 F2
NO2 146. (c) Carbon tetrachloride vapours react with steam above
500° C to from phosgene, a poisonous gas.
500 C
NO2 CCl 4 H 2O COCl2 2HCl
phosgene
hence withdrawl of electrons from ortho and para 147. (a) In stratosphere, freon is able to initiate radical chain
position cause easy removal of –Cl atom due to reaction that can upset the natural ozone balance.
development of +ve charge on o- and p positions. 148. (c) In stratosphere freon is able, to initiate radical chain
143. (a) On the same basis as above reactions that can upset the natural ozone balance.
CH3CH2Cl > CH2 = CHCl > C6H5Cl 149. (d) Exposure of carbon tetrachloride causes liver cancer
in humans. The most common effects are dizziness,
144. (c) The carbon-halogen bonds of aryl halides are both
light headedness, nausea and vomiting which cause
shorter and stronger (due to possibility of resonance)
permanent damage to nerve cells. In severe cases,
than the carbon-halogen bonds of R–X and in this these effects can lead rapidly to stupor, coma,
respect as well as in their chemical behaviour, they unconsciousness or death.
resemble vinyl halides (CH2= CHX) more than alkyl oxidation
halides. 150. (a) CH 3CH 2OH + Cl2 CH 3CHO + 2HCl
Ethanol Ethanal
X CH 3CHO + 3Cl2 CCl 3 CHO + 3HCl

Ethanal Chloral
2CCl3CHO + Ca(OH)2
2CHCl 3 + (HCOO) 2 Ca
CH2= CH–X Chloroform Cal. formate
Aryl halides Vinyl halides CH 3COCH3 + 3Cl2 CCl 3COCH 3 + 3HCl

Acetone Trichloroacetone
Halogen attached to C is sp2 hybridised C, 2CCl3CO.CH3 + Ca(OH)2
C–X bond is shorter and stronger because of 2CHCl3 + (CH3COO)2Ca
partial double bond character due to
delocalisation of electrons on halogens 151. (c) Triiodomethane (CHI3) when comes in contact with
organic matter decomposes easily to free iodine which
CH2– X has antiseptic property.
152. (a) Cl Cl Cl Cl
C
H +[O]
Light and air
Cl C
Cl OH
CH = CH–X R–CH 2–X CH2 = CH–CH2–X Chloroform
Vinyl halides Alkyl halides Allyl halides Benzyl halides Cl

HCl+ C=O
Cl Phosgene
hybridised C, C–X
tronger because of Phosgene is an extremely poisonous gas.
153. (d)
ALCOHOLS, PHENOLS AND ETHERS 433
FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS 19. (d) Benzoic acid (C 6 H 5COOH) will not form phenol or
phenoxide.
1. (b) 2. (b)
20. (b) By heating benzaldehyde with conc. NaOH or KOH
CH 2 (Cannizzaro reaction).
H2 C CH OH
OH C6 H5 CHO NaOH
3. (a) or Benzaldehyde
H2 C CH 2 C6 H 5 CH 2 OH C6 H 5 COONa
Benzyl alcohol Sod. benzoate
CH 2
21. (d) Any one of Ni, Pt or Pd can be used in the reduction of
4. (b) Glycols are dihydric alcohols (having two hydroxyl aldehydes.
groups). Ethylene glycol is the first member of this
KMnO4
series. 22. (c) CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2
OH | |
CH 2OH
| Baeyer’s OH OH
CH 2 OH reagent Glycol
(Ethylene glycol)
This reaction is known as Baeyer’s test for unsaturation.
5. (c) Ethers contain the functional group – O – 23. (c) Ethylene is passed into concentrated sulphuric acid at
6. (b) CH3CH2CH(OH)CH3 – a secondary alcohol 75–80°C under pressure when a mixture of ethyl
7. (b) Cresol has phenolic group – OH hydrogen sulphate and diethyl sulphate is formed.
8. (b) Four primary alcohols of C5H11OH are possible. These H 2C CH 2 H 2SO 4
100 C
C2 H5 HSO 4
are: Ethylene
(i) CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OH C 2 H 5 OH H 2SO 4
H 2O
(ii) CH 3 CH 2 CH CH 2 OH
| SO 3 Na O Na
CH 3
24. (b) NaOH + Na2SO3.H2O
(iii) CH 3 CH CH 2CH 2 OH 300°
|
CH 3 HCl
CH 3 OH
|
(iv) CH 3 C CH 2 OH + NaCl
|
CH 3 25. (b)
CH3 H H
| | CH3MgBr
|
9. (b)
5 4 3 2 1 26. (a) H C O H C OMgBr
CH3 CH CH 2 C CH3
| | |
OH OH CH 3
2-methyl- 2, 4-pentanediol. H
10. (b) C4H10O : (i) C2H5OC2H5 (ii) CH3OC3H7 H3O |
(iii) CH3OCH(CH3)2 H C OH
|
11. (c) 12. (a) 13. (c) 14. (a) 15. (c) CH 3
16. (b)
27. (b) Since the compound is formed by hydration of an
17. (c) In this structure –OH group is directly attached to
alkene, to get the structure of alkene remove a molecule
double bonded carbon atom i.e. sp2 hybridized carbon
of water from the alcohol.
atom.
H 2O
18. (c) If two groups attached to the oxygen atom are CH3 C H CH3 CH 2 CHCH 3
|
different then ethers are known as unsymmetrical or OH
Propylene
mixed ethers. Isopropyl alcohol
EBD_7207
434 ALCOHOLS, PHENOLS AND ETHERS
alk. KMnO 4 CH2–CH2 – – –

28. (b) CH 2 CH 2 H 2 O [O] 40. (b) Hydrogen bonding : O–H O–H O –H
OH OH | | |
Glycol
R H R
Alcohol Water Alcohol
Conc. H 2SO 4 41. (b) When ethanol dissolves in water then there is emission
CH 2 CH 2 H 2 O CH 3 CH 2 OH of heat and contraction in volume.
Ethane Ethanol
42. (d) C 2 H 5 OH 4 I 2 6 NaOH
29. (d) The aldehydes which do not have -hydrogen atom
react with NaOH when half of molecules are reduced CHI 3 HCOONa 5 NaI 5H 2O
Iodoform
to alcohol and other half of molecules are oxidised to
43. (a) When primary (1°) alcohols are treated with copper at
acid (Cannizzaro reaction).
300°C, then aldeh ydes are obtained by
NaOH dehydrogenation of alcohols. Similarly secondary (2°)
2 HCHO CH3OH + HCOONa
Methanal Methyl Sod. formate alcohols form ketone and alkene is obtained by
alcohol dehydration of tertiary (3°) - alcohols. But phenol does
30. (b) 31. (b) not respond to this test.
32. (a) Commercially, acids are reduced to alcohols by
converting them to the esters, followed by their R CH 2 CH2 OH
Cu
R CH 2 CHO + H 2
reduction using hydrogen in the presence of catalyst 1° alcohol 300 C Aldehyde
(catalytic hydrogenation).
H
R'OH H2
RCOOH RCOOR RCH 2OH R OH Cu
H Catalyst R C OH R – C – R + H2
300 C
33. (d) O
R
34. (b) A diazonium salt is formed by treating an aromatic
2° alcohol Ketone
primary amine with nitrous acid (NaNO2 + HCl) at
273-278 K. Diazonium salts are hydrolysed to phenols CH 3
by warming with water or by treating with dilute acids. Cu
R C OH R C CH 2 + H 2 O
300 C |
NH2 N2 Cl OH CH3 CH 3
NaNO2 H2O 3° alcohol Alkene
+ N2 + HCl
+HCl Warm Cu
C 6 H 5 – OH No reaction
Aniline Benzene diazonium 300 C
chloride
O– O O
35. (a) Among isomeric alcohols surface area decreases from –
1º to 2º to 3º alcohols and hence the boiling point.
..
44. (c) etc.

36. (a) The lower alcohols are readily soluble in water and the
. .–
solubility decreases with the increase in molecular Resonance stabilisation of phenoxide ion
weight. The solubility of alcohols in water can be (conjugate base of phenol)
explained due to the formation of hydrogen bond
Conjugate base of ethyl alcohol, i.e., C2H5O– does
between the highly polarised —OH groups present
not show resonance.
both in alcohol and water.
.. .. –
37. (c) o-Nitrophenol has intramolecular H-bonding. OH O
..
..
..
38. (b) The solubility of alcohols depend on number of

C-atoms of alcohols. The solubility of alcohols in water
45. (d) + H+
is decreased by increasing number of C-atoms of
alcohol. As resulting molecular weight increases, the Phenol Phenoxide ion
(resonance not (resonance stabilised)
polar nature of O – H bond decreases and hence significant)
strength of hydrogen bond decreases.
46. (b) Phenol is most acidic because its conjugate base is
39. (d) Solubility of alcohol in water decreases with increase stabilised due to resonance, while the rest three
in molecular mass due to increase in water repelling compounds are alcohols, hence, their corrosponding
alkyl part in alcohol. conjugate bases do not exhibit resonance.
[O]
47. (c) C6 H 5 OH H 2 O C6 H5O H 3O CH 3CH 2 CH 2 OH
Phenoxide ion n propyl alcohal
The phenoxide ion is stable due to resonance. [O]

CH 3 CH 2 CHO CH 3 CH 2 COOH
–
O O O H3C [O] H3C
– CH – OH C=O
•• isopropyl alcohal Ketone
54. (a) Lucas reagent is conc. HCl + anhyd. ZnCl2.

••
– 55. (d) The rates of reaction with lucas reagent follows the
order.
3° alcohol > 2° alcohol > 1° alcohol
OH O– O since carbocations are formed as intermediate, more
– –
•• stable the carbocation, higher will be the reactivity of
– the parent compound (alcohol). 2-Methylpropan-2-ol
– generates a 3º carbocation, so it will react fastest; other
three generates either 1º or 2º carbocations.
The negative charge is delocalized in the benzene ring CH3
which is a stabilizing factor in the phenoxide ion and |
H
because of this reason ionization constant of phenol CH3 C OH
|
is higher whereas no resonance is possible in alkoxide CH3
ions (RO–)derived from alcohol. The negative charge 2-Methyl-2-propanol
is localized on oxygen atom in case of alcohols.
48. (b) Secondary alcohols on oxidation give ketones. CH3 CH3
| |
Note : – Primary alcohols from aldehydes. Br
CH3 C CH3 C Br
| |
R R CH3 CH3
[O]
CHOH C=O
R R 56. (d) OH OH
Isopropyl | Br Br
Ketone
alcohol 3Br2 (aq.)
49. (a) Alcohols are oxidized by removal of H2 in presence

of a heated metal catalyst (Cu) Br
2, 4,6-Tribromophenol
Cu
CH3CH 2OH CH3CHO H 2 Note : The –OH group in phenol, being activating
300
1 alcohol Aldehyde
group, facilitates substitution in the o- and p-positions.
H3 C OH OH
CH OH
Cu CHCl2
300 CH3CCH3 H 2
||
57. (b) + CHCl3
H3 C
2° Alcohol O
Ketone
OH OH
50. (b) C 2 H 5 OH CH 3 COOH CH 3 COO.C 2 H 5 H 2O CH(OH)2 CHO
51. (c) Secondary alcohols oxidise to produce kenone. 2KOH
–H2O
( O)
CH3CHOHCH2CH3 CH3COCH2CH3
Reimer-Tiemann reaction.
2-Butanol Ethyl methyl ketone 58. (c) When phenol reacts with Zinc dust, then benzene and
52. (b) Greater the stability of the intermediate carbocation, zinc oxide are formed
more reactive is the alcohol. Since 2-methylpropan-2-ol
OH
generates 3° carbocation, therefore, it reacts fastest
with HBr.
53. (c) Primary alcohol on oxidation give aldehyde which on + Zn + ZnO
further oxidation give carboxylic acid whereas
secondary alcohols give ketone.
Phenol Benzene
EBD_7207
59. (d) Phenol does not react with NaHCO3.
70. (d) 3C 2 H 5OH PBr3 3C 2 H 5Br H 3PO 3
OH ONa [X ]
71. (c) Methanol and ethanol can be distinguished by heating
NaOH with iodine and washing soda
60. (d)
I2
Phenol C 2 H 5 OH CHI 3 HCOONa
Na 2 CO 3
Iodoform
(yellow ppt)
OH
COOH NaI 2NaOH H 2O
CO 2 HCl
I2
140 C CH3OH No reaction
Na 2CO3
Salicylic acid
This is also called iodoform test.
72. (d) 73. (c) 74. (c) 75. (a) 76. (b)
H 2O
61. (d) CH3CH 2 CHOH 77. (d) 78. (c)
|
CH3 OH OH OH
CH3 COOH
CH3 CH = CHCH3 + CH3CH2 CH = CH2
79. (d)
(Major product) (Minor product)
62. (c) Lucas test is used to distinguish between 1°, 2° and 3° o-cresol Salicylic acid Phenol
alcohols. Lucas reagent is anhy. ZnCl2 and HCl. Electron releasing groups (–CH3, –OCH3, –NCH3 etc)
3° alcohol + Lucas reagent turbidity immediately intensify the negative charge of phenoxide ion, i.e.,
2° alcohol + Lucas reagent turbidity after destablises it hence decrease ionization of parent
5 minutes phenol. Therefore decreases acidity while electron
1° alcohol + Lucas reagent No turbidity at donating groups (–NO2, –COOH, –CHO etc.) increases
room temperature. acidity.
63. (a) OH OH 80. (b) Alcohols and phenols are acidic in nature. In fact they
are Bronsted acids i.e., they can donate a proton to a
COOH stronger base (B:)
Salicyclic acid Phenol
(evolves CO 2 with NaHCO3) (No reaction with NaHCO3 )
– –
B+H–O–R B–H+ O–R
64. (b) Other options are acids, only Na metal is a base. Base Acid Conjugate Conjugate
65. (c) Reactivity increases as the nucleophilicity of the halide acid base
ion increases, i.e. I– > Br– > Cl–. 81. (b) Oxidation of phenol with chromic acid produces a
66. (a) In presence of acid, alcohols always form carbocations conjugated diketone known as benzoquinone. In the
as intermediates. presence of air, phenols are slowly oxidised to dark
67. (c) 68. (b) coloured mixtures containing quinones.
69. (b) Phenol on reaction with conc. H2SO4 gives a mixture 82. (c) Glucose and fructose obtained by hydrolysis of
of o- and p- products (i.e., –SO3H group, occupies sucrose, are converted into alcohol by enzyme zymase.
o-, p- position). At room temperature o-product is more
zymase
stable, which on treatment with conc. HNO3 will yield C 6 H12 O 6 2C 2 H 5 OH 2CO 2
o-nitrophenol. Cr2O3 – ZnO
OH OH OH 83. (a) CO + H2 + H2 CH3OH
300ºC
SO3H water gas
Methanol
Conc.H2SO4
+ 84. (c) Ethylene is passed into concentrated sulphuric acid at
o-product 75–80°C under pressure when a mixture of ethyl
SO3H hydrogen sulphate and diethyl sulphate is formed.
p-product 100 C
At room temperature o- product is more stable H 2C CH 2 H 2SO 4 C2 H5 HSO4
Ethylene
OH OH
SO3H NO2 C2 H5 OH H 2SO 4
Conc. HNO 3 H 2O
85. (b) 86. (a)
o- nitrophenol
87. (c) Hydration of alkenes 101. (c) Preparation of ethers by reacting sodium ethoxide with
– alkyl halide is called Williamson synthesis.
CH 2 CH 2 H HSO 4 CH 3 – CH 2 HSO 4 102. (a) Due to H-bonding, the boiling point of ethanol is much
H 2O higher than that of the isomeric diethyl ether.
CH3 CH 2 HSO 4 CH 3 – CH 2 OH H 2SO 4
Boil 103. (c) CH3OCH3 and C2H5OCH3 are gases while C2H5OC2H5
Fermentation of sugar : (b. p. 308 K) is low boiling liquid.
Invertase 104. (d) Ether is used (i) as a general anaesthetic, (ii) as
C12 H 22O11 H 2O C2H12O6 C6H12O6 refrigerant since it produces cooling on evaporation,
Glucose Fructose
(iii) as solvent for oils, fats, resins etc. (iv) for providing
C6H12O 6
Zymase
2C2H 5OH 2CO 2 inert medium in Wurtz reaction, (v) for preparing
Glucose or Fructose Grignard reagent, (vi) in perfumery.
105. (a) Like dissolves like. Oils and fats, being covalent,
88. (d) Enzymes
Starch Alcohol dissolve in ether, a non-polar solvent.
Diastase 106. (d) Due to inter-molecular hydrogen bonding in alcohols
89. (a) 2(C6H10O5 )n nH 2O boiling point of alcohols is much higher than ether.
(from germinated barley)
Starch
107. (c) 108. (c)
n(C12H 22O11 ) 109. (b) Only alkyl aryl ethers e.g., C6 H5OCH3 undergoes
Maltose electrophilic substitution reactions.
Maltase
C12 H 22 O11 H 2 O (from yeast)
2C6 H12 O6 110. (c) C2H5OC2H5 + 2 HI 2 C2H5I + H2O
Glucose
111. (a) C6 H5O CH3 I C6 H5 OCH3 I
Zymase
C6 H12 O6 2C 2 H 5 OH 2CO 2
(from yeast) 112. (a) Ethers are readily cleaved by HI as follows :
90. (b)
H I
91. (c) Denaturing can also be done by adding 0.5% pyridine, R O R R O R ROH + RI.
petroleum naptha, CuSO4 etc. |
92. (c) H
93. (c) Tonics contain ethyl alcohol. 113. (c) In case of unsymmetrical ethers, the site of cleavage
94. (c) Due to presence of methyl alcohol in liquor. depends on the nature of alkyl group e.g.,
95. (c) The quantity of sugar increases and yeast grows on CH 3O CH(CH 3 ) 2 HI
373K
CH 3I (CH 3 )2CHOH
the outer skin as grapes ripen. When grapes are Methyl Isopropyl
iodide alcohol
crushed, sugar and the enzyme come in contact and
fermentation starts. Fermentation takes place in The alkyl halide is always formed from the smaller alkyl
anaerobic contidions i.e., in absence of air CO2 is group.
released during fermentation. If air gets into 114. (b) Due to greater electronegativity of sp2-hybridized
fermentation mixture the oxygen of air oxidises ethanol carbon atoms of the benzene ring, diaryl ethers are not
to ethanoic acid which in turn destroys the taste of attacked by nucleophiles like I–.
alcoholic drinks. CH3 CH3
96. (b) The commercial alcohol is made unfit for drinking by 115. (b)
CHOCH3 + HI CH3I + CHOH
mixing in it some copper sulphate (to give it colour) CH3 CH3
2-propanol
and pyridine (a foul smelling liquid). It is known as
denaturation of alcohol. 116. (a) Dehydration of alcohols gives ethers
117. (d) R – O – Ar + HI Ar – OH + RI
97. (a) C 6 H 5 ONa C 2 H 5 I C6 H 5OC 2 H 5 NaI Aryl-alkyl ether Phenol Alkyl iodide
Phenetole
Due to steric hinderance, smaller alkyl group is always
98. (b) C2 H 5 Br C 2 H 5ONa C2 H5 O C2H 5 attached to iodine.
NaBr
Sod. ethoxide diethyl ether
118. (d) Diethyl ether, being a Lewis base, is not attacked by
99. (b) Reaction of sodium ethoxide with ethyl iodide to nucleophiles, while all others contain electrophilic carbon,
produce diethyl ether is known as Williamson hence attacked by nucleophiles like OH– ions.
synthesis.
It is a nucleophilic substitution reaction and proceeds O
|
via SN2 mechanism. CH3 C OCH3 CH3 C N
100. (d) The two components should be (CH3 )3 CONa +
(CH3)3CBr. However, tert-alkyl halides tend to undergo
elimination reaction rather than substitution leading O
|| ..
to the formation of an alkene, Me2C = CH2 CH 3 C NH 2 C2H5 O
. . C 2 H5
EBD_7207
STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS

119. (c) Product formed is 2–methyl–pentan–2–ol hence :O :
carbon is attached to four different group therefore 128. (a) The bond angle in alcohols is slightly less
C H
the molecule is chiral but because the carbonyl group than the tetrahedral angle (109°-28 ). It is due to the
is planar so attack of methyl group can take place either repulsion between the unshared electron pairs of
ways above and below the plane of the of molecule oxygen.
hence equal number of enantiomers are formed and 129. (b) The correct explanation is : In Lucas test, tertiary
hence the racemic mixture is formed. alcohols react immediately because of the formation
120. (b) Alcohols are versatile compounds. They react both of the more stable tertiary carbocations.
as nucleophiles and electrophiles. The bond between 130. (c) The correct reason is : Nucleophilic attack of phenolate
O—H is broken when alcohols react as nucleophiles. ion through the ortho-carbon atom occurs on CCl4 (a
neutral electrophile) to form an intermediate which on
Alcohols as nucleophiles
hydrolysis gives salicylic acid (ArSE reaction).
131. (a) R is the correct explanation of A. Due to +M effect of
H ..
(i) R–O–H+ +C – R –+O
.. – C – R–O– C– +H +
.. H , its intermediate carbocation is more stable than
O
the one in benzene.
(ii) The bond between C — O is broken when they 132. (c) The usual halogenation of benzene takes place in the
react as electrophiles. Protonated alcohols react presence of a Lewis acid, such as FeBr 3, which
in this manner. polarises the halogen molecule. In case of phenol, the
Protonated alcohols as electrophiles polarisation of bromine molecule takes place even in
the absence of Lewis acid. It is due to the highly
R CH 2 OH H R CH2 OH 2 activating effect of –OH group attached to the benzene
ring.
133. (b)
Br– + CH2 – OH2+ Br – CH2 + H2O 134. (a) R is the correct explanation of A.
135. (d) 136. (c)
R R
137. (c) Alkyl aryl ethers are cleaved at the alkyl-oxygen bond
121. (b) Alcohols are, weaker acids than water. This can be due to the more stable aryl-oxygen bond. The reaction
illustrated by the reaction of water with an alkoxide. yields phenol and alkyl halide
– – O–R OH
R – O: + H – O – H R – O – H + :OH
: :
: :
: :
Base Acid Conjugate Conjugate

acid base +H–X +R–X
This reaction shows that water is a better proton donor Ethers with two different alkyl groups are also cleaved
(i.e., stronger acid) than alcohol. Also in the above in the same manner.
reaction, we note that an alkoxide ion is a better proton R O R ' HX R X R ' OH
acceptor than hydroxide ion, which suggests that
alkoxide are stronger bases (sodiumethoxide is a CRITICAL THINKING TYPE QUESTIONS
stronger base than sodium hydroxide).
138. (a) Methyl alcohol (CH3OH) is also known as carbinol.
122. (c) The dehydration of secondary and tertiary alcohols Hence vinyl carbinol is CH2 = CH – CH2OH.
to give corresponding ethers is unsuccessful as 139. (c) KMnO4 (alkaline) and OsO4 / CH2Cl2 are used for
elimination competes over substitution and as a hydroxylation of double bond while O3 /Zn is used for
consequence, alkenes are easily formed. ozonolysis. Therefore, the right option is (c), i.e.,
123. (c) The C — O bond length (136 pm) in phenol is slightly 3CH 3CH CH 2 BH3 in THF (CH 3CH 2 CH 2 )3 B
less than that in methanol (142 pm). 3H 2O 2
3CH 3CH 2CH 2OH + H3BO3
124. (a) A methanol poisoned patient is treated by giving NaOH
intravenous injection of ethanol. 1-propanol
140. (a) Hydroboration-oxidation leads to anti-Markownikoff’s
MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS hydration, thus
125. (d) 126. (c) 127. (b)
–
141. (b) NaBH4 and LiAlH4 attacks only carbonyl group and O
reduce it into alcohol group.
O
–
CH3– C–O > >
NaBH 4
C6 H5 CH CHCHO Most stable because
cinnamic aldehyde resonating structures
are equivalent
O–
C6 H 5 CH CH.CH 2 OH
cinnamic alcohol
CH C
> Least stable
142. (a) (resonance not
possible)
143. (b) Carbocation is formed as intermediate which is most
OCH3
stabilized when protonation occurs on terminal carbon. –OCH3 group intensifies
144. (b) Reaction of 1–chloropropane leads to the formation of –ve charge due to + M effect
the primary carbocation which rearranges to more OH OH OH OH
stable secondary carbocation, hence (ii) and (iii) give
similar products.
149. (a)
145. (a) In case of (ii) and (iii), the alcohol so obtained contain
carbon which is attached to four different groups i.e., NO2
chiral carbon while in case of (i) and (iv) achiral alcohol CH3 NO 2
is obtained. +I –I – M, – I
146. (a) CH 2 CH OH represents vinylic alcohol. In vinylic (A) (B) (C) (D)
alcohols –OH group is attached to sp2 hybridized Electron withdrawing substituents increases the
acidity of phenols; while electron releasing substituents
carbon whereas in allylic alcohols – OH group is
decreases acidity. Further the particular effect (acidity
attached to sp3 hybridized carbon. increasing or decreasing) is more when a substituent
147. (c) The mechanism of the reaction involves the following is present in o-ortho position to phenolic group. Thus
three steps: the correct order will be D > C > A > B.
Step 1: Protonation of alkene to form carbocation by 150. (c) Electron withdrawing substituents like –NO2 , Cl
electrophilic attack of H3O+ increase the acidity of phenol while electron releasing
substituents like – CH3, – OCH3 decreases acidity.
H2O + H+ H3O+ hence the correct order of acidity will be
H H OH OH OH OH
+ +
C=C +H—O
.. —H —C—C + H2O
> > >
H
Step 2: Nucleophilic attack of water on carbocation. NO2 Cl CH3 OCH3
H H H III I II IV
+ + (–M, –I) (–I > +M) (+I, + HC) (+ M)
—C—C + H2O —C—C—O —H
151. (c) ClCH 2 CH 2 OH is stronger acid than CH3CH 2 OH due
H H to – I effect of Cl.
Step 3: Deprotonation to form an alcohol. Cl CH 2CH 2OH Cl CH 2CH 2O H
Stronger acid ve charge on O
dispersed hence
.. conjugate base, stable
H H H OH
..
+ .. + CH3CH 2 OH CH3 CH 2O H
— C — C — O — H + H2O — C — C — +H3 O
Weaker acid ve charge intensified,
hence conjugate
H H base unstable
148. (a) More the stability of the conjugate base, higher is the 152. (c) Due to strong electron-donating effect of the OH
acidic character of the parent acid. Stability order of group, the electron density in phenol is much higher
than that in toluene, benzene and chlorobenzene and
the four conjugate bases is arranged below. hence phenol is readily attacked by the electrophile.
EBD_7207
OH 163. (a) Here also, carbocation is formed as an intermediate,
hence the species capable of forming most stable
Zn CH3Cl carbocation will be most reactive.
153. (b) anhy + + +
AlCl3 CHCH
CHCH2CH
CH3 CHCH
2CHCH
2CHCH
3 3 CH2CH2CH2
Phenol X
CH3 COOH
alc. > >

KMnO 4
Y Z Benzyl
Benzylcarbocation
carbocation 2º carbocation 1º carbocation
154. (d) Riemer-Tiemann reaction involves electrophilic 164. (a) In Williamson’s synthesis the reaction of alkyl halides
substitution on the highly reactive phenoxide ring. with sodium alkoxides give ethers. However, if the alkyl
HCCl3 + OH– H2O + – :CCl3 halide is 3°, it undergoes elimination to give an alkene.
Cl– + : CCl 2 CH3
Note the C has only a
| +–
sextet of electrons H3C – C – Cl + NaOC2H5
|
sod. cthoxide
CH3
tert-butyl chloride
CH2
– – ||
O O CH3 – C – CH3 + C2H5OH + NaBr
CHCl2 – CHO 2-Methyl-1-propene
OH
165. (c) If a tertiary alkyl halide is used, an alkene is the only
reaction product and no ether is formed. For example,
A benzal chloride the reaction of CH3 ONa with (CH3)3C–Br gives
Al 2 O 3 Al 2 O3 exclusively 2-methylpropene.
155. (c) CH 2 CH 2 CH 3 CH 2 OH
650 K 525 K CH3
CH3CH2 OCH2CH3 | + –
: :
156. (b) Dehydration of CH3OH gives carbene (methylene), an CH3 C Br + NaO – CH3
unstable intermediate. |
CH3
H 2SO 4
CH 3OH [: CH 2 ] H 2 O
Carbene CH3 C CH 2 NaBr CH 3OH
157. (d) Since the compound (C4H10O) react with sodium, it |
must be alcohol (option b, c, or d). As it is oxidised to CH3
carbonyl compound which does not reduce Tollen’s 2-Methylpropene
reagent, the carbonyl compound should be a ketone It is because alkoxides are not only nucleophiles but
and thus C4H10O should be a secondary alcohol, i.e. strong bases as well. They react with alkyl halides
sec-butyl alcohol; other two given alcohols are 1º. leading to elimination reactions.
158. (a) 166. (c) In the cleavage of mixed ethers having two different
P I2 Mg alkyl groups, the alcohol and alkyl iodide that form
159. (d) CH3CH 2 OH CH3CH 2 I depend on the nature of alkyl group. When primary or
Ether
A
secondary alkyl groups are present, it is the lower alkyl
CH 2 CH 3 group that forms alkyl iodide therefore
HCHO
|
CH 3CH 2 MgI H C OMgI CH3 CH CH 2 O CH 2 CH 3 HI
|
(B) | CH3
H CH3
(C) |
CH 2 CH3 CH3 CH CH 2 OH CH 3CH 2 I
H2 O
|
H C OH H+ + Br –
167. (d) OCH3 O–CH3
|
H H
(D)
n propyl alcohol OH + CH3Br
160. (b) 161. (c)
162. (a) In case of m–nitrophenol operational effect of nitrogroup 168. (b) Due to greater electronegativity of sp2-hybridized
is electron withdrawing inductive effect while in case of carbon atoms of the benzene ring, diaryl ethers are not
b and c, both –R and –I effect are operational. attacked by nucleophiles like I–.
EBD_7207
454 ALDEHYDES, KETONES AND CARBOXYLIC ACIDS
FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS H CH3 H O CH3

O3
15. (a) CH3– CH2– C C CH3– CH 2– C– C
2 1 CH3
1. (b) CH3 – CH – CHO CH3 O O
O O
3 4
CH2 – CH3 CH3– C – CH 3+ CH3 – CH2 – CHO (–H2O)
2. (a) 16. (b) Catalyst used in Rosenmund reduction is Pd/BaSO4.

O CH3 Rosenmund reduction is used for reduction of acid
1 2 || 3| 4 chloride.
3. (c) CH 3 C C H CH 3 ; 3- methyl-2-butanone
O O
4. (c) 5. (b) 6. (a) 7. (b) Pd / BaSO4
R C Cl R C H
8. (b) O is more electronegative than C.
17. (d) Phenyl cyanide is reduced into benzaldehyde in the
9. (d) Vanillin -vanilla beans
presence of SnCl2 / HCl reagent. This reaction is
Salicylaldehyde - meadow sweet
Cinnamaldehyde -from cinnamon. known as Stephen’s reaction.
10. (d) The lower aldehydes have sharp pungent odours. As C 6 H 5C N 2[H]
SnCl 2
the size of the molecule increases, the odour becomes HCl
less pungent and more fragrant.
H 2O / H
11. (a) Carbonyl compounds (aldehydes and ketones) are C 6 H 5CH NH C 6 H 5CHO NH 3
obtained by the oxidation of 1° and 2° alcohols 18. (c)
respectively. Among the given options, only (a) is 2°
alcohol hence it can be oxidized to ketone. COOH CH3 CHO
acidic K 2 Cr2 O7 CrO 2 Cl2

OH O
or KMnO 4
| ||
oxidation
H3CCHCH3 H3CCCH 3
(Etard reaction)
2 hydroxypropane Acetone
Acidic KMnO4 and K2Cr 2O7 oxidise toluene to
12. (b) Secondary alcohols on oxidation give ketones. benzoic acid but CrO2Cl2 oxidises it to benzaldehyde.
Note : Primary alcohols form aldehydes. 19. (c) 20. (c) 21. (b) 22. (d) 23. (b)
24. (a) 25. (d)
R R
[O] 26. (b) Formyl chloride is unstable at room temperature.
CHOH C=O 27. (a) Alkanenitriles (other than methanenitrile) and
R R benzonitrile give ketones with Grignard reagents.
Isopropyl Ketone
alcohol 28. (b)
13. (a) 1° Alcohols on catalytic dehydrogenation give + –
29. (c) C=O C – O ; the polarity exists in
aldehydes.
Cu
carbonyl group due to resonance.
RCH2OH RCHO + H2 30. (a) Solubility decreases with increase in mol. wt.
300°C
1° alcohol Aldehyde 31. (c) Propanone has symmetrical structure.
14. (a) Alcohols are oxidized by removal of H2 in presence 32. (d)
of a heated metal catalyst (Cu) 33. (b) Acetaldehyde reacts only with nucleophiles. Since the
mobile p electrons of carbon–oxygen double bond are
Cu
CH3CH 2OH CH3CHO H 2 strongly pulled towards oxygen, carbonyl carbon is
300
1 alcohol Aldehyde electron-deficient and carbonyl oxygen is electron-rich.
The electron deficient (acidic) carbonyl carbon is most
H3 C susceptible to attack by electron rich nucleophilic
Cu
CH OH CH3CCH3 H2 reagents, that is, by base. Hence the typical reaction
300
H3 C || of aldehydes and ketones is nucleophilic addition.
2° Alcohol O 34. (c)
Ketone
ALDEHYDES, KETONES AND CARBOXYLIC ACIDS 455
35. (d) Cannizzaro reaction is given by aldehydes having no 44. (c) CH3 CHO + 2Cu2+ + OH– CH3COOH + Cu2O
-hydrogen atom in the presence of conc. alkali, aldol Fehling solution (red)
condensation is given by aldehydes and ketones 45. (c) Aldol condensation is given by carbonyl compounds
having at least one -atom in presence of alkali or in which have -hydrogen atoms.
presence of acids HCHO does not have any -hydrogen atom, so it
36. (b) Aldehydes containing no -hydrogen atom on does not give aldol condensation.
warming with 50% NaOH or KOH undergo 46. (b) Cannizzaro reaction is given by aldehydes and ketones
disproportionation i.e. self oxidation - reduction known which do not have -hydrogen atom. Benzaldehyde
as Cannizzaro’s reaction. (C6H5CHO) does not have -H atom and hence gives
2 HCHO
50% NaOH
HCOONa CH 3OH
Cannizzaro reaction.
47. (d) Compounds having – CHO group reduce Tollen’s
37. (d) I2 and Na2CO3 react with acetophenone (C6H5COCH3)
reagent to silver mirror. It is called silver mirror test.
to give yellow ppt. of CHI 3 but benzophenone
(C6H5COC6H5) does not and hence can be used to O O
|| ||
distinguish between them. H C OH CH3 (CHOH) 3 C H
38. (b) When benzaldehyde is refluxed with aqueous alcoholic
(a) (b)
potassium cyanide, two molecules of benzaldehyde
condense together to form benzoin O
H O Both (a) and (b) have – C – H group so both of them
KCN (alc)
—C +C— give positive silver mirror test.
O H 48. (b) Tollen’s reagent is ammonical AgNO3. Aldehydes form
H O silver mirror with it and ketones do not show any
— C– C — change. So Tollen’s reagent is used to distinguish
OH between aldehydes and ketones.
Benzoin 49. (a) Aldehydes and ketones are reduced to alkanes by
39. (b) CH 3 COCH 3 3I 2 4 NaOH Clemmensen reduction.
Acetone
Zn–Hg/HCl H
CHI 3 3NaI CH 3COONa 3H 2 O C=O C + H2O
Iodoform H
Thus acetone reacts with iodine to form iodoform in 50. (a) Wolf- Kishner reduction
the presence of NaOH. (i) NH2 – NH2 H
40. (c) Aldol condensation is given by the compounds which C=O C
(ii) KOH H
contain hydrogen atom. As the given compound
51. (c) Only aldehydes and ketones react with
does not contain hydrogen atom. Hence it does not
2, 4-dinitrophenylhydrazine.
undergo aldol condensation.
O OH
O || |
( H 2O ) HCN
41. (b) CH3–C=O + H2N–NH–C–NH2 52. (b) CH3 C H CH3 C H
acetaldehyde |
H CN
O OH
CH3–CH=N–NH–C–NH2 Hydrolysis
|
acetaldehyde semicarbazone CH3 C H
|
42. (d) Iodoform test is exhibited by ethyl alcohol, COOH
acetaldehyde, acetone, methyl ketone and those Lactic acid
alcohols which possess CH3 CH(OH)-group. As 53. (d) HCHO does not undergo iodoform test, while
3-pentanone does not contain CH3CO-group therefore
acetaldehyde undergoes iodoform test ( I 2 in presence
it does not give iodoform test.
of base) to form yellow precipitate of iodoform.
O
54. (d) Aldehydes can be oxidised by all the three given
C–CH3 CH2–CH3 reagents.
55. (c) Iodoform test is given by compounds which have
43. (b) Zn-Hg/HCl CH3CO group.
O
Phenyl methyl Ethyl ||
ketone benzene CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 C CH 3
This reaction is known as Clemmensen's reduction. 2-pentanone
EBD_7207
O 59. (a) Aldehydes and ketones having at least one -hydrogen

|| atom in presence of dilute alkali give -hydroxy
CH 3 CH 2 C CH 2 CH 3 aldehyde or -hydroxy ketone
3-pentanone
O
2-pentanone has CH3CO group, so it gives iodoform ||
test, while 3-pentanone does not have CH3CO group, CH3 C HCH 2 CHO
|
so it does not give iodoform test. H
56. (c) In cross aldol condensation aromatic aldehydes or Acetaldehyde
ketones (with or without -hydrogen) react with
aldehydes, ketones or esters having -hydrogen atoms OH
in the presence of dilute alkali to form a -unsaturated |
dil.NaOH
CH3 C CH 2 CHO
carbonyl compound. |
Example, H
Aldol
OH
(i) C6 H5CHO CH3CHO CH3 CH CH.CHO
Benzaldehyde Acetaldehyde H 2O Crotonaldehyde
C6 H5CHOHCH 2 CHO 60. (b) Clemmensen reduction is
– H2O Zn–Hg/HCl
C=O CH 2
C6 H 5 CH CHCHO 61. (a) Aldehydes, other than formaldehyde, when treated
Cinnamaldehyde with RMgX give 2º alcohols.
CH3 O
O
| 62. (a) R C H + NH2 NH2 R C N NH2
(ii) C6 H 5 C O H 3C C C6 H 5 H
Acetophenone Aldehyde Hydrazine Aldehyde hydrazone
CH3 O O OH
| || |
Aluminium HCN
C6 H 5 C CH C C6 H5 63. (a) R– C –R R-– C — CN
t-butoxide KCN |
Dyprone
R (A)
R R OMgX
57. (c) C = O + R'MgX C OH
R R R' |
Reduction by
HOH
R – C – CH 2 NH 2
LiAlH 4 (B) |
R R
R C – OH + Mg(OH)X 64. (b)
R'
3° alcohol 65. (d) Iodoform test is given by compounds having CH3CO–
group or secondary alcohols having CH3– as one of
58. (a) When acetaldehyde is treated with alcohol in the alkyl groups, i.e., CH3CHOHR or CH3CH2OH because
presence of dry HCl , then acetal is formed it is readily oxidised by halogen (present in reagent) to
H
CH 3 CH 3 OR |
dry HCl CH3CHO which has CH C O group.
C= O + ROH C 3
66. (d)
H H OH 67. (a) Aldehydes (e.g. CH3CHO) restore the pink colour of
Hemiacetal Schiff’s reagent.
68. (a) fusion
CH 3 OR C 6 H 5 COC 6 H 5 KOH
ROH
H2O + C C6 H 6 C 6 H 5COO K
69. (c) The nucleophile is SO3 HSO3– , SO3Na
– – not
H OR
Acetal 70. (c) Wolf-Kishner reduction is reduction of carboxyl
compound into alkane.
Hence, option (a) is correct. 71. (b) Ammonical AgNO3 is Tollen’s reagent.
72. (d) 73. (c) O
74. (d) These reactions lead to replacement of oxygen atom C OMgBr
MgBr
of carbonyl group to form hydrazones and oximes.
+
75. (a) Cannizzaro’s reaction is shown by aldehydes lacking (i) CO2 H3O
-H-atom. Aldol condensation reactions are shown
by aldehydes having -H-atoms.
O
76. (b) NaBH4 selectively reduces the aldehyde group to
alcohol without affecting double bond in a organic C O H
compound. So, X is NaBH4.
NaBH + Mg(OH)Br
4
C6 H5 CH = CHCHO C6 H5 CH = CHCH2OH
77. (a) All ketones in (i), (ii) and (iii) contain abstractable 'P'
Benzoic acid
alpha–proton while all aldehydes do not contain
alpha–hydrogen. 96. (c)
97. (d) In carboxylates (conjugate base of carboxylic acids),
78. (a) Benzaldehyde undergoes Cannizzaro reaction, which
resonance is more significant because the two
forms benzoic acid and benzylalcohol as the product.
resonating structures are similar, while in phenoxide,
79. (c) 80. (b) 81. (a) the resonating structures are not equivalent, alkoxide
82. (d) Automobile exhausts are artificial source of isobutyric ions do not show resonance.
acid. 98. (a) 99. (a)
83. (c) Vinegar is 6 - 8% solution of acetic acid. 100. (c) Bromine is less electronegative than F, further in
84. (b) The overall reaction involved is BrCH2CH2COOH, Br is more away from the –COOH
H 2O H 2O group than in CH3CHBrCOOH.
CH 3 CN CH 3 CONH 2
O CH3
HCl || |
CH3 COO NH 4 CH3COOH + NH 4 Cl 101. (c) CH 3 C OH HO– CHCH 3
Ethanoic acid Propan-2-ol
On reduction cyanides yield 1 amines. They do not
undergo decarboxylation or electrolysis.
O CH3
R || |
COOH CH3 C O– CHCH3
85. (a) KMnO 4 / OH – 102. (a)
K 2Cr2O7 or dil. HNO3 103. (c) pKa = –logKa; HCOOH is the strongest acid and hence
R = Any alkyl group it has the highest Ka or lowest pKa value.
Benzoic acid
104. (c)
86. (b) Both C–O bonds are identical and each O possesses 105. (b) LiAlH4 in presence of ether can be used to convert
partial negative charge. acetic acid into ethanol.
87. (c) Formic acid cannot be prepared by Grignard reagent.
ether
88. (b) CH3COOH + 3LiAlH4
acetic acid
CH3 CHCl2 CHO [CH3CH2O]4AlLi + 2LiAlO2 + 4H2
H 2O
Cl 2 / h
373 K H
[CH3CH2O]4AlLi CH3CH2OH
Toluene Benzal chloride Benzaldehyde ethanol
89. (d) 106. (c) Carboxylic acids are weak acids.
90. (c) Carbonyl group acts as a deactivating and 107. (c) Removal of CO2 from carboxylic acid is called
metadirecting group. decarboxylation.
91. (d) Primary and secondary alkyl groups oxidised to give 108. (b) It is a test for –COOH gp.;
carboxylic acid while tertiary alkyl group remain R–COOH+NaHCO3 RCOONa + H2O + CO2 .
unaffected. 109. (d)
92. (b) 93. (d) COOH COOC2H5
94. (b) Due to H-bonding.
HCl
95. (b) Grignard reagent forms addition product with bubbled 110. (c) + C2H5OH + H2O
Ethanol
dry
carbondioxide which on hydrolysis with HCl yields
benzoic acid. This process is known as esterification.
EBD_7207
111. (c) This reaction is an example of Hell - Volhard Zelinsky 122. (c) Chlorine is electron withdrawing group. Further
reaction. In this reaction acids containing – H on inductive effect is stronger at position than
treatment with X2 /P give di-halo substituted acid. -position. i.e.,
Br2 /P
CH 3 – CH 2 COOH CH 3 CBr2 COOH
CH 2ClCOOH CH 2 ClCH 2 COOH
112. (c) 3CH 3COOH PCl3 CH 3 COCl + H3PO3 123. (b)
Acetyl Phosphorous
Chloride acid STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS
113. (b) 124. (b) Carbonyl compounds have substantial dipole moments
114. (a) –COOH group when attached to benzene ring and are polar in nature. The high polarity of the
deactivates the ring and substitution occurs at carbonyl group is due to resonance.
m-position. (HNO3 + H2SO4) is a source of + NO2 125. (a) Primary alcohols on oxidation give carboxylic acids as
(electrophile) which attacks at m-position. the final product, of course through aldehydes.
COOH COOH Oppenauer oxidation involves oxidation of 2º alcohols
to ketones, and not for the oxidation of 1º alcohols.
+ HNO3 H2SO4 126. (c) If the aldehyde has a boiling point less than 100°C, it
can be prepared by the oxidation of 1° alcohols with
NO2
3- nitrobenzoic acid
regular oxidising agents like acidic permanganate or
dichromate. Since the aldehyde has a lower boiling
115. (b) Br2 / P point than the alcohol, it is distilled off as soon as it is
RCH 2 COOH R CH COOH
HVZ reaction | formed ; so further oxidation to a carboxylic acid is
Br minimized.
'X' 127. (d) The solubility of aldehydes and ketones decreases
rapidly on increasing the length of alkyl chain.
NH3
R CH COOH 128. (a) Aldehydes are generally more reactive than ketones
(Excess) | in nucleophilic addition reactions due to steric and
NH 2 electronic reasons. Sterically, the presence of two
'Y' relatively large substituents in ketones hinders the
116. (d) The yield of product in a reversible reaction can be approach of nucleophile to carbonyl carbon than in
increased by (i) removing one of the products, (ii) aldehydes having only one such substituent.
taking either of the reactant in excess. Electronically, aldehydes are more reactive than
117. (d) Use of SOCl2 and ClCOCOCl forms gaseous by- ketones because two alkyl groups reduce the
products which can be easily removed, giving better electrophilicity of the carbonyl carbon more effectively
yield of RCOCl. Further, oxalyl chaloride is particularly than in former.
easy to use becasue any excess of it can be easily 129. (b) The hydrogen atom that is added to the carbonyl
evaporated due to its low b.p. (62ºC) carbon of the aldehyde in the reduction is derived
directly from the other aldehyde molecule as a hydride
O O O
|| || || ion. The second hydrogen that is added to the
R C OH Cl C C Cl negatively charged oxygen is coming from the solvent
O (consult mechanism of Cannizzaro reaction). Oxidation
|| of one molecule of the compound at the expense of
R C Cl HCl CO CO 2 other molecule of the same compound is known as
118. (b) disproportionation.
119. (a) Salicylic acid, because it stabilizes the corresponding 130. (b) First two steps of the esterification make the question
salicylate ion by intramolecular H-bonding. clear
120. (c) Cl 2CHCOOH is most acidic because it has two O OH
+
chlorine at -position. H
+
R–O–H
121. (a) An electron releasing substituent (+I) intensify the CH3 — C — OH CH3 — C — OH
negative charge on the anion resulting in the decrease Protonated acid
(carbonyl C is more
of stability and thus decreases the acidity of the acid. electrophilic than
Hence acid character decreases as the + I-effect of the that of parent acid)
alkyl group increases as OH
CH3– < CH3CH2– < CH3CH2CH2– < CH3CH2CH2CH2–
R–O–H
Hence the order becomes : (i) > (ii) > (iii) > (iv) CH — C — OH CH3 — C — OH
Protonated acid +
HO R
+ +
MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS 148. (c) (a) C = O + H2NNH2 H
C – OH
H
C = NNH2
131. (a) 132. (c) 133. (b) 134. (d) 135. (b) NHNH2
136. (c) 137. (c) (b) In the reduction of carbonyl group with LiAlH4 or
NaBH4, a hydride ion is transferred from the metal
ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS to the carbonyl carbon (nucleophilic addition)
138. (a) 139. (a) 140. (b) H
141. (a) The molecular mass of acetic acid in benzene is 120 – –
C = O + H– AlH3 C – OAlH3
instead of 60 because the carboxylic acids exists as
cyclic dimers in which two molecules of the acid are 149. (d) Being reversible reaction, the backward reaction i.e.
held together by two strong hydrogen bond. acetal -hemiacetal step can be restricted by minimizing
water content, i.e. by using dry HCl. The step hemiacetal
CRITICAL THINKING TYPE QUESTIONS - aldehyde can be restricted by using excess of alcohol.
150. (c) First step in Cannizzaro reaction is the nucleophilic
142. (d) addition of OH– on the carbonyl carbon.
143. (b) In structure II, presence of positive charge on oxygen
causes the displacement of electrons toward oxygen, H –
H
making carbon more electron deficient than that in OH –
R–C=O (fast) R–C–O
unprotonated carbonyl group.
144. (c) It is the reason for the given fact. OH
145. (d) Higher the electron deficiency on cabonyl carbon, more
146. (c) With ammonia, HCHO forms hexamethylenetetramine, easier will be the attack of the nucleophile
CH3 CHO gives acetaldehydeammonia addition (OH–) on its carbon. Futher, the attack of OH– on the
product, while C6H5CHO gives hydrobenzamide. carbonyl carbon is more easy in case of HCHO because
147. (d) Aldol condensation : its carbon is least hindered having two hydrogens
(steric effect). Thus the intermediate I is formed very
OH New C–C bond
easily which donates hydride ion to another aldehyde
–
OH
2CH3CHO H3C–C–CH2CHO and thus itself oxidised.
H H
|
Kolbe reaction : Ist
H C O OH step
Easier because of electronic
ONa
ONa OH New C–C bond and steric effects
COOH H H H
CO
CO2,140ºC
,140ºC – –
R–C=O
Pressure
Pressure H–C–O 2nd Step
H–C=O +R–C –O
(slow)
OH OH H
OH I
151. (c) OH– and –CH2CHO act as nucleophile in the first two
steps.
CHCl3
Reimer-Tiemann reaction : O
3KOH
|
OH CH 3CHO
CH3 CHO C H 2 CHO CH 3 C H
|
New C–C bond CH 2CHO
OH
CHO OH
CHCl |
+ 3KCl + 2H2O H 2O
3KOH
CH3 CH
(as an acid) |
CH2CHO
Wurtz Fittig reaction :
Na
H3CCl + 2Na + Cl
152. (c)
H3C + 2NaCl H
C6 H5CHO –
C6H5 – C – O + C6H5 – C = O
New C–C bond
H OH
EBD_7207
153. (d) If we observe the haloform reaction carefully, we see 157. (a) Aldol condensation involves an aldehyde or ketone
that –COCH3 group is first halogenated to the trihalo having an –hydrogen atom. This type of
–COCX3 through monohalogeno and dihalogeno condensation occurs in presence of dilute base (i.e.,
compound. It is the –COCX 3 part which then dil NaOH).
undergoes nucleophilic addition. The product easily Only CH3COCH3 will give aldol condensation (Both
loses –CX3 since it is a very good leaving group. HCHO and C6H5CHO lack -hydrogen).
O O 158. (d) H3 C
–
X2, OH C = O + CH 3 MgI
CH3 – C – CH3 CH3 – C – CH2Cl
H 3C
I II
H3 C
O O H OH H2 O
C O MgI
CH3 – C – CHCl2 CH3 – C – CCl3 H3 C
III IV CH3
– CH3
O O
OH
– |
CH3 – C – CCl3 CH3 – C – CCl3 H3C C OH + Mg(OH)I
|
OH CH3
Tert butyl
O alcohol
–
CH3 – C + CCl3 159. (d) Ketones do not respond to Tollen’s test. Aldehydes
respond to Tollen’s test.
OH
160. (b) R R OH
Thus all compounds (I to IV) are ultimately converted NH3
to CHCl3 (chloroform).
C = O HCN C
R R CN
154. (c) 2CH3CHO 1st Product,
2 CH 3CH 2CHO 2 nd Product R NH2 R NH2
HOH
C C
CH3CH 2CHO CH3CHO 3rd Product; R CN R COOH
CH3 C H 2 CHO CH 3CHO 4 th Product 161. (d) 162. (a) 163. (a)
164. (b) The car bon atom of the carbonyl group of
155. (d) Dihydrogen sodium phosphate (NaH2PO4) does not
benzaldehyde is less electrophilic than carbon atom of
have a lone pair of electrons on the P atom. As such it the carbonyl group present in propanal. The polarity
can not act as a nucleophile and hence does not react of the carbonyl group is reduced in benzaldehyde due
with aldehydes and ketones. to resonance as shown below and hence it is less
156. (d) Aldehydes which contain a -hydrogen on a reactive than propanal.
saturated carbon, i.e., CH 3CH 2CHO undergo aldol 165. (b) Aldehydes and ketones react with hydrogen cyanide
condensation. (HCN) to yield cyanohydrins. This reaction occurs
very slowly with pure HCN. Therefore, it is catalysed
H CH3 by a base and the generated cyanide ion (CN– ) being
| |
a stronger nucleophile readily adds to carbonyl
CH3CH 2 – C O H C CHO
propanol | compounds to yield corresponding cyanohydrins
H 166. (b) Dry hydrogen chloride protonates the oxygen of the
carbonyl compounds and therefore, increases the
H CH3 electrophilicity of the carbonyl carbon facilitating the
| |
OH nucleophilic attack by the alcohol molecule. Dry HCl
CH3CH 2 C CHCHO
| gas also absorbs the water produced in these reactions
OH thereby shifting the equilibrium in the forward
3-hydroxy-2-methylpentanal
direction.
167. (a) Because of resonance in benzaldehyde which is not

O
possible in case of acetaldehyde the positive charge
NH
3 Æ CH CH COO- NH+
on the carbonyl carbon decreases and hence there is CH3CH 2 - C- OH æææ 3 2 4
decrease in reactivity.
(A) (B)
168. (c) Acetal formed upon reaction of ethylene glycol and
D
HCl, which is unaffected by base hence unwanted ææÆ CH 3CH 2 CONH 2
reaction does not occur due to presence of carbonyl (C)
group.
169. (c) 2, 2-dimethyl propanal gives Tollen’s test and KOH Br2
3-methylbutan-2-one gives iodoform test. CH 3CH 2 NH 2
170. (d)
179. (a) The correct order of increasing acid strength
OH CF3COOH > MeOCH2COOH > CH3COOH
3 1 > (Me)2CH.COOH
H3C 2 COOH
171. (a) Electron withdrawing groups increase the acid strength
6 4
and electron donating groups decrease the acid
5 CH 3
strength.
IUPAC name of the structure is 3-ethyl-2-hydroxy 180. (a) Grignard reagents and nitriles are useful for converting
-4-methylhex-3-en-5-ynoic acid. alkyl halide into corresponding carboxylic acids having
one carbon atom more than that present in alkyl halides.
172. (c) CN NaOH
R X R CN RCOONa
COCH3
173. (c) C6H 6
181. (a) CH COOH +PCl CH3COCl
3 5 AnhydAlCl 3
H 2O [A]
(C 6 H5CO)2 O 2C 6 H5 – COOH
174. (b) Friedle Craft
benzoic anhydride benzoic acid reaction
H2O OH OMgBr
C6 H5COOCOCH3 C6 H5 COOH CH 3COOH H
+
MgBrC2H5
bezoyl ethanoic benzoic acid ethanoic acid C2H5 – C – CH3 ether C2H5 – C – CH3
anhydride
hydrolysis
175. (b) 176. (a)
177. (b) Recall that presence of electron-withdrawing group (C)
increases, while presence of electron-releasing group
decreases the acidity of carboxylic acids. 182. (c) An alkyl group attached to benzene ring can be
oxidised only when it contains at least one -hydrogen
O O atom. Thus here –CH3 group is oxidised and Me3C–
|| || group not. However, Me 3 C– group may cause
ClCH 2COOH H C OH CH 3
C OH
(electron-withdrawing gp.)
oxidation of the benzene ring to –COOH.
(Electron-releasing character
increasing from Left to Right) 183. (a) 184. (a)
185. (c) Electron withdrawing substituent (like halogen, —NO2,
O C6H5 etc.) would disperse the negative charge and
|| hence stabilise the carboxylate ion and thus increase
C2H5 C OH acidity of the parent acid. On the other hand, electron-
releasing substituents would intensify the negative
charge, destabilise the carboxylate ion and thus
NH3 Br2
178. (d) A B C CH3CH 2 NH 2 decrease acidity of the parent acid.
(I) II KOH,(III)
Electronegativity decreases in order
Reaction (III) is a Hofmann bromamide reaction. Now F > Cl > Br
formation of CH3CH2NH2 is possible only from a and hence –I effect also decreases in the same order,
compound CH3CH2CONH2(C) which can be obtained therefore the correct option is
from the compound CH3CH2COO– NH+4 (B). [FCH2COOH > ClCH2COOH > BrCH2COOH >
Thus (A) should be CH3CH2COOH CH3COOH]
EBD_7207
186. (d) V is most stable because its anion is stabilized to a COOH COOH
greater extent through H – bonding with H atom of OH OH OH
HO
present on both ortho-positions ; followed by II in > >
which one OH group is present. Compound IV comes
next to II because here –OCH3 group is present in ortho V II
position which although is not capable of forming

COOH COOH COOH
H–bonding yet more acidic than p-HOC6H4COOH (III)
due to ortho effect. Compound III is less acidic than OCH3
benzoic acid because of electron-releasing group in > >
the para position. Thus IV I
OH
III
AMINES 473
FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS 14. (c) C2 H5I NH3 C2 H5 NH 2 HI

Ethyl
1. (c) RNH 2 R 2 NH R3N iodide
Primary amine Secondary amine Tertiary amine C 2 H 5 OH NH 3 C 2 H 5 NH 2 H2O
2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (d) 15. (d) 16. (d)
5. (c) 1° amines have –NH2 group in their structure. 4 primary 17. (d) For the preparation of Me3CNH2, the required alkyl
amines are possible by C4H11N. halide is Me3CX which will react with potassium
CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 NH 2 phthalimide, a strong base, to form alkene rather than
(i) substituted product. For preparing C6H5NH2, C6H5Cl
CH 3 CH 2 CH CH 3 will be the starting halide in which Cl is non-reactive.
| 18. (c) 19. (d) 20. (c)
NH 2
21. (d) Reduction with iron scrap and hydrochloric acid is
(ii) preferred because FeCl2 formed gets hydrolysed to
CH3 CH3 release hydrochloric acid during the reaction. Thus,
| |
CH3 C CH3 only a small amount of hydrochloric acid is required
CH3 C CH 2 NH 2
| | to initiate the reaction.
H NH 2 22. (b) 23. (c) 24. (a)
(iii) (iv) 25. (b) Amines possess fishy smell.
6. (b) The compound contains longest chain of 6C atoms 26. (c) 27. (b) 28. (b)
and amino group. Hence it is an alkanamine. 29. (b) Basic nature of amines arises due to presence of lone
7. (d) 8. (d) 9. (a) pair of e–1s on the N-atom, which can be shared with
10. (c) CH3NC (methyl isocyanide) on reduction with LiAlH4 an electron deficient species.
gives secondary amine 30. (a)
O 31. (a) Secondary amine is more basic than primary amine.
||
11. (b) CH 3 CH 2 C NH 2 Br2 KOH 32. (d) Amines are basic in nature
CH3 CH 2 NH 2 33. (b) (CH3)3N < CH3NH2 < (CH3)2 NH < C2H5NH2
12. (d) R N C
4[H]
RNH CH3 34. (a)
alkyl isocyanide secondary amine 35. (a) Secondary amines are more basic than tertiary amines
O O due to stabilisation of 2° amine by hydrogen bonding
with solvent molecule.
KOH –+
13. (c) NK 36. (c) Aliphatic amines are more basic than aromatic amines.
NH
Resonance decreases the basic character due to
delocalisation of shared pair of electrons on nitrogen
O O within benzene nucleus
Phthalimide N-Potassium phthalimide 37. (b) Basic character of amines is
(a nucleophile)
2° > 1 ° > 3° > NH3
O
RX / DMF RNH 2 38. (b) CH2–NH2 compound is most basic due

NR
SN 2 rxn
to localized lone pair of electron on nitrogen atom while
O other compounds have delocalized lone pair of electron.
N-alkyl phthalimide 39 (c) 40. (a) 41. (b)
O 42. (d) Amines give alcohols only on reaction with HNO2
and not on hydrolysis.
OH
+ H2N R 43. (b) Aniline gives dyes on coupling reaction with phenols
OH Primary and p-amines.
amine 44. (c) Aryl amines do not produce phenol on treatment with
O
Phthalic acid
nitrous acid
EBD_7207
474 AMINES
45. (c) Methyl amine is a stronger base than ammonia due to 54. (d) Nitrous acid reacts differently with aliphatic and
+I effect. The alkyl groups which are electron releasing aromatic amines in cold.
groups increase the electron density around the
C2 H5 NH 2 HONO C2 H5OH N 2
nitrogen thereby increasing the availability of the lone 1 Amine Alcohol
pair of electrons to proton or lewis acid and making
the amine more basic
NH3 CH3NH2 NH 2 N N
Kb = 1.8 × 10–5 44 × 10–5
+ Cold
46. (a) Any primary amine means both aliphatic as well as HONO Cl
aromatic but monoalkylamines means only 1° aliphatic
amines. Therefore, option (a) is correct while (d) is (NaNO 2 HCl) Benzene diazonium
wrong. chloride
RNH2+ CHCl3+ 3KOH RNC 3KCl 3H 2 O 55. (c)

alkyl
isocyanide NH2 OHC
47. (c) We know that
CH 3CH 2 NH 2 CHCl 3 3KOH 56. (c) + N = CH
CH 3CH 2 NC 3KCl 3H 2O
In this reaction, bad smelling compound ethyl 57. (c) The compounds containing active H-atoms (H atoms
isocyanide (CH 3CH 2 NC) is produced. This equation attached to N, O or S) react with CH3COCl to form
acetyl derivatives.
is known as carbylamine reaction.
48. (a) Acylation occurs in one step only because lone pair 58. (d) 59. (b) 60. (b) 61. (d) 62. (d)
of nitrogen is delocalized with acyl group. 63. (a) 64. (d)
65. (a) Hinsberg’s method is based on the use of benzene
O O–
.. sulphonyl chloride.
R – NH – C – CH 3 R – NH – C – CH 3 66. (c) The inclusion of C6H5CO gp.in a molecule is called
–
benzoylation
49. (d) R – NH2 + CHCl3 alc. KOH
R N C 67. (d) Aniline is insoluble in water, because its –NH2 group
can’t form H- bond with water due to bulky phenyl
group.
NH2 + CHCl3
68. (c) 69. (b) 70. (d)
71. (a) Pyridine is a stronger base than the amine, pyridine
+ – removes HCl formed in acylation reaction of amines
alc. KOH N C and shifts the equilibrium to the right hand side.
72. (b) The hydrogen attached to nitrogen in sulphonamide
HNO2 is strongly acidic due to the presence of strong
50. (b) RNH2 ROH + H2O + N2
electron withdrawing sulphonyl group. Hence, it is
(A) (B) (C)
soluble in alkali.
51. (c) Since the organic amino compound on reaction with
nitrous acid at low temperature produces an oily 73. (d) In case of substituted aniline, electron releasing groups
nitrosoamine so the organic amino compound is a like –OCH3, –CH3 increase basic strength whereas
secondary aliphatic amines. electron withdrawing groups like –NO2 , –SO3H,
–COOH, –X decrease it.
273 278K
52. (a) C 2 H 5 NH 2 + HNO 2
Ethyl amine Nitrous acid .. –
NH2 N NCl
C2 H5OH + N2 + H2O
Ethanol 74. (a) NaNO2 /HCl
Note : This reaction is used as a test for aliphatic amines 0C
Diazotisation
since no other class of amines liberates N2 gas on
treatment with HNO2. Br
53. (a) 1° amines (aliphatic and aromatic) react with
CHCl3/KOH to yield isocyanide (foul smelling) This is CuBr/HBr
known as carbylamine test which is not given by 2° Sandmeyer reaction
and 3° amines.
AMINES 475
81. (c) Primary aromatic amines react with nitrous acid to
NH2 N2 Cl yield arene diazonium salts.
cold
NaNO2 ,HCl
ArNH2 + NaNO2 + 2HX
75. (b) æææææÆ 1° Aromatic amine
(0-5∞C) Ar—N = N+X– + NaX + 2H2O
aniline diazonium Arene diazonium salt
chloride The diazonium group can be replaced by fluorine by
treating the diazonium salt with fluoroboric acid
76. (a) Azo dye is prepared by diazo coupling reaction of
(HBF4). The precipitated diazonium fluoroborate is
phenol with diazonium salt.
isolated, dried and heated until decomposition occurs
– to yield the aryl fluoride. This reaction is known as
N+2Cl OH Balz-Schiemann reaction.
HBF4 heat
Ar—N2+X– Ar—N2+BF4–
+ N=N
Ar—F + BF3 + N2
Benzene + –
p–hydroxyazobenzene NH 2 N 2 Cl
diazonium
chloride
(– N = N –) group is called azo – group. 82. (a) NaNO2 CuCN

HCl, 278K
+
NH2 N NCl Diazotization Benzene diazonium
chloride
77. (d) NaNO2 ,HCl CuCN (A)
C N
0°C
Aniline (diazotisation) (A)
benzene
diazonium
chloride Benzonitrile
(B)
Sandmeyer reaction
83. (d) 84. (c) 85. (a)
86. (a) Excess of HCl is used to convert free aniline to aniline
hydrochloride otherwise free aniline would undergo
coupling reaction with benzenediazonium chloride.
87. (b) 88. (d) 89. (b) 90. (d) 91. (b)
92. (b)
78. (b) The given reaction is known as Sandmeyer’s reaction. STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS
–
N2+Cl OH 93. (b) The fourth orbital of nitrogen in all amines contains an
unshared pair of electrons. Due to the presence of
H 2O
unshared pair of electrons, the angle C–N–E, (where E
79. (b) + N2+HCl is C or H) is less than 109.5°.
94. (b) Lower aliphatic amines are soluble in water solubility
decreases with increase in molar mass of amines.
CH3 CH3
p- cresol
Higher amines are essentially insoluble in water.
95. (b) Primary and secondary amines are engaged in
intermolecular association due to hydrogen bonding
+ – between nitrogen of one and hydrogen of another
80. (b) N NCl + OH
molecule. This intermolecular association is more in
Benzene diazonium chloride Phenol primary amines than in secondary amines as there are
two hydrogen atoms available for hydrogen bond
formation in it. Tertiary amines do not have
N= N OH intermolecular association due to the absence of
hydrogen atom available for h ydrogen bond
p-Hydroxyazobenzene formation. Therefore, the order of boiling points of
(orange dye)
isomeric amines is as follows :
Primary > Secondary > Tertiary
EBD_7207
476 AMINES
96. (b) 115. (a) The reaction is Hoffmann bromamide reaction
97. (a) The yield in Sandmayer reaction is found to be better O
than Gattermann reaction. ||
R C NH 2 Br2 4NaOH
R NH 2 2NaBr Na 2CO3 2H 2O
98. (a) 99. (a) 100. (b) 101. (c)
O
R – NH2 contains one carbon less than ||
ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS R C NH 2
102. (a) 103. (d) 116. (a) Secondary amines are more basic than tertiary amines
104. (a) Amines are basic due to the presence of a lone pair of due to stabilisation of 2° amine by hydrogen bonding
electrons on nitrogen atom. The lone pair can be easily with solvent molecule.
donated. 117. (d) Aromatic amines are less basic than aliphatic amines.
Among aliphatic amines the order of basicity is
105. (d)
2° > 1° > 3°. The electron density is decreased in 3°
106. (c) Acetylation decreases the electron-density in the amine due to crowding of alkyl group over N atom
benzene ring thereby preventing oxidation. which makes the approach and bonding by a proton
107. (a) 108. (c) relatively difficult. Therefore the basicity decreases.
Further Phenyl group show – I effect, thus decreases
109. (a) HNO3 2H 2SO4 2HSO4 NO2 H3O the electron density on nitrogen atom and hence the
basicity.
CRITICAL THINKING TYPE QUESTIONS dimethylamine (2° aliphatic amine) is strongest base
among given choices.
CH3 The correct order of basic strength is
110. (a) C2H5
Dimethylamine > Methyl amine > Trimethyl amine >
HC – N
Aniline.
CH3 C2H5
118. (d) All aliphatic amines are stronger bases than NH3 and
among different ethylamines order of basictity is
N, N- diethyl propan - 2-amine
2° > 1° > 3°. Thus, the correct order is (d) i.e.,
111. (c) (C2H5)2 NH > C2H5NH2 > (C2H5)3N > NH3
112. (c) The compound is derivative of aniline. The positions This anomolous behaviour of tertiary ethyl amine is
of groups are shown by numbering the nuclear C- due to steric factors i.e., crowding of alkyl groups cover
atoms. nitrogen atom from all sides and thus makes the
approach and bonding by a lewis acid relatively
NaOH
113. (a) CH3CONH2 CH3 NH 2 difficult which results the maximum steric strain in
Br2
tertiary amines. The electrons are there but the path is
(Hofmann bromamide reaction) blocked resulting the reduction in its basicity.
114. (a) Aniline cannot be prepared by this method because 119. (b) In aniline the lone pair on N is involved in delocalization
aryl halides do not undergo nucleophilic substitution with benzene ring and is not available for protonation.
with potassium phthalimide under ordinary conditions Methyl amine is a stronger base than ammonia because
to give N-phenyl phthalimide (i.e., cleavage of C–X +I effect of methyl group increases electron density
bond in haloarenes is quite difficult). on N making it more basic than NH3.
CO alc CO NH 2 NH 2
KOH
NH N+K–
CO CO
CO
RX
N–R Cannot be protonated. least basic
CO
H+/H2O CH3 – NH 2
I Effect increases
COOH basicity.
+ RNH2
COOH 120. (a)
AMINES 477
125. (d)
121. (a) (CH3CO) 2 O,Pyridine
NH2
126. (b) CH2–NH2 compound is most basic due
(I)
(i) LiAlH 4 to localized lone pair of electron on nitrogen atom while
NH – C – CH3 other compounds have delocalized lone pair of electron.
(ii) H 2 O
(II) O NH2 NH – CO – CH3
NH – CH2 – CH3 (CH3CO)2 O

127. (b)
(III)
Product (II) is NH – C – CH3 and (III) is

NH – CO – CH3
O
(II)
HNO3
NH – CH2 – CH3 H2SO4
(III) NO2
III > I > II, As + I effect increases the basic strength +
and – R, – I effect shown by – COCH3 reduces the H3O
basic strength.
122. (d) Here again the two amines differ in the nature of
-carbon atom NH2
CH2NH2 CH2NH2
3 2
sp C > sp C
II I
123. (b) Greater the delocalisation of electron pair on N, lesser
is its availability for protonation leading to lesser basic NO2
NH2
character.
.. H
: NH2 CH2NH2 :NH2 :N CH3COCl
128. (c)
> > >
IV II I III O O
Delocalisation not Delocalisation not Delocalisation possible, more
possible, cyclohexyl gp. possible, phenyl gp. is
in III than in I. Further C6H 5– gp. is NH – C – CH3
is electron-releasing electron-withdrawing NH – C – CH3
electron-withdrawing
124. (b) Although – NH2 group is o,p - directing but in
presence of conc. HNO3 it undergoes protonation to Br2 H2O
form – N H3 which, being electron - deficient, becomes

m- directing. Br
+
: NH2 NH3
(A) (B)
conc. HNO3 conc. HNO3
NH2
– NH2 group is – NH+ group is
3
o, p - directing m - directing H 3O
+
N H3
Br
(C)
NO2
Protonated
m - nitroaniline
EBD_7207
478 AMINES
.. 131. (b)
NO2 NH2
129. (b) NO2 NO2 NO2
HNO3 Fe/HCl
H2SO4
NO2 NH2
nitrobenzene Aniline
O HNO2
+ – ..
NH3Cl H–N–C–CH3
NO2 NO2
–N2
H2 O + –
Aniline hydrochloride N- Acetylaniline OH N2Cl
Nitrobenzene and aniline hydrochloride have electron- 132. (a) It is a tertiary amine hence shows above observations.
133. (d) The reaction can be completed as follows:
withdrawing (–NO2 and – N H3 ) groups, hence these
NH2
will undergo electrophilic substitution with difficulty. NaNO2 /HCl CH3
Aniline and N– acetylaniline (acetanilide) have N2Cl + N
(diazotisation) CH3
electron– releasing groups, however –NHCOCH3 is ‘A’ ‘B’ N, N-dimethylaniline
less electron- releasing than – NH 2 due to (Aniline) Benzene
delocalisation of lone pair of electron on N toward diazonium chloride
cold
carbonyl group. Hence aniline (having – NH2) will
undergo electrophilic substitution most easily. CH3
N =N N
130. (b) CH3
‘C’
p-dimethylaminoazobenzene
BIOMOLECULES 491
FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS 16. (d) It is the most abundant organic compound on earth.
17. (d) Tollen’s reagent is reduced by glucose due to aldehydic
1. (c) Carbohydrates, proteins and fats are biomolecules. group and gives grey colour as silver metal.
2. (a) Lactose is a disaccharide. 18. (b) The letter ‘D’ or ‘L’ before the name of any compound
3. (c) It is found in the milk of all animals and imparts indicate the relative configuration of a particular
sweetness to milk (hence named milk sugar). stereoisomer.
4. (d) The disaccharides are sugars which on hydrolysis give 19. (a) 20. (a)
two moles of the same or different monosaccharides. 21. (d) Glucose is a monosaccharide, others are disaccharides.
Sucrose, maltose and lactose (C12H22O11 ) are the Sucrose is a combination of glucose and fructose.
common examples. Maltose is a combination of two glucose units. Lactose
5. (c) Aldo-(keto) pentoses having 5 carbon (or milk sugar) is a combination of glucose and
Aldo-(keto) hexoses having 6 carbon galactose (a hexose sugar).
is an example of Pentose Sugar, arabinose 22. (c) Glucose is considered as a typical carbohydrate which
(aldopentose) glucose, galactose and fructose are contains –CHO and –OH group.
important examples of hexose sugar. 23. (a) Glucose contains an aldehyde group. It is oxidised
6. (d) The most common disaccharide, Lactose has the into acidic group by bromine water and gluconic acid
molecular formula C12H22O11. is formed
7. (a) 8. (d) (O)
CH 2 OH (CHOH) 4 CHO
9. (d) Monosaccharides cannot be hydrolysed to simpler
molecules. CH 2OH (CHOH ) 4 COOH
10. (b) Sucrose is an oligosaccharide and cellulose is a
polysaccharide. Br2 H 2O 2HBr O ob
11. (c) All those carbohydrates which reduce Fehling’s 24. (d) Weak reagent like NaHSO3 is unable to open the chain
solution and Tollens’ reagent are referred to as reducing and can’t react with glucose. This explains the inability
sugars. of glucose to form aldehyde bisulphite compound.
12. (a) Glucose (C 6 H12O 6 ) is the simplest molecule which 25. (c) Glucose has 5 hydroxyl groups, hence it reacts with
is monosaccharide while others are polysaccharides acetic anhydride to form a penta-acetate
which on hydrolysis give monosaccharides. 26. (d)
Option (a) is correct. 27. (d) Red P + HI is reducing agent.
13. (d) Glucose is aldohexose. Glucose is a monosaccharide, 28. (c) Pentaacetate of glucose does not react with
i.e. it can not be hydrolysed further to simple sugars. hydroxylamine
Oligosaccharides on hydrolysis give 2-10 molecules 29. (c) Open chain structure is unstable and converted to
of monosaccharides. cyclic.
14. (b) To explain the properties which can not be explained 30. (b)
by open chain structure of glucose it was proposed 31. (a) Natural glucose is dextrorotatory and thus, glucose is
that one of the –OH groups may add to the –CHO also known as dextrose.
group and form a cyclic hemiacetal structure as shown
32. (c)
below. 1
H OH
O
2
1
H—C—OH 1 1
HO —C—H H OH
H —C
2 2 2 3 O
H OH H OH H OH HO H
3 3
HO H HO 3 H HO H
H
4
OH
H 4 OH H 4 OH H 4 OH 5
H
H 5 H 5 H 5
6 OH CH2OH
6CH2OH CH OH
6 2 6CH2OH -D-(+) - Glucose
– D – (+) – Glucose – D – (+) – Glucose
15. (c) Glucose contain aldehyde group. Hence it give positive (Fischer formula)
Fehling solution test.

EBD_7207
492 BIOMOLECULES
33. (b) -D glucose and –D glucose are the isomers which H H
H
differ in the orientation (configuration) of H and OH ROH
43. (c) – C = O + ROH – C – OH – C – OR + H2O
groups around C1 atom.
OR OR
1 1 An aldehyde A hemiacetal An acetal
H —C —OH HO —C —H
2
H —C —OH H —C2—OH – C = O + ROH – C – OH
ROH
– C – OR + H2O
O O
HO —C3—H HO —C3—H OR OR
A hemiketal A ketal
H —C4—OH H —C4—OH
A ketone
5 5
In cyclic structure of fructose, ketonic group has
H —C H —C reacted with an alcoholic group, it is said to be an
6 6
CH2OH CH2OH example of an intramolecular cyclic hemiketal.
– D - glucose – D - glucose 44. (a) Sweet taste of fruits is due to fructose.
45. (a)
34. (b) T h e t wo i somer i c for m s ( – a n d –) of
46. (c) Honey is collected from flowers by honey bee which
D-glucopyranose differ in configuration only at
contains fructose.
C–1; hence these are called anomers.
47. (c) Fructose is the sweetest sugar.
35. (b)
48. (a) We know that cellulose (C 6 H12 O 6 ) n is the chief
36. (d) constituent of cell walls of plants. It is the most
1
H OH abundant organic substance found in nature. It is a
2 polymer of glucose with 3500 repeat units in a chain.
H OH 49. (b) Sucrose is a disaccharide which on hydrolysis gives
3 O one molecule of glucose (monosaccharide) and
HO H
fructose (monosaccharide).
4
H OH
H
5 C12 H 22 O11 H 2 O C6 H12 O 6 C6 H12 O 6
H sucrose glucose fructose
CH2OH 50. (b) RNA has D (–) – Ribose and the DNA has 2–Deoxy
-D-(+) - Glucose D (–) – ribose as the carbohydrate unit.
O 5 O
(Fischer formula) HOCH2 OH HOCH2 OH
H H 4 H H 1
37. (b) Glucose and fructose both are reduced by Fehling’s
solution, Tollen’s reagent and Bendict’s solution. H H H H
3 2
Therefore, these three reagents can not be used to OH OH OH H
distinguish between glucose and fructose. ribose 2-deoxy ribose
38. (b) Maltose and glucose are reducing sugars. From the structures it is clear that 2nd carbon in DNA
do not have OH group.
39. (a) Glucose contains -CHO group and fructose contains
> C = O group,. Hence these are functional isomers. 51. (d) Carbohydrates are stored in the body as glycogen.
40. (d) Glucose being an aldose responds to Tollen’s test 52. (c)
while fructose, although a ketose, undergoes 53. (b) CH2OHCH2CHOHCHOHCH2OH does not correspond
rearrangement in presence of basic medium (provided to Cx(H2O)y.
by Tollen’s reagent) to form glucose, which then 54. (d) Lactose (milk sugar) is a disaccharide, it is made of
responds to Tollen’s test. -D-galactose and -D-glucose
41. (d) CH2OH
CH2OH H O H
42. (b) Fructose has the molecular formula C6 H12 O6. It HO O H
H OH H
belongs to D-series and is laevorotatory compound. It OH H OH
H H
also exists in two cyclic forms which are obtained by H OH
H OH
the addition of –OH at C-5 to the >C=O group. The
ring thus formed is a five membered ring and is named 55. (b) 56. (b)
as furanose with analogy to the compund Furan. Furan 57. (a) Sucrose does not have free — CHO or CO group, hence
is a five membered cyclic compound with one oxygen it does not undergo mutarotation.
and four carbon atoms. 58. (b) 59. (d)
BIOMOLECULES 493
60. (b) Sucrose is dextrorotatory but after hydrolysis gives 73. (d) In neutral solution, amino acids exists as dipolar ion (also
dextrorotatory glucose and laevorotatory fructose. known as zwitter ions or inner salts) where the proton of
Since the laevorotation of fructose (–92.4°) is more –COOH group is transferred to the – NH2 group to form
than dextrorotation of glucose (+52.5°), the mixture is inner salt, known as dipolar ion.
laevororatory. R R
61. (c) Chemically amylose is a long unbranched chain with .. | H 2O .. |
H2N–CH–COOH H2N–CHOO–+H+
200-1000 -D-(+ -glucose units held by C1-C4 -Amino acid
glycosidic linkage. R
+ |
62. (b) It is a branched chain polymer of -D-glucose units in H3N–CH–COO–
which chain is formed by C1-C4 glycosidic linkage Zwitter ion
whereas branching occurs by C1-C6 glycosidic linkage. 74. (c) With the exception of glycine all the 19 other common
63. (b) Cellulose is a straight chain polysaccharide. amino acids have a uniquely different functional group
64. (b) The carbohydrates are stored in animal body as on the central tetrahedral alpha carbon.
glycogen. It is also known as animal starch because
H
its structure is similar to amylopectin and is rather more |
highly branched. H — C — COOH
|
65. (d) Carbohydrates are essential for life in both plants and
NH 2
animals. Honey has been used for a long time as an
instant source of energy by ‘Vaids’ in ayurvedic system glycine
of medicine. Carbohydrates are used as storage 75. (d) Zwitter ion contains both +ve and –ve charge. Proton
molecules as starch in plants and glycogen in animals. of –COOH group is transferred to the –NH2 group.—
Cell wall of bacteria and plants is made up of cellulose. NH3+ group is acidic since it can donate a proton and
We build furniture etc., from cellulose in the form of —COO– group is basic since it can accept a proton.
wood and cloth ourselves with cellulose in the form of 76. (a) Amino Acids are amphoteric in nature. So for it a special
cotton fibre. They provide raw materials for many term is coined called Zwitter ion.
important industries like textiles, paper lacquers and They have following structure in solution
breweries. R
66. (b) There are 20 amino acids in man out of which 10 amino + –
acids are essential amino acids. These essential amino H3N–C–COO
acids are supplied to our bodies by food which we H
take because they cannot be synthesised in the body. [Zwitter Ion]
These are (1) valine (2) leucine (3) Isoleucine (4) Phenyl 77. (d) Proline is a secondary amine
alanine (5) Threonine (6) Methionine (7) Lysine (8) 78. (a) Proteins and peptides are linked by peptide linkages
Tryptho phone (9) Arginine (10) Histidine.
67. (N) All the given options are example of neutral amino O
||
acids. ( C NH) .
68. (b) - Amino acid is the building block unit of protein
79. (c) The bond formed between two amino acids by the
which is formed by polymerisation of amino acid
elimination of a water molecule is called a peptide
through peptide linkage.
linkage or bond. The peptide bond is simply another
NH C name for amide bond.
|| C OH H — N— — C– N— H 2 O
O | | || |
O H O H
Carboxyl group Amine group of Peptide bond
69. (a) Except alanine, all amino acids are essential amino acids of one amino acid other amino acid
which cannot be synthesised in the body and must be
The product formed by linking amino acid molecules
obtained through diet.
through peptide linkages. —CO—NH—, is called a
70. (a)
peptide.
71. (c) Amino acids are the compounds having one or more 80. (b) 81. (c)
amino groups and one or more carboxyl groups in the 82. (d) Proteins are highly complex, natural compounds,
same molecule. composed of a large number of different -amino-acids
72. (b) Except glycine, all other naturally occurring joined together with peptide linkage, i.e., they are
- amino acids are optically active, since the -carbon naturally occuring polypeptides.
atom is asymmetric. 83. (d) All these are the examples of globular proteins. These
are soluble in water.
EBD_7207
494 BIOMOLECULES
84. (c) Polypeptide chains in fibrous proteins are held together 102. (b) In this structure of protein atoms are highly coiled
by disulphide and hydrogen bonds. and form a spherical form.
85. (d) Proteins are building blocks of the body but they do 103. (d)
not provide energy for metabolism. 104. (d) When a protein, in its native form, is subjected to a
86. (c) Insulin is an example of globular protein. physical change like change in temperature, or a
87. (c) 88. (b) 89. (b) chemical change like change in pH, the native
90. (c) These are generally insoluble in water. conformation of the molecule is disrupted and proteins
91. (b) The NH of the amide can act as a hydrogen bond donor so formed are called denaturated proteins.
and the carbonyl group can act as a hydrogen bond The denaturation may be reversible or irreversible. The
acceptor. Statements (a), (c) and (d) are false. The coagulation of egg on boiling is an example of
peptide bond has double bond character due to the irreversible protein denaturation.
interaction of the nitrogen lone pair with the carbonyl However, it has been shown now that in some cases,
group. This prevents bond rotation and makes the bond the process is actually reversible. The reverse process
planar. The trans isomer is favoured over the cis isomer. is called renaturation.
92. (a) 105. (c) Tertiary structure indicates the overall structure of the
93. (a) The sequence in which the -amino acids are linked to protein.
one another in a protein molecule is called its primary 106. (b)
structure. 107. (b) Serine contains a hydroxyl functional group on its side
94. (a) chain and so the strongest possible interaction will be
95. (b) The -helix structure is formed when the chain of hydrogen bonding where the hydroxyl group could
-amino acids coils as a right handed screw (called act as a hydrogen bond donor or hydrogen bond
-helix) because of the formation of hydrogen bonds acceptor.
between amide groups of the same peptide chain, i.e., 108. (a) When antigens enter in to the body cells and destroy
NH group in one unit is linked to carbonyl oxygen of them, then antibodies being proteins are synthesised
the third unit by hydrogen bonding. This hydrogen in the body and combine with antigens and destroy
bonding between different units is responsible for these antigens by forming inactive complexes.
holding helix in a position. Therefore antibodies protein destroy antigens.
96. (c) During denaturation 2° and 3° structures are destroyed 109. (b) Enzymes are highly specific for a particular reaction
but 1° structure remains intact. and also for a particular substrate.
97. (a) Primary structure refers to the order of the amino acids
in a protein. 110. (b) Enzymes being biocatalyst can increase the rate of a
98. (d) The hydrophilic/ hydrophobic character of amino acid reaction upto 10 million times. Even very small amount
residues is important to tertiary structure of protein can accelerate a reaction.
rather than to secondary structure. In secondary 111. (b) Enzymes are made up of protein with specific structure.
structure, it is the steric size of the residues that is 112. (b) Triglycerides are lipids, hence these are hydrolysed
important and residues are positioned to minimise by lipases to glycerol and fatty acids.
interactions between each other and the peptide chain. 113. (d) Enzymes are most reactive at optimum temperature.
99. (d) Quaternary structure refers to the overall structure of The optimum temperature for enzyme activity lies
a multiprotein complex where as primary, secondary between 40°C to 60°C.
and tertiary structure refer to the different structural 114. (b) Insulin is a biochemically active peptide harmone
levels of a single protein. secreted by pancreas.
100. (a) The arrangement of polypeptide chains formed as a 115. (a)
result of hydrogen bonding is called secondary 116. (d) Enzymes may or may not require a coenzyme for their
structure of proteins. catalytic action.
-helix is formed by intramolecular H-bonding. 117. (c) Deficiency of vitamin D causes rickets.
-pleated sheet is formed by intermolecular H-bonding. 118. (d) Vitamin D is a fat soluble vitamin.
101. (b) The secondary structure of a protein refers to the
119. (b) Beri-Beri.
shape in which a long peptide chain can exist. There
120. (d) Vitamin Disease caused by deficiency
are two different conformations of the peptide linkage
B6 Dermatitis
present in protein, these are -helix and -conformation.
The -helix always has a right handed arrangement. In B1 Beri-beri
-conformation all peptide chains are streched out to B2 Photophobia, glossitis
nearly maximum extension and then laid side by side B12 Pernicious anaemia
and held together by intermolecular hydrogen bonds. 121. (b) Vitamin E is mainly present in vegetable oils like wheat
The structure resembles the pleated folds of drapery gram oil, sunflower oil, etc.
and therefore is known as -pleated sheet. 122. (a) Vitamin A or retinol.
BIOMOLECULES 495
123. (b) 140. (d) The correct structure of thymine is
124. (c) It is found in liver, egg, milk, meat, and fish. Minute OH
amounts are probably present in all animal cells.
N CH3
Peculiarly, unlike other vitamins, B12 is not found in
significant amounts in green plants.
HO N
125. (a) DNA consists of two polynucleotide chains, each Thymine (T)
chain forms a right handed helical spiral with ten bases
in one turn of the spiral. The two chains coil to double 141. (c)
helix and run in opposite direction held together by 142. (d) Tyrosine is an -amino acid, and not a purine
143. (d)
hydrogen bonding.
144. (c) DNA fingerprinting is same for every cell and cannot
126. (d) O Deoxyribose-Adenine ... Thymine -Deoxyribose O be altered by any known treatment.
OH P P OH
O Deoxyribose-Guanine ... Cytosine -Deoxyribose
O STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS
P P
OH OH
O Deoxyribose-Guanine ... Cytosine -Deoxyribose O 145. (a)
OH P Deoxyribose-Adenine ... Thymine -Deoxyribose
P OH 146. (c) Sucrose is non-reducing in nature. It does not contain
a free aldehydic or ketonic group. Maltose is a
The hydrogen bonds are formed between the base reducing sugar.
(shown by dotted lines). Because of size and 147. (b) Naturally occurring monosaccharides are 20 only.
geometrics of the bases, the only possible pairing in Sucrose is a non–reducing sugar whereas maltose is a
DNA and between G(Guanine) and C(Cytosine) reducing sugar.
through three H-bonds and between A (Adenosine) 148. (b) The six membered cyclic structure of glucose is called
and T (Thymine) through two H-bonds. pyranose structure ( or ), in analogy with pyran.
127. (a) In DNA the complimentary base are Adenine and Pyran is a cyclic organic compound with one oxygen
thymine. atom and five carbon atoms in the ring. The cyclic
Guanine and cytosine structure of glucose is correctly represented by
The genetic information for cell is contained in the Haworth structure.
sequence of bases A, T, G and C in DNA molecule. 149. (d) Sucrose is a dextrorotatory but on hydrolysis gives
128. (b) The DNA sequence that codes for a specific protein is dextrorotatory glucose and laevorotatory fructose.
called a Gene and thus every protein in a cell has a Since the laevorotation of fructose (–92.4°) is more
corrosponding gene. than dextrorotation of glucose (+52.5°), thus the
129. (c) The base pairs of the two strands of DNA are linked resulting mixture is laevorotatory. Glycogen is
together through H-bonds. structurally similar to amylopectin not amylose.
130. (d) DNA has the property of self - replication . It is therefore 150. (a) For statement (i) correct Haworth structure for –D
a reproducing molecule. This unique property of DNA glucose will be.
is at the root of all reproduction. Through its 6
replication, DNA acts as the key to heredity. In the CH2OH
replication of DNA, the two strands of a double helix 5 O
unwind and separate as a template for the formation of H H H
a new complementary strand. 4 1
131. (c) Each chromosome is made up of DNA tightly coiled OH OH OH
H
many times around proteins called histones that 3 2
supports its structure.
H OH
132. (a) 151. (c) Amylose is water soluble component which constitutes
133. (a) DNA has double stranded -helical structure. about 15-20% of strach. Amylopectin is insoluble in
134. (b) DNA is responsible for transmission of heredity and constitutes about 80-85% of starch.
character. 152. (c) Glycine is optically inactive.
135. (b) 153. (a) Gln stands for glutamine. Except glycine, all other
136. (a) Energy is stored in our body in the form of A.T.P. naturally occurring –amino acids are optically active.
137. (d) 154. (c) When the proteins are subjected to the action of heat,
138. (a) Phosphoric acid is the third component in DNA. mineral acids or alkali, the water soluble form of globular
139. (a) Synthesis of polypeptide is known as translation. For protein changes to water insoluble fibrous protein. This
this process three type of RNA are essential. is called denaturation of proteins. During denaturation
secondary and tertiary structures of protein destroyed
but primary structures remains intact.
EBD_7207
496 BIOMOLECULES
155. (c) group, the third molecule of phenylhydrazine condenses

156. (b) Water soluble vitamins must be supplied regularly in to glucosazone. Therefore the value of X is 3
diet because they are readily excreted in urine and
cannot be stored (except vitamin B12) in our body.
157. (b) In secondary structure of DNA adenine forms CHO + H2NNHC6H5 CH = NNHC6H5
hydrogen bonds with thymine whereas cytosine forms
CHOH CHOH
hydrogen bonds with guanine. warm
158. (b) The sugar moiety in DNA molecule is -D-2- (CHOH)3 CH(OH)3
deoxyribose whereas in RNA molecule, it is -D-ribose.
CH2OH CH2OH
Nucleotide is a nucleoside linked to phosphoric acid
Glucose Glucose Phenylhydrozone
at 51– position of sugar moiety.
H2NNHC6 H5
MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS H2NNHC6 H5
CH = NNHC6H5 CH = NNHC6H5
– H2 O
159. (c) 160. (a) 161. (b)
162. (c) Vitamin A - Xerophthalmia C = NNHC6H5 C=O
Vitamin B12 - Pernicious anaemia
CH(OH)3 (CHOH)3
Vitamin C - Scurvy
Vitamin E - Sterility CH2OH CH2OH
Vitamin K - Haemorrhage Glucosazone keto compound of glucose
phenyle hydra zone
163. (c)
164. (a) The hydrolysis of sucrose brings about a change in 170. (c) OHC.(CHOH)4.CH2OH + 5Ac2O
Au.ZnCl2
the sign of rotation from dextro (+) to laevo (–) and the
Glucose Acetic anhydride
product is named as invert sugar.
165. (d) Maltose is compound of two -D - glucose units in OHC. (CHOAc) 4 . CH2 OAc
Glucose penta-acetate
which C1 of one glucose is linked to C4 of another
or penta-acetyl Glucose
glucose unit.
171. (c) Melting point of -glucose 419 K and -glucose is
6
CH2OH 6
CH2OH 323 K.
H 5 OH H 5 OH 172. (a) -D-glucose or -D-glucose when dissolved in water
H H
4 1 O 4 1 and allowed to stand, following equilibrium is
OH H OH H
HO 3 2 3 2 OH stablished, which is called mutarotation.
H OH H OH -D-glucose Open chain form -D-glucose
I II
-D-glucose -D-glucose (+111°) (+19°)
Specific rotation of -form falls until a constant value
166. (a) R is the correct explanation of A. of +52.5° is reached. On the other hand, specific
167. (d) Vitamin D is a fat soluble vitamin and can be stored in rotation of form increases. Specific rotation of
the body since it is not excreted out of the body. equilibrium mixture is 52.5°.
CRITICAL THINKING TYPE QUESTIONS 173. (b) The two monosoccharides are held together by a
glycosidic linkage between C1 of -glucose and C2 of
168. (c) Glucose contains aldehyde group due to which it gives -fructose. Since the reducing groups and glucose and
positive test with ammoniacal silver nitrate. fructose are involved in glycosidic bond formed.
169. (d) We know that glucose reacts with one molecule of Sucrose is non-reducing sugar.
phenyl hydrazine to give phenyl hydrazone. When
174. (c) Cyclic hemiacetal forms of monosaccharide which differ
warmed with excess of phenylhydrazine, the
only in the configuration of the hydroxyl group at C1
secondary alcoholic group adjacent to the aldehyde
are anomers.
group is oxidised by another molecule of
phenylhydrazine to a ketonic group. With this ketonic 175. (a) 176. (c)
BIOMOLECULES 497
Sucrose is a disaccharide of –D-Glucopyranose and

6 O 1 –D-Fructofuranose.
177. (b) HOH2C CH2OH 181. (c) Most of the carbohydrates have a general formula,
5 2 Cx(H2O)y, and were considered as hydrates of carbon.
H OH
4 3 All the compounds which fit into this formula may not
H OH
be classified as carbohydrates. Acetic acid (CH3COOH)
OH H fits into this general formula, C2(H2O)2 but is not a
-D-(–)-Fructofuranose carbohydrate. Similarly, rhamnose, C6H12O5 is a
carbohydrate but does not fit in this definition. A large
number of their reactions have shown that they contain
6 O specific functional groups. Chemically, the
HOH2C OH carbohydrates may be defined as optically active
5
H OH
2 polyhydroxy aldehydes or ketones or the compounds
4 3 which produce such units on hydrolysis.
H CH2OH
1 182. (c) Valine has no functional groups on its side chain. There
OH H is only an alkyl group and so only van der Waals
-D-(–)-Fructofuranose interactions are possible.
178. (c) The hydrolysis of sucrose by boiling with mineral acid 183. (c) 2R S H R S S R
Thiol Disulphide
or by enzyme invertase or sucrase produces a mixture
Example :
of equal molecules of D(+) glucose and
D(–) Fructose.
2HO 2C CHC H 2SH
|
HCl NH2
C12 H 22O11 H 2O C 6 H12O 6 C 6 H12O 6
sucrose D glu cos e D Fructose Cystine
[ D] 66.5º [ D ] 52.5º [ D ] 92 º
Invert sugar ,[ D ] 20º HO 2CCHC H 2S SCH 2 CHC O 2 H
| |
NH 2 NH2
CH2OH H OH Cystine
O
HO OH H
179. (c) H H 184. (b) Glycosidic linkage is actually an ether bond as the
O
OH H H
H H H O OH linkage forming the rings in an oligosaccharide or
H OH CH2OH polysaccharide is not just one bond, but the two bonds
(Lactose) sharing an oxygen atom e.g. sucrose
All reducing sugar shows mutarotation.
HO
180. (b) CH2 OH
O CH2 O
OH + OH
OH HO
OH H2C
OH OH OH
-D-Glucopyranose -D-Fructofuranose
HO
CH2 OH
O CH2 O
OH HO + H2O
O
OH CH2
OH OH
OH
Fructose
EBD_7207
498 BIOMOLECULES
185. (a) Due to resonance C — N bond in protein acquires 187. (a) Vitamin C is water soluble. Therefore, it is readily
double bond character and is smaller than usual excreted in urine and cannot be stored in our body and
C — N bond. is supplied regularly in diet.
–
O O 188. (b) In DNA and RNA heterocyclic base and phosphate
C NH C NH ester are at C1' and C5' respectively of the sugar
molecule.
186. (d) The function of enzymes in the living system is to
catalyse biochemical reactions which occur in living
HO N
systems. e.g. invertase, pepsin, amylase. | 5
N
HO – P – O – C H 2 4 O N
Invertase || N
Sucrose glucose + fructose O
C
C
H H
(polymer) (monomer) H | |
C3––– C2 H
amylase
Starch glucose | |
OH OH
(polymer) (monomer)
POLYMERS 507
FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS 26. (d) Silk is protein fibre. Dacron is polyester fibre and
Nylon-66 is polyamide fibre.
1. (d) 27. (d) All the given statements about fibres are correct.
2. (d) All these are natural polymers and exist in nature. 28. (d) Both polyesters and polyamides are examples of fibres.
3. (c) ATP is a monomer molecule. 29. (b) Polystyrene and polyethylene belong to the category
4. (a) It is present in the cell wall of plant cell. of thermoplastic polymers which are capable of
5. (b) Since proteins, cellulose and RNA control various repeatedly softening on heating and harden on cooling.
activities of plants and animals, they are called 30. (d) Vinyl chloride, butadiene and styrene being
biopolymers. unsaturated undergoes addition polymerization.
31. (b) 32. (a) 33. (c)
6. (d) Rayon is a manufactured from regenerated cellulosic
fiber. Rayon is produced from naturally occurring 34. (a) Ethene on free radical polymerisation gives low density
polymers and therefore it is not a truly synthetic fiber, polythene.
nor is it a natural fiber. It is known by the names viscose 35. (b) Monomer of teflon is to Tetrafluoro ethylene C2F4.
rayon and artificial silk in the textile industry. So, 36. (d) Acrylonitrile is the monomer used in the preparation of
option (d) is the correct choice. orlon.
7. (c) Protein is a natural polymer of amino acids. 37. (d) Orlon is a trade name of polyacrylonitrile
8. (b) 38. (b) High density polythene is used for manufacturing of
9. (b) Polymers are substances of high molecular weight buckets, dustbins, pipes etc.
(usually more than a few thousand) formed by the union 39. (b) High density polythene is formed when addition
of small molecular weight substances by covalent polymerisation of ethene takes place in a hydrocarbon
bonds. solvent in presence of catalyst such as ziegler-natta
10. (d) Cellulose acetate also known as rayon and cellulose catalyst.
nitrate are semisynthetic polymers. 40. (b) Nylon-66 is an example of first synthetic fibres produced
11. (a) 12. (a) from the simple molecules. It is prepared by
condensation polymer-isation of adipic acid and
13. (a) Polymerisation starts either by condensation or addition
haxamethylene diamine.
reactions between monomers. Condensation polymers
41. (a) Melamine plastic crockery is a copolymer of HCHO
are formed by the combination of monomers with the
and Melamine.
elimination of simple molecules.Whereas the addition
42. (d) 43. (a)
polymers are formed by the addition together of the
molecules of the monomer or monomers to form a large 44. (b) nHOOC(CH 2 )4 COOH nH 2 N(CH 2 )6 NH 2
molecule without elimination of any thing. adipic acid Hexamethylene
diamine
14. (d) 15. (a) 16. (d) 17. (c)
18. (b) Elastomers are the polymers having very weak O O
intermolecular forces of attraction between the polymer 525K
[– C – (CH 2)4 – C –NH–(CH2) 6 – NH –]n
chain. The weak forces permit the polymer to be Polymerisation Nylon 6, 6
streched.
45. (b)
19. (b) Those polymers in which process of heat softening
46. (d) The unbreakable plastic household crockery is made
and cooling can be repeated as many times as desired.
from copolymer of formaldehyde (HCHO) and melamine.
Example : polystyrene PVC, teflon, etc.
20. (c) Bakelite is a thermosetting polymer. On heating it is N
H2N NH2
infusible and cannot be remoulded.
21. (b) Polymerisation
HCHO Melamine
22. (d) These are characteristics of thermosets. N N formaldehyde polymer
23. (d) All these are characteristics of elastomers.
NH2
24. (d) Thermosetting polymers have strongest molecular Melamine
forces. These are crosslinked polymers.
25. (b) Thermosetting plastics have three dimensional cross 47. (d) Nylon tyre cord is made from high tenacity continuous
linked structure. filament yarn by twisting and plying.
EBD_7207
508 POLYMERS
48. (a) Polyesters are condensation polymers of a dibasic acid 53. (d) Nylon–6 can be manufactured from
and a diol. e.g., Terylene O
NH2OH
Ethylene glycol Terephthalic acid

O
NOH C
conc H2SO4
NH
(Beckmann
rearrangement) C
Terylene H
49. (d) Neoprene is an addition polymer of isoprene. H
caprolactum
Cl H2O,
|
nCH 2 CH C CH 2
O 2 or peroxides È O˘
Í || ˙˙ -(n-1)H 2O
Chloroprene Í polymerization
–ÍÎ NH - (CH 2 )5 - C –˙˚ ¨æææ æææ
Cl Nylon-6
| È + ˘
— CH 2 C CH CH2 — Í H 3 N- (CH 2 )5 - COO- ˙
Î ˚
Neoprene 54. (b) Nylon 6 is
50. (d) Phenol and formaldehyde undergo condensation O O
polymerisation under two different conditions to give —(NH(CH 2 )5 —C— NH— (CH2)5 —C— )n
a cross linked polymer called bakelite.
Hence (b) is the correct option.
OH OH OH 55. (b) Nylon is a polyamide fibre. It is prepared by the
–
CH2OH condensation polymerisation of adipic acid
OH (HOOC.(CH2)4COOH) and hexamethylene diamine
+ HCHO +
(H2N.(CH2)6.NH2).
CH2OH 56. (c) 57. (b)
o & p-hydroxymethylphenol 58. (a)
(intermediate) OH OH
OH OH CH2OH
OH OH
CH2OH
Polymerisation
+ HCHO + ;
n CH2
– (n – 1) H2 O
Linear Polymer (Novalac) CH2OH

59. (a) Melamine plastic crockery is a copolymer of HCHO
OH OH
and Melamine.
CH2OH
Polymerisation 60. (a) Bakelite is used for making phonograph records.
n + n
– H2O 61. (b) Novolac is a linear polymer.
62. (a) Dacron is a polyester and is the condensation polymer
CH2OH of ethylene glycol and terephthalic acid. It is crease
resistant
63. (c) Terylene is made from glycol and Terephthalic acid
HO CH2 CH2 OH and HOOC COOH

(Glycol)
(Terephthalic acid)
64. (d) 65. (a) 66. (d)

67. (d) Butadiene – styrene copolymer is used for the
manufacture of autotyres, floortiles, footwear
components, cable insulation etc.
68. (a) This is definition of homopolymer.
51. (b) Nylon 6, 6 has amide linkage capable of forming
69. (a) Butyl rubber is a copolymer of isobutylene and
hydrogen bonding.
isoprene.
52. (b) Nylon is a polyamide polymer.
POLYMERS 509
70. (d) Neoprene is a homopolymer of 2-chloro-buta-1, 3-diene STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS
or chloroprene.
71. (b) It is the definition of copolymerisation. 91. (a) Monomeric units in polymers are joined together by
covalent bonds only.
72. (b) n CH2=CH–C=CH2 Polymerisation 92. (b) Condensation polymers are formed by repeated
condensation reaction between two different bi-
CH3 functional or tri–functional monomeric units.
Isoprene
–CH2–CH=C–CH2 – Buna–S and Buna–N being elastomeric consists of
n polymeric chains held together by weak intermolecular
CH3
Polyisoprene forces thus they are elastic in nature.
(Natural rubber) 93. (d) Number of hydrogen bonds is greater in polymer (1)
than in (2) as the density of amide bond is greater in (1)
73. (b)
therefore the chain links to each other strongly in (1)
CH3 H CH2 CH2 CH3 H than in (2) hence (1) melts at higher temperature.
C=C C=C C=C
– CH 2 CH2 CH 3 H CH 2
94. (d) Nylon–6 is used in the manufacturing of tyre cords
CH2–
Natural rubber not nylon–6,6 this is used in making sheets, bristles
Natural rubber
for brushes and in textile industry. Melamine –
(All cis configuration) formaldehyde polymer is used in the manufacture of
All statements except (b) are correct unbreakable crockery.
74. (b) Natural rubber is a linear 1, 4-addition polymer of 95. (b) Vulcanisation of natural rubber with sulphur and an
isoprene (2-methyl-1, 3-butadiene). appropriate additive is carried out within temperature
range of 373K to 415K. Synthetic rubbers are either
75. (d) 76. (b) 77. (b)
homopolymersof 1, 3– butadiene derivatives or
78. (c) Rubber is a polymer of isoprene. Its chemical formula is copolymers of 1, 3–butadiene or its derivatives with
(C5H8)n. another unsaturated monomer.
79. (a) Neoprene is a synthetic polymer that resembles natural 96. (c) Biodegradable polymers are manufactured because
rubber. Neoprene is a polymer of chloroprene which conventional polymers are quite resistant to the
polymerises 700 times faster than the isoprene environmental degradation which leads to accumulation
(monomer of natural rubber) and no specific catalyst is of polymeric solid waste materials causing acute
environmental problems.
needed for this purpose.
CH 2 C CH CH 2 MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS

| 97. (b) A – (q), B – (s), C – (r), D – (p)
Cl
Chloroprene
98. (c) A – (s), B – (r), C – (p), D – (q)
(2 chloro 1,3 butadiene) 99. (b) A – (t), B – (p), C – (r), D – (q)
100. (b) A – (q), B – (r), C – (p), D – (t), E – (s)
101. (a) A – (r), B – (p), C – (q), D – (t), E – (s)
( CH 2 C CH CH 2 C CH CH 2 ) n
| | 102. (c) A – (r), B – (p), C – (s), D – (q)
Cl Cl 103. (a)
Neoprene (A) Polystyrene is used as insulator.
(B) Glyptal a polymer of ethylene glycol and phthali acid
80. (d) Synthetic rubber (neoprene) is a polymer of is used in manufacture of paints and lacquers.
Cl (C) Bakelite, a polymer of phenol & formal dehyde is used
|
for making electrical switches, handles of utensils and
CH 2 CH C CH 2 or chloroprene.
computer disc’s.
81. (a) (D) PVC, a polymer of vinyl chloride is used in manufacture
82. (b) Buna – N is a copolymer of butadiene of raincoat and flooring.
(CH2=CH–CH=CH2) and acrylonitrile (CH2 = CHCN).
83. (a) Neoprene is a polymer of chloroprene ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS
(2 – chloro – 1, 3 – butadiene). 104. (a)
84. (c) Neoprene is a homopolymer of chloroprene. 105. (b) Due to the presence of strong C–F bonds, teflon has
85. (b) 5% of sulphur is used as a crosslinking agent in the high thermal stability and chemical inertness.
manufacture of tyre rubber. 106. (c) Bakelite can be heated only once.
86. (b) Buna – N is obtained by copolymerisation of 107. (b) Vulcanisation is a process of treating natural rubber
with sulphur or some compounds of sulphur under
1, 3–butadiene and acrylonitrile.
heat so as to modify its properties. This cross-linking
87. (d) 88. (c) 89. (d) 90. (b) give mechanical strength to the rubber.
EBD_7207
510 POLYMERS
108. (d) The time of vulcanisation is reduced by adding 115. (b) Considering the resonance structure, the radical of
accelerators and activators. acrylonitrile is found to be more stable.
109. (d)
H
H
CRITICAL THINKING TYPE QUESTIONS CH = CH – C N C=C H
H
110. (b) Nylon 6, 6 has amide linkage capable of forming + C 6H 5
hydrogen bonding. + C6H5
111. (d) Nylon and cellulose, both have intermolecular
hydrogen bonding, polyvinyl chloride has dipole-
dipole interactions, while natural rubber has van der
Waal forces which are weakest.
112. (d) Copolymer of adipic acid (6C) and hexamethylene C6H5 – CH – CH – C N C 6H5 – CH 2 –CH 2
diamine (6C).
n HOOC(CH 2 ) 4 COOH nH 2 N (CH 2 ) 6 NH 2
Adipic acid Hexamethyl ene diamine
O O
|| || C6H5 – CH – CH C N
( C (CH 2 ) 4 C NH (CH 2 ) 6 NH ) n
Nylon 66 (Resonance stabilised)
It has high tenacity and elasticity. It is resistant to
abrasion and not affected by sea water. It is used for Cl
reinforcement of rubber tyres, manufacture of |
O 2 or peroxides
parachute, safety belts, carpets and fabrics. 116. (d) nCH 2 CH C CH 2
113. (b) The condensation polymerisation of hexamethylene Chloroprene
diamine and adipic acid is done in solution form by
interface technique. In this liquid nylon polymer is Cl
|
obtained. ( CH 2 CH C CH 2 )n
n.H 2 N (CH 2 )6 NH 2 + Neoprene
Polymerisation 117. (a) Terylene is prepared by condensing terephthalic acid

nHOOC – (CH 2 ) 4 – COOH nH 2O and ethylene glycol
[ HN CH 2 NHCO CH 2 CO ]n
6 Nylon 4 nHOOC COOH + nHOCH 2CH 2OH
Terephthalic acid Ethylene glycol
O O O
|| || ||
114. (a) C6 H5 C O O C C6 H5 2C6 H5 C O O O
|| ||
C C – OCH2–CH2–O n
2C6 H5
Terylene
(A)
Phenyl radical
118. (a)
C6 H5 CH2 CH 2 C6 H5 CH2 CH 2 CH 2 C H2 119. (d) As the amide density along the chain increases the
(A) (B) melting point increases.
120. (c) Thiokol is polymer of CH2ClCH2Cl and sodium
C6 H 5 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 C H 2 nCH 2 CH 2 polysulphide Na–S–S–Na and thus, not polydiene
(B) rubber.
121. (d)
C6 H 5 (CH 2 CH 2 ) n CH 2 C H 2 .
(C) 122. (b) Average number molecular weight M n 30,000
C6 H 5— (CH 2 CH 2 )n—CH 2 C H 2 C6 H—(CH Average mass molecular weight M w 40,000

5 2 CH 2 ) n—CH 2 C H 2
C6 H5 (CH 2— CH 2 )n—CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 Mw 40,000

Polydispersity index (PDI) = 1.33
Mn 30,000
(CH 2 CH 2 )—C
n 6 H5
EBD_7207
518 CHEMISTRY IN EVERYDAY LIFE
FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS O–COCH3
1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (c) 4. (b) COOH

28. (a) Aspirin (Acetyl salicylic acid)
5. (a) Given drug is used as Antacid.
6. (d) The function of enzymes in the living system is to
catalyse biochemical reactions which occure in living 29. (d) Valium is a tranquilizer and not an analgesic. It is used
systems. e.g. invertase, pepsin, amylase. for treatment of stress, fatigue, mild and severe mental
diseases.
Invertase
Sucrose glucose + fructose 30. (d) Aspirin is an non-narcotics analgesic.
(polymer) (monomer) 31. (a) Salol is phenyl salicylate used as antiseptic.
amylase
32. (a) Antiseptic drugs cause destruction of micro-organism
Starch glucose that produce septic disease e.g. Dettol, Savlon, Boric
(polymer) (monomer) acid, Phenol, Iodoform, KMnO4 and some dye such
7. (d) Equanil is an important medicine used in depression as methylene blue, genation violet.
and hypertension. 33. (d) Sulpha drugs (antibacterial and antibiotic) are group
8. (b) of drugs which are derivative of sulphanilamide.
9. (b) Terfenadine is commonly used as antihistamine. 34. (a) It is the very effective antibiotic for tuberculosis.
10. (c) Salvarsan is an organoarsenic compound, used in the 35. (c) Broad spectrum antibiotics act on different antigens.
treatment of syphilis. It was the first modern 36. (c) It is an insecticide.
chemotherapeutic agent. 37. (a) A. Fleming discovered penicillin in 1929.
11. (c) 12. (b) 38. (b)
13. (c) Tranquilizers reduce anxiety and tension they are also 39. (c) Penicillin is an effective medicine for pneumonia
called psychototropic drugs. These are two type disease.
(i) Sedative the drugs used for violent and mentaly 40. (d) The mixture of chloroxylenol and terpenol is dettol
agitated patient e.g.., Equanil and diazepam. which is used as antiseptic.
(ii) Antidepressant- The drug are used to patients who 41. (d) Chloroamphenicol is a broad spectrum antibiotic.
are highly depressed and lose self confidence e.g. 42. (a) Substances used for the treatment of malaria are
tofranil vitalin, amphetamine etc. antimalarial e.g. Quinine, chloroquine.
14. (a) 15. (b) 16. (d) 43. (d) Chloramphenicol is
17. (a) These drugs induce sleep and are habit forming O
common example of hypnotic drugs are Luminal and ||
NO2 CH CH NH C – CHCl 2
Saconal. | |
18. (d) OH CH 2OH
19. (b) Aspirin is antipyretic i.e., a drug which is responsible 44. (b) It is the known structure of Penicillin G
for lowering the temperature of feverish organism to 45. (c) Arsenic drugs are poisonous for syphilis.
normal, other antipyretic drugs are Paracetamol, 46. (b) Bithional is a well known antiseptic, added in soaps to
Phenacetin. reduce odours produced by bacterial decomposition
20. (b) Paracetamol is an antipyretic of organic matter of skin.
21. (b) It is acetyl salicylic acid i.e., aspirin, analgesic and
antipyretic. Cl OH HO Cl
22. (d)
23. (a) Due to anti-blood clotting action of aspirin, it is used S
to prevent heart attack. Cl
Bithional
Cl
24. (d) Sulpha drugs (antibacterial and antibiotic) are group
of drugs which are derivative of sulphanilamide. 47. (a) Penicillin is an antibiotic.
25. (a) Analgesic are pain killers. 48. (c) Chloramphenicol is a broad spectrum drug.
26. (b) Analgesic means painkiller. [Broad spectrum antibiotics are medicines effective
27. (c) We know that N-acetyl-para-aminophenol (or against gram positive as well as gram negative bacteria,
paracetamol) is an antipyretic which can also be used e.g., tetracycline, chloramphenicol, etc.]
as an analgesic to relieve pain.
CHEMISTRY IN EVERYDAY LIFE 519
49. (d) Bithional is another well known antiseptic which is 78. (a) Soaps are the sodium or potassium salt of higher fatty
added to good quality soaps to reduce the odours acids e.g., C17H37COOK (Potassium stearate). These
produced by bacterial decomposition of organic matter are obtained by alkaline hydrolysis of oils and fats.
on the skin. The reaction is called saponification.
50. (b) Dilute solutions of boric acid and hydrogen peroxide 79. (b) Alkaline hydr olysis of esters is known as
are weak antiseptics. saponification.
51. (d) R COOR ' NaOH R 'OH RCOONa
52. (d) Novestrol is an antifertility drug. 80. (d) Commercial detergent are the sodium salts of long chain
53. (c) 54. (b) (linear) alkyl substituted benzene sulphonic acids
55. (b) Morphine narcotics are chiefly used for the relief of (LAB) and are most widely used. The most common is
post operative pain. sodium dodecylbenzene sulphonate.
56. (d) Classification of drugs on the basis of pharmacological
effect is useful for doctors because it provides them – +
CH3(CH2)10 CH2 SO2O Na
the whole range of drugs available for the treatment of
a particular type of problem.
81. (c) Any oils which are good for eating or cooking, can be
57. (a) 58. (d)
used in making soap. One of the best is said to be
59. (a) Drug tegamet was designed to prevent the interaction
coconut oil. Groundnut, Shea butter, Cocoa butter, Sun
of histamine with the receptors present in the stomach
flower and many other vegetable oils are also used.
wall. This resulted in release of lesser amount of acid.
60. (b) 82. (b) Sodium or potassium salts of palmitic acid
61. (c) Antidepressant drugs inhibit the enzymes which (CH 3 (CH 2 ) 14 COO – Na + ) and stearic acid
catalyse the degradation of noradrenaline. (CH3(CH2)16COO–Na+) are used as soaps.
62. (d) 83. (b) Soaps are actually salts of higher fatty acids.
63. (b) Arsphenamine also known as salvarsan was the first Example ; C17 H 35 COONa
effective treatment discovered for syphilis. (sodium stearate)
64. (b) Penicillin G has a narrow spectrum, while all other
options have broad spectrum. 84. (b)
CH 3
65. (d) Chloramphenicol is rapidly absorbed from the |
gastrointestinal tract and hence can be given orally in CH3 (CH 2 )15 N CH3 Br
case of typhoid, acute fever, meningitis, pneumonia |
etc. CH3
66. (a) cetyl trimethyl ammonium bromide
67. (d) All are characteristics of Saccharin.
68. (d) Vitamin E is an antioxidant present in edible oils. 85. (d) Cetyltrimethyl ammonium bromide possess germicidal
69. (c) Salts of sorbic acid and propionic acid are used as properties. Thus it is used as a cationic detergent in
food preservatives because these chemicals inhibit the hair conditioners.
growth of yeast bacteria or moulds. 86. (b) 87. (c) 88. (a)
70. (d) Neither any of the substances among given options 89. (c) Non– ionic detergent is formed when stearic acid reacts
possess nutritive value. with polyethylene glycol.
71. (b) Artificial sweetener Sweetness value 90. (c)
Aspartame 100
Saccharin 550 STATEMENT TYPE QUESTIONS
Sucralose 600 91. (b) 92. (c)
Alitame 2000
93. (b) For statement (ii), drug which brings major change in
72. (c) Sucralose does not provide calories.
the treatment of hyperacidity was histamine. For
73. (a) Sodium benzoate is used as a food preservative.
statement (iv), antidepressant drugs like iproniazid and
74. (b) Structurally biodegradable detergents should contain
phenelzine inhibit the enzymes which catalyse the
branched alkyl chain.
degradation of noradrenaline when the enzyme is
75. (b)
inhibited, this important neurotransmitter is slowly
76. (d) It is used as detergent.
metabolised and can activate its receptor for longer
77. (c) The most widely used domestic detergent is the
periods of time, thus counteracting the effect of
sodium dodecyl benzene sulphonate (SDS).
depression.
94. (c) For statement (ii), 2–3% solution of iodine in alcohol
CH3 – (CH2)11 SO3Na water mixture is known as tincture of iodine. For
statement (iii), SO2 in very low concentrations are used
(Sodium dodecyl benzene sulphonate) as disinfectants.
EBD_7207
520 CHEMISTRY IN EVERYDAY LIFE
95. (b) 117. (d) Bacteriostatic drugs inhibit the growth of organism
96. (a) Shaving soaps contain glycerol to prevent rapid drying. while bactericidal drugs kill the microorganisms.
97. (d) For statement (iii), cationic detergents are expensive 118. (a)
and thus have limited use. For statement (iv), 119. (a) OH
detergents having unbranched chains can be
biodegraded more easily thus are less polluting as
compared to detergents having branched chains. H3C CH3
Cl
MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS Chloroxylenol
98. (c) 99. (a) 100. (a) 101. (c) 102. (b) (4-chloro-3, 5-dimethylphenol)
120. (d) Drugs that mimic the natural messenger by switching
ASSERTION-REASON TYPE QUESTIONS on the receptor are called agonists. While drugs that
binds to the receptor site and inhibit its natural function
103. (d) The drugs which act on the central nervous system are called antagonists.
and help in reducing anxiety are called tranquilizers. 121. (b)
104. (a) Tranquilizers are chemicals which are used to cure 122. (b) Bactericidal have killing effect on microbes while
mental diseases. bacteriostatic have inhibitory effect on microbes.
105. (a) Broad spectrum antibiotics are those medicines which 123. (b) Chloramphenicol is bacteriostatic antibiotic while
are effective against several different types of harmful ofloxacin is bactericidal type antibiotic.
micro organisms. 124. (c) Narrow spectrum antibiotics are effective against
106. (b) Antiseptics are those chemical which kill or prevent Gram–positive or Gram-negative bacteria. Limited
the growth of micro organism. Antiseptics do not harm spectrum antibiotics are effective against a single
the living tissues and can be applied on cuts and organism or disease.
wounds. They help to reduce odour resulting from the 125. (a) Norethindrone is an example of synthetic progestrone
bacterial decomposition in the mouth and on the body. derivative most widely used as antifertility drug.
107. (a) A small quantity of sedative produces a feeling of 126. (b) Benzoic acid used as preservative as sodium benzoate.
relaxation, calmness and drowsiness. 127. (c) HO OH
108. (d) 109. (b) Cl
Cl HO
O
CRITICAL THINKING TYPE QUESTIONS HO O O
OH Cl
110. (a) 111. (c) Sucrolose
112. (c) Iproniazid Tranquilizer 128. (a) Benzalkonium chloride, also known as
Salvarsan Antimicrobial alkyldimethylbenzylammonium chloride is nitrogenous
Zantac (ranitidine) Antihistamine cationic surface active agent belonging to the
Chloramphenicol Antibiotic quaternary ammonium group. It is used as antiseptic.
–
113. (a) It is an alkaloid, a class of organic compound which is Cl
basic in nature and of plant origin containing atleast +
N
one nitrogen atom in a ring structure of molecule.
CnH2n+1
114. (b) The term “antihistamine” refers only to H1 antagonists,
which is also known as H1-receptor antagonists and n = 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18
H1-antihistamine. 129. (b) Laundry soaps contain fillers like sodium rosinate,
115. (a) Amoxillin is semisynthetic modification of Penicillin sodium silicate, borax and sodium carbonate.
116. (a) Ciprofloxacin is used as antibiotic while paracetamol, 130. (b)
ibuprofen and tocopherol are respectively antipyretic, 131. (b) Aspartame cannot be used in baked food as it is
pain killer and Vit. E. unstable at cooking temperature thus its use is limited
to cold foods and soft drinks.

Chemsiry Solutions

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chemsiry Solutions

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chemsiry Solutions

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SOME BASIC CONCEPTS OF CHEMISTRY 11

18. (d) Litre (L) is not an SI unit. It is used for measurement of

C 38.71 12 38.71 3.23 N1V1 N 2V2

Thus, 1 mole of alumina is obtained by the reaction of

137. (c) Percentage R.N.A Simplest ratio 15.05

26. (a) 19 + 1e– = 20 electrons.

34 176. (c) Possible values of and m depend upon the value of n

FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS 16. (d) Chloride formulas

FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS Cl Cl

Correct Lewis symbol for Ne = :Ne:

term covalent bond. – –

electron to the shared pair. – – –

Triangular planar (symmetrical molecule) AlCl3 shows maximum covalent character.

bond because of greater extent of overlapping

94. (a) Bond angle increases with increase in s-character of

sp3 sp 2 sp 2 sp 3 131. (b) The removal of an electron from a diatomic molecule

O O: one lone pair. The three N – H bond pairs are pushed

O O: correct explanation of assertion.

Cl Cl Cl Cl– Cl– Cl– For N2(14) :

2 px2 2 p2y , *2 px2 2* p1y 10 – 6

FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS 19. (c)

1 Both these graphs represents Boyle's law.

3 3 64. (c) Given statement explain the great compressibility of

a a 91. (a) 92. (b)

1 137. (a) As the height increases, atmospheric pressure

22. (c) For isothermal reversible expansion.

CRITICAL THINKING TYPE QUESTIONS 8.314 373

FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS

10 On taking log on both side

14. (b) Blue colour of the solution disappear due to

MATCHING TYPE QUESTIONS Oxidation state of N in NaN3 is

19. (b) Mn + 2HNO3 (dil.) Mn(NO3)2 + H2

electron precise molecules, they are normally not

FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS 8. (b) C – 1 is sp hybridized C C

CH 3 45. (d) (CH 3 ) 2 CHCH 2CH 2

H3C — C— CH3 CH3

38. (a) The IUPAC name of the given compound is |

whereas in alkyl carbocations dispersal of positive

1373K 168. (d) The correct name of the given compound is

2NO + 2Cu 2CuO + N 2 * **

191. (c) Metamerism shown among compounds of the same

boil Normality = 0.5 × 2 = 1 N H2SO4

FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS H

The polythene manufactured in this way is called low H O

69. (a) CH 2 = CH 2 + H - O - SO2 OH O O

72. (d) Completing the sequence of given reactions,

2CH3CHO H 2 O ZnO Conc. H 2 SO4

Protonated Nitronium ion CH3 H

173. (b) CH 3 — C— CH 3 first has more dipole moment than second.

HBr (ii) CH3 C C CH 2 CH 2 CH3

CH3 201. (c) Due to the maximum percentage of s character (50%),

FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS 31. (c)

FACT / DEFINITION TYPE QUESTIONS Number of moles

1000 33. (a)

P P n2 0.1 180 100

134. (d) No. of moles of A

1 3 Number of moles of solute

0.059 [Fe 2 ]2 1000 0.01

(ii) Ba(OH) 2 524 10 4 Sm 2 mol 1.

m OH m Na m Cl 70. (d) WA WB 1.6 Wt. of Ag

2 px2 2 p2y , 2 px2 2 p1y 10 – 6